Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout2013-018B3 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN 0 September, 2012 BID DOCUMENTS 0,55 Prepared for INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA UTILITIES DEPARTMENT County Bid No. 2013013 Utilities Project No. UCP - 4067 Prepared by Atkins 482 South Keller Road Orlando, Florida 32810 100026893 TABLE OF CONTENTS INDIAN RIVER COUNTY WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00020 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00100 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 00300 BID FORM 00310 TRENCH SAFETY ACT COMPLIANCE STATEMENT 00410 AIA DOCUMENT A310 BID BOND 00431 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS 00450 SCHEDULE OF SUPPLIERS 00452 DISCLOSURE OF RELATIONSHIPS 00456 GENERAL INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS 00460 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATE SUPPLIERS 00530 EJCDC - AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00610 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 00700 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01035 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01045 CUTTING CORING AND PATCHING 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 01052 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01170 SPECIAL PROVISIONS 01172 PIPE PENETRATIONS 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01311 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01340 SUBMITTALS 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01580 PROJECT ID AND SIGNS 01610 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01650 START-UP AND DEMONSTRATION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01710 CLEANING 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01730 O&M MANUALS AND TRAINING TOC - 1 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02100 SITE PREPARATION 02200 EARTHWORK 02220 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION 02276 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02932 SEEDING AND MULCHING 02934 SOLID SODDING DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03250 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04000 UNIT MASONRY 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05520 ALUMINUM RAILING DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS 06190 ROOF TRUSSES DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07165 VAPOR BARRIER DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08710 FINISH HARDWARE DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09900 PAINTING 09905 PIPING, VALVE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM DIVISION 10 — SPECIALITIES (Not Used) DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT TOC -2 11510 ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS (Not Used) DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13210 FLAT ALUMINUM COVERS DIVISION 14 — CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS (Not Used) DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15044 PIPING MATERIALS, DESIGNATION, AND PRESSURE TESTING 15050 PROCESS AND UTILITY PIPING, FITTINGS, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES 15064 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS 15126 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15210 FRP DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16000 ELECTRICAL POWER AND SYSTEMS 16110 RACEWAYS 16120 WIRES AND CABLES 16130 BOXES 16450 GROUNDING TOC -3 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00020 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design (� Indian River COUNTY BID No. 2013013 UTILITIES PROJECT NO. UCP — 4067 The Indian River County (IRC) Board of County Commissioners is accepting sealed bids for the construction of the West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design Bids will be received by Indian River County marked "Sealed Bid" until 2:00 P.M. December 11, 2012. Each bid shall be submitted in a sealed envelope and shall bear the name and address of the bidder on the outside and the words West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design, Bid No: 2013013 . Only bids received on or before the time and date listed will be considered. Bids should be addressed to Purchasing Division, 1800 27th Street, Vero Beach, Florida 32960. All bids will be opened publicly and read aloud at 2:00 PM. Deadline for receipt of bids has been set for December 11, 2012. All bids received after 2:00 PM. will be returned unopened. All material and equipment furnished and all work performed shall be in strict accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents pertaining thereto, which may be obtained from Demandstar at (800) 711-1712 or download from www.demandstar.com. Bid specifications are also available from the Indian River County Purchasing Division at (772) 226-1416 or email to purchasing(d)-ircgov.com. All bids shall be submitted in duplicate on the bid forms provided within the bidding documents. Bid Security must accompany each bid and must be in the form of an AIA Document, A310 Bid Bond, properly executed by bidder and by a qualified surety, or a certified check or cashier's check drawn on any bank authorized to do business in the State of Florida. Bid Security must be in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid, made payable to Indian River County Board of County Commissioners. In the event the contract is awarded to the bidder, Bidder will enter into a Contract with the County and furnish the required 100% Public Construction Bond for work authorized over $100,000.00 within the time frame set forth by the County. If Bidder fails to do so, the Bid Security shall be retained by the County as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Communication concerning this bid shall be directed to IRC Purchasing Department at purchasing(cOrcg_ov.com. A Pre -Bid Conference meeting will be held at 10:00 A.M. on November 19 2012 in the Utility Department Conference Room, Building A, 1801 27 th Street, Vero Beach, Florida 32960. This meeting is MANDATORY INDIAN RIVER COUNTY - PURCHASING MANAGER For Publication in the Vero Beach Press Please furnish tear sheet and affidavit of Journal Publication to: Date: November 8, 2012 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PURCHASING DIVISION 180027 th Street, Vero Beach, FL 32960 END OF SECTION 00020 Advertisement For Bid (4-11-2-12) 00020-1 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (Based Upon EJCDC No. C-700,2002 Ed.) West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design 1.01 DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. C-700, 2002 ed.) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a bid directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub -bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible, and responsive Bidder to whom Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, The Bid Form, Disclosure of Relationships Statement, General Information Regarding Bidder, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 1.02 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents as stated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from Demandstar. B. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. C Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use of the Bidding Documents. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS To demonstrate qualifications to perform the work, each Bidder must also be prepared to submit, within 5 days of Owner's request, written evidence, such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments, and other such data as may be necessary to prove to the satisfaction of the Owner that the Bidder is qualified by experience to do the work and is prepared to complete the work within the stated time period. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE A. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost progress, performance, or furnishing of the work, (c) consider federal, state, and local laws and regulations that may affect costs, progress, performance, or furnishing of the work, (d) study and carefully correlate 00100-1 Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. B. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: 1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents. Bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations, or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof the purposes of bidding or construction. To obtain access to the site, the following shall be contacted: Mike Hotchkiss, Engineer, (772) 226-1821. Project work site is located within the property lines for the existing wastewater plant as shown on the Construction Drawings. 2. Those drawings, if any, of physical conditions in relation to existing surface and subsurface conditions (except underground facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents. Bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings, but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. Copies of such reports and drawings will be made available by Owner to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraphs 1.04.131 and 1.04.132 are incorporated therein by reference. Such technical data has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless it is expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, underground facilities and other physical conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 of the General Conditions. E. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies, and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the 00100-2 site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. F. On request in advance, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up, and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. G. The lands upon which the work is to be performed, right-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designed for use by the Contractor in performing the work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by and paid for by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. H. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this the Instruction to Bidder, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the work. 1.05 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA A. All questions about the meanings or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in writing to the Indian River County Purchasing Division by email to purchasing@ircgov.com. Interpretation or clarifications considered necessary by Owner in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all parties recorded by Demandstar as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for the opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will not be binding and will be without legal effect. B. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Only the interpretation or correction issued by Owner or Engineer by Addendum shall be binding. Prospective Bidders are advised that no other source is authorized to give information concerning the documents or to explain or interpret the documents. 00100-3 C. All Bidders will acknowledge in the space provided for in Section 00300 BID FORM, the receipt of all Addenda and will confirm that the Addenda have been considered in the preparations of their proposal. 1.06 BID SECURITY A. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent of the Bidder's maximum base bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or an AIA Document A310 Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions. B. The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Contract security, whereupon the Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Contract security within fifteen days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be retained by the County. The Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the Owner until the earlier of. the seventh (7) day after the effective date of the Agreement or the ninety-first (9 1) day after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid security with bids which are not competitive may be returned before the end of the ninety -day (90) period. 1.07 CONTRACT TIME The number of days within which, or dates by which, the work is to be substantially completed and also complete and ready for final payment (the Contract Time) are set forth in the Bid Form (Section 00300) and the Agreement (Section 00530). 1.08 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement (Section 00530). 1.09 SUBSTITUTE OR "OR EQUAL" ITEMS The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions and may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 00100-4 1.10 BID FORM A. The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be obtained from Engineer (or the issuing office). B. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter. C. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. D. Bids by partnership must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. E. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. F. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). G. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown. H. Additional forms to be submitted with Bid Form include: Section 00310 — "Trench Safety Act Compliance Statement"; Section 00452 — "Disclosure of Relationships"; Section 00456 — "General Information Required for Bidders." 1.11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. A. The Bidder shall submit the Bid in duplicate on the forms, or an exact copy of the forms, furnished herewith. The blank spaces on the Bid Form shall be filled in correctly for each Bid Item for which a Bid is submitted. B. The Owner will consider only those bids received from parties who have obtained Contract Documents directly from the Owner or the Owner's Engineer. Contract Documents are not transferable to other parties for bidding purposes. Bids 00100-5 received from firms whose names are not recorded by the Owner or the Engineer as having secured documents for this Contract will be rejected. 1.12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS A. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. B. If, within two business days after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the work to be provided under the Contract Documents 1.13 OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. 1.14 BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT OF ACCEPTANCE All bids will remain subject to acceptance for ninety days after the day of the Bid opening, but the Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to that date. 1.15 AWARD OF CONTRACT A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the work, and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all non- conforming, non-responsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Also, Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to the Bidder. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Owner reserves the right to cancel the award of any Contract at any time before the execution of such Contract by all parties without any liability to the Owner. For and in consideration of the Owner considering Bids submitted, the Bidder, by submitting its Bid, expressly waives any claim to damages, of any kind whatsoever, in the event the Owner exercises its right to cancel the award in accordance herewith. 00100-6 B. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidder, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit ( prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. C. Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the work as to which the identity of subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Owner may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice to Award. D. Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. E. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Owner. F. If the Contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within ninety days after the day of the Bid opening. G. More than one Bid from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or association under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that one Bidder is financially interested in more than one proposal for the same work will cause the rejection of all proposals in which such Bidders are believed to be interested. Any or all proposals will be rejected if there is reason to believe that collusion exists among the Bidders, and no participants in such collusion will be considered in future proposals for the same work. H. Within fifteen (15) calendar days of the date of the Notice of Award of the Contract, the Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall execute and deliver two (2) original Contracts to the Owner, together with a Public Construction Bond for 100 percent of the Bid in the forms set forth in the Contract Documents and general Conditions; and all required insurance certificates, before the Contract will be executed by the Owner. I. Failure upon the part of the Bidder to whom the Contract has been awarded to execute and deliver the Contract, a Public Construction Bond and required insurance in the manner and within the time provided shall be just cause for cancellation of the award. It is understood and agreed by said Bidder, that if the award is cancelled for the above persons, the certified check or Bid Bond shall become the property of the Owner, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages. 00100-7 1.16 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND The successful Bidder as Contractor shall furnish the County immediately upon execution of the Contract a Public Construction Bond in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract price in the form provided in the Contract Documents. The Surety shall be authorized to issue surety bonds in Florida and be included in the most recent United States Department of Treasury List of Acceptable Sureties. The successful Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact, who executed the Public Construction Bond, to affix to each a current certified copy of their Power of Attorney, reflecting such person's authority as Power of Attorney in the State of Florida. Further, at the time of execution of the Contract, the successful Bidder shall provide a copy of the Surety's current valid Certificate of Authority issued by the United States Department of the Treasury under 31 United States Code sections 9304-9308. The Contractor shall provide a Public Construction Bond in conformance with Fla. Stat. 255.05(3). 1.17 PUBLIC DISCLOSURE STATEMENT Any entity entering into a contract with Indian River County as Owner shall disclose any relationship that may exist between the contracting entity and an Indian River County Commissioner or Indian River County employee. The relationship with either must be disclosed as follows: Father, mother, son, daughter, brother, sister, uncle, aunt, first cousin, nephew, niece, husband, wife, father-in-law, mother-in-law, daughter-in-law, ron- in -law, brother-in-law, sister-in-law, stepfather, stepmother, stepson, stepdaughter, stepbrother, half brother, half sister, grandparent, or grandchild. The term "affiliate" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in the management of the entity. 1.18 FLORIDA PRODUCED LUMBER The selected Bidder as Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of Section 255.20, Florida Statutes, as such statute may be amended from time to time, wherein Indian River County as Owner must specify lumber, timber and other forest products produced and manufactured in Florida whenever such products are available and their price, fitness and quality are equal. 1.19 TRENCH SAFETY Florida Statutes Section 553.60 through 553.64, known as the "Trench Safety Act" requires all contractors engaged by Indian River County, Florida to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration's excavation safety standard, found in 29 C.F.R. s. 1926.650 Subpart P. All prospective subcontractors are required to sign a Trench Safety Act Compliance Statement and provide compliance cost information where indicated. The costs for complying with the Trench Safety Act must be incorporated into the Bid. 00100-8 1.20 PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME STATEMENT Pursuant to Florida Statutes Section 287.133(2)(a), all Bidders are hereby notified that a person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for a public entity crime may not submit a bid, proposal, or reply on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity (defined as the State of Florida, any of its departments or agencies, or any political subdivision); may not submit a bid, proposal, or reply on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work; may not submit bids, proposals, or replies on leases of real property to a public entity; may not be awarded or perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity; and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Florida Statutes Section 287.017 for CATEGORY TWO [currently $25,000] for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. A "public entity crime" means a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to and directly related to the transaction of business with any public entity or with an agency or political subdivision of any other state or with the United States, including, but not limited to, any bid, proposal, reply, or contract for goods or services, any lease for real property, or any contract for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, involving antitrust, fraud, theft, bribery, collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or material misrepresentation. 1.21 PERMITS, IMPACT, AND INSPECTION FEES. In accordance with Florida Statutes Section 218.80, the 'Public Bid Disclosure Act", Indian River County as OWNER is obligated to disclose all license, permit, impact, or inspection fees that are payable to Indian River County in connection with the construction of the Work by the accepted bidder. ALL PERMIT, IMPACT, OR INSPECTION FEES PAYABLE TO INDIAN RIVER COUNTY IN CONNECTION WITH THE WORK ON THIS COUNTY PROJECT WILL BE PAID BY INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF RE -INSPECTION FEES AS SET FORTH IN THE CONTRACT. The bidder will not include ANY PERMIT, IMPACT, OR INSPECTION FEES payable to Indian River County in the bid. 1.22 NOTIFICATION OF RESIDENTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall notify each resident who will be affected by construction of the sewer mains, laterals or house service lines, connection to the service lines, demolition of septic tank or construction of the lift station prior to start of construction. Notification shall be in the form of a written door flier in addition to verbal communication. END OF SECTION 00100-9 SECTION.00300 . BID FORM (Based Upon EJCDC No.0-700, 2002 Ed.) PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: Indian River County Bid # 2013013 West °Reeionh! WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control Systetii Desitin r= PROJECT DESCRIPTION: ' CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The work ! is generally described as follows, which shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the following: The Project includes Flat Aluminum Covers for two Anaerobic Tanks, Odor Control System, Building around the existing Grit Handling Equipment, Aluminum Canopy over existing sludge odor control equipment, two confined space entry kits, four roll -off dumpsters, Yard Piping Electrical/Controls, Instrumentation/SCADA, Landscaping Buffer and irrigation. All ancillary work associated with these systems are to be included. x: THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: Indian River County Purchasint Division C 1800 27P.Street. Adtfijn: Blde, B Vera Beach. F.E. 32960 1. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with Owner in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time indicated in the Contract Documents and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for ninety (90) days after the day of Bid opening. Bidder will sign and submit the Agreement with the bonds and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen (15) calendar days after the date of Owner's Notice of Award per 1.15 H. in Section 001.00. 3. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that: �4 (a) Bidder has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents and of the following Addenda (receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged): Date Number (i December 5, 2012 #1 is i. December 7, 2012 #2 l G 11, N Bidder has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, the work, site, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or finishing of the work. (c) Bidder has studied carefully all reports and drawings of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in Paragraph SC -4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extent of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings upon which Bidder is entitled to rely. (d) Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in (c) above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work as Bidder considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the work at the contract price, within the contract time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the contract documents, including specifically the provisions of Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions; and no additional examination, investigations, explorations, test, reports, studies or similar information or date or will be required by Bidder for such purposes. (e) Bidder has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by Bidder in order to perform and furnish the work at the contract price, within the contract time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of Paragraph 4.04 of the General Conditions. (f) Bidder has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. (g) Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder. (h) This bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm, or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other -Bidder or over Owner. 4. Bidder will complete and include with the bid the Schedule of Bid Items attached to this proposal. The quantities shown` on the Schedule of Bid Items are approximate quantities to be used for the purpose of comparing bids. The actual quantities may vary. It is further understood that the actual amount of the Agreement and payments there under, will be based upon the actual quantities placed into the work. 5. Bidder agrees that the work will be completed in accordance with the following timeframe. v The CONTRACTOR shall be substantially completed with the work Two Hundred and Forty (240) calendar days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, in accordance with Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions within Two Hundred and Seventy (270) calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 6. The following documents are attached to and made a partof this Bid: (a) Certificate of Compliance with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Section 003 10) (b) Disclosure of Relationships (Section 00452) (c) Schedule of Subcontraciors (Section 00431) (d) General Information Required for Bidders (Section 00456) 7. The terms used in this Bid, which are defined in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract included as part of the Contract Documents, have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges the insurance requirements of Section 00700 as amended by Section- 00800 and any other addendums and agrees to provide said insurance upon award of contract. BIDDER INFORMATION: SUBMITTED ON: December 11, 2012 SUBMITTED BY: R.J. Sullivan Corp. 2001 N.W. 22nd Street Pompano Beach, FL (954) 975-0388 (954) 975-3333 (DATE) (NAME OF BIDDER) (STREET ADDRESS) 33069 (CITY, STATE, zip) ' (PHONE #) (FAX #) csullivan@rjsullivancorp.co�k-MAII,) 59-163-4796 CGC1507756 SIGNED BY: Casey R. Sullivan (FEDERAL ID #) WWRIDA LICENSE #) (PRINTED NAME) President (E) / (SIGNATURE) { 00300-3 DEC.11.2012 13:26 #6232 P-003 /003 SCHEDUP, OF BIJ) ITEMS All bid items shall in include co costs for furnishin, fUr ail costs incurred in to the OWNER all materials, equipment, and supplies and mpleting ttte work including installation of all txratedals, equipment, and supplies furnished, complete in place and ready for continued service, all other labor, miscellaneous costs, overhead and profit_ taxes, insurance, BfD West RegWnal WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design This Contract is a LUMP SOM CONTRACT, which consists of sum dtotal of individual bid Items e Cribed below and IDDEk is to im ltxle all costs BIDDER may a►tticipate during file ten th of this project and the contract~ Each RIDDFA shall include all extras the BIDDER may determine necessary to provide the quantity and duality of Work required , the ContractDocuments. breakdown which will be used to determine bidcamp eteness and understanding,ann ld infollowing in Total i ump Sum Bid Price an the tine Provided. The total bid price must be equal to the sutn of the values in the bid breakdown.. The verified sum of the individual values in fife bid breakdown rakes precedence over any discrepancy between the Total Lump Suns Bid Price written and dIC corrected total lump sum bid prig. The base bid schedule shall include the following items including the allowanct listed below. Each Pmerindividual bid item shall be paid Payment basad on completeness as defined in section 0I025 -Measurement and Fdym Number L _ Item — a.i,+v —c aUU11 2 Anaerobic Tanks Flat Aluminum Cover 3 An4grobic Tatra Odor Control S stem 4 odor Control System Duct Work $ C coo, " 5 b Gritu' nE Bniidin plosion prop motors and accwgsones for $ e Yrit t ment . xtsung Aluminum anppy for exist. Stud 'moi rea l qui yment ��— odor ontrol $ `Chi [hof � • � Cy y $ �v bbq 00 $ wp z co soction 1SDSQ nCd space entry Monrtonpg (# r . 9 Form t ) Cubic ail 1'0' rafts. mlxiters and floor $ rb foe • 0 (� .2 O00 .acs IUM Landscaping }3uffer azrd itxl dhoti system jf 1I New ARV, Vent Piping and Pump quick connect $ rulocution and r num us items 12 Aluminum sto plates Cur 1 fifers r lhhawin M-7 $ 7 ' 0 0 13 An�„>,a., . GRAND TOTAL BASE, LID: $) 015 (� C> (In Words) (>�IiDDER:: NA7ViE} n f'nrrti �.`` 00300-4 ADDENDUM NO. 1 A-8 1's'C�cJnC?j Section 00310 TRENCH SAFETY ACT COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Project: West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design Instructions Florida Statutes Sections 553.60 through 553.64, known as the "Trench Safety Act" requires all contractors engaged by Indian River County, Florida to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration's excavation safety standard, found in 29 C.F.R. s. 1926.650 Subpart P. All prospective contractors are required to sign this Trench Safety Act Compliance Statement and provide compliance cost information where indicated below. The costs for complying with the Trench Safety Act must be incorporated into this Project's base Bid. Certify this Statement in the presence of a notary public. Certification 1. 1 understand that the Trench Safety Act requires me to comply with OSHA excavation safety standards found in 29 C.F.R. section 1926.650 Subpart P. I will comply with The Trench Safety Act and I will design and provide trench safety systems at all trench excavations in excess of five feet in depth for this Project. 2. The estimated cost imposed by compliance with The Trench Safety Act will be: 5 0 0 Dollars 55 per linear foot of trench to be excavated. 3. The estimated cost imposed by compliance with the Trench Safety Act will be: N/A Dollars $— per square foot of special shoring used. 4. The amount listed above has been included within the Base Bid. Certified: R.J. Sul1ivan Corp. (Contractor) (Typed or Printed Name) STATE Florida COUNTY OF: Broward The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this 11th day of December, 2012 by Casey R. Sullivan of R.J. Sullivan Corp. who is personally known to me oF hea pFadtiaed P. as ideptiflaRti and whom did not) take an oath. W. G. PULSFORD Notary Public (affix seal) MYCOMMISSION#EE116883 1 d4 EXPIRES: July 28, 2015 1 -800 -3 -NOTARY Fl. NotwY Discount A"oc, My Commission Expires: 00310-1 CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) R.J. Sullivan Corp. 2001 NW 22nd Street Pompano Beach, FL 33069 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) Indian River Board of County Commissioners 1800 - 27th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 1 Bond No. N/A SURETY: Continental Casualty Company: Illinois Corporation (Name, legal status and principal place of business) 333 S. Wabash Avenue 41st Floor Chicago, IL 60604 BOND AMOUNT: Five Percent of Amount of Bid (5% of Bid This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design, Bid No: 2013013 The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor ' within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and l` Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days. If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. S' d and sealed this __.._1,1 th _ day of ._. ( 'tness) Caro9nM . Sullivan, ecretary kness) Sama ha aw ess December 2012 ._. R.J. Sullivan Cori._ (Principal)—r atle) Casey-2—�S Continental Cas (Surety) (Title) R.Q. Rob Printed in cooperation with the American Institute of Architects (AIA). The language in this document conforms to the language used in AIA DocumentA310 - Bid Bond - 2010 Edition. (Seal) (Seal) nsed Resident Agent POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know All Men By These Presents, That Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford,"an Illinois insurance company, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania insurance company (herein called "the CNA Companies"), are duly organized and existing insurance companies having their principal offices in the City of Chicago, and State of Illinois, nd that they do by virtue of the signatures and seals herein affixed hereby make, constitute and appoint R Q Roberts Jr, Martha Polk, Individually of Longwood, FL, their true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for and on their behalf bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature - In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind them thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of their insurance companies and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given is hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By -Law and Resolutions, printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by the Boards of Directors of the insurance companies. In Witness Whereof, the CNA Companies have caused these _presents to be signed by their Senior Vice President and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed on this 22nd day of June, 2011. �P\ GASUA, 1NSURgyc ANY 0A 00 PO Art Z 3 �' `OQRPOpgrFp S X. �y A JULY 31, 1897 HARD • Continental Casualty Company National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania Stathy Darcy error Vice President State of Illinois, County of Cook, ss: On this 22nd day of June, 2011, before me personally came Stathy Darcy to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that she resides in the City of Glenview, State of Illinois; that she is a Senior Vice President of Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford; an Illinois insurance company,. and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania insurance company described in and which executed the above instrument; that she knows the seals of said insurance companies; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Boards of Directors of said insurance companies and that she signed her name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said insurance companies. OffICW.9E W OOMLEM8L8I?i0Al1Pt;Rf7ICDZIM OTMY PURA - STATF < My Commission Expires September 17, 2013 Eliza Price Notary Public CERTIFICATE I, Mary A. Ribikawskis, Assistant Secretary of Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois insurance company, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania insurance company do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney herein above set forth is still in force, and further certify that the By -Law and Resolution of the Board of Directors of the insurance companies printed on the reverse hereof is stilllin force. In testimony whereof I have hereunt bscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said insurance companies this I1'`� day of 2C'P4n bel , 2a 1 1 0Asvg4r 1NSU944 MvAx�vF Continental Casualty "pany F 'pok OORP®RAre O�0 s 3 t�� 1Rj,ORPORgj Fp O� SEAL F `� JULY31, '1-11897 HARK b Form F6853-1/2011 National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania CA2 414.4"�_ Mary A. ikaj5kis Assistant Secretary (L SECTION 00410 AIA DOCUMENT A310 BID BOND The Contractor shall use the document form entitled "AIA Document A310 Bid Bond" in this Section. *END OF SECTION* 00410-1 SECTION 00431 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS The following are the subcontractors to be used if the undersigned is awarded the contract for this project. NAME & ADDRESS TYPE OF WORK Electrical -6-7,-,l Jf V_ P,,-," C6' Landscaping Masonry �_/Roofing �__'f rovers X—aA0 n c , L� � cj- , Painting G4 !m -r_ Con4rc)lI J"up,�cr Instrumentation S4C TC&7s !___ Total dollar amount that will be awarded to Sub -contractors:$ �(- c'n 0 NOTE: The above Schedule of subcontractors will become a part of the contract that has been awarded and duly executed and must be submitted in writing to the OWNER for approval prior to that sub -contractor performing the work. *END OF SECTION* 00431-1 SECTION 00450 SCHEDULE OF SUPPLIERS The Contract Documents are based upon the equipment or products available from the Suppliers denoted as "A", 'B", etc. Provision will be made in. the Contract Documents for alternate suppliers whose equipment or product may be deemed equivalent in quality (see Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions). However, the Bidder must indicate in his Bid which supplier the Bidder intends to use for each item of equipment listed on this form by circling one of the listed suppliers. Should a Bidder fail to circle a named item in each category, or if he circles more than one listed supplier, he hereby agrees to provide the item listed as "A." If the Bidder desires to propose one or more alternate suppliers, he may write in the name of such alternates in the spaces provided in Section 00460, but he must nevertheless also circle one of the listed suppliers in this Section and include this -circled supplier in the bid price listed in the bid form. If the proposed alternate supplier is determined "not equivalent" by the ENGINEER, the Bidder must use the circled supplier. If the Bidder fails to indicate which listed supplier the Bidder intends to use if an alternate is rejected, the Bidder must use the supplier listed as "A". Also, if the Bidder circles more than one listed supplier, he must use the first supplier circled (unless an alternate is approved). Each proposed alternate will be evaluated in accordance with Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions. The OWNER may request and the Bidder shall supply complete information on proposed alternates prior to the Notice of Award. 00450-1 SCHEDULE OF SUPPLIERS INDIAN RIVER COUNTY BID NO.: 2013013 EQUIPMENT ITEM ITEM OR MATERIAL 1. Section 09900 Painting 3. Section 11510 Odor Control System 4. Section 13310 Flat Aluminum Covers BID OR SUPPLIER A. Carboline Tnemec C. ICI and Devoe Coatings A. Biorem Hallsten Csr COVEP-s After receipt of Bids, the CONTRACTOR may not substitute any Supplier circled above except as permitted under the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 00450-2 SECTION 00452 DISCLOSURE OF RELATIONSHIPS THIS SWORN STATEMENT UNDER SECTION 105:08, INDIAN RIVER COUNTY CODE, ON DISCLOSURE OF RELATIONSHIPS THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED IN THE PRESENCE OF A NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICER AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATHS. This sworn statement MUST be submitted with Bid, Proposal or Contract No. UCP -4067 for West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design This sworn statement is submitted by- R.J. Sullivan Corp. (Name of entity submitting Statement) whose business address is: 2001 N.W. 22nd Street, Pompano Beach, Florida 33069 3. My name is Casey R. Sullivan (Please print name of Individual signing) and my relationship to the entity named above is President 4. 1 understand that an "affiliate" as defined in Section 105.08, Indian River County Code, means: The term "affiliate" includes those officers, directors, executives,partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active In the management of the entity. 5. I understand that the relationship with a County Commissioner or County employee that must be disclosed as follows: Father, mother, son, daughter, brother, sister, uncle, aunt, first cousin, nephew, niece, husband, wife, father-in-law, mother-in-law, daughter-in-law, son-in-law, brother-in-law, sister-in-law, stepfather, stepmother; stepson, stepdaughter, stepbrother, stepsister, half brother, half sister, grandparent, or grandchild. 6. Based on information and belief, the statement, which I have marked below, is true in relation to the entity submitting this sworn statement. [Please indicate which statement applies.] X Neither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in management of the entity, have any relationships as defined in section 105.08, Indian River County Code, with any County Commissioner or County employee. 00452-1 The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents, who are active in management of the entity have the following relationships with a County Commissioner or County employee: Name of Affiliate Name of County Commissioner or entity or employee STATE OF Florida COUNTY Of Broward Relationship Signature) Der 11, 2012 (Date) The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this 11tday ofDecember 2012 by Casey R. Sullivan who is personally known to me or who has produced as identification. NOTARY PUBLIC SIGN: /'o G" �'ar� PRINT: Notary Public, State at large My Commission Expires: (Seal) 00452-2 K W. G. PULSFORDMY COMMISSION # EEI 16883 EXPIRES: July 28, 2015 F7. Notary Disc t Ann. Co.Y SECTION 00456 GENERAL INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS The undersigned Bidder Guarantees the truth and accuracy of all statements and answers herein contained. Failure to comply with these requirements may be considered sufficient justification to disqualify a Bidder. Additional sheets shah be attached as required. Documentation Submitted with Indian River County Bid No:_2013013 for West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design 1. How many years has your organization been in business as a General Contractor? 37 years 2. Describe and give the date and owner of the last project that you have completed similar in type, size, and nature as the one proposed? Glades 12 MGD WWTP for the City of Port St. Lucie. Complete new 12 MGD wastewater treatment facility. Completed in 2009, value $54 million (two phases). 2A. The following is a list of the projects similar in character and scope to the work specified under this contract (specifically— cleaning of utility main other than a water main, and conversion to a potable water main) which have been successfully completed by the bidder's personnel (may include sub -contractors) during the past three (3) years. The information must be furnished by each bidder. Completed means accepted and final payment received from the owner or authorized representative. LOCATION & OWNERS NAME CONSULTING DATE TYPE OF WORK & ADDRESS ENGINEER COMPLETE See attached 00456-1 3. Have you ever failed to complete work awarded to you? If so, where and why? No 4. Name three individuals or corporations for which you have performed work and to which you refer: Broward County - Bob Leonard - (954) 831-0969 Palm Beach County - Brian Shields - (561) 493-6000 City of Tamarac - Jim Moore - (954) 597-3758 5. Name of person who inspected site or proposed work for your firm: Name: Jason Buckwalter Date of Inspections: November 19, 2012 Describe any anticipated problems with the site and your proposed solutions: None 6. Will you Subcontract any part of this Work? If so, describe which portions: Yes, see page 00431-1 of Bid Package 7. Please list the names and addresses of the subcontractors to be used for the portions of the work listed below. Additional information will be required in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders (Section 00100). PAVING: No paving subcontractor SURVEYING: To be determined; didn't receive any quotes TESTING LAB: To be determined; didn't receive any quotes 8. What equipment do you own that is available for the work? See attachment 00456-2 9. What equipment will you purchase for the work? None 10. What equipment will you rent for the work? None 11. Florida Contractor's License No:. CGC1507756 12. The following is given as a summary of the Financial Statement of the undersigned: (List Assets and Liabilities and use insert sheet if necessary.) See attachment 13. List the names and titles of ALL officers of Contractor's firm: Casey R. Sullivan President/Treasurer Carolyn M. Sullivan Corporate Secretary 14. State the true and exact, correct, and complete name under which you do'business. BIDDER is: R.J. Sullivan Corp. 15. State your total bonding capacity: $30 Million 16. State your bonding capacity per job. $20 Million 00456-3 J 17. Please provide name, address, telephone number, and contact person of your bonding company. Insurance Office of America . 1200 University. Blvd. Suite 200, Jupiter, Florida 33458 (561) 776-0660 Contact: Roland Roberts NOTE: To demonstrate qualifications to perform the work, each Bidder must be prepared to ; submit, within 5 days of Owner's request, written evidence, such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments, and other such data as may be necessary to prove to the satisfaction of the Owner that the Bidder is qualified by experience to do the work and is prepared to complete the work within the stated time period. *END OF SECTION* 00456-4 SECTION 00460 PROPOSED AL'T'ERNATE SUPPLIERS Bidder proposes the following alternate manufacturers/suppliers for the equipment or material categories so identified: Equipment Item or Drawing Spec. Alternate Supplier Deduct Material No. Section (List One Only Amount I 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. END OF SECTION 00460-1 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 00460-2 LillIVCH1 CORP. 2001 N.W. 22nd Street Pompano Beach, FL 33069 (954) 975-0388 FAX (954) 975-3333 Proiects Completed Within Last Three (3) Years The following projects represent just a few of the almost 250 water and wastewater treatment plant projects that R.J. Sullivan Corp. has successfully completed as a General Contractor. Project Name: Filter Backwash Recovery Basin Owner/Location: City of Tamarac Owner's Representative: Jim Moore (954) 597-3758 Project Description: Filter backwash recovery basin with piled foundations, associated submersible pumps, yard piping, electrical and instrumentation work. Engineer., Eckler Engineering. Date Completed: October, 2012 Contract Price: $1,297,700 Project Name: Southern Regional Water Reclamation Facility Effluent Flow Delivery Modifications Owner/Location: Palm Beach County WUD Owner's Representative: Brian Shields (561) 493-6000 Project Description: Two new 250 HP effluent pumps, 48 -inch and 24 -inch piping modifications and additions at the existing effluent pumping station and the deep injections wells, including electrical and instrumentation work. Engineer.- Jacobs Date Completed. August, 2011 Contract Price: $1.35 million Project Name: Tamarac WTP Clearwell Addition Owner/Location: City of Tamarac Owner's Representative: James Moore (954) 597-3758. Project Description: Demolish existing clearwell, construct new clearwell and electrical building, transfer pumps, electrical and instrumentation systems, yard piping, and sitework. Engineer.' Eckler Engineering.. Date Completed., August, 2011. Contract Price: $1.6 million. • IJ Suff ivan CORP. 2001 N.W. 22nd Street Pompano Beach, FL 33069 (954) 975-0388 FAX (954) 975-3333 Project Name: Sawgrass WWTP Aeration System Improvements. OwnerlLocation: City of Sunrise. Owner's Representative: Greg Sutherland (954) 888-6000 Project Description: Modify and replace existing stainless steel air piping feeding the aeration basins and the sludge holding tanks including tie-ins to existing piping systems. Engineer: Hazen and Sawyer. Date Completed: March, 2011. Contract Price: $0.6 million. Project Name: WTP Pressure Vessel Replacement & Cleaning System imp. OwnerlLocation: City of Pompano Beach. Owner's Representative: Don Bayler (954) 545-7030. Project Description: Replace pressure vessels and membranes for five 2 MGD membrane softening skids, perform improvements to the associated cleaning system. Engineer: CDM Smith. Date Completed: December, 2010. Contract Price: $1.6 million. Project Name: Glades Wastewater Treatment Facility. OwneMLocation: City of Port St. Lucie. Owner's Representative: Max Harper (772) 871-5430. Project Description: New 12 MGD regional wastewater treatment facility including large excavations, complex temporary dewatering, 2,500 auger -cast piles, headworks, four anoxic/aeration basins, four clarifiers, pumping stations, reclaimed water filters, two odor control systems, four buildings, a sludge processing and handling facility, standby generator, extensive buried and above ground process piping up to 42 -inches in diameter, multiple complex tie-ins to existing piping and services, electrical and instrumentation installations, roads and sitework. Engineer- Arcadis, Inc. Date Completed: March, 2009. Contract Price: $54 million (in two phases). rj Saw. CORP. 2001 N.W. 22nd Street Pompano Beach, FL 33069 (954) 975-0388 FAX (954) 975-3333 Company Owned Equipment The Company owns the following equipment: • Four rough terrain telescopic cranes • Three tracked excavators • Three rubber -tired loaders • Three combination backhoe loaders • One bulldozer • Two telescopic manlifts • One carrydeck telescopic crane. • One dump truck • One flatbed truck • One service truck • Two skid steer loaders • One forklift truck • Three dewatering pumps • One concrete pump • Three air compressors • One vibratory roller • Four equipment trailers • Four storage trailers • One trailer mounted welding unit • Various small pumps and generators • Numerous small tools STATE OF FLORIDA - :-- DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION ' F CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET WE TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 SULLIVAN, CASEY R R J SULLIVAN CORP 2051 SE 3 ST APT 506 DEERFIELD BEACH FL 33441 Congratulations) With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers, from boxers to barbeque restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you bettei For information about our services, please log onto www.myfloridalicense.com. There you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that impact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the Department's initiatives, our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We `stantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers, ik you for doing business in Florida, and congratulations on your new licensel, ee DETACH HERE (85 0) 487-1395 Expiration date: AUG. 31., 2014' ;.3: ,.t; z. ..F; S',•it �t yC}� " %f ,�,� i 2001 22 POMPANO BEACH FL, 330691,5 r �.t i' :., �C G� ..SbT tr' :...: R { t DISPEA AS REQUIRE606' ''LAW rLAT10 3N SE4# L12o71101592 KEN LAWSON SECRETARY STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 COVERT, BROOKS CURRY R J SULLIVAN CORP 2001 N W 22ND STREET POMPANO BCH FL 33069 Congratulationsi With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers, from boxers to barbegue restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. Every day we work to improve the way we do business In order to serve you bettei For information about our services, please log onto www.myfloridalleense.com. There you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that Impact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the Department's initiatives. Our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We onstantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. )k you for doing business in Florida, and congratulations on your new licensel DETACH HERE (850) 487-1395 3.� 0 6 9 l �lp¢�WE r} ZZ.ST�l1l1T7�.�'! 'rc�. i� .>f• •�}: .�' s£. �.1.�: ...'k :fit Y.... DISPLAY AS REG2UIREY:13 LAW KEN LAWSON SECRETARY Indian River County Purchasing Division 180027 th Street Vero Beach, FL. 329;60 Phone (772) 2-26-141- Fax (7721770-S140 ADDEKDUM'I O 1 Date: December 5, 2012 Project Name: West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design Proposal Number: 2013013 Proposal Due Date: December. 11, 2012 at 2:00 pm This Addendum sets forth changes and/or additional information'as referenced and is* hereby made a part of, and should be attached to, the subject Specifications and Contract Documents. **********This Addendum.MUST be returned with your Proposal************ All proposals must be -received in the Purchasing Division office located at 1800 27th Street, Vero Beach, FL. 32960 prior to the Date and Time shown above. Late proposals will be returned unopened. Company Name R.J. Sullivan Corporation Name: Casey R. Sullivan Title: President (Type / Printed.) ------ December 11, 2012 Authorized Signatures._= !" Dater Telephone; (954) 975-0388_ Fax: (954) 975-3333 ADDENDUM NO. 1 A-1 Indian River County Purchasing Division 180027 th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 Phone (772) 226-1416 , Fax (772) 770-5140 ADDENDIUK NO.2 Date: December 7, 2012 Project Name: West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design Proposal Number:' 2013013 Proposal Due Date: December 11, 2012 at 2:00 pm This Addendum clarifies insurance requirements as provided in Addendum 1. DELETE Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions, Paragraph 5.04 C.4, referencing Professional Liability Insurance. Contractor -is not required to obtain Professional Liability Insurance. ************This Addendum MUST be returned with your'Proposal************* All proposals must be received in the Purchasing Division office located at 1800 27th Street, Vero Beach, FL 32960 prior to the Date and Time shown above. Late proposals will be returned unopened. Company Name R.J. Sullivan Corp. Name: Casey R. Sullivan Title: President (Type / Printed) Authorized Signature: �•----ate: 1, (954) 97 5 0388 December 11, 2012 Telephone: = Fax: (954) 975-3333 i 0 R.J. SULLIVAN CORPORATION BALANCE SHEET DECEMBER 31, 2011 ASSETS CURRENT ASSETS Cash and cash equivalents $ Marketable securities $ 618,530 Contract receivables, net, including 944,644 retainage receivable of $124,485 102,760 Costs and estimated earnings in excess of billings 882,615 Prepaid expenses 81,765 Loan receivable - other 19,710 TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS 4,370 Cash surrender value of life insurance 2,551,634 PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT Machinery and equipment $ Vehicles 2,205,491 Computer equipment 172,30836,067 102,760 Less: accumulated depreciation 2,413,866 (2,277,520) STOCKHOLDER'S EQUITY 136,346 OTHER ASSETS Cash surrender value of life insurance Deposits 620,945 Retained earnings 1,080 Accumulated other comprehensive income 622,025_ TOTAL ASSETS $ 3,310,005 LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDER'S EQUITY CURRENT LIABILITIES Accounts payable $ Billings in excess of costs and estimated earnings 664,924 46,219 Accrued expenses 102,760 TOTAL LIABILITIES 813,903 STOCKHOLDER'S EQUITY Common stock, par value $5 per share; 1,000 shares authorized, 100 shares issued and 27 outstanding Additional paid in capital 500 Retained earnings 511,046 Accumulated other comprehensive income 7,285,058 20,998 Less: treasury stock, 73 shares, at cost 7,817,602(5,321,500) TOTAL STOCKHOLDER'S EQUITY 2,496,102 TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDER'S EQUITY $ 3,310,005 SECTION 00530 — EJCDC STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design THIS AGREEMENT ("Agreement" or "Contract"), dated the 14th day of February in the year 2013 by and between Indian River County, a political subdivision of the State of Florida (hereinafter called OWNER) and R. J. Sullivan Corp. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 WORK CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor and not as an employee shall furnish and complete all of the necessary labor, material, and equipment to perform the work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents (as that term is defined in Article 8 hrein) and per FDEP, FDOT, County Utilities Department and County Engineering Department standards. The work is generally described as follows: The Project includes Flat Aluminum Covers for two Anaerobic Tanks, Odor Control System, Building around the existing Grit Handling Equipment, Aluminum Canopy over existing sludge odor control equipment, Yard Piping Electrical/Controls, Instrumentation/SCADA, Landscaping Buffer and irrigation. All ancillary work associated with these systems are to be included ARTICLE 2 ENGINEER The project has been designed by Atkins, hereinafter called ENGINEER, and who is to act as OWNER'S representative, assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The CONTRACTOR shall be substantially completed with the following timeframe The CONTRACTOR shall be substantially completed with the remaining work Two Hundred and Forty (240) calendar days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, in accordance with Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions within Thirty (30) calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraphs 3.1 and 3.2 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving in a legal proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay 00530-1 (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER four -hundred and fifty dollars ($450.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.1 for Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER four -hundred and fifty dollars ($450.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.2 for completion and readiness for final payment. 3.2.1 The CONTRACTOR and OWNER agree that OWNER is authorized to deduct all or any portion of the above -stated liquidated damages due to the Owner from payments due to the Contractor; or, in the alternative, all or any portion of the above -stated liquidated damages may be collected from the Contractor or its Surety or Sureties. These provisions for liquidated damages shall not prevent the OWNER, in case of the CONTRACTOR's default, from terminating the Contractor's right to proceed as provided in this AGREEMENT. 3.2.2 In addition to the above -stated liquidated damages, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for reimbursing OWNER to third party consultants in administering the Project beyond the Substantial Completion date specified in this Agreement, or beyond an approved extension of time granted to CONTRACTOR, whichever date is later. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds in the amount of $1.015,000.00 ARTICLE 5 PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions and the Contract Documents. 5.1 Progress Payments. The OWNER shall make progress payments to the CONTRACTOR on the basis of the approved partial payment request as recommended by ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act, Florida Statutes section 218.70 ET. seq. The OWNER shall retain ten percent (10%) of the payment amounts due to the CONTRACTOR until fifty percent (50%) completion of the work. After fifty percent (50%) completion of the work is attained as certified to OWNER by ENGINEER in writing, OWNER shall retain five percent (5%) of the payment amount due to CONTRACTOR until final completion and acceptance of all work to be performed by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. Pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8) (b), fifty percent (50%) completion means the point at which the County as OWNER has expended fifty percent (50%) of the total cost of the construction services work purchased under the Contract Documents, together with all costs associated with existing change orders and other additions or modifications to the construction services work provided under the Contract Documents. 00530-2 5.2 Pay Requests. Each request for a progress payment shall be submitted on the application for payment form supplied by OWNER and the application for payment shall contain the CONTRACTOR's certification. All progress payments will be on the basis of progress of the work measured by the schedule of values established, or in the case of unit price work based on the number of units completed. After fifty percent (50%) completion, and pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8)(d), the CONTRACTOR may submit a pay request to the County as OWNER for up to one half (1/2) of the retainage held by the County as OWNER, and the County as OWNER shall promptly make payment to the CONTRACTOR unless such amounts are the subject of a good faith dispute; the subject of a claim pursuant to Florida Statutes section 255.05(2005); or otherwise the subject of a claim or demand by the County as OWNER or the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that where such retainage is attributable to the labor, services, or materials supplied by one or more subcontractors or suppliers, the Contractor shall timely remit payment of such retainage to those subcontractors and suppliers. Pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8) (c) (2005), CONTRACTOR further acknowledges and agrees that: 1) the County as OWNER shall receive immediate written notice of all decisions made by CONTRACTOR to withhold retainage on any subcontractor at greater than five percent (5%) after fifty percent (50%) completion; and 2) CONTRACTOR will not seek release from the County as OWNER of the withheld retainage until the final pay request. 5.3 Paragraphs 5.1 and 5.2 do not apply to construction services work purchased by the County as OWNER which are paid for, in whole or in part, with federal funds and are subject to federal grantor laws and regulations or requirements that are contrary to any provision of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. In such event, payment and retainage provisions shall be governed by the applicable grant requirements and guidelines. 5.4 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT: Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the ENGINEER will promptly make such inspection and when the ENGINEER finds the work acceptable under the terms of the Contract and the Contract fully performed, the ENGINEER will promptly issue a final completion certificate stating that the work provided for in this Contract has been completed, and acceptance by the OWNER under the terms and the conditions thereof is recommended and the entire balance found to be due the CONTRACTOR, will be paid to the CONTRACTOR by the OWNER following County Commission approval of the final Contract payment. 5.5 Acceptance of Final Payment as Release. The acceptance by the CONTRACTOR of final payment shall be and shall operate as a release to the OWNER from all claims and all liability to the CONTRACTOR other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the CONTRACTOR for all things done or furnished in connection with the work under this Contract and for every act and neglect of the OWNER and others relating to or arising out of the work. Any payment, however, final or otherwise, shall not release the CONTRACTOR or its sureties from any obligations under the Contract Documents or the Payment and Performance Bonds. ARTICLE 6 INTEREST Not Applicable. ARTICLE 7 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 00530-3 In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, work, site, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and accepts the determination set forth in Paragraph SC -4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extent of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings upon which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in Paragraph 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance of furnishing of the work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of Paragraph 4.04 of the General Conditions. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 8 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the work consist of the following: 8.1 This Agreement (Section 00530). 8.2 Public Construction Bond (Section 00610). 8.3 Notice of Award and Notice to Proceed (examples in Section 00800). 00530-4 8.4 General Conditions (Section 00700). 8.5 Supplementary Conditions (Section 00800). Documents/Specifications bearing the title "West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design / Project No 4067 / Bid No. 2013013" 8.6 Addenda numbers 1 to 2 inclusive. 8.7 CONTRACTOR'S Bid (Section 00300). 8.8 Specifications bearing the title "West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design" 8.9 The following, which may be delivered or issued after the effective date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: All written amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to Paragraphs 3.04 of the General Conditions. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in Paragraphs 3.04 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9 MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall not assign, transfer, convey, or otherwise dispose of the contract or its right, title, or interest in or to the same or any part thereof, or allow legal action to be brought in its name for the benefit of others, without previous consent of the OWNER and concurred to by the sureties. Any attempted assignment shall be void and may, at the option of the OWNER be deemed an event of default hereunder. Nothing herein shall be construed as creating any personal liability on the part of any officer or agent of the OWNER who may be a party hereto. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 The CONTRACTOR shall be properly licensed to practice its trade or trades which are involved in the completion of this Agreement and the work thereunder. 9.5 This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Florida. Venue for any lawsuit brought by either party against the other party or otherwise arising out of this agreement shall be in Indian River County, Florida, or, in the event of federal jurisdiction, in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Florida. 9.6 The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER, and its officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of the CONTRACTOR and persons employed or utilized by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the construction contract. Nothing herein shall effect the rights, privileges, and immunities of the OWNER as set forth in Section 768.28, Florida Statutes. 00530-5 In any and all claims against the County or any of its agents or employees, by any employee of the contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under the previous paragraph shall not be limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the contractor or any subcontractor under Workers' Compensation Acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 9.7 Pledge of Credit. The CONTRACTOR shall not pledge the OWNER'S credit or make it a guarantor of payment or surety for any Agreement, debt, obligation, judgment, lien or any form of indebtedness. The CONTRACTOR further warrants and represents that it has no obligation of indebtedness that would impair its ability to fulfill the terms of this Agreement. 9.8. Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, but all such counterparts, when duly executed, shall constitute one and the same Agreement. 9.9. Public Records. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with the provisions of Chapter 119, Florida Statutes (Public Records Law) in connection with this Agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER AND CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement the day and year first written above. OWNER Indian River County y Board of County Commissioners;`° By: J eph E. Flescher, Chairman C Ap roved: January 22, 2013 y✓° A est::Ple&ry Smith, Clerk of the Circuit Court and Comptroller By:owv— Deputy Clerk Approved By: ph/A. Baird, County Administrator 4proved as to Form and Legal Sufficiency: County Attorney--. - Address for giving notices 00530-6 1801 27th Street Vero Beach, Florida 32960 CONTRACTOR R. J. Sullivan Corp. Casey R. Sullivan, President Attest:_ Address for giving notices: 2001 N.W. 22`d Street Pompano Beach, FL 33069 License No. CGC1507756 *END OF SECTION* 00530-7 (CORPORATE SEAL) SECTION 00610 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND INSTRUCTION FOR PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND The front or cover page to the required public construction payment and performance bond shall contain the information required by Fla. Stat. 255.05(1)(a), and be substantially in the format shown on the first page following this instruction. The Public Construction Bond shall be in the form suggested by Fla. Stat. 255.05(3) as shown on the second page following this instruction. A Power of Attorney from a surety insurer authorized to do business in Florida, authorizing the signature of the Attorney in Fact who executes the Public Construction Bond shall accompany that Bond. 00610- 1 Public Work F.S. Chapter 255.05 (1)(a) Cover Page THIS BOND IS GIVEN TO COMPLY WITH SECTION 255.05 OR SECTION 713.23 FLORIDA STATUTES, AND ANY ACTION INSTITUTED BY A CLAIMANT UNDER THIS BOND FOR PAYMENT MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATION PROVISIONS IN SECTION 255.05(2) OR SECTION 713.23 FLORIDA STATUTES. BOND NO: CONTRACTOR NAME: CONTRACTOR ADDRESS: CONTRACTOR PHONE NO: SURETY COMPANY NAME: SURETY PRINCIPAL BUSINESS ADDRESS: SURETY PHONE NO: OWNER NAME: OWNER ADDRESS: OWNER PHONE NO: OBLIGEE NAME: (If contracting entity is different from the owner, the contracting public entity) OBLIGEE ADDRESS: OBLIGEE PHONE NO: BOND AMOUNT: CONTRACT NO: (If applicable) DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT LOCATION: LEGAL DESCRIPTION: (If applicable) FRONTPAGE All other bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page regardless of any page number(s) that may be printed thereon. 00610-2 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (enter bond numbed BY THIS BOND, We , as Principal and a corporation, as Surety, are bound to herein called Owner, in the sum of $ , for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Principal: 1. Performs the contract dated between Principal and Owner for construction of , the contract being made a part of this bond by reference, at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Principal with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Principal in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Principal under the contract; and 4. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond. DATED ON 00610-3 (Name of Principal) (As Attorney in Fact) (Name of Surety) Continental Casualty Company CONTRACTOR: SURETY COMPANY: BOND (Public Work) In compliance of F.S. Chapter 255.05(1)(a) 929550032 R.J. Sullivan Corp. 2001 NW 22nd St., Pompano Beach, FL 33069 (954) 975-0388 Continental Casualty Company 2405 Lucien Way Maitland, FL 32751 (305) 919-3948 OWNER NAME: Indian River Board of County Commissioners 180027 th Street, Vero Beach, FL 32960 OBLIGEE NAME: (If contracting entity is different from the owner, the contracting public entity) BOND AMOUNT: $1,015,000.00 CONTRACT NO. (if applicable) Bid Number: 2013013 DESCRIPTION OF WORK PROJECT LOCATION LEGAL DESCRIPTION: West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design Indian River County, FL FRONT PAGE All other Bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page regardless of any Page number(s) that may be pre-printed thereon R.Q. Roberts, Jr., Attorney -in -Fact and Licensed Resident Agent, License #A221966 Insurance Office of America, 1200 University Blvd., Ste. 200, Jupiter, FL 33458 (561) 721-3752 3120130008359 RECORDED I\ THE PL-BLIC RECORDS OF JEFFREY R SMITH. CLERK OF COURT 1\DLa\ R1\FR COU N -FY FL. BK: 2612 PG: 361 Page 1 A4 2520133:27P\I PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND Bond No. 929550032 (enter bond number) BY THIS BOND, We _ R. J. Sullivan Corp , as Principal and Continental- Casualty ontinentalCasualty Comnany , a corporation, as Surety, are bound toInd-an River Co. BICC herein called Owner, in the sum of $--!, 015 , 000.00 , for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Principal: 1. Performs the contract dated Ja.rt 1013, between Principal and Owner for construction of West Regional WWTP anaerobic tanks OCSD , the contract being made a part of this bond by reference, at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Principal with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Principal in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Principal under the contract; and 4. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance's"" with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's. obligation under this bond. DATED ON R.J. Sullivan Corp. by: Casey R. l rr>, e$ JNa�rin�cliail%1 B—Y_R.Q. Roberts, Jr 7 (As Attorney in Fay Continental CasuAl't ,:Co -. Name of Surety fi•. 00610-3 POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know All Men By These Presents, That Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois insurance company, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania insurance company (herein called "the CNA Companies"), are duly organized and existing insurance companies having their principal offices in the City of Chicago, and State of Illinois, and that they do by virtue of the signatures and seats herein affixed hereby make, constitute and appoint R Q Roberts Jr, Martha Polk, Individually of Longwood, FL, their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for and on their behalf bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature - In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind them thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of their insurance companies and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given is hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By -Law and Resolutions, printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by the Boards of Directors of the insurance companies. In Witness Whereof, the CNA Companies have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Vice President and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed on this 22nd day of June, 2011. GAS Uq�rr INSUggti oAW � Continental Casualty Company n �e�s �F tialPo National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford Z OORPOAATF o oa z v : 9 \mtvor�Tf� American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania oU ? SEAL JULY n, � t. 1902 ��• a 1897 � HARh� • � Zy Darcy �enior State of Illinois, County of Cook, ss: On this 22nd day of June, 2011, before me personally came Stathy Darcy to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did dep'ose°'arld'say: that she resides in the City of Glenview, State of Illinois; that she is a Senior Vice President of Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois iiisli` a'ecorppany, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois insurance company, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pcgnsyyatlia; Pennsylvania insurance company described in and which executed the above instrument; that she knows the seals of said incur nce-Comp4hli�s; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Boards'of'lavetors of sai¢ insurance companies and that she signed her name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and e o satdF/ ur ce , t:c companies. l ------------ CFFICI& SEAL El1ZA PRICE EWTAW PAW -STATEOF L111018 My Commission Expires September 17, 2013 Eliza Price N6t6Vubl'rb`. CERTIFICATE I, Mary A. Ribikawskis, Assistant Secretary of Continental Casualty Company, an IIlinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois insurance company, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania insurance company do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney herein above set forth is still in force, and further certify that the By -Law and Resolution of the Board of Directors of the insurance companies printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said insurance companies thisday of �0 GAS A, 1NSUR4 o�\vAuvoF 2` CORP• RATg 3 S� \liG0itP0AgT Fp X �U SEAL `c w' i JULY 71, a 1897 HA0 b • Form F6853-1/2011 Continental Casualty Company National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania Mary A. gikaEkis Assistant Secretary Authorizing By -Laws and Resolutions ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By -Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company. "Article IX—Execution of Documents Section 3. Appointment of Attorney -in -Fact. The Chairman of the Board of Directors, the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys -in -fact to act in behalf of the Company in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thererto. The Chairman of the Board of Directors, the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President or the Board of Directors, may, at any time, revoke all power and authority previously given to any attomey-in-fact." This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 17'h day of February, 1993. "Resolved, that the signature of the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted pursuant to Section 3 of Article IX of the By -Laws, and the signature of the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power and any power or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certified by certificate so executed and sealed shall, with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and binding on the Company." ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF AMERICAN CASUALTY COMPANY OF READING, PENNSYLVANIA: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By -Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company. "Article VI—Execution of Documents Section 3 Appointment of Attorney -in -Fact. The Chairman of the Board of Directors, the President or any Executive or Senior Vice President may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys -in -fact to act in behalf of the Company in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thereto. The Chairman of the Board of Directors, the President or any Executive or Senior Vice President or the Board of Directors may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attomey-in-fact " This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 17'h day of February, 1993. "Resolved, that the signature of the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted pursuant to Section 2 of Article VI of the By -Laws, and the signature of the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power and any power or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certified by certificate so executed and sealed shall, with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and binding on the Company." ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY OF HARTFORD: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By -Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company. "Article VII—Execution of Documents Section 3. Appointment of Attorney -in -Fact. The Chairman of the Board of Directors, the President or any Executive or Senior Vice President may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attomeys-in-Fact to act in behalf of the Company in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thereto. The Chairman of the Board of Directors, the President or any Executive, Senior Vice President or the Board of Directors, may, at any time, revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact." This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutionadopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 17'h day of February, 1993. "RESOLVED: That the signature of the President, an Executive Vice President or any Senior or Group Vice President and the seal of the Insurance Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted pursuant to the Resolution adopted by this Board of Directors on February 17, 1993 and the signature of a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Insurance Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power, and any power or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Insurance Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certified by certificate so executed and sealed, shall with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and binding on the Insurance Company." RJSULLI-01 SEESK CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (M 1 /23//201201YYY) 3 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES '.OW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED _PRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). - . .. -- PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Martha Kuveikis Insurance Office of America - JUP j PHONE 561 776-0660 FAX Abacoa Town Center (A/c No, Ext1 ( ) (A/C, No): (5.61) 776-0670 1200 University Blvd, Suite 200 E-MAIL M Jupiter, FL 33458 ADDRESS:artha.Kuveikis@ioausa.com _ INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # - INSURERA.Admiral Insurance Company 24856 INSURED INSURER B: American Economy Insurance Company _19690 R J Sullivan Corp. INSURER C: Zenith Ins Co 1.3269 2001 NW 22nd Street INSURER D : Pompano Beach, FL 33069 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR ADDL SUBR - LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY EFF POLICY EXP INSR WVD _ POLICY NUMBER (MM/DD/VYYY) (MM/DD/YYYY) LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY FEIECC1198300 12/28/2012 12/28/2013 DAMAGE -TO RENTED 50 000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) Job: West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design Indian River County Board of County Commissioners is additional insured with respect to General Liability as required by written contract. 30 day Notice of Cancellation, 10 day for non-payment of premium, in accordance with policy provisions. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Indian River Board of County Commissioners 1800 27th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 l © 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2010/05) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD CLAIMS X PREMISES IEa occurrence) $ , -MADE OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 - -- - GENE RALAGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY X PRO - — JECT _Loc - - - - CPL PL $ 1,000,000 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT EaaccidentZ 1,000,000 X ANY AUTO 02CE2286311 12/28/2012 12/28/2013 _ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ $ ALL OWNED SCHEDULED — AUTOS AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (PER ACCIDENT) UMBRELLA LIAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 A X EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE FEIEXS1198400 12/28/2012 12/28/2013 AGGREGATE $ DED X RETENTION $ General Aggrega $ 5,000,000 WORKERS COMPENSATION X WC STATU- OTH- C AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY Y / N TORY LIMITS ER _ ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? N / A Z068832107 1/1/2013 1/1/2014 E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000 (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) Job: West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design Indian River County Board of County Commissioners is additional insured with respect to General Liability as required by written contract. 30 day Notice of Cancellation, 10 day for non-payment of premium, in accordance with policy provisions. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Indian River Board of County Commissioners 1800 27th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 l © 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2010/05) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the Controlling Law. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE and Issued and Published Jointly By A C E C National Society of SCE American Society Professional Engineers Amtir ,%, Coin it a,i r.N >,i , iNr.,. cx,.ie,,.n, Professional Engineers In Pr/vale Practice of Civil Engineers PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS This document has been approved and endorsed by n y� Ycrns� �Imnzlalz� m The Associated General Contractors of America Knowledge for Creating kI and Sustaining the Built Environment Construction Specifications Institute EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-1 Copyright ©2002 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005 American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Nos. C-520 or C-525 (2002 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EJCDC Construction Documents, General and Instructions (No. C-001) (2002 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. C-800) (2002 Edition). EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY..............................................................................................................6 1.01 Defined Terins..........................................................................................................................................................6 1.02 Terininology...................................................... .......................................................................... ARTICLE 2 -PRELIMINARY MATTERS """"""""""" 9 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence oflnsurance.........................................................................................................9 2.02 Copies of Documents .................... 9 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed .................................... 9 2.04 Starting the Work ......................................... 2.05 Before Starting Construction...................................................................................................................................9 2.06 Preconstruction Conference .......................................... 2.07 Initial Acceptance o Schedules 9 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT AMENDING, REUSE......................................................................10 3.01 Intent......................................................................................................................................................................10 3.02 Reference Standards ................................... to 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 10 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents.............................................................................................. l l 3.05 Reuse of Documents...............................................................................................................................................11 3.06 Electronic Data ............................................ ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS................................................................................................11 4.01 Availability of Lands ............................ 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions..... I.... ............................................................................................,...............12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions........................................................................................................12 44.04 Underground Facilities..........................................................................................................................................13 .05 Reference Points............................................................................:................13 ....................................................... 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site.........................................................................................................14 ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ....................... 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..............................................................................................................15 5.02 Licensed Sureties andInsurers ..............................................................................................................................15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance .................................. 5.04 Contractor's Liability Insurance """""""""""""""" 5 55.05 Owner's Liability Insurance..................................................................................................................................16 .06 Property Insurance................................................................................................................................................16 5.07 Waiver of Rights ....................................................................................................................17 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds ........................... 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds andIusurance; Option to Replace..........18 ............................. ................. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer.....................................................................................18 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES..........................................................................................................18 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence..........................................................................................................................18 6.02 Labor; Working Hours..... .................................................................... 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment.......................................................................................................................18 6.04 Progress Schedule .................................. ........ .............................................................................. """"""""""""" 19 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals"I........ I ............. ..... ......... ............................... 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others............................................................................................... 20 66.07 Patent Fees and Royalties......................................................................................................................................21 .08 Permits ..................................................... ........... ...... .............................................. 6.09 Laws and Regulations............................................................................................................................................21 6.10 Taxes......................................................................................................................................................................22 66.11 Use of Site and Other- Areas................................................................................................................................... 22 6.12 Record Documents.................................................................................................................................................22 .13 Safety and Protection.............................................................................................................................................22 6.14 Safety Representative ............................... 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs........................................................................................................................23 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved, 00700-3 6.16 Emergencies .................................................. 23 .................................................... 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples.................................................................................................................................23 6.18 Continuing the Work....................................................................................... .......................................................24 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee....................................................................................................24 6.20 Indemnification ........................................ _ 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services........................................................................... ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE.........................................................................................................................25 7.01 Related Work at Site...............................................................................................................................................25 7.02 Coordination..........................................................................................................................................................26 7.03 Legal Relationships................................................................................................................................................26 ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES......................................................................................................................26 8.01 Communications to Contractor..............................................................................................................................26 8.02 Replacement of Engineer.......................................................................................................................................26 8.03 Furnish Data..........................................................................................................................................................26 8.04 Pay When Due................................................................ 26 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests..............................................................................................................26 8.06 Insurance...............................................................................................................................................................26 8.07 Change Orders......................................................................... . ....................................................................26 ................ 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .................................. 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities ................................ 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition................................................................................................27 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ................................. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION.....................................................................................27 9.01 Owner's Representative...................................................... ...........27 9.02 Visits to Site...........................................................................................................................................................27 9.03 Project Representative....................................................... 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work..............................................................................................................................27 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ....................................................... 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments.....................................................................................................28 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work......................................................................................................................28 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................................................28 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................................................................28 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS........................................................................................................... 29 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................................................... 29 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work.......................................................................................................................29 10.03 Execution of Change Orders..................................................................................................................................29 10.04 Notification to Surety.............................................................................................................................................29 10.05 Claims....................................................................................................................................................................29 ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK..................................................................30 11.01 Cost of the Work................................................................................................................................ .................... 30 2 Allowances.............................................................................................................................................................31 11.03 Unit Price Work ............................. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES.....................................................32 12.01 Change of Contract Price......................................................................................................................................32 12.02 Change of Contract Times.....................................................................................................................................33 12.03 Delays .......................................' .................... ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ....... 33 13.01 Notice of Defects ....................................................................................................................................................33 13.02 Access to Work.......................................................................................................................................................33 13.03 Tests andInspections .............................................................................................................................................33 13.04 Uncovering Work................................................................... 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work....................................................................... ..............................................................34 13.06 Correction or Removal ofDefective Work.............................................................................................................34 13.07 Correction Period..................................................................................................................................................34 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ............. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work .............................. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION..............................................................................36 14.01 Schedule of Values.................................................................................................................................................36 14.02 Progress Payments.................................................................................................................................................36 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................................................37 14.04 Substantial Completion........................................................................................................... 37 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-4 14.05 Partial Utilization 14.06 ..................................................................................................................................................38 Final Inspection.....................................................................................................................................................38 14.07 Final Payment........................:........................................ 14.08 38 Final Completion Delayed.....................................................................................................................................39 14.09 Waiver of Claims .................................................... 39 ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 .........................................................................................39 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................................................39 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause 15.03 ...........................................................................................................................39 Owner May Terminate For Convenience 15.04 ...............................................................................................................40 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate..............................................................................................................40 ARTICLE16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 ................................................................................................................................41 Methods and Procedures .......................................................................................................................................41 ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 .........................................................................................................................................41 Giving Notice.........................................................................................................................................................41 17.02 Computation ofTirnes............................................................................................................................................41 17.03 Cumulative Remedies.............................................................................................................................................41 17.04 Survival of Obligations..........................................................................................................................................41 17.05 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................................................41 17.06 Headings................................................................................................................................................................ 42 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright D 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-5 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFMTIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda --Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement --The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment --The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such ( supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos --Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid --The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidder --The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. 7. Bidding Documents --The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). 8. Bidding Requirements --The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. 9. Change Order --A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim --A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract --The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents-- Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor's submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 13, Contract Price --The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times --The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any, (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer's written recommendation of final payment. 15. Contractor --The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work --See Paragraph 11.0l.A for definition. 17. Drawings --That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement --The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. Engineer --The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20, Field Order --A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-6 not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21. General Requirements --Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition --The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 23. Hazardous Waste --The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations -- Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinanc- es, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 25. Liens --Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 26. Milestone --A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple- tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 27. Notice of Award --The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. 28. Notice to Proceed --A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Con- tract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 29. Owner --The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 30. PCBs --Polychlorinated biphenyls. 31. Petroleum --Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non -Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 32. Progress Schedule --A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 33. Project --The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. 34. Project Manual --The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 35. Radioactive Material --Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 36. Related Entity -- An officer, director, partner, employee, agent, consultant, or subcontractor. 37. Resident Project Representative --The authorized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 38. Samples --Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 39. Schedule of Submittals --A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. 40. Schedule of Values --A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 41. Shop Drawings --All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 42. Site --Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright C 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-7 43. Specifications --That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 44. Subcontractor --An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 45. Substantial Completion --The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 46. Successful Bidder --The Bidder submitting responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 47. Supplementary Conditions --That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 48. Supplier --A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor. 49. Underground Facilities --All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 50. Unit Price Work --Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 51. Work --The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 52. Work Change Directive --A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 1.02 Terminology A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the following meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. The Contract Documents include the terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered", "as directed" or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the require- ments of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the com- pleted Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day 1. The word "day" hours measured midnight. D. Defective means a calendar day of 24 from midnight to the next 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents, or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or EJCDC C•700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-8 approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer's - recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word "furnish," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "pro- vide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, "provide" is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence oflnsurance A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times com- mence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise speci- fied in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: I. a preliminary Progress Schedule; indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference B. Evidence oflnsurance: Before any Work at the Site is A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as other, with copies to each additional insured identified in appropriate will be held to establish a working the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance understanding among the parties as to the Work and to (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, any additional insured may reasonably request) which procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-9 submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibil- ity for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor's full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor's Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor's Schedule of Values will be accept- able to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equip- ment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, or Engineer, or any of, their Related Entities, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Docu- ments and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-10 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepan- cy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in viola- tion of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to (� modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; 2. Engineer's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; (Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or 3. Engineer's written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents 2. reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaption by Engineer. B. The prohibition of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Copies of data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor or Contractor to Owner or Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user's sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60 - day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data's creator. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all of the A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor, Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of shall not: general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other for easements for permanent structures or permanent documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are bearing the seal of Engineer or Engineer's unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or consultants, including electronic media editions; or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner's furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyrig,st © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-11 may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05, B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws andRegulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equip- ment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Docu- ments; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relat- ing to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connec- tion therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer's findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, perfor- mance of the Work; subject, however, to the follow- ing: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if. EJCDC C-700 Standsrd General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National So6ety of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-12 a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, explo- ration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's making such final commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, Owner and Engineer, and any of their Related Entities shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated proj ect. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated- The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facili- ties, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data, b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Under- ground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-13 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confine such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to Contractor written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stop- page or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the conse- quences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. as �aU U-'/UU Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright CC) 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-14 I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Compa- nies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agent's authority to act. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.11, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.13 and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be pravided in the Supplementary Conditions, 5.03 Certificates ofinsurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Condi- tions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 Contractor's Liability Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclu- EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-15 sion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these addi- tional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provid- ed in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. a. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter. 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner's option, may purchase and'maintain at Owner's expense Owner's own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, (other than caused by flood) and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-16 any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accor- dance with Paragraph 5.07. D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or additional insureds thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.073 shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application oflnsurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order. B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make TJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright D 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-17 settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.13. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superin- tendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on Contractor. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guaran- tees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and (� necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the conditioned in accordance with instructions of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided responsible for the means, methods, techniques, in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-18 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or -Equals" A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or -equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below. 1. "Or -Equal" Items: If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an "or -equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design !oncept of the completed Project as a functoning whole, 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times, and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items a. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or -equal" item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: 1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified; 2) will state: a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will preju- dice Contractor's achievement of Substantial Completion on time; EJCDC C-7;10 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-19 b) whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require ( a change in any of the Contract Docu- ments (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and c) whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in con- nection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; 3) will identify: a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; 4) and shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indi- rectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change, B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer's Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.13, Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Engineer's Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer's costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.13 Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. F. Contractor's Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or "or -equal" at Contractor's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.13), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reason -able objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supple- mentary Conditions, Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall consti- tute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright (0 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-20 2, shall anything in the Contract Documents create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, and Engineer„ and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require; separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incmrporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention_, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engine=er its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling far the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regula- tions, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringe- ment of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-21 entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work.- During ork:During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engi- neer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-22 indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcon- tractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or , or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly em- ployed by any of them). D. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 1. Shop Drawings a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. 2. Samples: Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and veri- fied: a. all field measurements, quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; b. the suitability of all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. all information relative to Contractor's 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples safety precautions and programs incident thereto; to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with and the acceptable Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as d. shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Engineer may require. Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-23 requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations, that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawing's or Sample Submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer's Review 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Sched- ule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of cor- rected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific; attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its Related Entities shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor's warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Sub- contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. EJC,'.)C C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright ©2 02 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-24 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regula- tions, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the perfor- mance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of - 1. f 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primaty cause of the injury or damage. 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for amstruction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to Engineer. C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner's employees, or via other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Con- tract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. LOW C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright b 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-25 B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner's employees, proper and safe access to the Site, a reason- able opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and respon- sibility for such coordination. 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs TOLA and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.0 LA shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor's actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor's action or inactions. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Condi- tions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 8.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.0 and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities, if any, in respect to pur- chasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5, 8.07 Change Orders A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-26 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner's responsibility in respect to certain inspec- tions, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.13. 8.09 Limitations on O►vner's Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner's r obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner's responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 Owner's Representative A. Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.02 Visits to Site check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer's efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer's authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's visits or observations of Contractor's Work Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer's consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be appropriate to the various stages of construction as made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor's executed Work. Based on A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in believes will not produce a completed Project that general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to the integrity of the design concept of the completed make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-27 Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is �( fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. D. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer's written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believe that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer's decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.13. C. Engineer's written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be respon- sible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to, the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-28 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.04 Notification to Surety 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.B. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.0l.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner's correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such deci- sion in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims A. Engineer's Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims. B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.13. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part, 2. approve the Claim, or 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-29 D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. E. Engineer's written action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.1) will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.13, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.13. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs_ of special consultants (including but not limited to Engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and mainte- nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the perfor- mance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equip- ment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. (( and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence field services required in connection therewith. All of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-30 directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.13), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor's fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expresses, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.O1.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor's principal and branch offices other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.0I.B. C. Contractor's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 1 LOLA and 11.O13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances 1. Contractor agrees that: a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation , overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright ©;IJ02 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-31 1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.0I.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.13.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit (deter- mined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor's Fee: The Contractor's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.0I.A.I and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor's fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.0I.A.3, the Contractor's fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraph 12.0l.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.0l.A.2 and that any higher tier EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-32 Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d, no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.0 LAA, 11.0I.A.5, and 11.01.13; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.0l.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive. 12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times , or both. Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer and the Related Entities of each of them shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of Engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13, 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor's Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-33 tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1, for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.0 and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.13 shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.04.C; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con- tract Documents, C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. D. If, the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights, reserved. 00700-34 A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor's use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.1 LA is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner's written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily complet- ed. E. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take posses- sion of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorpo- rating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-35 an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Applica- tion for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other docu- mentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer's observations on the Site of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer's knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicat- ed; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accor- dance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer's responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsi- bilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or b. that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4. Neither Engineer's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer's recommendation of any payment, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-36 including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replace- ment; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. D. Reduction in Payment 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because: a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnish- ing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occur- rence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. 'Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that Owner's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C. I. 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly after Contractor's notification, , Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-37 C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially com- plete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner's objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will within said 14 days execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or correct- ed) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions. 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all main- tenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by; a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-38 evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.7; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer's Review of Application and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as re- quired by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer's recommen- dation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and , will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjust- ment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-39 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply suffi- cient skilled workers or suitable materials or equip- ment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor's disregard of the authority of Engineer; or 4. Contractor's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and 3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.13, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.13 and 15.02.C, Contractor's services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. E. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.0I.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.13, and 15.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1, completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit bn such expenses; 3, all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 Contractor May ,Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-40 within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer's action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.13 shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions, or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process, or 3. gives written notice to the other party of their intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regula- tions, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Proiect is located. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-41 17.06 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-42 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS INDIAN RIVER COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF UTILITY SERVICES BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS 180127`" Street, Vero Beach, Florida 32960 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART I - AMENDMENTS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS Article Number Title 1 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 11 COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 12 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 17 MISCELLANEOUS 00800-2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART I - AMENDMENTS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC Document No. C-700, 2002 edition) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC -1.01A.43. Delete paragraph 1.01 A.43. of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: 43. Specifications - Sections included under Division 1 through Division 2 of the Project Manual. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS SC -2.01 B. Delete paragraph 2.01 B of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: B. Before any Work at the site is started, Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to Engineer, certificates of insurance, which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. SC 2.03A Delete paragraph 2.03A of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace with the following: The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. SC 2.05A1 Add the following immediately at the end of subparagraph 2.05A1: using the Critical Path Method (CPM). SC 2.05A.4 Add new subparagraph 4 after the existing text of 2.05 of the General Conditions: 4. If this Project is an addition to an existing working plant, then the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on tie-ins. The Owner shall have final say on plant shut down times and duration to make tie-ins. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE SC -3.01 C Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 3.01 C of the General Conditions which is to read as follows: 00800-3 D. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract ( Documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein SC3.03A.3 Delete existing 3.03A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following: Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or, in the exercise of ordinary care, reasonably should have recognized such conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy and failed to report it in writing to the Owner and the Engineer. SC 3.03B Delete existing 3.03B of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following B. Resolving Discrepancies. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall be read together as a whole not in isolation so as to give meaning to each provision; however, to the extent there is a conflict or inconsistency between or among provisions, the strictest or most stringent standard shall apply. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE DPHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINT SC 4.01 A Delete existing paragraph 4.01 A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following: A. Owner shall furnish the site. SC 4.01 B Delete existing paragraph 4.01 B of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 4.02A Delete 4.02 A.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following: A. Reports and Drawings: The Contract Documents may identify those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents. Engineer has relied upon the data obtained from subsurface investigations made at the site in the form of test borings. Such data is in the form of boring logs, which are available upon request. The locations of the test borings are indicated on the Drawings. Such logs and samples are not part of the Contract Documents. SC -4.02A.2. Add the following new sentences immediately at the end of existing paragraph 4.02A.2. of the General Conditions which is to read as follows: In the preparation of Drawings and Specifications, the Engineer has relied upon the reports listed in Section 00200 and tests of subsurface physical conditions at the site. Copies of these reports are available upon request. The foregoing information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents is based on information and data furnished to Owner or the Engineer by others. The, Owner and Engineer shall not beresponsible or the accuracy or full responsibility for requesting,reviewing,ewof nngSand y such information or data, and the Contractor have checking all such information and data. 00800-4 SC -4.02B. Delete paragraph 4.02 b in its entirety and replace with the following: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities owned by others or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or the Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. The Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data, and the Contractor shall have full responsibility for reviewing and checking all such information and data. SC 4.03A Delete 4.03 A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following: A. Notice. The Contractor shall promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, and in no event later than 10 days after first observance of the conditions, notify the Owner and Engineer in writing of: (1) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in this Contract, or (2) unknown physical conditions at the site of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in Work of the character provided for in this Contract. The Owner will promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that such conditions do materially so differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work under this Contract, a Change Order shall be issued accordingly based on the Schedule of Values and executed by the Owner and the Contractor. Contractor's failure to provide notice upon discovery of the differing site condition shall waive any entitlement to such an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time. Further, no Claim of the Contractor under this paragraph 4.03A shall be allowed unless the Contractor has given the notice as required in this paragraph 4.03A. SC 4.03C1 Delete subparagraph 4.03C1 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 4.03-C.3: Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 10 of paragraph 4.03-C.3 of the General Conditions. SC -4.05A. Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph 4.05A. of the General Conditions to read as follows: B. Engineer may check the lines, elevations, reference marks, batter boards, etc., set by Contractor, and Contractor shall correct any errors disclosed by such check. Such a check shall not be considered as approval f th oentiretorWork. Contractor's lshall furnish personnel tnot relieve Contractor ofo assistEngineer in accurate construction o checking lines and grades. SC 4.06D Delete the last sentence of paragraph 4.06D of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 4.06G Delete paragraph 4.06G of the General Conditions in its entirety. Add the following new Section immediately after paragraph 4.06I of the General Conditions to read as follows: SC 4.07 Archaeological or Resources at Site SC4.07A If Archaeological or Historical Resources are revealed, uncovered or discovered at site, Contractor shall cease work immediately and solicit the services of an Archaeologist Registered with �( the Registry of Professional Archaeologists. Based on Archaeologist's determination, Contractor 00800-5 shall then submit a Change Order in order to avoid resources or mitigate as required to proceed with project. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE SC 5.01 A Delete existing paragraph 5.01 A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Contractor shall furnish a Public Construction Bond in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. The bond shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws and Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. Pursuant to Florida Statutes section 255.05(1)(a) (2007), any claimant (as such term is defined in Florida Statutes section 713.01) may apply to Indian River County as Owner for copies of the Agreement and the recorded payment and performance bonds and shall thereupon be furnished with certified copies of such documents. SC 5.01B Delete reference to "all bonds" and replace with "the bond" throughout the entire paragraph. (Total of 2 replacements) SC 5.03B Delete existing paragraph 5.0313 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 5.04B Delete existing paragraph 5.04B of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: B. The Contractor shall not commence Work under the Agreement until it has obtained all insurance required under the Agreement and the Indian River County Risk Manager has approved such insurance. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, for the duration of the Agreement, the minimum insurance coverage as set forth herein. The cost of such insurance shall be included in the Contract Price. C. The insurance required by paragraph 5.04A of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations: 1. Workers' Compensation: To meet statutory limits in compliance with the Workers Compensation Law of Florida. This policy must include employers' liability with a limit $500,000 for each accident, $500,000 disease policy limit and $100,000 disease each employee. Such policy shall include a waiver of subrogation as against Owner on account of injury sustained by an employee(s) of the Contractor. 2. Commercial General Liability: A per occurrence form policy, including Premise Operations, Independent Contractors, Products and Completed Operations including X, C, U (Explosion, Collapse, Underground) Broad Form Property Damage, Broad Form Property Damage Endorsement, with a combined single limit of not less than $1,000,000 general aggregate to include products/completed operations, personal injury/advertising liability, fire damage /legal liability, and medical payments. 3. Business Auto Liability: Coverage shall include Owned vehicles and Hired/Non-Owned l ( vehicles, for a combined single limit (bodily injury and property damage) of not less than $1,000,000/combined single limit (Bodily Injury/Property Damage); personal injury protection -- statutory limits; $1,000,000 uninsured/underinsured motorist; $1,000,000/hired/non-owned auto liability. 4. Umbrella/Excess Liability: Coverage will include and layer $1,000,000. In excess of Primary policies 1. Workers Compensation, Cov B; 2. Commercial General Liability— all coverages as listed; 3. Business Auto Liability. D. Insurance Requirements — Ten (10) days prior to the commencement of any Work under the Contract, a certificate of insurance shall be provided to the Indian River County Risk Manager for review and approval. The certificate shall provide that: (a) Indian River County (as Owner) be named as an additional insured on the commercial general liability, auto liability; (b) the Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary; and (c) Indian River County (as Owner) will be given thirty (30) days' notice prior to cancellation or modification of any required insurance and such notice shall be in writing by registered mail, return receipt requested and addressed to the Indian River County Risk Manager. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all subcontractors comply with all insurance requirements of this Contract. E- All coverage shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of Work until date of final payment. F. All insurers must be authorized to do business in Florida and have a Best Key Rating of A- VIII. G. The insurance companies selected shall send written verification to the Indian River County Risk Manager that they will provide 30 days prior written notice to the Indian River County Purchasing Division of its intent to cancel or modify any required policies of insurance. SC 5.05 Delete existing paragraph 5.05 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -5.06 Delete existing paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -5.07 Delete existing paragraph 5.07 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following. A. All insurance policies provided by the Contractor shall contain provisions to the effect that the insurer waives all partners, shts f em subrogation agents, consultants and subcontnst any of the insured, ractors of each and any of insured, (and the officers, directors, pa p Y them) Owner and the Engineer. SC -5.08 Delete existing paragraph 5.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -5.09 Delete existing paragraph 5.09 of the General Conditions in its entirety. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC 6.01 B Delete paragraph 6.01 B of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace with the following: 6.01 B The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be assigned to, and in attendance at, the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall be reasonabContractor or anyctory to the Owner. So ng as the relatedentity, the uperiintende t shall notbel ntendent remains employed by replaced 00800-7 or nary without the Owner's prise tithe Cont actor, and ommunicat onsunder rgiven toithe super ntendent rcumstances. The superintendent shall repre shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. SC -6.026 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 6.026, of the General Conditions which are to read as follows: C. Regular working hours are defined as 8 hours per day, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, between the hours of 7:00 AM and 7:00 PM. Requests to work other than regular working hours shall be submitted to Engineer not less than 48 hours prior to any proposed weekend work or scheduled extended workweeks. Occasional unscheduled overtime on weekdays maybe permitted provided two hours notice is given to Engineer. D. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and/or inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours stipulated in Article SC -6.02C. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the Contractor's monthly payment request or deducted from the retainage prior to release of final payment. Overtime costs for the Owner's personnel shall be based on the individual's current overtime wage rate. Overtime costs for personnel employed by the Engineer or Owner's independent testing laboratory shall be calculated in accordance with the terms of their respective contracts with the Owner. SC 6.04A.1 Add the following sentence immediately after the existing text in paragraph 6.04 A.1 of the General Conditions: Additionally, any and all changes to the Project's critical path must be reflected in each Project schedule. SC -6.04.A.3 Add the following paragraph immediately after paragraph GC -6.04.A.2 of the General Conditions: Contractor shall give Owner full information in advance as to its plans for performing each part of the Work. If at any time -during the progress of Work, Contractor's actual progress is inadequate to meets the requirements of the Contract, Owner may, but is not obligated to, so notify Contractor. In such event, Contractor acknowledges and agrees that Contractor shall implement some or all of the following remedial actions at the sole cost and expense of Contractor: (a) Increase manpower in such quantities and crafts as necessary to eliminate the backlog of Work; (b) Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing to eliminate the backlog of Work; or (c) Reschedule the Work in conformance with the specification requirements. Neither such notice by Owner nor Owner's failure to issue such notice shall relieve Contractor of its obligation to achieve the quality of Work and rate of progress required by the Contract. Failure of Contractor to implement some or all of the remedial actions may be grounds for determination by Owner that Contractor is not prosecuting its Workwith such diligence as will assure completion within times specified. Upon such determination, Owner may terminate Contractor's right to proceed with the performance of the Contract, or any separable part thereof, in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Contract. SC -6.06A Delete Paragraph 6.06A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: it A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, (including those who are to furnish the principal items of materials or equipment), whether initially or 00800-8 as a substitute, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Acceptance of any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization by Owner shall not constitute a waiver of any right of Owner to reject defective Work. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. SC -6.06B Delete Paragraph 6.06B of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -6.08 Delete Paragraph 6.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: ALL PERMIT, IMPACT, OR INSPECTION FEES APPLICABLE AT THE TIME OF OPENING OF BIDS THAT ARE PAYABLE TO INDIAN RIVER COUNTY IN CONNECTION WITH THE WORK ON THIS COUNTY PROJECT WILL BE PAID BY INDIAN RIVER COUNTY. Contractor acknowledges that the foregoing items are governed by the provisions of Florida Statutes section 218.80, Public Bid Disclosure Act. Further, Contractor shall pay the applicable business tax and obtain a business tax receipt from the Indian River County Tax Collector. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all applicable construction permits. Owner shall reimburse Contractor for the cost of such permits on the basis of actual cost. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. As set forth in the Contract Documents, re -inspection fees are payable solely by Contractor. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent services to the Work. Owner has obtained the General Water Permits from Florida Department of Environmental Protection and such permits are included in the Contract Documents in Section 00901. Owner has made application for the Florida Department of Transportation Utilities Permit, Indian River Farms Water Control District Rangline Canal and A-2 Canal Utilities Construction Permit, and Indian River County Utilities Right- of-way Permit. Any permits issued after issuance of bid documents and prior to bid opening will be provided as an Addendum. The selected Contractor shall obtain Florida Department of Environmental Protection NPDES Permit and Indian River County dewatering permit, if such permits are required. Contractor acknowledges that the foregoing items are governed by the provisions of Florida Statutes section 218.80 (2006), Public Bid Disclosure Act. SC 6.11 A.3: Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 9 of paragraph 6.11 A.3 of the General Conditions. SC 6.19A: Delete Paragraph 6.19A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner for one (1) y mr from the date of Final Completion that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective; provided, however, that manufacturer equipment warranties may be of a longer duration. SC -20: Delete Paragraph 6.20 in its entirety and replace with the following: INDEMNIFICATION The successful proposer shall indemnify and save harmless Indian River County, its commissioners, officers, employees and agents from and against all claims, suits, actions, damages, causes, or action or judgments (collectively "claims") arising out of or relating to any negligence, intentional t` wrongdoing, breach of applicable law or breach of the resulting agreement, and from and against all I costs, attorney's fees, expenses, and other liabilities incurred in the defense of any such claim. Nothing herein shall be deemed to affect the rights, privileges, and immunities of the County as set forth in Florida Statute Section 768.28. In any and all claims against the County or any of its agents or employees, by any employee of the contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under the previous paragraph shall not be limitedthein any way as to the amount contractor or any subcontractor runder Wo kee of n's Compensationnpl on or benefits or payable by or fActs, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. SC -6.21 E Delete paragraph 6.21 E of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance criteria or design criteria required by or contained in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC -8.02 Delete paragraph 8.02 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following If Owner terminates the employment of Engineer, Owner may appoint another engineer whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. SC -8.04 Delete paragraph 8.04 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: Payments under this contract are governed by the Local Government Prompt Payment Act, Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq., SC -8.06 Delete paragraph 8.06 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -8.11 Delete paragraph 8.11 of the General Conditions in its entirety. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION SC 9.02 Delete the first sentence of paragraph 9.03A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction pr Engineer-deemshas been maderand the quality -of the various aspects of Contin order to observe as an experienced dractorl qualified Engineer Work. progress that SC -9.03A Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph 9.03A of the General Conditions (� which is to read as follows: 00800-10 ( B. Engineer will furnish a part-time Resident Project Representative. Contractor is responsible to give 24-hour notice on all required inspections so that the Resident Project Representative may be present. SC 9.04 A Delete the third sentence of paragraph 9.04A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: However, if Contractor claims entitlement to additional time or money as a result of the Field Order, such entitlement is conditioned upon obtaining a Change Order authorized and executed by Owner after timely making a Claim as provided in the Contract Documents. SC 9.08-A: Delete the second sentence of 9.08A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: Except for: (a) Claims for differing subsurface or physical conditions governed by paragraph 4.03; and (b) claims for time extensions governed by paragraph 12.03, all matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due, relating to the acceptability of the Work and the interpretation of the requirements of the contract documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 15 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 15 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later; provided, however, the Owner shall make all final determination of such matters. SC 9.08-C Delete paragraph 9.08-C of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 9.08-D Delete paragraph 9.08-D of the General Conditions in its entirety ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS SC 10.03 A.3 Delete subparagraph 10.03.A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 10.05.A Delete paragraph 10.05.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. All Claims shall initially be referred to the Engineer for decision. SC 10.05.6 Delete paragraph 10.05.6 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: Except for: (a) Claims for differing subsurface or physical conditions governed by paragraph 4.03; and (b) claims for time extensions governed by paragraph 12.03, Claims by either party shall be initiated within 15 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 15 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later, by written notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with supporting data to the Engineer and the other party by written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, dispute, or other matter delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.01.6. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.02.13. No claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment hereunder (� shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under this Contract. 00800-11 SC 10.05 C Delete paragraph 10.05C of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 10.05 D and E Delete paragraphs 10.05.D and E of the General Conditions in their entirety ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK SC -11.02A Delete paragraph 11.02.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums as may be acceptable to OWNER. Delete paragraphs 11.0213 through D of the General Conditions in their entirety. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES SC12.01 C Delete 15 percent" in line 2 of paragraph 12.01 C.2.a of the General Conditions and replace with "10 percent". SC12.01 C Delete "15 percent" in line 6 of paragraph 12.01 C.2.c of the General Conditions and replace with 10 percent". 12.03A and B Delete paragraphs 12.03.A and 12.0313 of the General Conditions in their entirety and replace with the following: A. Where Contractor is delayed or prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if M a Claim is made therefore as provided in paragraph 12.02.A and (2) Contractor provides evidence that the delay impacted the critical path of the Project. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. The Contractor must request the extension of time in writing and must provide the following information within the time periods stated hereafter. Failure to submit such information and in compliance with the time requirements hereinafter stated, shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor and a denial of the claim for extension of time: 1. Nature of the delay or change in the Work; 2. Dates of commencement and cessation of the delay or change in the Work; 3. Activities on the current progress schedule affected by the delay or change in the Work; 4. Identification and demonstration that the delay or change in Work affects the critical path; 5. Identification of the source of delay or change in the Work; 6. Anticipated extent of the delay or change in the Work; and 7. Recommended action to minimize the delay. B. Contractor hereby affirms that the extension of time granted herein is the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy. Apart from extension of time, no payment or claim for damages shall be made to the Contractor as compensation for damages for any delays or hindrances from any cause whatsoever in the progress of the Work whether such delay is avoidable or unavoidable. < < SC 12.03C Delete paragraph 12.03.0 of the General Conditions in its entirety. 00800-12 SC 12.03D Delete paragraph 12.03D of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with ( the following: In no event shall Owner, Engineer, or the Related Entities of either of them be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor,soplother person organization, surety for or employee or agent of any of themfor claim, loss, damages of or any nate whatsoever arising out of or resulting from delays. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK SC 13.04C Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 10 of paragraph 13.04.0 of the General Conditions. SC 13.06A Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 9 of paragraph 13.06.A of the General Conditions. SC13.07A Add the following sentence at the beginning of paragraph 13.07.A of the General Conditions: The Owner and Contractor agree that a warranty inspection shall be scheduled no later than eleven (11) months after final payment under this Contract so that the Owner and the Contractor may inspect and otherwise examine the Work prior to the expiration of the Public Construction Bond SC 13.07E Delete paragraph 13.07E of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: Contractor's obligations under this paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or any way to limit the Contractor's continued liability for defective Work, including latent defects. SC 13.08A TWO changes: 1. Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 8 of paragraph 13.08.A of the General Conditions. 2. Delete the phrase "(such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness)" in lines 10 and 11 of paragraph 13.08.A of the General Conditions. 13.09C Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 4 of paragraph 13.09.0 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION SC -14.02A.1 Delete the first sentence of paragraph 14.02.A.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: On or before the tenth (10`h) day of each month, the Contractor shall submit completed partial progress payment requests to the Engineer, as set forth herein. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application for Payment and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Such supporting documents shall include but not be limited to, the required Contractor's certification; retainage as set forth in the Agreement; ( and a monthly dated CPM schedule for the Project. The Contractor shall make the following ( certification (Affidavit) on each Application for Payment: "I hereby certify that the labor and materials 00800-13 listed on this Application for Payment have been used in the construction of this Work and payment i received from the last request for payment has been used to make payments to all subcontractors, laborers, material, men and suppliers except as listed below: "All payments by Indian River County as Owner shall be made in accordance with the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. SC -14.02A.3 Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 14.02A.3 of the General Conditions, which is to read as follows: 4. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof to Owner and Engineer that payment received from Owner for materials and equipment not incorporated into the Work and suitably stored, has in fact been paid to the respective supplier(s) within ten (10) days of Contractor's receipt of payment from Owner. Failure to provide such evidence of payment shall result in the withdrawal of previous approval(s) and removal of the cost of related materials and and shall be deemed a default under the' Contract ment m the next submitted Application for Payment, SC -14.02C.1 Delete paragraph 14.02.0 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: All payments by Indian River County as Owner shall be made in accordance with the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. SC-14.02D.1.d Delete paragraph 14.02D.1.d of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: du Oated i has actual knowledge of the occurrence paragraphs 14 02.B 5 a through 14 02 B 5 or -Probable or paragraphrrence 15 02.Af any of the events e p SC -14.02D.2 Delete paragraph 14.02D.2 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner shall provide notice to Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. and pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. Owner shall pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. SC -14.03A. Add the following sentences to the end of the existing paragraph 14.03A of the General Conditions as follows: No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that Contractor has good title to all materials and supplies used by Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. SC -14.04C. Delete paragraph 14.04C of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion that shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. In accordance with the provisions of Florida Statutes section 208.735(7) (a) (2005), upon receipt of the 00800-14 � tentative certificate of Substantial Completion from Engineer, the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor shall conduct a walk-through inspection of the Project to document a list of any items required to render the Work on the Project complete, satisfactory, and acceptable under this Agreement (herein the "Statutory List"). The Statutory List shall be reduced to writing and circulated among the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor by the Owner or the Engineer within 30 calendar days after substantial completion. The Owner and Contractor acknowledge and agree that: 1) the failure to include any corrective work, or pending items that are not yet completed, on the Statutory List does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all of the Work under this Agreement; 2) upon completion of all items on the Statutory List, the Contractor may submit a pay request for all remaining retainage except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement; and 3) any and all items that require correction under this Agreement and that are identified after the preparation of the Statutory List remain the obligation of the Contractor to complete to the Owner's satisfaction under this Agreement. After receipt of the Statutory List by the Contractor, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it will diligently proceed to complete all items on the Statutory List and schedule a final walk-through in anticipation of final completion on the Project. SC 14.04D Delete paragraph 14.04D of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, HVAC, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. SC14.07A.3 Delete paragraph 14.07A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety. C( SC -14.076.1 Delete paragraph 14.076.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: 1. If, on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will indicate, within twenty days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, in writing Engineer's recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. and replace with he following: shall b 07.C.1 Delete per oraph Conttrrractor accordingtto the entirety call Gove nme Government Prompt Payment Act, shall be made by Own Florida Statutes section 218. et.seq. SC 14.08 Delete paragraph 14.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 14.09 Delete paragraph 14.09 of the General Conditions in its entirety. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION SC -15.02.A.1 Delete subparagraph 15.02.A.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace C( with the following: 00800-15 I, 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; SC -15.02.A.4 Delete subparagraph 15.02.A.4 of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace with the following: 4. Contractor's violation of any material provisions of the Contract Documents. SC 15.02.A.5 and 6: Add the following new subparagraphs at the end of paragraph GC -15.02.A 5. Failure of Contractor to make proper payments to Subcontractors for labor, services, materials or equipment in connection with the Work; 6. If Contractor abandons the Work, or assigns Contract or any part thereof, without the previous written consent of Owner, otherwise than in accordance with the Contract Documents. SC -15.02.0 Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 7 of paragraph 15.02.0 of the General Conditions. SC 15.02.G Add the following new paragralah immediately following paragraph 15.02.F of the General Conditions: G. If, after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause asset forth in paragraph 15.02, it is determined that the Contractor had not failed to fulfill its contractual obligations, the termination under paragraph 15.02 shall be deemed to have been for the convenience of the Owner. In such event, adjustment of the contract price shall be made as provided in paragraph 15.03. SC -15.03.A.3 Delete subparagraph 15.03.A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION SC -16.01 A Delete the paragraph 16.01 A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Prior to the filing of any suitor other legal proceedings, the parties shall endeavor to resolve claim disputes or other matters in question by mediation. Mediation shall be initiated by any party by serving a written request for same on the other party. The parties shall, by mutual agreement, select a circuit court mediator as certified by the Supreme Court of Florida within 15 days of the date of the request for mediation. If the parties cannot agree on the selection of a circuit court mediator as certified by the Supreme Court of Florida, then the Owner shall select the mediator, who shall be a circuit court mediator as certified by the Supreme Court of Florida. The mediator's fee shall be paid in equal shares by Owner and Contractor. SC 16.01.C. Delete paragraph 16.01 C of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following C. Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain the progress schedule during the dispute resolution proceedings, unless otherwise agreed by Contractor and Owner in writing. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 00800-16 SC 17.01 A Delete paragraph 17.01 A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following Notices: Any notice, request, demand, consent, approval, or other communication required or permitted by this Agreement shall be given or made in writing and shall be served, as elected by the party giving such notice, by any of the following methods: (a) Hand delivery to the other party; (b) Delivery by commercial overnight courier service; or (c) Mailed by registered or certified mail (postage prepaid), return receipt requested at the addresses of the parties shown in the Agreement. Notices shall be effective when received at the address as specified above. Facsimile transmission is acceptable notice effective when received, provided, however, that facsimile transmissions received (i.e., printed) after 5:00 p.m. or on weekends or holidays, will be deemed received on the next day that is not a weekend day or a holiday. The original of the notice must additionally be mailed. Either party may a cordanceawth the provisions of this paoses of raraparagraph, by written notice to the other party given in SC 17.07 —17.14 Add the following new ad agrfollows: mediately after paragraph 17.06 of the General Conditions which is to b 17.07. Utilities. The Contractor shall, at its expense, arrange for, develop, and maintain all utilities in Work areas to meet the requirements of the Contract. Such utilities shall be furnished by Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, and shall include, but not be limited to the following: public telephone service for the Contractor's use; construction power as required at each point of construction; and water as required throughout the construction. Prior to final acceptance of the Work the Contractor shall, at its expense, satisfactorily remove and dispose of all temporary utilities developed to meet the requirements of the Contract. The Owner will assume the utility costs directly related to its usage of areas in which it has take Beneficial Occupancy. 17.08. Draina e. The Contractor shall so conduct all tiits es.operations Existing funlct oin the ning storm sewers, ork in such condition that adequate drainage will be in effect a gutters, ditches, and other run-off shall not be obstructed. 17.09. Fire Hydrants. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the highway shall be kept accessible to fire apparatus at all times and no material or obstruction shall be placed within fifteen feet (15') of any such hydrant. 17.10. Protection of Structures. Heavy equipment shall not be operated close enough to pipe headwalls or other structures to cause their displacement. 17.11. EgIcincL On all Work which includes fencing and where the Engineer determines it to be necessary for maintaining the security of livestock or adjacent property, or for protection of pedestrians who are likely to gain access to the Work from adjacent property, the Contractor shall erect an appropriate temporary security fence as a first order of business. Temporary fencing shall be installed at temporary construction easement areas on all commercial and residential properties appropriate to secure the Work protect persons domestic ts. At all times, t he Contractor shall conduct the under secure temporary ecgSPerrmanent fencing shall be addressed as required by the Plans and Specifications. 17.12. Record Drawings. The Contractor shall keep one record copy of all Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, and Shop Drawings at the sire in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. These items shall be available to the Engineer and shall be delivered to the Engineer for the Owner. Record Drawings shall be submitted (� with each pay request. Final Acceptance of the Work will be withheld until the approval of such 00800-17 documents is made by the Owner. 17.13. Proaress Videotaaes. Contractor shall deliver to the Owner both prior to commencing the Project and before receipt of Final Payment a DVD type color videotape of the Project showing the site before and umbers as those areas of the completed.ork has been Contactor are taped. The costofthe videotaping ison the le included the station nu in the bid submitted by the Contractor. 17.14. Commercial Activities. Contractor shall not establish any commercial activity or issue concessions or permits of any Kind to third parties for establishing commercial activities on land owned or controlled by Owner. Contractor shall not allow its employees to engage in any commercial activities on the Project site. PART II — FORMS TO BE USED DURING PROJECT CONSTRUCTION (Pages 20 through 37) NOTICE OF AWARD — (Sample) NOTICE TO PROCEED FIELD ORDER WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE CHANGE ORDER APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION FINAL RELEASE OF LIEN DUTIES RESPONSIBILITIES AND LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE 00800-18 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 00800-19 (SAMPLE) NOTICE OF AWARD Reference: Indian River County Bid No. 2013013 fProiect Name) West Rg Tonal WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Co Dear I am pleased to inform you that on (DATE), the Board of County Commissioners awarded the above referenced project to your company. Bond for theabove areferenced Section repoject 0l�Statutes, you are required to execute a Public Constructi The following documents are required before the applicable County department can issue a "Notice to Proceed" letter: 1. Public Construction Bond in the amount of 100% of the contract amount. 2. Certificate of Insurance, must name Indian River County as an additional insured and must provide for a 30 day Notice of Cancellation. 3. WW_ 4. Two Signed Copies of Enclosed Agreement Please execute both copies of the enclosed Agreement and return them together with the required Bond, W-9, and Certificate of Insurance to this office at the address provided below no I later than Sincerely, Jerry Davis, Purchasing Manager 00800-20 Indian River County (� Purchasing Division 1801 27`h Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 Phone (772) 226-1416 purchasing@ircgov.com NOTICE TO PROCEED DATE: IM PROJECT: Project Name: Fax (772) 770-5140 TTndian River County You are hereby notified to commence WORK in accordance with the agreement dated , on or after . You are to complete the WORK within consecutive calendar days from this date. The date of completion of all work is, therefore, the INDIAN RIVER COUNTY Name Title ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of above NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged by Name this day of 20 by Signature Pre -Construction Checklist Typed Name and Title 00800-21 Recorded Insurance �[ Payment and Performance Bond �[ Executed Agreement Board Approval Dated 00800-21 FIELD ORDER PROJECT: WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN FIELD ORDER NO.: OWNER: Indian River County TO: DATE: CONTRACT: OWNER'S PROJECT NO.: UCP 4039 CONTRACT DATE: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This Field Order is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order minor changes in the work and/or memorialize trade-off agreements. Both parties hereby agree that the work described by this Field Order is to be accomplished without change in Contract Sum, Contract Time, and/or claims for other costs. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DESCRIPTION: (Here insert a written description of the interpretation, change or agreement.) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FIELD ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: BY: BY: DATES: DATE: 114 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 00800-23 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE No. PROJECT:WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN DATE OF ISSUANCE: OWNER: Indian River County 1800 27th Street Vero Beach Florida 32960 (Name, Address) CONTRACTOR: OWNER's Project No.: ENGINEER: Michael C. Hotchkiss, P.E. CONTRACT FOR: ENGINEER's Project No.: UCP 4067 You are directed to proceed with the following change(s): Description: Purpose of Work Directive Change: Attachment(s) (list documents supporting change): If a claim is made that the above change(s) have affected Contract Price or Contract Time, any claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one of the following methods of determining the effect of the change(s). Method of determining change in Contract Price: Time: [ ] Time and Materials [ ] [ ] Unit Prices [ ] Cost plus fixed fee Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price $ . If the change involves an increase, the estimated exceed amount is not to be exceeded without further authorization. Method of determining change in Contract Contractor's records [ ] Engineer's records [ ] Other Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Time days. If the change involves an increase, the estimated time is not to be without further authorization. Once the Work covered by the directive is completed or final cost and time determined, Contractor should submit documentation for inclusion in a change Order. THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACT PRICE OR THE CONTRACT TIME. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHOULD BE CONSIDERED PROMPTLY. RECOM ENDED: APPROVED: M Engineer Date: la Date: 00800-24 Owner WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed for use in situations involving changes in the Work which, if not processed expeditiously, might delay the Project. These changes are often initiated in the field and may affect the Contract Price or the Contract Times. This is not a Change Order, but only a directive to proceed with Work that may be included in a subsequent Change Order. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times a Field Order should be used. B. COMPLETING THE WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE FORM Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the items involved and attachments. Based on conversations between Engineer and Contractor, Engineer completes the following: METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT PRICE: Mark the method to be used in determining the final cost of Work involved and the estimated net effect on the Contract Price. If change involves an increase in the Contract Price and the estimated amount is approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the estimated price or Contractor may stop the changed Work when the estimates time is reached. If Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Price, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked "Not Applicable". Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner for authorization because Engineer alone does not have authority to authorize changes in Price or Times. Once authorized by Owner, a copy should be sent by Engineer to Contractor. Price and Times may only be changed by Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor with Engineer's recommendation. Paragraph 10.03.A.2 of the General Conditions requires that a Change Order be initiated and processed to cover any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed pursuant to this Work Change Directive. Once the Work covered by this directive is completed or final cost and times are determined, Contractor should submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order. THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACT PRICE OR CONTRACT TIMES. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHOULD BE CONSIDERED PROMPTLY. 00800-25 CHANGE ORDER PROJECT WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN DATE OF ISSUANCE OWNER Indian River County OWNER's Contract No CONTRACTOR EFFECTIVE DATE SBS Project No. 09-069 ENGINEER Michael C. Hotchkiss, P.E. You are directed to make the following changes in the Contract Documents: Description: Reason for change order: Ld t ortin chan e Attachments. ist ocumen s su CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME Original Contract Price Original Contract Times $ Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: Das or dates Net changes from previous Change Orders Net change from previous Change Orders No. to No. No. to No. $ days Contract Price prior to this Change Order Contract Time prior to this Change Order $ Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: Das or dates Net Increase (decrease) in this Change Order Net Increase in this Change Order $ days Contract Price with all approved Change Contract Time with all approved Change Orders Orders $ Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: Das or dates RECOMMENDED: APPROVED: By: By: Engineer (Authorized Signature) Owner (Authorized Signature) Date: Date: ACCEPTED. By: Contractor (Authorized Signature) Date: EJCDC No. C-700 (2002 Edition) Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 00800-26 �( CHANGE ORDER INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed to provide a uniform format for handling contract changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Change Directive must be incorporated into a subsequent Change Order if they affect Price or Times. Changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times should be promptly covered by a Change Order. The practice of accumulating Change Orders to reduce the administrative burden may lead to unnecessary disputes. If Milestones have been listed in the Agreement, any effect of a Change Order thereon should be addressed. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times, a Field Order should be used. B. COMPLETING THE CHANGE ORDER FORM ((Engineer normally initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner or Contractor for approval, depending on whether the Change Order is a true order to the Contractor or the formalization of a negotiated agreement for a previously performed change. After approval by one contracting party, all copies should be sent to the other party for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies after approval by both parties. If a change only applies to price or to times, cross out the part of the tabulation that does not apply. 00800-27 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. To: Indian River Count (OWNER) From: (CONTRACTOR) Contract: Project WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN OWNER's Contract No. ENGINEER's Project No. UCP 4067 For Work accomplished through the date of: Original Contract Price: 2. Net change by Change Orders and Written Amendments (+ or 3. Current Contract Price (1 plus 2): 4. Total completed and stored to date 5. Retainage (per Agreement): % of completed Work: $ % of stored material: $ Total Retainage: 6. Total completed and stored to date less retainage (4 minus 5) 7. Less previous Application for Payments: 8. DUE THIS APPLICATION (6 MINUS 7): $ Accompanying Documentation: CONTRACTOR'S Certification: The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (1) title to all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all Liens, security interests and encumbrances; (2) all Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and not defective; and (3) the labor and materials listed on this Application for Payment have been used in the construction of this Work and payment received from the last progress payment has been used to make payments to all subcontractors, laborers, material, men and suppliers except as listed below: " Dated LIM State of County of Subscribed and sworn to before me this _ day of , Notary Public My Commission expires: Payment of the above AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION is recommended. Dated CONTRACTOR ENGINEER By: EJCDC No. C -700-E (2002 Edition) Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America and the Construction Specification Institute. 00800-28 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION The sample form of Schedule of Values is intended as a guide only. Many projects require a more extensive form with space for numerous items, descriptions of Change Orders, identification of variable quantity adjustments, summary of materials and equipment stored at the site and other information. It is expected that a separate form will be developed by Engineer and Contractor at the time Contractor's schedule of Values is finalized. Note also that the format for retainage must be changed if the Contract permits (or the law provides), and Contractor elects to deposit securities in lieu of retainage. Refer to Article 14 of the General Conditions for provisions concerning payments to Contractor. B. COMPLETING THE FORM The Schedule of Values, submitted and approved as provided in paragraphs 2.05.13.3 and 2.07 of the General Conditions should be reproduced as appropriate in the space indicated on the Application for Payment form. Note that the cost of materials and equipment is often listed separately from the cost of installation. Also, note that each Unit Price is deemed to include Contractor's overhead and profit. All Change Orders affecting the Contract Price should be identified and included in the Schedule of Values as required for progress payments. The form is suitable for use in the Final Application for Payment as well as for Progress Payments; however, the required accompanying documentation is usually more extensive for final payment. All accompanying documentation should be identified in the space provided on the form. C. LEGAL REVIEW All accompanying documentation of a legal nature, such as Lien Waivers, should be reviews by an attorney, and Engineer should so advise Owner. 00800-29 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN DATE OF ISSUANCE OWNER Indian River County Board of County Commissioners OWNER's Contract No. CONTRACTOR Project No. UCP 4067 ENGINEER Michael C. Hotchkiss, P.E. This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to the following specified parts thereof: To: Indian River County OWNER And To CONTRACTOR The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially complete in accordance with the contract Documents on DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all- inclusive, and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the contract Documents. The items in the tentative list shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR within Days of the above date of Substantial Completion. EJCDC No. C-700 (2002 Edition) Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 00800-30 From the date of Substantial Completion, the responsibilities between OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties and guarantees shall be as follows: RESPONSIBILITIES: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: [For items to be attached see definition of Substantial Completion as supplemented and other specifically noted conditions precedent to achieving Substantial Completion as required by Contract Documents.] This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Executed by ENGINEER on ENGINEER By: (Authorized Signature) CONTRACTOR accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on , 20_ CONTRACTOR LM OWNER accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on , 20_ OWNER (Authorized Signature) 00800-31 FINAL RELEASE OF LIEN KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (Company Name) The acceptance by the CONTRACTOR of final payment shall be and shall operate as a release to the OWNER from all claims and all liability to the CONTRACTOR other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the CONTRACTOR for all things done or furnished in connection with the work under this Contract and for every act and neglect of the OWNER and others relating to or arising out of the work. for all in consideration of dollars ($ (Total Amount of Contract) paid to by receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, (Me/Us) do hereby release and quit claim to the OWNER, its successors (I/We) or assigns, all liens, lien rights, claims or demands of any kind whatsoever now have or might have against the property, building, and/ or (I/We) for any incidental expense for the construction of (Project Number) WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN (Project Name) thereon or in otherwise improving said property situated as above described. IN WITNESS WHEREOF I have hereunto set my hand and seal this day of 20_ M WITNESS: Title (SEAL) 00800-32 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 00800-33 DUTIES, OF RESPONSIBILITIES PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE AUTHORITY NTATIVE GENERAL Resident Project Representative is ENGINEER'S Agent, will act as directed by and under the supervision of ENGINEER, and will confer with ENGINEER regarding his actions. Resident Project Representative's dealings in matters pertaining to the on-site Work shall in general be only with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR, and dealings with Subcontractors shall only be through or with thu h fknowledge deed ONTRAby TOR Written communication with OWNER will be only g or 2. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES Resident Project Representative will: 1. Schedules: Review he progress schedule of oDtt submissions and schedule ofvalues prepared by CONTRACTOR and consult ENGINEER concerning their acceptability. 2. Conferences: Attend preconstruction conferend in ces. Arrange a schedule of progress and meetings and other job to conferences in as require equi eAttend meetings, ation Itand Nmaintain R and notify those expected circulate copies of minutes thereof. 3. Liaison: 4. Serve as ENGINEER'S liaison with CONTRACTOR, working principally through CONTRACTOR'S superintendent and assist him in understanding the intent of the ,( Contract Documents. Assist ENGINEER in serving as OWNER'S liaison with CONTRACTOR when CONTRACTOR'S operations affect OWNER'S on-site operations. 5. As requested by ENGINEER, assist in obtaining from OWNER additional details or information, when required at the job site for proper execution of the Work. 6. Shop Drawings and Samples: a. Receive and record date of receipt of Shop Drawings and samples, receive samples which are furnished at the site by CONTRACTOR, and notify ENGINEER of their availability for examination. b. Advise ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR or his superintendent immediately of the commencement of any Work requiring a Shop Drawing or sample submission if the submission has not been approved by the ENGINEER. 7. Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests: a. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist ENGINEER in the Contract Documents if that Work completed eding Workn willaccordance form with the Contract Docume Documents. b. Report to ENGINEER whenever he believes that any Work is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective or does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspections, tests or approval required to be made or has been damaged prior to final payment; and advise ENGINEER should buncover d for olieves bservation, or requork ires special testing, be corrected or rejected spe ion should b or approval. 00800-34 C. Verify that tests, equipment and systems startups and operating and maintenance instructions are conducted as required by the Contract Documents and in presence of the required personnel, and that CONTRACTOR maintains adequate records thereof; observe, record and report to ENGINEER appropriate details relative to the test procedures and startups. d. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Project, record the outcome of these inspections and report to ENGINEER. 8. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Transmit to CONTRACTOR engineer's clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents. 9. Modifications: Consider and evaluate CONTRACTOR'S suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report them with recommendations to ENGINEER. 10. Records: a. Maintain at the job site orderly files for correspondence, reports of job conferences, Shop Drawings and samples submissions, reproductions of original Contract Documents including all Addenda, change orders, field orders, additional Drawings issued subsequent to the execution of the Contract, ENGINEER'S clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents, progress reports, and other Project related documents. b. Keep a diary or log book, recording hours on the job site, weather conditions, data relative to questions of extras or deductions, list of visiting officials and representatives of manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers and distributors, daily activities, decisions, observations in general and specific observations in more detail as the case of observing test procedures. Send copies to ENGINEER. C. Record names, addresses and telephone numbers of all contractors, Subcontractors and major suppliers of materials and equipment. 11. Reports: a. Furnish ENGINEER periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and CONTRACTOR'S compliance with the approved progress schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing submissions. b. Consult with ENGINEER in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the Work. C. Report immediately to ENGINEER upon the occurrence of any accident. 12. Payment Requisitions: Review applications for payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward them with recommendations to ENGINEER, noting particularly their relation to the schedule of values, Work completed and materials and equipment delivered at the site but not incorporated in the Work. 13. Certificates, Maintenance and Operation Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that certificates, maintenance and operation manuals and other data required to be assembled and furnished by CONTRACTOR are applicable to the items actually installed; and deliver this material to ENGINEER for his review and forwarding to OWNER prior to final acceptance of the Work. 00800-35 14. Completion: a. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit to CONTRACTOR a list of observed items requiring completion or correction. b. Conduct final inspection in the company of ENGINEER, OWNER and CONTRACTOR and prepare a final list of items to be completed or corrected. C. Verify that all items on final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to ENGINEER concerning acceptance. C. LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY Except upon written instructions of ENGINEER, Resident Project Representative: 1. Shall not authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or approve any substitute materials or equipment. 2. Shall not exceed limitations on ENGINEER'S authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Shall not undertake any of the responsibilities of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or CONTRACTOR'S superintendent, or expedite the Work. 4. Shall not advise on or issue directions relative to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction unless such is specifically called for in the Contract Documents. 5. Shall not advise on or issue directions as to safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 6. Shall not authorize OWNER to occupy the Project in whole or in part. 7. Shall not participate in specialized field or laboratory tests. *END OF SECTION* 00800-36 SECTION 01005 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Owners Status and Intent: Indian River County Board of County Commissioners (Owner) is a political subdivision of the State of Florida and is a Tax Exempt Institution. As such, it is exempt from the payment of Sales and Use Tax on purchases of tangible property, materials, equipment, etc., (materials) necessary for the performance of Work under construction contracts, provided Owner determines it is to its best interest to do so and provided the purchase of such materials are handled in the manner hereinafter described. B. Summary: The Owner reserves the option to purchase certain materials necessary for the performance of the Contract, and thereby save the amount of the sales tax thereon by virtue of the Owner's status as a Tax Exempt Institution. C. All monies which would have been payable as taxes, if not for Owner direct purchase ( under these procedures, will be solely for the benefit of the Owner. The Owner's direct purchase of materials will not minimize or conflict with the Contractor's responsibility for the scheduling, installation, coordination, storage, protection, warranty, etc. of the materials as described herein and in the Contract Documents. D. Base Bid: The Base Bid (and all Alternate Bids) submitted on the bid form SHALL INCLUDE the COST of all required taxes, including sales and use tax. E. Designated Materials: The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative of materials needed for the project corresponding with the bid items listed in section 00300. F For the purpose of these procedures, the Contractor will assign to Owner any rights the Contractor may have under quotes, contracts or commitments received from the particular vendor or supplier for the materials described in the requisition. Any materials purchased by Owner pursuant to these procedures shall be referred to as "County Purchased Materials," and the responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor relating to such County Purchased Materials shall be governed by the terms and conditions of these procedures, which shall take precedence over other conditions and terms of the Contract Documents where inconsistencies or conflicts exist. The invoiced amount of County Purchased Materials and applicable sales tax had the purchases not been tax exempt, once finalized through the Owner's Purchase Order 01005-1 and after confirmation of completed delivery and acceptance pursuant to this ( Procedure, will be deducted from the Contractor's Contract price via Change Order. he G. Administrative Costs: Any and all administrative the Owner shall be bcon deredContractor to be administering the purchase in the name included in the base bid for the Work. Noaddition in the purchase of n he contract amount because of the service provided by Contractor the name of the Owner. shall be fully H. The Contractor, notwithstanding this direct p County Purhase gchased Materials under responsible for all matters relating to the receiptof aration of shop drawings and these procedures, including, but not limited to, prep submittals, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents allnwarrant orders and guarantees manner, coordinating purchases, providing and g and acceptance of the goods at the required by the Contract Documents, inspection d materials due to the negligence of time of delivery, loss or damage to equipment the Contractor, and otherwise be responsible for were d s The Owner is such materials have been the case if the tax savings procedureere not responsible for payment only. The Contractor shallo rdi and otherprocurement en d delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading normally required by the Contractor for the matg, ria dl ng and for gernished. The n tractor shall ding, of materials provide all services required for the unloa through installation. The Contractor agrees toever nature indemnify from nonpayment and hold nt of goods eto (� from l' ers ari ang from the act onall claims of s of Cont actor. g supe I It is the County's intent to utilize open PurchaseOrders as concrete, steel reinfor elmentd , suppliers for the purchase of commodity items s etc. 1.02 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASING REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES A. For all materials included in Table 1 above, the Contractor shall prepare a requisition form, which shall, in detail, be acceptable to Owner, elect t d purchasespecifically dire tly if y the et The materials which Owner may, at its discretion, requisition form shall be complete when s on the re and requisition, the Contractor ll information u must provided. Along with the requisition, or on q provide: ephone and fax number and contact person for the 1. The name, address, tel material supplier; 2. Manufacturer or brand, model or specification number of the item; 3. Quantity needed; 01005-2 4. The price quoted by the supplier for the materials identified therein; 5. Any sales tax associated with such quote if it were not purchased by a tax exempt entity; 6. Shipping and handling cost, including associated insurance; 7. Delivery dates as established by the Contractor. B. After receipt of each requisition, the Owner's Representative will determine whether the Owner will directly purchase the materials described in the requisition, and communicate consent or decline to purchase the materials to the Contractor within 72 hours. If the Owner consents to purchase the materials, the Owner shall issue the original Purchase Order, and shall deliver the Purchase Order to the Contractor. Brevard County's Purchasing Division shall issue all Purchase Orders for County Purchased Materials. The Purchase Order shall require (1) that the supplier provide the required shipping, (2) that the supplier provide the required snipping and handling insurance, and that (3) delivery of the County Purchased Materials occur on the delivery dates provided by the Contractor with the requisition. C. The Contractor shall ensure that County Purchased Materials conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, and determine prior to incorporation into the Work, if such Materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the Material ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. As County Purchased Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and, if in conformance with the Purchase Order and the requirements of the Contract Documents, approve Owner's payment of the vendor's invoice for materials delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of County Purchased Material is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of an itemized delivery ticket, packing slip or invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made, together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the documentation to the Owner. D. If the Contractor discovers defective or non -conformities in County Purchased Material upon inspection, the Contractor shall not use such non -conforming or defective Materials in the Work and instead shall promptly notify the Owner in writing of the defective or non -conforming conditions and coordinate the repair or replacement of those Materials without any undue delay or interruption to the Project. All repair, maintenance or damage -repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection, the condition of which the Contractor either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible 01005-3 building corners, sidewalks, paved areas and location of all above ground structures within the plant or tlocation, site- ines and grades of all lines 4-inch in 2. Certified drawing showing the facilities diameter and larger buried and exteriors to a result of the work. This shall be at the valves, tanks, vaEngietc) installed all piping the same scale as the Eng anddrawing and submitted on reproducible Mylar. process Certified survey at the same scale as the Engineer's line drawings (e.g. 3. indicating lines, grades, elevations and piping, force main, duct banks etc) ' coordinates at each change of direction.Provide elevations of structure bottom, pipe invert(s) and rim elevations on all E. Topographical su100-feet shall 11-inch scale reproducible p otr2 foot contours. 2. Produced on national map accuracy standards for 1-inch =100-feet scale maps with 2 foot contour intervals computer enerated drawing files in AutoCAD 200 3. Contractor shall submit comp gon layers named to format on CD-R/RW disks. All entries shalllbe place e the AutoCAD file hall be the entity being mapped. All elevation in appropriate three dimensional format. A digital terrain model (DTM) in an AutoCAD file containing adequate three dimensional points and break lines to accurately model the surface shall be software.. The DTM file shall be compatible for use with softDe sk i M below. l Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.itrumentation and similar appropriate B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by ns means: 1 Site improvements a. Stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement. b. Utility slopes and invert elevations. 2. Batter boards for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations and floor levels. 4, Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades. C, From time to time, verify layouts by same methods. grades prior to construction of line work for all piping 4 inches in D. Establish all lines and g p rade. diameter and larger at 50 -feet increments and at defined breaks in g 1.07 RECORDS progresses. A., Maintain a complete, accurate tog of all control and survey work as it rog rk Update the project record drawings on a mont al condition for approval basis based on the oof monthlyed B. p request as during the month ending at the pay q progress payment requests. ._ -1 ...., —Ai iratl hllS. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SECTION 01052 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. established Applications for Payment to Engineer in accordanceAgreement with the schedule and Contractor. established by Conditions of the contract and B. The accepted Schedule of Values, Section 01370, shall be used as the basis for the CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. In other parts of the Construction Documents: 1, Agreement between Owner and Contractor 2, General Conditions of the Contract 3, Article 14 — Payments to Contractor and Completion B. Specified in Other Sections: in Section 01010. 3. Detailed list of enclosures 4. For stored products: a. Item number and identification b. Description of specific material B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. 1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Application for payment is required for progress payments B. Only one application will be acceptable in any one month 1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE Engineer at the time stipulated in the Agreement A. Submit Applications for Payment to B. Number: Five copies of each progress Application C. When Engineer finds the Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit the applications for payment to the Owner PART 2 — PRODUCTS SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED Abbreviations and acronyms used in Contract Documents to identify reference standards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes establish stricter standards. B, Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OR ORGANIZATIONS A. Obtain copies of reference standards direct frFomnpubli*ation c onrce, wh ne ded for Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 1221 Avenue of the Americas New York, NY 10020 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16`s Street, NW Washington, D.C., 20036 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1815 North Fort Myer Drive Arlington, VA 22209 AWPA American Wood -Preservers Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society 2501 NW 7" Street Miami, FL 33125 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 W. Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 CDA Copper Development Association 57"' Floor, Chrysler Building 405 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10017 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue Washington, D.C. 20036 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 180 North LaSalle Street, Suite 2110 MIEL Military Specification Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 MLSFA Metal Lath / Steel Framing Association 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 L Street, NW Washington, D.C. 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association 470 Atlantic Avenue PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 20 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 PS Product Standard U.S. Department of Commerce Washington, D.C. 20203 RCSHSB Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit Shake Bureau 515 116'h Avenue Bellevue, WA 98004 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 3812 St. Louis, MO 63122 SDI Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North Cleveland, OH 44107 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 111 East Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601 PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION (Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank) SECTION 01170 SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment with particular reference to the pumps and electric drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been completed, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall. be securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the foundations, and after conformation of all alignments, the sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, grout, or other materials necessary to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the Contractor. A 11 _—:—.o,,AA,-i r,. t,P. „t„mh or level must be proven exactly so. Perform all grinding relocations shall be included in the bid for the project and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 GREASE, OIL AND FUEL A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's supply of all required lubricants including grease and oil of type recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied under Divisions 11, 14, 15, and 16. 1.05 TOOLS A. Any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation and maintenance of any equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. B. Tools shall be furnished in heavy steel tool boxes complete with lock and duplicate keys. 1.06 POWER SUPPLY A. Unless otherwise specified, all motors 1/2 Hp and larger shall be designed for a power supply of 460 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz, and all motors 1/3 Hp and smaller shall be designed a ,,,o« o„r,r,ly of 1 go Vnits cinule nhnse_ 60 Hz. 1.09 PIPE MARKING A. Pipe marking is included in Division 9, but it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assist, as required by the Owner, in identifying pipe contents, direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe. 1.10 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall prepare a valve schedule for all valves required for the work showing a number, the location, type, function, and normal operating position, for each valve. The schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval not less than 30 days prior to start-up. B. The Contractor shall furnish tags for all valves required for the work. Valve tags shall be 2 -in diameter, 19 gauge, brass or plastic, with brass hooks suitable for attaching the tag to the valve operator. Tags shall be stamped or etched with the valve number and the information on the valve schedule coded in a system provided by the Owner. Submit two samples of the type of tag proposed and the manufacturer's standard color chart and letter styles to the Engineer for approval. C. The Contractor shall install valve tags on all valves required for the Work. XT�TVT7 T T XYrP A rPTnXTQ 1. 13 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, submit a Hurricane Preparedness Plan to the Engineer and the Owner for approval. The Plan shall describe in detail the necessary measures which the Contractor will perform, at no additional costs to the Owner, in case of a hurricane warning. Revise Plan as required by the Engineer and Owner. 1.14 WEATHER PROTECTION A. In the event of inclement weather, the Contractor shall protect the Work and materials from damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner, any portion of the Work or materials has been damaged by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced with new materials and Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1.15 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run-off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into the supplies and surface waters of the State. Control measures must be adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not1 be increased more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), 111 the .CtatP nr nthar rnntrnllintr hnriv_ in water need for nuhlic 1.17 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and prepare for connections to the existing wastewater treatment plant system as shown on the Drawings or where directed by the Owner. The cost for this work and for the actual connection to the existing wastewater treatment plant system shall be included in the bid for the project and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to expose as required, the existing pipes at the tie-in locations and, if necessary, any buried utilities in the immediate area of the tie-in that may affect the installation of new pipe as shown on the Drawings. Contractor is fully responsible for ordering any additional material, such as fittings and restrained pipe that may be needed to avoid existing buried utilities should such material not be shown on the Drawings or included in the Schedule of Prices. The Contractor may not schedule any tie-in activity until such additional material is on site and a specific detailed plan is approved by the Engineer in accordance with Section 01014. 1.18 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the fact that during excavation at the Project site, the possibility exists of the Contractor encountering various water, chemical, electrical, or other lines not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall exercise __+­__ n '. 1—f— -1 rinrinrt r vravntinn to lnentP and flnv ti1P.CP, line..0 Ml AC to avoid B. Accidents shall be reported immediately to the Engineer by messenger or phone. C. All accidents shall be documented by the Contractor and a fully detailed written report submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer after each accident. 1.22 TRAFFIC CONTROL A. The Contractor shall ensure that vehicular flow is maintained in a safe manner and shall adhere to all State and Local requirements for maintenance of traffic, safety precautions, and lighting. Should the Owner request the preparation and submittal of a traffic maintenance and/or safety plan, the Contractor will do so, at no additional cost to the Owner, within 21 days of receipt of request. 1.23 WORK ADJACENT TO UTILITY FACILITIES A. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to existing overhead and underground utility facilities in the area of the Work. The Contractor shall protect all existing utility transmission and distribution. facilities tbroughout the period of construction and shall notify the offices all utility companies at least 72 hours prior to the start of any construction. B. It is the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor to determine the exact location of all overhead and underground utility transmission and distribution facilities in the area of the VU -1, nr not tlk— ara in(liratarl nn tlh nrawinac B. The Contractor shall employ a disinfection method approved by the Engineer and Owner, and shall fully satisfy the Owner that adequate disinfection has been achieved prior to placing a facility on-line. C. The Contractor, in the presence of the Owner, will be responsible for the collection of all water samples. The samples shall be collected in accordance with best management processes in Chapter 17-550, 17-555 and 17-560, F.A.C. and submitted to a NELAC approved analytical laboratory for analyses of the required constituents. D. The cost of all disinfection work shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid and the Contractor shall pay for all bacteriological clearance tests. 1.27 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN A. Bid prices of equipment furnished under Divisions 11, 14, 1.5, and 16 shall include the cost of a competent field service technician of the Manufacturers of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved Manufacturer's operation and maintenance data as specified in Section 01730 shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be divided into two or more time periods as required by the installation program or as directed by the Engineer. C i than eight (8) full working hours) shall not be credited toward the specified durations. Training shall not be concurrent with on-going testing debugging or installation activities; but shall be a separate activity devoted exclusively to the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the Manufacturer's equipment. Training shall be performed by qualified representatives of each equipment Manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operation personnel. Training shall provide an overview of operations and maintenance requirements and shall include but not be limited to: 1. Description of unit and component parts, 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria, 3. Operating procedures, 4. Maintenance procedures, 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules, 6. Troubleshooting, and 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and in as a minimum. The operating and maintenance data to be provided in accordance with Specification Section 01730 shall be used as a basis for training. F. A certificate from the Manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the unit has been satisfactorily tested, is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit shall be submitted before start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The certificate -1-..,, A,,+o —A +;, ;, etnwt;nn Waq u;ven and names of operating personnel in SECTION 01172 PIPE PENETRATIONS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install pipe penetration assemblies as shown. This Section covers materials for the various pipe penetration configurations. Refer to drawings for details of assembly and for location. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers' literature, installation instructions, and where applicable, fire rating and certified test results of the various components on all items to be furnished in accordance with Section 01300. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE SLEEVES 2.03 SEALING MATERIALS A. Mechanical seals shall be modular, adjustable, bolted, mechanical type consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve. The seal shall be rated by the manufacturer for 40 -feet of head or 20 psig. Mechanical seals shall be Link -Seal, depending on pipe size, by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, MI or equal. B. Sealant shall be a two part foamed silicone elastomer by Dow Corning Co., Product No. 3-6548 silicone R.T.V.; 3M brand fire barrier products caulk C.P. 25 and 3M brand putty 303; or Flame -Safe fire stop systems Fig. No. FS -500 by Thomas & Betts Corp. Sealant bead configuration, depth and width shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Caulking for iron, steel and copper piping shall consist of braided oakum packing or fire retardant pliable material, Fig. 310 by Sealtite Co.; White Oakum W.S.-600 by American Manufacturing Co., or equal, followed by poured molten soft virgin lead. Minimum length of leadlsh twith end of sleeve. Coolwhichever or 6 -inch, Lead shall be flush lead shall be expanded with flua caulking iron to form a water seal. D. Caulking for PVC pipe shall meet all the requirements in Paragraph B above except that i—ri wnnl comnacted to form a watertight seal, shall be used in place of molten lead. SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with theeR ResidentProject Represengs ntative to schedule and administer pre -construction meeting , p progress meet specially called meetings throughout progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 3. Preside at meetings. 4, Record the minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions. 5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 15 working days after each meeting. a. To participants in the meeting. b. To Owner, Engineer, and other parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. __onfat;vPs of Contractors, Owner, Subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings 4. Contractor's Superintendent. 5. Major Subcontractors. 6. Major suppliers. 7. Utilities g. Others as appropriate. D. Suggested Agenda 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major Subcontractors and suppliers. b. Projected Construction Schedules. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project Coordination. a. Designation of responsible personnel. b. Contractor, Owner, Engineer, and Resident Project Representative responsibilities. 5. Procedures and processing of. a. Field decisions. b. Proposal requests. C. Submittals. d. Change Orders. e. Applications for Payment. A Adenuacv of distribution of Contract Documents. E. Suggested Agenda 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems and conflicts. 4. Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7, Revisions to Construction Schedule. g, Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the project. 14. Other business. 15. Construction schedule. 16. Critical/long lead items. F. Attend progress meetings is to sulnutes and current da items, in order to be prepared to discus pertinent topics such as deliveries of materials and eauioment, progress of the work, etc. SECTION 01311 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Promptly after award of the Contract, Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner and Engineer estimated construction progress for the Work, with sub -schedules of related activities which are essential to its progress. B. Coordinate the work and scheduling with and around other Contractors and individual trades performing work on the Project. C. Submit revised progress schedules with each application for payment. D. Progress Schedule shall become part of Contract Documents after approval by Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. In other parts of the Contract Documents: �( 3. Show projected percentage of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show projected dollar cash flow requirements for each month of construction. 1.05 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of Schedule: 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities modified since previous submission. 3. Revised projections of progress and completion. 4. Other identifiable changes. C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime Contractors. 1.06 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial schedules within ten (10) days after award of Contract; Owner and Eneineer will review schedules for information only. Submit to Owner and Engem ;er f PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor agrees that whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly schedule that delays to the critical path have resulted, and hence, that the contract completion date will not be met or when so directed by the Owner, he will take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner, submitting to the Owner for approval, a written statement of the steps he intends to take to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule. 1, Increased construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Owner's representative, the backlog of Work. 2, Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Owner's representative, the backlog of work. 3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule. inr1nr11nA are not appoved on the rst D. Shop drawings which eschedu ed, as well as pipelinesaand tanks which dont pass leak mittal or within the schedued tim shall be immediately r tests. E. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract. In the event the Contractor requests an extension of any contract completion date, he shall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the Engineer may deem necessary for determination as to whether the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of the contract. Engineer will, after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor in writing thereof. If the Engineer finds that the Contractor is entitled to any extension of any contract completion date under the provisions of this contract, the Engineer's determination as to the total number of days of extension shall be based upon the currently approved schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities which, according to the schedule, do not affect any e schedule do not have any contract completion date shown by the citical path in on date or dat s, and therefore, hwi 1 not be he bass for a change affect on the contract compl therein. F. From time to time it may be necessary for the contract schedule and/or completion time to be adjusted by the Engineer to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical .iiffin„ lties. strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the Owner orchis+repres antatives, Contractor shall obtain the schedules of the other appropriate contracts from the Engineer and/or Owner for the preparation and updating of his schedule and shall make the required changes in his schedule when indicated by changes in corresponding schedules. END OF SECTION SECTION 01340 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. This Section specifies the general methods and requirements of submissions applicable to Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Construction Photographs, and Construction or Submittal Schedules. Additional general submission requirements are contained in Article 6.17 of the General Conditions. Detailed submittal requirements are specified in the technical Sections. B. All submittals shall be clearly identified by reference to Section Number, Paragraph, Drawing Number or Detail as applicable. Submittals shall be clear and legible and of sufficient size for presentation of data. C. The Contractor is to maintain an accurate updated submittal log and will bring this log to each scheduled progress meeting with the Owner's representatives. This log should include the following items: c„hmittal-Description and File number assigned. on of the various Parts to 4, All details on shop drawings f the structure andwhere correct fabrication of the onarly the aclo the main members and work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the drawings before being submitted. 5. Submittals for equipment specified under Divisions 11 though 16 shall include a listing of all installations where identical or similar equipment has been installed and been in operation for a period of at least one year. B. Product Data 1, Product data cmetimes referred to ecified in individual Sections as catalog data), such as the for manufactured edd products manufacturer's product specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing -in diagrams and templates, catalog cutscurves and ct photographs, standard wiring diagrams, p performance operational -range diagrams, production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare -parts listing and printed product warranties, as applicable to the work. C. Samples l Samples specified imanufactured or fabricated work, small cuts ordividual Sections include, physical econtainers oof such as sections of - , ___^a _..,,a,,ntc r,nlnr/texture/Vattern (� on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully describe the packaged data and include a listing of all items within the package. Provide to the Resident Project Representative a copy of each transmittal sheet for shop drawings, product data and samples at the time of submittal to the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall utilize the following Shop Drawing numbering system: 1, The Submittal Log Number shall reference the Specification Section Number, 2, The numbering system shall be specification section number followed by a "1" for original submittal, "IA" for first resubmittal and so forth, (for example: 15050-1, 15050-1A, 150504B...) D. Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractoroferror and ohe responsibility for the mission are assumed by the1llment of the Contractor a d h terms Engil neer Contract. All risks of will have no responsibility therefor. F. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing, sample, or product data shall be started nor shall any materials be fabricated or installed prior to the approval or qualified approval of such item. Fabrication performed, materials purchased or on-site construction ar.r.mmnlished which does not conform to approved shop drawings and data shall be at the 1.05 b. Supplier C. Manufacturer e ph(s), 5. Identification of the product, with the section number, page and P ara rag p � 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7, Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. g. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Standards numbers. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 11. A blank space suitably sized for Contractor and Engineer stamps. 12. Contractor's stamp or review and approval, initialed or signed, certifying to review of initialed or signed, certifyingto review of submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents. 13. Where calculations are required to be submitted by the Contractor, the calculations shall have been checked by a qualified individual other than the preparer. The submitted calculations shall clearly show the names of the preparer and of the checker. REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES The review of shop drawings, data and samples will be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. They shall not be,construed: WORKING DRAWINGS AND A. any revisions made other than the corrections requested by the Engineer on previous submissions. ge as to the F. Partial submittals may ittbe Submittals not complete will be returned tothe the completeness of a submitt and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete. G. Repetitive Review I, Shop Drawings and other submittals will be reviewed no more than twice at the Owner's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense based on the Engineer's then prevailing rates. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all such fees invoiced to the Owner by the Engineer. Submittals are required until approved, 2. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of submittal will not entitle Contractor to extension of the contract time. on the shop s to constitute a H. If the Contractor tract Documents, the Contractor rs any correction shall give written notice thereof to the change to the Contract D Engineer at least 7 working days prior to release for manufacture. . . , . of the F,ngineer, the P.E. CERTIFICATION FORM The undersigned hereby certifies that he/sheis a professional that he/she has engineer registered by in the State of Florida a _to design in accordance with Section (Name of Contractor) (Insert P.E. Responsibilities) (Name of Project) for the The undersigned further certifies that he/she hasperformed thehat said design id i g onfon of the WWest Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks odor Control System Des ig ance (Name of Project) with all applicable local, state and federal codes, rule ,s used regulations, , and that his/heru signature and P.E. stamp have been affixed to all calculations and drawings T,-,. ,, i, rcianed hereby agrees to make all original design drawings and calculations available to the SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Submit a Schedule of Values e date of the e various portions of the work, within twenty- one (21) days after theffectiv B. Upon request of the Owner or Engineer, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract are included in Section 00700. R_ Application for Payment is included in Section 01052. F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum, 1.04 SUB -SCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES A. Submit a sub -schedule of unit costs and quantities for: 1. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products. B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values. C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste. D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into: 1. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid. 2. Copies of invoices for component material shall be included with the payment request in which the material first appears. 3. Paid invoices shall be provided with the second payment request in which the material appears or no payment shall be allowed and/or may be deleted from the request. E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values. SECTION 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS PART 1— GENERAL . 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Employ competent photographer to take construction record photographs periodically during the course of Work. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Summary of Work is included in Section 01010. B , Contract Closeout is included in Section 01700. 1,03 PHOTOGRAPHY REQUIRED A. The Contractor shall provide preconstruction videotaping (digital format) of each construction site with descriptive radio narrative clarifying orientation and objects viewed. A. Pay costs for specified photography and prints. directly. 1. Parties requiring additional photography or prints will pay photographer PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 PRINTS A. Color: 1. Paper: Single weight, color print paper. 2. Finish: Smooth surface, glossy 3. Size: 8 inch x 10 inch forconstruction ophotos and preliminary aerial photos; 24 inch x 36 inch for selectedaerial p s. B. Identify each print on back, listing: 1. Name of Project. 2. Project Number. 3. Location (Name of Structure or System, etc.). 4. Orientation of View. 5. Date and time of exposure. 6. Name and address of photographer. PART 3 — EXECUTION END OF SECTION SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform certain specified testing. All testing described in the Contract Documents shall be paid for by the Contractor. This requirement takes precedence over any other specification that may indicate that the testing fees (including collection, shipping and laboratory fees) be paid for by the Owner or any other party other than the Contractor. I, Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to 2. Employment of the laboratory perform the work of the Contract. B. Selection of testing laboratory shall be approved by Engineer and Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS C E. Testing Equipment: 1, Calibrated at reasonable intervals devices of accuracy traceable to either. a, National Bureau of Standard b, Accepted values of national physical constants. 1.04 LABORATORY DUTIES rovide qualified A. Cooperate with Resident Project Representative and Contractor; p q personnel after due notice. sampling, and testing of materials and methods of B. Perform specified inspections, construction: I, Comply with specified standards 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Owner, Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Promptly submit written report of each o Re o dt and 1Documents Engineer, File. Each report shall Owner, and Contractor, and one copy t include: I , Date issued 2. Project title and number T_ . iahnYatnry name, address, and telephone number uantities of representational samples of Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate q C. iv to be used and which require testing. materials Proposed mix proposed to be used for concrete, the reliminary designlaboratory. D Provide to the laboratory p uire control by the testing and other material mixes which req ' the erformance of work under onisContract oda a t are subject E Materials and equipment used in p at the point of manufacture or fabrica o inspection and testing workmanship are indicated in the m nts ortcDertifi ates from t s quality and w rovide sta them are specifications for q �'Te uire the Contractor to p ui ment provided by quality Owner or Engineer may q specifications for q full accordance with the standard cot sof this testing and the manufacturers and fabricators that the materials an egll manufactured or fabricated obligation of the Contractor, and workmanship indicateertif cats shall be he Contract a s bs mount of such testing and providing statements and to the Owner shall be allowed on ac and no extra charg certification. project site or at the source of the product to F. Furnish inc aaccess or and f worlk to•be tested 1 • T provideles at the prof 2 To obtain and handle same be tested To facilitate inspections and tests 3 c, �tnra�e and curing of test samples _, ��;Q„ments of SECTION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary utilities required for construction; remove on completion of entire project. B. Provide temperature, ventilation, and lighting requirements, if applicable, as specified in each individual section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Summary of Work is included in Section 01010. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code. E. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work, when natural light is not adequate for work, and for areas accessible to persons other than Contractor's employees. F. If Contractor requires service other than specified above, he shall arrange for, provide maintenance, and pay all costs incurred. 2.03 TEMPORARY AIR AND WATER Contractor shall make arrangements with Owner for all temporary water at the project site. Contractor shall pay for all temporary water required for his operations. The Contractor shall provide all air and water, including temporary piping and appurtenances required therefore, as may be required for the cleaning and testing of pipelines and equipment necessary the Work. Temporary piping and appurtenances shall be removed upon approval of equipment being tested. 2.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Contractor shall provide temporary sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations. B. Contractor shall provide for regular service, cleaning, and maintenance of temporary facilities and enclosures. SECTION 01560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary control facilities required for construction; remove on completion of entire project any features not intended to remain on the project site. B. Provide noise control, dust control, water control, debris control, pollution control and erosion control as specified in the appropriate sections of these documents. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with federal, state, and local codes and regulations and utility company requirements. B. Comply with Department of Transportation requirements. 2.04 2.05 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL A. The flow of water through the oehowever, it shall be divertedoantd ctor such that it does not damage any constructed items; channeled to effectively leave the site as soon as possible. Puddling and ponding on the site is not permitted. B. Water shall be controlled such that it does not enter excavated areas, nor is deposited on or against constructed features. TEMPORARY DEBRIS CONTROL A. Provision shall be made by each aConilble t nerstshould be c veredcontainers to d any and all debris that is to b generated from the project to prevent wind blowing paper, plastic, and lightweight products around and off the site. B. Instructions shall be given tthe snn el to utilize the trash containers . Containers shall be placed in convenient places a bris shall be C. At least once per week, a thoroughethod of disptosal shall rash andbe employed. made at the construction site. An acceptable END OF SECTION SECTION 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish, install and maintain project identification sign. B. Remove sign on completion of construction. C. Provide construction entrance sign. D. Allow no other signs to be displayed. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Summary of Work is included in Section 01010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340. encies, or as appropriate Size of signs and lettering: as required by regulatory a g 1a encies, otherwise of uniform colors to usage. regulatory g 2. Colors: as required by throughout project. B. Erect at appropriate location to provide required information. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE of work required. A Sign Painter: Professional Experience in type to resist weathering and fading for scheduled construction B_ Finishes, Painting: Adequate period. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: May be new or used, wood or metal, in sound condition structurally adequate to work and suitable for specified finish. overla ,standard large Sign Surfaces: Exterior softwood plywood with medium density y B. Sig members, to provide even, sizes to minimize joints. � Thickness: As required by standards to span framing A- — .,raves or buckles. SECTION 01610 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work: 1, Conform to applicable specifications and sand ardfind, s. or as specifically approved in 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality p writing by the Engineer. 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best Engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard es, to sizes and gauges, be interchangeable - C. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or ved n �,specified fi shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically othep than that for which itis a Do not use material or equipment for any purpose B. Within 30 days after the effective date of the Agreement, submit to the Resident Project t for the Representative, data relating to materialsProjecto enable the R P data Prto of ct Repree furnishess tat ve work. Such data shall be in sufficient or Engineer to identify the particular product and to form an opinion as to its conformity to the specifications. The data shall comply with Section 01340. C. Facilities and labor for handling and Proje t tion of Represe tativmaterials ane orgEngineer requr es, furnished by the Contractor. If the Resident either prior to beginning or during the progresso demonstrate that they conform to the submit samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary packed, and shipped as directed at specifications. Such samples shall be furnished, stored, otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements the Contractor's expense. Except as for and pay for the tests. D. Submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit consideration and approval before ulting materials are necessary for incorporation in the w lr sh 1 not be use against as a basis ny delay of approval sof claim from the failure to submit samples or data promptly hal — against the Owner or the Engineer. the ice among E. In order to demonstrate the rofiand cy Of workmen or surfaces provide suoh samples of workmanship or several textures, types, finishes finish as may be required. ..1-11-rrP,,nnnd to the approved samples 1, Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shiments to assure complianc with Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products requirements of are properly protected and undamaged. B , provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. C. The Delivery, Storage and Handling of all equipment and supplies shall comply with Section 01600. 1.06 STORAGE AND PROTECTION providing d storage structure d non- A. Furnish a coverenmnt for alrmechanical equipment, valves,architectural items, electrical corrosive enviroeto be into this and instrumentation equipment and special ripment e Witt' the 'instruct onsf or storage" of project. Storage of equipment shall be in strict Placing of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of heaters, p g storage lubricants in equipment, etc, oflsh a copy a 1 equipmof the ent and materials.Corrodedtionsfnr storage to the Engineer poor to storage damaged or deteriorated equipmentoandoparts shall dewillnot be inaced oluded in a payment project. Equipment and materials properly P.ctimate. E. All materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the work and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions and free from damage or deterioration. G. Protection after Installation I Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering when no longer needed. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment and supplies sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the w aork and cceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, equipment and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without additional cost to the Owner. I, Failure to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment o has been givenpthe Owner retains lied under this Contract within seven days after written notice t the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contract. These costs may be ---ni7ged of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, - - -lot; approved by the Resident Project Representative, until such time as the equipment is to be installed. grease, etc, unless 3. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. 4. A copy of the manufacturer's storage instructions shall be given to the Resident Project Representative and shall be carefully studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Resident Project Representative by him. These instructions shall be carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the Contractor. 5. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to insure proper lubrication and to avoid metal -to -metal "welding". Upon installation of the equipment, start the equipment, at least half load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. 6. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. Mechanical equipment to be used in the work, if stored for longer than ninety days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed and lubricated prior to testing and startup, at no additional cost to the Owner. 7. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guarantee the equipment P.,,,atty in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of the equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of operation. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION SECTION 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install products specified, under options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. B. Whenever a product, material or item of equipment is specified or described by using the name of a proprietary product or the name of a particular manufacturer or vendor, followed by the phase "or equal," the specific item mentioned shall be the basis upon which bids are to be prepared, and shall be understood as establishing the type, function, dimension, appearance and quality desired. Other manufacturer's or vendor's products not named will be considered as substitutions, provided the required information is submitted in the manner set forth in this section and provided the substitution will not require substantial revision to the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK -Rm Fnrm is included in Section 00300. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. In order for substitutions to be considered, the Contractor shall submit, within 30 days of issuance of Notice of Award, complete data as set forth herein to permit complete analysis of all proposed substitutions noted on his substitutions list. No substitution shall be considered unless the Contractor provides the required data in accordance with the requirements of this Section within the 30 day period. B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1, Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. 4) Operation and maintenance data. C. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; List significant variations. Substitution shall not change design intent and shall perform equal to that specified. 3. Data relating to impact on construction schedule occasioned by the proposed E. The Engineer's decision regarding evaluation of substitutions shall be considered final and binding. Requests for time extensions and additional costs based on submission of, acceptance of, or rejection of substitutions will not be allowed. All approved substitutions will be incorporated into the Agreement by Change Order. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making formal request for substitution, Contractor represents that: 1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified. 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his Contract, but not: a. Costs under separate contracts. b. Engineer's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents. 1.07 ENGINEER DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. SECTION 01650 STARTUP AND DEMONSTRATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a competent field services technician of the manufacturers of all equipment furnished under Divisions 11, 15, and 16 to supervise installation, adjustment, initial operation and testing, performance testing, final acceptance testing and startup of the equipment. B. Perform specified equipment field performance tests, final acceptance tests and startup services. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Operation and Maintenance Data is included in Section 01730. B. Performance and acceptance testing and startup requirements are included in the respective sections of Divisions 11, 15, and 16. procedures submittals, modified to reflect actual conduct of the tests and the following additional information: a. Copy of all test data sheets and results of lab analyses. b. Summary comparison of specified test and performance requirements versus actual test results. C. Should actual test results fail to meet specified test and performance requirements, describe action to be taken prior to re -testing equipment. 3. Copies of the manufacturer's field service technician's report summarizing the results of his/her initial inspection, operation, adjustment and pre-tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions and tabulations of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained, suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance, and the equipment supplier's Certificate of Installation in the format specified herein. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C653 - Disinfection for Water Treatment Plants. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Water Pollution Control Federation (WPCF) T). Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of B. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. C. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall submit a signed report of the results of his/her inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. 3.02 STARTUP AND ACCEPTANCE A. General Requirements 1. Successfully execute the step-by-step procedure of startup and performance demonstration specified herein. 2. The startup and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to Substantial Completion and acceptance by the Owner. 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least 5 working days in advance or as otherwise specified with the Owner and the Engineer. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during the workweek of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified. B. Preparation for Startup 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that they are in good working order and properly connected. Preliminary equipment operation shall be conducted. All systems shall be cleaned and purged as required. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, pump wells and pipelines which are hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the testing and replacements shall be made. When the facility is again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and a new test shall be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer, for the specified duration. 4. The Owner will furnish all operating personnel (other than vendor's or subcontractor's service personnel) needed to operate equipment during the final test period; however, said personnel will perform their duties under Contractor's direct supervision. Until performance tests are completed and units and systems are accepted by the Owner as substantially complete, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the operation and maintenance of all new facilities. 5. The Owner will provide all necessary chemicals and electricity. However, the Contractor shall provide all necessary personnel of the various construction trades, i.e., electricians, plumbers, etc, and field service personnel of the major system suppliers on an 8 hour per day basis at the facilities. 6. Do not, at any time, during startup allow the facility to be operated in a manner which subjects equipment to conditions that are more severe than the maximum allowable operating conditions for which the equipment was designed. DEMONSTRATION TEST PROCEDURES (SAMPLE) PROJECT DATA NAME: WEST REGIONAL WWTF LOCATION: Odor Control System OWNER: Indian River County, Florida OTHER: CONTRACT DATA NUMBER: DATE: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY WEST REGIONAL WWTP ANAEROBIC TANKS ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION Owner INDIAN RIVER COUNTY Project West Regional WWTP Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System Design Contract No. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION SECTION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Authorized representative of (Print Name) SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Closeout procedures. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Adjusting. 4. Project Record documents. 5. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Operation and Maintenance Data are included in Section 01730. B. Warranties and Bonds are included in Section 01740. 1.03 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following documents; actual revisions to the work shall be recorded in these documents: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor elevation datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. 01700-1 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. F. Submit documents to Engineer with Application for Final Payment. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit Application for Final Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments and sum remaining due. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 4. Wipe surface of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 5. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even -textured surface. 1.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. END OF SECTION 01700-2 SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Execute cleaning, during progress of the work, and at completion of the work, as required by General Conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract are included in Section 00700. B. Each Section: Cleaning for specific products or work. 1.03 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and anti -pollution laws. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations. B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site. 01710-1 3.02 DUST CONTROL A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as -needed basis until painting is finished. B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly -coated surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. D. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. E. Ventilating Systems: 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction. 2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. F. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. G. Prior to final completion, or OWNER occupancy, conduct an inspection of sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean. END OF SECTION 01710-2 SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 9. Field engineering records for compliance with field engineering submittals 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01050: Field Engineering B. Section 01052: Application for Payment C. Section 01340: Submittals D. Section 01380: Construction Photographs 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI/CSC format. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Resident Project Representative. E. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is to exhibit the currently updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner. 1.04 MARKING DEVICES A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by the Resident Project Representative. 01720-1 1.05 RECORDING A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Drawings: legibly mark to record actual construction. 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. All underground piping with elevations and dimensions, changes to piping location, horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements, and actual installed pipe material, class, etc. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings. 7. Equipment and piping relocations. 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, windows, etc. 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and shop drawings. 10. Bronze tablet plaque revisions according to actual installation. 11. One set of record shop drawings for each process equipment, piping, (including casings) electrical system and instrumentation system. D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record. 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. E. Shop drawings (after final review and approval). F. Certified site survey, below ground piping survey, and line elevations and stationing at 100 foot increments per Section 01050 by a registered land surveyor. 1.06 SUBMITTAL A. At contract close-out, deliver record documents listed in paragraph 1.01A to the Engineer for the Owner. The required field engineering submittals certified by a registered land surveyor are listed in Section 01050. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED END OF SECTION 01720-2 SECTION 01730 O&M MANUALS AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. 2. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. 3. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. 4. Assemble individual equipment O&M manuals into multiple volume overall manual sets in a format similar to that illustrated in Table 01730-1. 5. Submit O&M manuals in hard copy and CD or DVD. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8 1/2 -inches x 1I inches. 01730-1 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 4. Drawings: a) Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b) Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger than 11 inches x 17 inches. 5. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment separated by a Section Tab. a) Provide typed description of products and major component parts of equipment. b) Provide indexed tabs to separate the individual product within each binder volume. 6. Cover: Identify each individual volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". An example cover and spine is presented in Table 01730-3. List: a) Title of Project. b) Identity of separate structure as applicable. C) Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality heavy duty EZD VIEW three D -ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers in black or white. 2. Maximum post width: 3 inches. 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. D. In addition to the hard copies one copy of the O&M manuals shall be submitted in electronic format on a CD. 01730-2 1.04 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. An example Table of Contents is presented in Table 01730-1. The Table of Contents shall be submitted and approved before final preparation of the manual volumes. B. Fly- Leaf .Data: An example fly — leaf is presented in Table 01730-2. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of: a) Subcontractor or installer, manufacturer and supplier name, address and telephone number. b) A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. C) Identify area of responsibility of each. d) Local source of supply for parts and replacement name, address and telephone number. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a) Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b) Clearly identify data applicable to installation. C) Delete references to inapplicable information. 3. Operation and maintenance information as herein specified. 4. Record shop drawings as submitted and approved with all corrections made for each product. C. Drawings: 01730-3 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b) Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a) Proper procedures in event of failure. b) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit six copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content: for applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a) Catalog number, size, composition. b) Color and texture designations. C) Information required for reordering special manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. a) Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b) Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product. C) Recommend schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 01730-4 C. Content, for moisture protection and weather -exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a) Applicable standards. b) Chemical composition. C) Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit six copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. C) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d) Summary of information listed on equipment and motor data plates. 2. Operating procedures: a) Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b) Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down and emergency instructions. C) Summer and winter operating instructions. d) Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures: a) Routine operations. b) Guide to "trouble -shooting". 01730-5 C) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d) Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a) Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. 13.. Approved record shop drawings with all corrections made, and a copy of the warranty statement, check-out memo, and demonstration test procedures and certification. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts. a) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. C) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards. a) Electrical service b) Controls 01730-6 3. As installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a) Routine and normal operating instructions. b) Sequences required. C) Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a) Routine operations. b) Guide to "trouble -shooting. C) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d) Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.07 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit two copies of preliminary of proposed Table of Contents, formats and outlines of contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals within 90 days after Notice to Proceed. Sets of example O&M manuals are available for examination upon request. B. Submit two copies of completed data in preliminary form no later than 20 days following Engineer's review of the last shop drawing of a product and/or other submittal specified under Section 01340, but no later than delivery of equipment. One copy will be returned with comments to be incorporated into the final copies and the other copy will be retained on-site for use in any early training. 01730-7 C. Submit six (6) copies of approved manual in final form directly to the offices of the Engineer, Post, Buckley, Schuh & Jernigan, Inc. within 10 days after the reviewed copy or last item of the reviewed copy is returned. D. Provide six (6) copies of addenda to the operation and maintenance manuals as applicable and certificates as specified within 30 days after final inspection. 1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to demonstration test, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. C. Instructors shall be fully qualified personnel as outlined within the individual equipment specifications. If no specific training specifications are listed with the equipment, the Contractor shall provide the instruction with qualified Contractor personnel. D. The instructors shall provide for and prepare lesson scopes and handouts for up to five individuals designated by the Owner that outline the items to be covered. Separate sessions for operation and maintenance instruction shall be provided consecutively. Handouts shall be submitted to the Owner with at least one week's notice prior to the training sessions. E. All instruction sessions shall be video taped with portable video cameras and tapes supplied by the Contractor. Video taping shall be made by the Contractor under the direction of the Owner with conventional VCR compatible taping equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used) 01730-8 01730-9 1ADII]V Vl/JV-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS XXXXXXXX WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT XXXXXXX EQUIPMENT MANUALS SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION OF ITEM VOLUME SECTION VOLUME I PRETREATMENT 11331 Mechanical Bar Screen I 1 11320 Grit Collection System I 2 VOLUME 11 BARDENPHO SYSTEM 11221 Fermentation Mixers (4) 7'/z HP II 1 11221 V&2 nd Anoxic Mixers (8) 15 HP II 2 11255 Denite Gate II 3 11375 Carrousel VFD Aerators (2) 100 HP II 4 VOLUME IIA BARDENPHO SYSTEM 11286 Sluice Gates IIA 1 11287 Slide and Weir Gates IIA 2 11222 Alum Mixer II A 3 11346 Alum Feed System H A 4 11376 Re - Aeration Diffused Aeration Equipment II A 5 11372 Re — Aeration Centrifugal Blowers II A 6 VOLUME III CLARIFICATION/SEDIMENTATION 11336 Clarifiers III 1 11331 Waste Activated Sludge Pumps III 2 11331 Return d Slud um III 3 11314 Scum opps III 4 .1215 1 RAS/W`�Vt r Vlt SIs III 1 5 VCWU2MPSO 11365 Sand Fi IV 1 11365 Sand Filter Air Compressor IV 2 11214 Effluent Discharge Pumps IV 3 VOLUME V ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements V 1 16461 Oil Filled Transformers V 2 16720 Fire Alarm System V 3 16800 Generator Switch Gear V 4 VOLUME VI INSTRUMENTATION 13310 Control Panel Wiring Diagrams VI A 1 13320 Allen-Bradley PLC, UPS, and Panel Components VI B 2 13310 Field Instruments VI C 3 13320 PLC Software Documentation VI D 4 VOLUME VII PIPING/VALVES/HVAC 15050 Miscellaneous Valves VII 1 15050 Air Release Valves VII 2 15150 Eccentric Plug and Butterfly Valves VII 3 15770 HVAC VII 4 VOLUME VIII EMERGENCY GENERATOR 16700 Emergency Generator VIII 1 01730-9 TABLE 01730-2 EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT ITEM COVER PAGE 01730-10 FACILITY NAME OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE DATA FORM DATE: Page 1 of 2 EQUIPMENT DATA Description: Manufacturer: Model No.: Quantity: Serial Nos.: Contract Specification No.: Service: (WAS Pump, RAS Pump, Clarifier etc) ELECTRIC MOTOR DATA Description: Manufacturer: Model No.: Quantity: Serial Nos.: VENDOR DATA Contractor: Address: Phone No.: email: SubContractor: Address: Phone No.: email Vendor: Address: Phone No.: email• Local Representative: Address: Phone No: email• LUBRICATION DATA Item: (Pump Oil,etc) Vendor & Type: (Any SAE 1OW-30 Motor Oil etc) Item: Vendor & Type: Item: Vendor & Type: Item: Vendor & Type: Item: Vendor & Type: Item: Vendor & Type: 01730-10 TABLE 01730-2 (Continued) EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT ITEM COVER PAGE FACILITY NAME OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE DATA FORM DATE: Page 2 of 2 SPARE PARTS DATA List Critical Spare Parts Recommended and/or Provided: WARRANTY DATA Manufacturers Warranty Shop for Parts and Service is: Name: Address: City, State, ZIP Phone No.: email COMMENTS 01730-11 c w sw z >- >. W �4 o w o aO O U�nQ W for all damages to the County resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such Materials into the Project, including liquidated or delay damages. E. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a list indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within 15 days of receipt of said invoice for goods or materials. The list shall reference the applicable purchase order and include a copy of the invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered items, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. Upon receipt of the appropriate documentation in duplicate, the Owner shall prepare a check drawn to the supplier based upon the receipt of data provided. This check will be delivered directly to the supplier by the Owner. If any discounts are available from the supplier or vendor, they shall accrue to the benefit of the Owner, and the amount quoted by the vendor, plus applicable tax, shall be deducted from the contract price via change order. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release of waivers as appropriate. F. Following performance of the Purchase Orders by the suppliers, inspection of delivered materials by the Contractor, and submittal of documentation confirming same to Owner with an invoice for payment by Owner, the Contractor shall execute and deliver to the Owner at the end of each month along with the Contractor's Periodic Pay Estimates, a Materials Deduction Summary setting forth the full value of all County Purchased Materials, plus all taxes which would have been payable on the purchase of the Materials had they not been Owner purchased. The Materials Deduction Summary shall be signed by the Contractor and show all sums to be deducted via deductive change order. Upon concurrence of the Owner, the Owner will begin processing the corresponding change order. G. The Contractor shall maintain records of all County Purchased Materials incorporated into the Work. These records shall be available for inspection by the Owner upon request. H. Notwithstanding the delivery of County Purchased Materials to the Project Site for the Contractor's inspection, custody and incorporation into the Work, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all County Purchased Materials. The transfer of possession of County Purchased Materials from the Owner to the Contractor shall constitute a bailment for the mutual benefit of the Owner and the Contractor solely for the purposes set forth herein. The Owner shall be considered the bailer and the Contractor the bailee of the County Purchased Materials. County Purchased Materials shall be considered returned to the Owner for purposes of their bailment at such time as they are incorporated into the Project or are returned to the vendor or supplier at the discretion of the Contractor prior to payment for the Purchase Order by Owner. 01005-4 I. The Builder's Risk Insurance provided by the Contractor pursuant to the requirements of the General Conditions shall be sufficient to protect against any loss or damage to County Purchased Materials." The Owner shall in no way be liable for any interruption or delay in the Project, for any defects or other problems with the Project, or any extra costs or time resulting from any delay in the delivery of, or defects in, County Purchased Materials. END OF SECTION 01005-5 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK A. The work is located within the property line limits of the County's West Regional wastewater treatment facilities as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. This project includes addition of Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System at the West Regional WWTP existing facility. The Project includes Flat Aluminum Covers for two Anaerobic Tanks, Odor Control System, Building around the existing Grit Handling Equipment, Aluminum Canopy over existing sludge odor control equipment, Yard Piping Electrical/Controls, Instrumentation/SCADA, Landscaping Buffer and irrigation. All ancillary work associated with these systems are to be included. B. Special Requirement: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for removal of all soils deemed to unsuitable for construction and replace with suitable fill material as necessary for proper construction. 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS A. Interference With Work on Roads/Utilities: the CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully with all utility forces of the OWNER or forces of other public or private agencies engaged in relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any Road/Utility facilities which interfere with the progress of the Work, and shall schedule the Work so as to minimize interference with said relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities. CONTRACTOR shall minimize road lane closures and obtain County approval in writing prior to any lane closures. B. Refer to the General Conditions for additional requirements. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. Perform Work to ensure completion of the Work within the Contract Time. Completion dates of the various stages shall be in accordance with the approved construction schedule submitted by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a written plan and schedule in the event he desires to perform work from 01010-1 different stages concurrently. A written plan describing the CONTRACTOR's intent must be submitted for approval by the ENGINEER. 1.05 CONTRACTOR's USE OF PREMISES A. CONTRACTOR shall have use of the premises as indicated on the drawings for the performance of the Work, subject to ongoing work by other contractor's and the County. B. Coordinate use of premises with OWNER and ENGINEER. C. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for security of all his and his subCONTRACTOR's materials and equipment stored on the site. D. If directed by the OWNER or ENGINEER, move any stored items which interfere with operations of OWNER or other contractor's. E. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas if needed to perform the Work. F. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining temporary sanitary facilities during construction and all associated costs. 1.06 SITE ACCESS AND EXISTING FACILITIES A. Access to the site and equipment delivery is limited to daylight hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Weekend access must be approved by OWNER. All work which interrupts normal system operation shall be scheduled with the OWNER prior to its construction. Scheduling shall include summary of procedures to be taken, date/time of work, and duration of activities. Due to operation issues, the OWNER reserves the right to modify the schedule and restrict time of day and/or date(s) of work (for both work herein listed and other work not listed but affecting operations) that impacts the system operations. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain the current level or a greater level of perimeter site security and restricted public access at all times throughout construction of the project. At no time shall any portion of the site perimeter be provided without a secure and continuous fence at the end of each day. The cost to furnish and install all required permanent and temporary fencing shall be at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. 1.07 CONTRACTOR's STAGING, STORAGE, AND STOCKPILE AREA A. A staging, storage, and stockpile area has been designated on the site plan. The CONTRACTOR is not allowed to store any equipment outside these limits. 111111100, B. The CONTRACTOR shall minimize the quantity of materials stored at the plant site throughout the construction period. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for properly storing and protecting the area such that adjacent residents, canals, and wetlands are not impacted. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for implementing theft prevention measures. The OWNER shall bear no responsibility for materials stolen or acts of vandalism. The CONTRACTOR shall supply temporary enclosed, locked storage for OWNER's spare parts until Substantial Completion. 1.08 CONNECTION TO WORK BY OTHERS OR EXISTING LINES A. Piping installed under this Contract must connect to lines installed under other contracts. The CONTRACTOR under this Contract shall perform the following work and include the cost thereof in the Contract price: 1. Remove any temporary plugs and thrust restraints provided in the pipe installed under other contracts. 2. Furnish and install necessary pipe, sleeves, fittings, specials and appurtenances to make proper connections to pipes installed by others. 3. Pressure test connections prior to connecting new piping. B. Connection to existing lines to which piping of this Contract must connect: 1. Expose buried lines to confirm or determine horizontal and vertical location of all underground piping, pipe diameter, end connection, and pipe material. 2. Furnish and install all material, labor, and equipment including appropriate pipe, fittings, specials, and appurtenances to make proper connections. 3. Coordinate with OWNER to schedule installation including nights and weekends, to limit operational outages. 4. Supply temporary plugs and thrust restraint, if piping is not available. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate construction and reconstruction work with the OWNER and ENGINEER. Unless otherwise indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the sequence of the work. All work shall be performed in accordance with applicable safety rules and regulations. B. The CONTRACTOR shall insure that any utilities connected to structures, equipment, and facilities to be removed, relocated, salvaged, replaced, or abandoned shall be rendered inoperable, replaced with new utilities, or adequately bypassed with temporary utilities before proceeding with reconstruction. C. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent facilities and to limit the reconstruction activities to the extent indicated. If reconstruction 01010-3 beyond the scope indicated is required, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the OWNER prior to commencing work. 3.02 DISPOSAL A. Clearing and grubbing and removal of debris, where necessary, shall minimize interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities which shall not be closed or obstructed without permission from the OWNER. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed or obstructed traffic ways. B. Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from reconstruction operations shall be legally removed and disposed of at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Structures and equipment to be demolished shall be cleaned prior to demolition and the wash water properly disposed. No trace of these structures shall remain prior to placing of backfill in the areas from which structures were removed. C. Refuse, debris, and waste materials resulting from demolition and site clearing operations shall not be burned. All refuse and waste material shall be disposed of at the IRC Landfill with the CONTRACTOR paying all transportation and disposal fees. END OF SECTION 01010-4 SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 GENERAL Measurement and payment will be based upon work completed and accepted in accordance with the Contract Documents. No separate payment will be made for excavation, trenching, dewatering, backfilling, leakage tests, surveying, density tests, or other incidental items of work not shown in the Agreement. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IN STORAGE Partial payment for materials and equipment in proper storage at the site of the work or other approved storage site will be made for those items for which the Contractor has submitted paid invoices to the Engineer. The partial payment for stored materials will be 50% of the value of materials and equipment, based on receipted bills, furnished but not incorporated in the work, as determined by Engineer. MEASUREMENT A. Mobilization (Bid Item No. 1): Measurement shall be on a lump sum basis, and shall be limited to the following maximum amounts: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT ($) MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF FROM MORE THAN TO AND INCLUDING ITEM FOR MOBILIZATION 0 100,000 3,000 100,000 500,000 15,000 500,000 1,000,000 30,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 60,000 2,000,000 3,000,000 90,000 3,000,000 4,000,000 120,000 4,000,000 5,000,000 125,000 5,000,000 6,000,000 150,000 6,000,000 7,000,000 175,000 7,000,000 10,000,000 200,000 10,000,000 ------------- 250,000 Should the lump sum price bid for the item Mobilization exceed the maximum permissible amount for this item, as specified herein, the bid price will be reduced to the maximum permissible amount, and the reduced price will be used in correctly determining the total price for comparison of bids received. The cost of video taping the pre -construction condition shall be included in the lump -sum cost of mobilization. 01025-1 B. Anaerobic Tanks Flat Aluminum Covers: (Bid Item No. 2) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for new aluminum flat covers and Handrails Removal and Replacement will be made at the lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule under Item No. 2, which price shall constitute full compensation for installation of covers as illustrated on the drawings, handrails and accessories removal and relocation, electrical conduit adjustment including new hardware, supports and accessories required for a complete installation. C. Anaerobic Tanks Odor Control System: (Bid Item No. 3) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for complete construction of the new odor control system shall be made at the Contract lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule under Item No. 3, which will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct a complete and operating odor control system. This shall include clearing & grubbing, excavation, disposal of excess material, bedding material, backfill, compaction, concrete slab, odor control system, controls, all duct between the vessels and the fan, NPW piping, fittings, vents, supports, connection to existing systems, and electrical work including, electrical grounding, testing with manufacturer's representative, and all related items as described in the Contract Documents. D. Odor Control Duct Work: (Bid Item No.4) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for complete installation of the odor control duct work shall be made at the Contract lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule under Item No. 4, which will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install a complete and operating odor control duct work including supports and dampers. This shall include odor control duct, fittings, vents, supports, connection to existing and/or new systems, and all related items as described in the Contract Documents E. Grit Equipment Building: (Bid Item No.5) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for complete construction of the new grit equipment masonry Building shall be made at the Contract lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule under Item No. 5, which will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct a complete building. This shall include, concrete curb, masonry work, doors, windows, roofing, skylights, building finishes, lighting, grounding, permitting and all related items as described in the Contract Documents. F. Explosion proof motors and Solenoid valves for existing grit equipment: (Bid Item 01025-2 No.6) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for complete replacement of the existing grit snail motors (2), solenoid valves (2-1" and 4-1.5") shall be made at the Contract lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule under Item No. 6, which will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to remove and replace these items. This shall include, removing and disposing the existing motors and valves, installation of the new motor sand valves, equipment operation verification after installation and all related items as described in the Contract Documents. G. Aluminum Canopy for exist. Sludge Area Odor Control Equipment: (Bid Item No.7) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for complete installation of the new Aluminum Canopy for existing Sludge Area Odor Control Equipment shall be made at the Contract lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule under Item No. 7, which will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install a complete canopy. This shall include, support footings excavation, disposal of excess material, bedding material, backfill, compaction, concrete, aluminum canopy, permitting and all related items as described in the Contract Documents. H. Confined space entry Monitoring Units: (Bid Item No. 8) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for furnishing the two (2) Confined space entry Monitoring Units shall be made at the Contract lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule under Item No.8, which will be full compensation for delivery of these items. This shall include, furnishing of the units and demonstration of operation and all related items as described in the Contract Documents. I. Four (4) 5 Cubic Yard Roll -off Dumpsters and floor rails: (Bid Item No.9) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for furnishing four (4) Roll -off Dumpsters and three (3) sets of floor rails shall be made at the Contract lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule under Item No.9, which will be full compensation for delivery of the four (4) roll -off dumpster and installation of thee (3) sets of floor rails using 316 stainless anchor bolts (size per dumpster supplier) with minimum 4 -inch embedment. Tw (2) of the four dumpster and rails shall be placed inside new building for grit snails and one (1) will be placed in existing screenings building and the 4h will be a spare. J. Landscaping Buffer and irrigation system: (Bid Item No. 10) a. Periodic payment will be made for these items based upon percent complete, less retainage. b. Payment for complete construction of the Landscaping Buffer and irrigation system shall be made at the Contract lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule 01025-3 `( under Item No. 10, which will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct a complete and operating irrigation system and landscape buffer. This shall include furnishing of landscaping material and its installation furnishing installation of irrigation system including all clearing, grubbing, excavation, dewatering, pipe bedding, backfill and compaction, and connections for all pipe and other materials, including restrained joints, supports, fittings, spray heads valves, valves, reducers, bends, stub -outs, tees, joining connections to existing system (tapping) or other structures, testing, pipe identification, and for all equipment and all other work necessary to complete the installation as specified. K. Allowance: (Bid Item No. 11) a. Payment for work related to this Bid Schedule item will be made for any additions completed to resolve Owner prior -approved, unforeseen construction conflicts, and/or minor amendments to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an amount of monies for this item unless specifically authorized in writing by the Owner. Payment for this item will be made based upon a negotiated lump sum or based on time and materials of accepted pricing. The Contractor shall produce documentation upon request to verify costs. Only fees substantiated and approved by the Owner shall be paid as part of this bid item in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. b. Payment for authorized contract amendments shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. Allowance monies remaining at the completion of the project, inclusive of all authorized contract amendments, will be returned to the Owner. PAYMENT Payment will be made at the respective contract unit and/or lump sum price for each item shown in the Agreement, installed and accepted, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials and performing all work in connection therewith and incidental thereto. 1.04 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACES, STRUCTURES AND PROPERTY Where pavement, existing utilities or other property or surface structures not designated as pay items have been damaged, removed, or disturbed by the Contractor, whether deliberately or through failure to carry out the requirements of the Contract Documents, state laws, municipal ordinances, or the specific direction of the Engineer, or through failure to employ usual and reasonable safeguards, such property and surface structures shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the Contractor to a condition equal to that before work began within a time frame approved by the Engineer. ** END OF SECTION ** 01025-4 SECTION 01035 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE A. Promptly implement Change Order Procedures 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time-and-material/force account basis. 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request. B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization: 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the Work, 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the authorization of changes in the Work. C. Owner will designate in writing the person who is authorized to execute Change Orders. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The amount of established unit prices. B. Conditions of the Contract: 1. Methods of determining cost or credit to Owner resulting from changes in Work made on a time -and -materials basis. 2. Contractor's claims for additional costs. C. Applications for Payment are included in Section 01052. D. Construction Schedules is included in Section 01311. E. Schedule of Values is included in Section 01370. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Change Order: See General Conditions 1.04 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES A. Owner or Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a proposal Request to Contractor. Request will include the following: 1. Detailed description of the Change, Products, and location of the change in the Project. 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized. 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. 01035-1 S. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction to execute the changes, nor to stop work in progress. B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to Engineer, containing: 1. Description of the proposed changes 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes. 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. 5. Documentation supporting any changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as appropriate. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. In lieu of Proposal Request, Engineer may issue a "Work Directive Change" for Contractor to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B. Authorization will describe changes in the work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. C. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the Changes. 1.06 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow Engineer to evaluate the quotation. B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computation including the following: 1. Labor required. 2. Equipment required. 3. Products required: a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. b. Quantities required. 4. Taxes, insurance bonds. 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. 6. Overhead and profit. 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time. C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time -and -material / force account basis, with documentation as required for a lump sum proposal, plus the following additional information: 1. Name of the Owner's authorization agent who ordered the work, and date of the order. 2. Dates and time work performed, and by whom. 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 4. Receipts and invoices for: a. Equipment used, listing dates and times of use. b. Products used, listing quantities. C. Subcontracts. 01035-2 !. D. Document requests for substitutions for Products as specified in Section 01630. 1.07 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order. B. Form: Change Order format provided in the Contract Documents. C. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of change. D. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time. 1.08 LUMP SUM / FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either: 1. Engineer's Proposal Request and Contractor's responsible Proposal as mutually agreed upon between OWNER and Contractor. 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer. B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for the contractor to proceed with the changes. C. Contractor shall sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. Content of Change Orders will be based on, either: 1. Engineer definition of the scope of the required changes. 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer. 3. Survey of completed work B. The amount of the unit prices shall be: 1. Those stated in the Agreement. 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be determined prior to start of the work: 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. 2. Contractor shall sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Change Order directing Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and will cite the applicable unit prices. 2. At completion of the change, Engineer will determine the cost of such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. 01035-3 a. Contractor shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. 3. Engineer will sign and date a second Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 4. Owner and Contractor will sign and date the second Change Order to indicate their agreement with the terms therein. 1.10 TIME AND MATERIAL /FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/ CONSTRUCTION AUTHORIZATION A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor to Proceed with the changes on a time -and -material / force account basis. B. At completion of the change, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting and supporting data as provided in the Article "Documentation of Proposals and Claims" of this section. C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in General Conditions and Supplementary Condition. D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. E. Owner and Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement therein. 1.11 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR's SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall periodically revise Schedule of Values and Request for Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of Work, and to record the adjusted Contract Sum. B. Contractor shall periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. 1. Revise sub -schedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes. C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01035-4 SECTION 01045 CUTTING, CORING AND PATCHING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section covers the cutting, coring, rough and finished patching of holes and openings Holes and opening maybe in existing construction, or in parts of new construction. Procedures for cutting and patching will be the same for either condition. B. All cutting, coring, and rough patching shall be performed by the Contractor. Finish patching shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed by the trade associated with the application of the particular finish. C. Provide all cutting, fitting and patching_ , including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the work to provide for installation of ill timed or improperly scheduled work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide penetrations of structural surfaces and materials for installation of piping, ductwork, equipment and electrical conduit. 7. Provide penetrations of non-structural surfaces and materials for installation of piping, ductwork, equipment and electrical conduit. The determination of what is a nonstructural surface or material shall be made by the Engineer. 8. Remove, install, or relocate materials or equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Summary of Work is included in Section 01010. B. Site work is included in Division 2. C. Concrete is included in Division 3. D. Masonry is included in Division 4. E. Equipment and Mechanical work is included in divisions 11 and 15. F. Electrical/instrumentation work is included in divisions 16. 01045-1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01340, a written request prior to executing any cutting or alteration which is not shown or detailed on the contract documents which affects or requires: 1. Cutting structural members. 2. Holes drilled in beams or other structural members. 3. Work of the Owner or any separate Contractor. 4. Structural value or integrity of any element of the project. 5. Integrity or effectiveness of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements or systems. 6. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 7. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. B. Request shall include: 1. Identification of the project. 2. Description of affected work. 3. The reason for cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. Effect on work of Owner or any separate contractor, or on structural or weatherproof integrity of project. 5. Description of proposed work: a. Method and extent of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d.Extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. If the work is considered out of scope, provide a cost proposal. 8. Confirmation of coordination with any separate contractor whose work will be affected. 9. Related shutdown requests if required to do the work. 10. Request for hot work permit if required to do the work. C. Submit written notice to the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. D. When a written request is required, do not proceed with the work until a written notice to proceed is received from the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. Where there is no equivalent specification, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer who will provide a specification for the materials to be used. B. Concrete and grout for rough patching shall be as specified in Divisions 3 and 4. C. Materials for finish patching shall be equal to those of adjacent construction. Where existing materials are no longer available, use materials with equivalent properties and that will provide the same appearance. The materials are to be approved by the Engineer prior to their use. 01045-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products, or performance of work. C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Engineer in writing; do not proceed with work until the Engineer has provided further instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of work. B. Protect surrounding materials and equipment prior to starting work. C. Contain and control cooling liquids and slurry produced by the cutting and coring operations. D. When the cutting or coring. will result in the structure or equipment being exposed to provide adequate weather protection. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. B. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. When excavating in close proximity to piping, duct banks or other items subject to damage, use hand excavation. C. All equipment and workplace safety shall conform to OSHA standards and specifications pertaining to plugs, noise and fume pollution, wiring and maintenance. D. Where possible, employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: 1. Weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 2. Sight -exposed finished surfaces. E. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. F. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 01045-3 G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. H. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises. 3.04 CORING A. All coring shall be performed in such a manner as to limit the extent of patching. Locate the rebar before coring to minimize core holes. B. Coring shall be performed with an approved non -impact rotary tool with diamond core drills. C. Size of holes shall be suitable for pipe, conduit, sleeves, equipment or mechanical seals to be installed. D. Fit work to minimize space to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. E. Fit to pipes and other penetrations in tanks to be water tight using seals or other methods defined in the specifications. F. All holes cut through concrete and masonry walls, slabs or arches shall be core drilled unless otherwise approved. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in this type of work. H. If holes are cored through floor slabs they shall be drilled from below where possible. If holes are drilled from above, provide protection and containment below the area being drilled to catch the plug and contain liquid and slurry. 3.05 CUTTING A. All cutting shall be performed in such a manner as to limit the extent of patching. B. Fit work to minimize space to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. C. Cutting shall be performed with a concrete saw and diamond saw blades of proper size. D. Provide for control of slurry generated by sawing operation on both sides of wall and from below if cutting a floor. E. When cutting a reinforced concrete wall or floor, the cutting shall be done so as not to damage the bond between the concrete and reinforcing steel left in structure. Cut shall be made so that steel neither protrudes nor is recessed from face of the cut. F. Adequate bracing of area to be cut shall be installed prior to start of cutting. Check area during sawing operations for partial cracking and provide additional bracing as required to prevent a partial release of cut area during sawing operations. 01045-4 G. Provide equipment of adequate size to remove cut panel. H. Saw cut concrete and masonry prior to breaking out sections. I. Install work at such time as to require the minimum amount of cutting and patching. J. All cutting of structural members shall be done in a manner directed by the Engineer. K. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the equipment, ducting, piping or conduit. L. When existing conduits or pipe sleeves are cut off at the floor line or wall line, they shall be filled with grout or suitable patching material. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work. C. Maintain excavations free from water. 3.07 PATCHING A. Rough patching shall be such as to bring the cut or cored area flush with existing construction unless otherwise shown. B. Finish patching shall match existing surfaces as approved. C. Patching shall be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed. D. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better. E. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed to include the joint between the existing material and the patch. F. Equipment damaged during cutting and patching shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the Owner's sole discretion and at the expense of the Contractor doing the work. G. Repaint any damage to factory applied paint finishes using touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. The entire damaged panel or section shall be repainted in accordance with the field painting requirements specified in Section 09900 at the expense of the Contractor doing the work. H. Slurry or tailings resulting from coring or cutting operations shall be contained and vacuumed or otherwise removed from the area following drilling or cut. 01045-5 Equipment shall be protected against mechanical and water damage during cutting and patching. Provide protective covers or use other means such as temporary relocation to protect equipment that is at risk of damage from the cutting and patching J. Provide protection for existing equipment, utilities and critical areas against water or other damage caused by drilling operation. END OF SECTION 01045-6 SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for project. 1. Survey work required in execution of project. 2. Civil, structural or other professional Engineering services specified, or required to execute Contractor's construction methods. B. The Contractor shall retain the services of a registered land surveyor licensed in the State of Florida: 1. Identify existing control points and property line corner stakes indicated on the Drawings, as required. 2. Verify all existing structure locations and all proposed building and structure corner locations, tank locations and equipment locations. 3. Maintain an accurate location of all buried piping 4 -inch in diameter and larger. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract are included in Section 0700. B. Summary of Work is included in Section 01010. C. Applications for Payment are included in Section 01052. D. Contract Closeout is included in Section 01700. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01340, name and address of registered land surveyor or professional Engineer. B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. C. Submit certificate signed by registered Engineer or land surveyor certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance, or non-conformance, with Contract Documents. D. At the end of the project, and prior to final payment, submit certified drawings with the Surveyor's title block (signed and sealed by the registered land surveyor) of the items listed below. Vertical Control shall conform to NGVD mean sea level datum. These drawings shall be included with, and made a part of, the project record documents. 1. Certified site survey at 1 -inch = 40 -feet scale or larger but not greater than 1 -inch = 20 -feet scale, on reproducible Mylar(s) 24 -inch by 36 -inch, indicating the 01050-1 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer's standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Conditions of Contract for the general requirements relating to warranties and bonds. B. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01700 Contract Closeout. C. Specific requirements for warranties for the work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted are included in the individual Sections of Division 2 through 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS !, ( A. Submit written warranties to the Owner prior to the date for Substantial Completion. If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the work, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties upon request of the Owner. B. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Owner within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor or the Contractor and a Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer; prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner for approval prior to final execution. D. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 17 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. E. At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, Subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 01740-1 F. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3 -ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -inch by 11 -inch paper. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the Section in which specified and the name of the product or work item. H. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address and telephone number of the installer, supplier and manufacturer. I. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", the project title or name and the name, address and telephone number of the Contractor. J. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual 1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. E. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the contract Documents. F. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the 01740-2 products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and Subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATIONS A. Where required, the Contractor shall supply evidence, satisfactory to the Owner and Engineer, that the Contractor can obtain manufacturers' certifications as to the Contractor's installation of equipment. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01740-3 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 01740-4 DIVISION 2 (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. This Section covers clearing, grubbing, and stripping along the construction sites, complete as specified herein, and disposal of the cleared and grubbed material. The Contractor is expected to visit the sites of the work and determine the extent of the clearing and grubbing necessary for the construction operations. 2. The Contractor shall clear and grub all of the area within the limits of actual construction as required, which includes, but is not limited to, roadways, trenchwork, structures, and open areas. The width of the area to be cleared shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of any clearing. 3. The Contractor's attention is directed to any Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Ordinances in force. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable sections of these ordinances. 4. Clearing, grubbing and stripping at each structure shall be a minimum distance of 10 feet outside the structure periphery. 5. A line locate for any and all utilities is to be conducted prior to clearing and grubbing operations at any of the sites within this project. The owner of the utility or utilities known to be in the vicinity of the work is to be contacted by the Contractor to request a line locate. If lines are not located properly before work begins and the Contractor damages the line in any way, the Contractor shall pay for repair and/or replacement of the utility. Once lines are located, the Contractor is to take care not to damage the existing utilities. Again, if the Contractor damages the line in any way, the Contractor shall pay for repair and/or replacement of the utility. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCES A. Silt fences shall consist of woven or non -woven geotextile fabrics as specified in Section 985 of the FDOT Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction. 02100-1 U:\WO\Projects\]RC_N_W\V-2011VRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControA10_Specs\I0B_90percent\DIV 02\02100 Site Prep.doc PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. The surface of the ground, for the area to be cleared and grubbed shall be completely cleared of all timber, brush, stumps, roots, grass, weeds, rubbish, and all other objectionable obstructions resting on, or protruding through, the surface of the ground. However, those trees which are designated by the Engineer shall be preserved as hereinafter specified. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent damage to existing structures and installations, and to those under construction, so as to provide for the safety of employees and others. 3.02 GRUBBING A. Grubbing shall consist of the complete removal of all stumps, roots larger than 1/2 -inch in diameter, matted roots, brush, timber, logs, and any other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, resting on, under or protruding through the surface of the ground to a depth of 2 feet below the excavated surface under roadways, structures and embankments, and 1 foot below all other areas requiring clearing and grubbing. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of such objects, shall be refilled with suitable materials and compacted to a density conforming to the surrounding ground surface. 3.03 STRIPPING A. For open areas for sodding or seeding, grass and roots shall be stripped to a depth of 4 inches. B. Stripped material suitable for topsoil shall be stockpiled and shall be protected until it is replaced. Any topsoil remaining after all work is in place, shall be disposed of by the Contractor unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 3.04 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall dispose of all material and debris from the clearing and grubbing operation by hauling such material and debris away to an approved landfill. No burning shall be allowed on-site. The cost of disposal (including hauling and obtaining the necessary permits) of cleared and grubbed material and debris shall be considered an obligation of the Contractor; the cost of which shall be included in the contract sum. The contractor shall not allow any debris to accumulate on-site for more than 48 hours and shall remove such debris when requested by the Owner's Representative. 02100-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC W_1VW-2011\IRC_Ma_"::mks_Odor ControMO_Specs\1OB_90percent\DIV 02\02100 Site Prep.doc 3.05 PRESERVATION OR REMOVAL OF TREES A. Trees outside the limits of construction shall be carefully protected from damage. The Contractor shall erect such barricades, guards, and enclosures as may be considered necessary for him for the protection of the trees during all construction operations, including damage from piled material, contact with equipment, subsurface damage to roots, soil contamination, and general construction operations. Care shall be taken to prevent damage not only to the tree trunk, but also the root system and overhanging branches and limbs. B. If found necessary, removal or trimming of trees within the limits of construction shall be in accordance with applicable local ordinances. The Contractor shall apply for and pay for all costs associated with the permitting of and removal of trees from the proposed developed area. The Contractor is required to repair or replace trees damaged or removed during construction. C. Cutting of branches, limbs, and roots, when deemed necessary, shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All cutting shall be smoothly and neatly done without splitting or crushing. Cut or injured portions shall be neatly trimmed and covered with an application of grafting wax or tree healing paint. Such cutting or repairing shall be performed by a qualified tree surgeon. END OF SECTION 02100-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_MV-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 02\02100 Site Prep.doc SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered under this section shall consist of excavating, placement, compaction and final shaping of soil materials within the limits of construction. B. Also included in this section is the preparation of subgrade, placement, compaction and final shaping of all embankments, dikes, berms or other earthwork fill sections as noted. All earthwork operations either fill or excavation shall conform to the alignments, sections and elevations as shown on the Drawings and as specified here in. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Excavation and shoring drawings for worker protection do not require submittal, but shall be in accordance with the General Conditions and other applicable specifications. B. Submit six (6) copies of a report from a testing laboratory verifying that the material conforms to the gradation specified. 1.03 TESTING FOR COMPACTION A. Determine the density of soil in place in accordance with the sand cone method, ASTM D 1556, or rubber balloon method, ASTM D 2167. B. Determine the laboratory moisture -density relations and maximum density by ASTM D 1557 or D 2049. C. Sample fill materials by ASTM D 75. D. Compaction shall be deemed to comply with the specifications when no more than one test of any three consecutive tests falls below the specified relative compaction. The one test shall be no more than three percentage points below the specified compaction. The Contractor shall pay the costs of any retesting of work not conforming to the specifications. E. 'Relative compaction" is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the in-place density to the laboratory maximum density. 02200-1 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02200 Earthwork.doc (( F. Density tests will be made for determination of specified compaction by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner as specified in Section 01410. Tests will be made in locations reviewed by the Engineer, but spaced not more than 50 feet apart and a minimum of three tests per compaction area in each vertical lift. If any tests are unsatisfactory, re -excavate and re -compact the fill or backfill until the desired compaction is obtained. Additional compaction tests will be taken to each side of an unsatisfactory test at locations reviewed by the Engineer to determine the extent of re -excavation and re -compaction necessary. G. Contractor will pay for each failed compaction test and for each additional test taken to determine extent of re -excavation and re -compaction as described previously. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fill material shall be excavated native material or borrow material that conforms to the specified criteria. B. Fill material shall be classified as A-1, A-3 or A-2-4 per ASTM D 3282 or shall consist of clean, fine to medium sand, contain less than 1.0 percent by weight of organic matter (peat, humus, leaves, and carbon compounds), and conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size (Square Openings) No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 10 (2.00 mm) No. 40 (0.420 mm) No. 60 (0.250 mm) No. 100 (0.149 mm) No. 200 (0.074 mm) 2.02 WATER FOR COMPACTION Weight Percent Passing Square Mesh Sleeves 95 to 100 90 to 100 70 to 95 40 to 80 5 to 40 less than 10 A. Water shall be free of acid, alkali, or organic materials and shall have a pH of 7.0 to 9.0. The Contractor shall furnish all water needed for earthwork. The Contractor shall provide temporary piping, valves, and trucks to convey water from the source to the point of use along with any meters required if the water is taken from a public water system. 02200-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor ControAlO_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 02\02200 Earthwork.doc PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. The Contractor shall perform all earthwork operations necessary to accomplish the construction indicated on the Drawings. Excavation shall be unclassified regardless of material encountered. All suitable excavated material, not required for fill or embankment, shall be deposited on the project site as directed by the Owner. The Contractor shall do all shoring necessary to perform and protect any excavation and as necessary for the safety of the workers and any existing facility. Wherever excavations are made below the grades indicated on the Drawings, approved material shall be used to restore the area to the proper grade and shall be compacted in accordance with these Specifications. B. In the event materials containing toxic substances, oil products or other pollutants are encountered during excavation, immediately cease operations and notify the Engineer. Proceed with the excavation only when so directed by the Engineer, using additional procedures and precautions, if any, as necessary to contain and dispose of the contaminated material in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations. 3.02 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. Where muck, rock, clay or other unsuitable material is encountered within the limits of construction the Contractor shall excavate such material as directed by the Engineer and backfill the excavated area with suitable material. Backfill material shall be compacted and shaped to conform to the required section. Muck shall be disposed of as designated by the Owner. 3.03 EMBANKMENT A. Embankment work shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting the specified materials required for fill or embankment as shown on the Drawings. The material used for embankment shall consist of sand, gravel, or a mixture thereof, and/or other suitable material approved by the Owner. If the materials are of a variable quality, the Contractor shall plan his operation so that the upper 2 feet of the embankment is constructed of selected materials as approved and directed by the Owner. B. Prior to placing any embankment, the surface to receive the embankment shall be cleared, plowed or scarified. Fill or embankment shall be placed, shaped, and compacted in successive uniform layers of not more than 8 inches in thickness, measured loose. 02200-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02200 Banhwork.doc 3.04 BACKFILL A. All backfill material shall be clean and free of lumber, trash, or other debris. Backfill material shall be placed in 8 -inch layers, measured loose, and then shall be thoroughly compacted. Prior to placing backfill, the areas around structures upon which the backfill is to be placed shall be cleaned of all trash and debris. Sheeting and bracing, if required, shall be left in place. Any sheeting and bracing allowed to be left in place shall be cut off a minimum of 2.5 feet below finished grade and the exact horizontal and vertical location shall be noted on Contractor's "as -built" drawings. 3.05 EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. During excavation, place the excavated material only within the project area. Do not obstruct roadways, streets, sidewalks or other pedestrian pathways. Conform to federal, state, and local codes governing the safe loading of trenches with excavated material. Separate suitable and unsuitable material. 3.06 DRAINAGE, EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION A. Maintain all existing drainage patterns and control stormwater runoff from the construction area to prevent erosion, sedimentation, or flooding due to the construction. Comply with all provisions of Section 02276, Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 3.07 FINISH GRADING A. Finish grading shall consist of the preparation, trimming, and shaping to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, of all areas, outside the paved areas, in such a manner to receive grassing, sod, and/or plantings without additional work. B. Round tops of banks to circular curves to not less than a 6 foot radius. Neatly and smoothly trim rounded surfaces. Shape the surface of earthwork and trenches to conform to lines, grades, and cross sections as shown on the Drawings, within 1/10 of a foot. C. Where construction operations disturb areas outside the immediate limits of construction, re -grade those areas to the typical cross-section that existed prior to construction. 02200-4 U:RVO\Projects\IRC_W_MV-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Contro1110_Specs\tOB_90percent\DIV 02\02200 Earthwork,doc 3.08 PROOF ROLLING A. Proof rolling, where required or directed, shall be conducted as follows: 1. After initial stripping, proof rolling shall be conducted to encompass any proposed building pad areas, parking lot areas, street areas or other areas of concern. 2. Proof rolling equipment shall consist of a self-propelled vibrating roller that imparts a minimum dynamic drum force of 36,000 pounds. 3. Each section of subgrade shall be subjected to overlapping coverage of the compactor as it operates at full vibrational frequency and at a travel speed of not more than 2 feet per second. 4. Each area shall receive a minimum of 5 overlapping passes. 5. Should yielding/unstable materials be encountered during proof rolling operations, they should be removed and replaced with clean sand that is compacted to at least 98 percent of the material's ASTM D-1557 (AASHTO T 180) maximum dry density. 6. After proof rolling operations are complete and prior to compaction and replacement of the initial fill, shape, level, and compact all areas disturbed or rutted during the proof rolling operation. B. Proof rolling operation shall be monitored by a Geotechnical Engineer to evaluate the potential for or necessity of additional earthwork operations. C. The Owner, upon recommendation of the Geotechnical Engineer, may modify the above test procedure as necessary. 3.09 COMPACTION A. Areas to be compacted shall be moistened and the soil moisture content shall be maintained within ±1 % of optimum moisture during compaction operation. B. Conduct compaction by either rolling, tamping, or any other method approved by the Owner in order to obtain the desired density. C. The Owner shall inspect all compacted areas prior to subsequent construction operations to ensure that satisfactory compaction has been obtained. 02200-5 U:\NO\Projects\IRC_M_W W-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02200 Earthwork.doc D. All embankments, including backfill and embankment adjacent to structures, shall be compacted to a density of not less than 98 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557 (AASHTO T 180). E. Fill areas under streets, paved areas, parking lots, etc. shall be compacted to 95% density per ASTM D 1557 at 2 feet below final grade. F. General fill areas not supporting structures and/or paved areas shall be compacted to 90% maximum density per ASTM D 1557. 3.10 TESTING A. All testing as described below shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory retained by the Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all construction operations to allow for adequate testing. B. Field density tests will be made in each vertical layer, and using the following approximate spacing: Under structures, pavements, and slabs, one test per 2,500 square feet with at least two tests per structure or area. 2. In trenches, one test every 100 feet in continuous trenches under pavements or future pavements plus one test at each intersection or one test every 300 feet in continuous trenches not under pavements, plus one test at each pavement or driveway crossing. 3. In all other areas, one test per each 7,500 square feet. C. If any field density tests indicate material below the specified relative density, the Contractor shall re -compact or re -excavate, re -backfill and re -compact the area until the specific density is obtained. A minimum of two field density tests per re - compacted and/or re -excavated area will be performed to verify compliance with the specifications. 3.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGED PROPERTY A. Existing curbs, walks, streets, poles, paving, survey monuments and other features, which are to remain, shall be fully protected by the Contractor. Any damaged items shall be removed and restored to their original condition at the Contractor's expense. 02200-6 UAW0\Projects\1RC_W_W1V-2011 URC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControiXI Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02200 Barthwork.doc 3.12 ACCEPTANCE A. After the specified density tests have been successfully completed, the Owner may cross section the excavation and/or fill area to verify that the excavation or fill area conforms to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and to verify quantities of material. The Contractor shall correct deviations from line and grade in excess of the tolerances specified at no expense to the Owner. END OF SECTION 02200-7 U:RVO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\1RC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Controt\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 02\02200 Earthwork.doc SECTION 02220 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work included under this Section consists of dewatering, excavating, trenching, sheeting/shoring, grading, backfilling, and compacting those soil materials required under, adjacent, and for the construction of buildings, structures, piping, ditches, utilities, roads, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Definitions: 1. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a specific material. 2. Optimum Moisture Content: The optimum moisture content shall be determined by ASTM D 1557 specified to determine the maximum dry density for relative compaction. Field moisture content shall be determined on the basis of the fraction passing the 3/4 -inch sieve. 3. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard natural substance which requires the use of explosives and/or special impact tools such as jack hammers, sledges, chisels or similar devices specifically designed for use in cutting or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench excavating machinery. 4. Suitable: Suitable materials for fills shall be non -cohesive, non -plastic granular local sand which shall be free from vegetation, organic material, marl, silt or muck. The Contractor shall furnish all additional fill material required. 5. Unsuitable: Unsuitable materials are highly organic soil (peat or muck) classified as A-8 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M 145. C. Plan For Earthwork: The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, the conformation of the ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantities of materials to be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract according to the General Conditions. 02220-1 U:\WO\Projecls\IRC_W_W W-201 IVRC_Ana_Tanks_odor ControhlO_Specs\lOB30percenl\DIV 02\02220 ExcavBackffidoc 2. Prior to commencing the excavation, the Contractor shall submit a plan of his proposed operations to the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall reflect the equipment and methods to be employed in the excavation. Prices established in the Proposal for the work to be done will reflect all costs pertaining to the work. No claims for extras based on substrata or groundwater table conditions will be allowed. D. Trench Safety Act: The Contractor shall comply with all of the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Chapter 90-96, CS/CB 2626, laws of Florida). The Contractor shall acknowledge that included in various items of his bid proposal and in the total bid price are costs for complying with the provisions of the Act. Additionally, the Contractor is required to break out the costs for complying with the Florida Trench Safety Act. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUEST IN THIS SECTION SHALL RESULT IN THE BID BEING DECLARED NON-RESPONSIVE. Failure to comply with the provisions of the Act shall result in a per diem penalty of $1,000 per day that the work is out of compliance. 1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. All publications and standard specifications referred to herein are the latest or current issue of that publication or specification as of the specification date. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A Testing Laboratory employed by the Owner will make such tests as are deemed advisable. The Contractor shall schedule his work so as to permit reasonable time for testing before placing succeeding lifts and shall keep the laboratory informed of his progress. Costs for all testing shall be paid by the Owner. However, any and all tests which have to be repeated because of the failure of the tested material to meet specification shall be paid for by the Contractor and the cost of any tests shall be deducted from payments due the Contractor. B. Field Engineering: Provide the services of a Professional Land Surveyor registered in the State of Florida to establish all vertical and horizontal controls required for layout of the work and for preparation of a certified survey showing recorded finish elevations and dimensions upon completion of site preparation and earthwork. 1.04 FEDERAL AND STATE REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All trench excavations which exceed 5 feet in depth shall comply with the applicable trench safety standards as stated in the OSHA excavation safety standards 29 CFR S. 1926.650 Subpart P as regulated and administered by the Florida Department of Labor and Employment Security as the "Florida Trench Safety Act." 02220-2 UAWO\Projects\IRC_W WW.2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV02\02220 ExcavBackfill.doc 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions encountered during construction warrant a change in the footing elevation, or in the depth of removal of unsuitable material from that indicated in the soils report, an adjustment will be made in the contract price, as provided in the General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. Provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. C. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. D. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied facilities. E. The use of explosives is not permitted. F. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by vibration, settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 1.06 PRE -CONSTRUCTION SURVEY A. Prior to commencing excavation, backfill or dewatering, the Owner and Contractor shall jointly conduct a survey of those existing structures which, in the opinion of the Engineer, may be subject to settlement or distress resulting from excavation or dewatering operations. B. The Contractor shall monitor the structures surveyed to ascertain evidence of settlement or distress. If settlement or distress becomes evident the Contractor shall be required to repair the structures to the previous condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Costs shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer for review the proposed methods of construction, including dewatering, excavation, bedding, filling, compaction and backfilling for the various portions of the work. Review shall be for method only. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the adequacy and safety of the methods. 02220-3 U:\WO\Projecls\IRC_W_WW-2011\IRC_Ma Tanks_Odor Controt\I0_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02220 ExeavBackfilldoc B. Certifications: Submit copies of a certification, from an independent testing laboratory that the material to be used for all backfills, fills, and structural backfills meets the specified criteria. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: All fill material from on and off-site sources shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All fill material shall be unfrozen and free of organic material, trash, or other objectionable material. Excess or unsuitable material as designated by the Engineer shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor. B. Soil Materials: Satisfactory soil materials are ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, SW and SP. Unsatisfactory soil materials are ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH and PT. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 in. sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. E. Common Fill Material: 1. Common fill shall be sand not containing stones, rock, concrete or other rubble larger than 2 inches in diameter. It shall have physical properties which allow it to be easily spread and compacted. 2. The Contractor shall utilize as much excavated material as possible for reuse in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications or as directed by the Engineer. 3. The Engineer shall direct the Contractor on the type of material allowed in certain sections of the earthwork operations. 02220-4 U:\\VO\Projects\IRC \V_WW-2011\IRC_Ma Tanks_OdorControPlO_Specs\10B_90pereent\DIV02\02220ExcavBackfilLdoc F. Structural Fill: Structural fill shall be well graded sand to gravelly sand having the following gradation: U.S. Sieve Size 1 - inch No. 4 No. 40 No. 100 No. 200 Percent Passing By Weight 100 75-100 15-80 0-30 0-10 G. Class I Soils: Class I soils are not defined in ASTM D2487. Class I Soils shall be manufactured angular, granular material, 1/4 to 1/2 inches (6 to 12 mm) in size, including materials having significance such as crushed stone or rock, broken coral, crushed slag, cinders, or crushed shells. Crushed stone shall consist of clean mineral aggregate free from clay, loam or organic matter, conforming with ASTM C33 stone size No. 8 and with particle size limits as follows: U.S. Sieve Size 1/2 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 H. Class II Soils: Percent Passing By Weight 100 85-100 10-30 0-10 0-5 1. Class II soils shall be in accordance with ASTM D2487, less than 5 percent pass No. 200 sieve as follows: 2 GW: Well -graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines. Fifty (50) percent or more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean. 3. GP: Poorly graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines. Fifty (50) percent or more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean. 4. SW: Clean, well -graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines. More than fifty (50) percent passes No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. 5. SP: Clean, poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines. More than fifty (50) percent passes No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. 02220-5 UANVO\ProjectsVRC W_W W-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_Wperunt\DIV 02\02220 ExcavBackfilLdoc I. Coarse Sand: Sand shall consist of clean mineral aggregate with particle size limits as follows: U.S. Sieve Size No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 Percent Passing By Weight 95-100 85-100 65-97 25-60 5-35 0-7 Other Material: All other material, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 02100. 3.02 SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING A. Furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting, shoring, and bracing as required to support the sides of excavations, to prevent movement which could in any way diminish the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper construction, and to protect adjacent structures, and to protect workers from hazardous conditions or other damage. Such support shall consist of braced steel sheet piling, braced wood lagging and soldier beams or other approved methods. If the Owner is of the opinion that sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he may order additional supports be installed at the expense of the Contractor, and compliance with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall be taken to prevent voids beside the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and compacted. Where soil cannot be properly compacted to fill a void, lean concrete shall be used as backfill at no additional expense to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall construct sheeting outside the neat lines of the foundation unless deemed desired otherwise for his method of operation. Sheeting shall be plumb and securely braced and tied in position. Sheeting and bracing shall withstand all pressure to which the structure or trench will be subjected. Any deformation shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense so as to provide the necessary clearances and dimensions. C. Where sheeting and bracing is required to support the sides of excavations for structures, the Contractor shall engage a Professional Geotechnical Engineer, registered in the State of Florida, to design the sheeting and bracing. The sheeting and bracing installed shall 02220-6 U:\WO\ProjectsURC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\lO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02220 BxcavBackfill.doc conform with the design, and certification of this shall be provided by the Professional Geotechnical Engineer. D. The installation of sheeting, particularly by driving or vibrating, may cause distress to existing structures. The Contractor shall evaluate the potential for such distress and, if necessary, take all precautions to prevent distress of existing structures because of sheeting installation. E. The Contractor shall leave in place to be embedded in the backfill, all sheeting and bracing not shown on the Drawings but which the Owner directs him in writing to leave in place at any time during the progress of the work for the purpose of preventing injury to structures, utilities, or property, whether public or private. F. Steel or wood sheeting may be used at the Contractor's option. Sheeting shall be of adequate strength for the purpose intended. Where conditions permit, steel drag shields or trench boxes may be used. Voids left by the advancement of the shield shall be carefully backfilled and compacted in accordance with trench backfill requirements. G. Steel sheeting above the crown elevation of pipe may be completely removed when sufficient backfill has been placed to prevent damage to the work and/or existing structures. Care shall be exercised to prevent the opening of voids during the extraction process. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all timber sheeting shall be cut off thirty (30) inches below grade and left in place, with proper bracing to provide lateral support. All sheeting placed below the crown elevation of pipe shall be cut off above the pipe crown elevations and left in place. H. All sheeting and bracing not left in place shall be carefully removed in such manner as not to endanger the construction, or other structures, utilities, or property. All voids left or caused by withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand by ramming with tools especially adapted for that purpose, or otherwise directed by the Owner. I. The right of the Owner to order sheeting and bracing left in place shall not be construed as creating any obligation on his part to issue such orders, and his failure to exercise his right to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages to persons or property occurring from or upon the work occasioned by negligence or otherwise, growing out of a failure on the part of the Contractor to leave in place sufficient sheeting and bracing to prevent any caving or moving of the ground. 3.03 PUMPING AND DRAINAGE A. See dewatering requirements of Section 02140. B. All water pumped or drained from the excavated area shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without undue interference with other work, without damage to surrounding property, and in accordance with pertinent rules and regulations. 02220-7 U:\WO\Projects\IRC W_W W-2011URC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\I0_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02220 ExcavBackfdldoc C. No construction, including pipe laying, shall be allowed in water. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 12 inches below excavation. No water shall be allowed to come into contact with masonry or concrete within 24 hours after being placed. The Contractor shall constantly guard against damage due to water and take full responsibility for all damage resulting from his failure to do so. D. The Contractor will be required at his expense to excavate below grade and refill with approved fill material if the Owner determines that adequate drainage has not been provided. 3.04 EXCAVATION A. Excavating for Structures and Utilities: Excavation work shall be performed in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions being taken against all hazards. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete forms. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut for extended footings. 2. Excavation shall be made to such dimensions as will give suitable room for bracing and supporting, for pumping and draining, for installing the pipelines, and for all other work required. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 ft. a) Excavation for precast or prefabricated structures shall be carried to an elevation two (2) feet lower than the proposed outside bottom of the structure to provide space for the structural backfill material. b) Excavation for structures constructed or cast -in-place in dewatered excavations shall be carried down to the bottom of the structure where dewatering methods are such that a dry excavation bottom is exposed and the naturally occurring material at this elevation leveled and left ready to receive construction. Material disturbed below the founding elevation in dewatered excavations shall be replaced with Class B concrete. 3. Immediately document the location, elevation, size, material type and function of all new subsurface installations, and utilities encountered during the course of construction. 4. Excavation equipment operators and other concerned parties shall be familiar with subsurface obstructions as shown on the Drawings and should anticipate the encounter of unknown obstructions during the course of the work. 5. Encounters with subsurface obstructions shall be hand excavated. 02220-8 LPAWO\Projects\IRC_W WW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorContro11t0_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV02\02220 ExcavBackfill.doc 6. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose, "quick" or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result of inadequate dewatering or other construction methods, shall be removed and replaced by crushed stone as required by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. 7. The bottom of excavations shall be rendered firm and dry before placing any structure or pipe. Excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. The bedding schedule for pipes shall be as shown in Table 02220-A. Excavated material shall be stockpiled in such a manner as to prevent nuisance conditions. Surface drainage shall not be hindered. 9. All structure and pipe locations and elevations as required herein must be permanently documented by the Contractor, on the Record Drawings prior to the Engineer's approval of the Application for Payment for that work. 10. Excavated material shall be stockpiled in such a manner as to prevent nuisance conditions. Surface drainage shall not be hindered. No excavated material or other construction material shall be placed within thirty (30) feet of the edge of pavement of any public road. 02220-9 UAWO\Projects\IRC_W IV\V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControl\lO_Specs\I0B_90percent\DIV02\02220 ExcavBackfdldoc TABLE 02220-A COMPACTION AND BACKFILL SCHEDULE Area Beneath structures, foundations, slabs, and pavements. (minimum 2 -foot depth) FOR STRUCTURES Material Compaction Structural Fill 8 -inch lifts, compacted (Para. 2.01 F) to 98% of the soil's modified Proctor maximum dry density. Fill should not be placed over any in-place soils until those layers have been compacted to 95% of the soil's modified Proctor maximum dry density. Around structures, Structural Fill 8 -inch lifts, compacted foundations and (Para. 2.01 F) to 98% of the soil's modified Proctor slabs (minimum 2 -foot maximum dry density. Use light spacing) rubber -tired or vibratory plate compactors. From cleared existing surface to subgrade for paved and gravel roadway surfaces Disturbed area require- ing seeding and mulch- ing 3.05 UNDERCUT Common Fill 12 -inch lifts, compacted (Para 2.01 E) to 98% of the soil's modified Proctor maximum dry density. Topsoil See Section 02920 A. If the bottom of any excavation is below that shown on the Drawings or specified because of Contractor error, convenience, or unsuitable subgrade due to the Contractor's excavation methods, he shall refill to normal grade with fill at his own cost. Fill material and compaction method shall be as directed by the Engineer. 02220-10 U:\WOTrojects\IRC_W_W W-2011uRC_Ma_TanU—W or Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02220 ExcavBackfiAdoc 3.06 STABILIZATION A. Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm, dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; shall be free from mud and muck; and shall be sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact. B. Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms which are otherwise solid, but which becomes mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with one or more layers of crushed rock or gravel. Not more than 1/2 inch depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms when the pipe bedding material is placed thereon. The finished elevation of stabilized subgrades for concrete structures shall not be above subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings. C. All stabilization work shall be performed by and at the expense of the Contractor. 3.07 FILL AND COMPACTION A. Materials: 1. To the maximum extent available, excess earth obtained from structure and trench excavation shall be used for the construction of fills and embankments. 2. Materials used as backfill shall be free from rocks or stones larger than 2 inches in their greatest dimension; brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic or other deleterious materials; and must be acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shall not be done except by permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials be in any backfill, fill or embankment. B. Placement and Compaction: 1. Backfill materials shall be placed in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 8 inches in uncompacted thickness. Material deposited in piles or windrows by excavating and hauling equipment shall be spread and leveled before compaction. 2. Each layer of material being compacted shall have the best practicable uniform moisture content to ensure satisfactory compaction. The Contractor will be required to add water and harrow, disc, blade, or otherwise work the material in each layer to ensure uniform moisture content and adequate compaction. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling or other method acceptable to the Engineer to 98 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content as determined by Modified Proctor Method, ASTM D1557, latest (AASHTO T180). 02220-11 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W W\V-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\IOB_90pereentWIV02\02220 EzcavBackfill.doc 3. Whenever a trench passes through a backfill or embankment, material shall be placed and compacted to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. C. Compact and backfill excavations and construct embankments for structures according to the schedule listed in Table 02220-A. Backfill schedule for pipes is listed in Table 02220-B. D. Pipe shall be laid in open trenches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. E. Excavations shall be backfilled to the original grade or as indicated on the Drawings. Deviation from this grade because of settling shall be corrected. Backfill operation shall be performed to comply with all rules and regulations and in such a manner that it does not create a nuisance or safety hazard. F. Embankments shall be constructed true to lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans or ordered by the Owner. Embankments shall be placed in successive layers of not more than 8 inches in thickness, loose measure, for the full width of the embankment. As far as practicable, traffic over the work during the construction phase shall be distributed so as to cover the maximum surface area of each layer. G. If the Contractor requests approval to backfill material utilizing lifts and/or methods other than those specified herein, such request shall be in writing to the Engineer. Approval will be considered only after the Contractor has performed tests, at the Contractor's expense, to identify the material used and density achieved throughout the backfill area utilizing the method of backfill requested. The Engineer's approval will be in writing. H. Foundation Preparation The existing ground beneath building foundations and equipment base slabs and slabs on grade shall be removed and the area proof -rolled. Proof -rolling the buildings and containment areas should consist of at least 10 passes of a self- propelled vibrator compactor capable of delivering a minimum impact force of 30,000 to 35,000 pounds per drum to the soils. Each pass should overlap the preceding pass by 30 percent to insure complete coverage. Backfilled areas shall be compacted in 8 -inch layers to a density of not less than 98 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557 latest (AASHTO T108) for a depth of not less than 2 -feet below the bottom of the foundations or concrete slabs. Any unsuitable foundation material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. 2. Slabs On Grade: Subgrades for concrete slabs shall be removed, backfilled, and compacted to the required grade. The top 2 -feet of concrete slab subgrade in cut 02220-12 U:\WO\Projecls\IRC_W_\V\V-2011\IRC_Aia_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02220 ExcavBackfdl.doc sections and all fill material shall be compacted in 8 -inch layers to a density of not less than 98 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557, latest (AASHTO T180). 3.08 TRENCH EXCAVATION (SEE FIGURE 02220-1) A. The Contractor shall not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work. Four hundred (400) feet shall be the maximum length of open trench on any line under construction. All trench excavation shall be open cut from the surface. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover: The alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline shall be fixed and determined from offset stakes. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and the maximum joint deflection used in connection therewith shall be in conformity with requirements of the section covering installation of pipe. 2. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the Contract Drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of the pipe of 42 inches where in paved or graded streets where surface grades are definitely established and 36 inches in other locations. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves or to provide necessary clearance beneath existing pipes conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or pavement surface elevation. B. Limiting Trench Widths: Stipulated minimum sidewall clearances are not minimum average clearances but are minimum clear distances which will be required. 2. Cutting trench banks on slopes to reduce earth load to prevent sliding and caving will be permitted only in areas where the increased trench width will not interface with surface features or encroach on right-of-way limits. Slopes shall not extend lower than one foot above the top of the pipe. 3. Trenches shall be excavated to a width which will provide adequate working space and sidewall clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and embedment. However, minimum permissible sidewall clearances between the installed pipe and each trench wall, expressed in inches, shall be as follows: 02220-13 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_WW-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\to_Specs\IOB_90pereentWIV 02\02220 ExcavBackfildoc _ W J Zp m H H V) H W N W Q H F- i L Z W I- W z C�0 LQ H p p m m X J f- H H p W X m p U- S W O 0 C) H H H m J W W m I O N N N O Li H W p 2 F- U H U U Q LD U H J J V) U- H p Q Q W p J Q J CD w x g Z a- Q V) z w SU' p CD U - U Of d O F" a V) _ 2 p H U m W p m m :3 p WLi Q Q a Q `1 ~ui J d V) _ F- OW J J U Q W U W 1- O h UH d ZLLJ 0 a w H L- F- Q H v- V) O_ J O W Z m O V) O O Z L p O O Z U z Qp H z 0 H MLli U W w W Z W / ^ v/ H + z TT O H 1 (, o-- -- ---- - z p W N w W 031d0IONI SV 80 'NIW ..0-,£ _ _ � H p W 3NOZ 3NOZ Q CD z H JdvaN003SMOM8d ONI0039 U = F - W TF Lai H W W = 0— H v SNOIIV'OI3I03dS 33S IIIJNOVO lV'NIJ 3d03303 3dId sM Pipe Size Minimum Sidewall Clearance 60 24 54 21 48 19 36 or smaller 12 C. Mechanical Excavation: 1. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, and other existing property, utilities, or structures above or below ground. In all such locations, hand excavating methods shall be used. 2. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of the type, design, and construction, and shall be so operated, that the rough trench excavation bottom elevation can be controlled, that uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an elevation one foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench, and that trench alignment is such that pipe when accurately laid to specified alignment will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between the pipe and sidewalls of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance will not be permitted. D. Pavement Cutting: 1. Cuts in concrete pavement, asphalt pavement, and asphalt base pavements shall be no larger than necessary to provide adequate working space for proper installation of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting shall be started with an asphalt or concrete saw in a manner which will provide a clean groove for the full depth of pavement along each side of the trench and along the perimeter of cuts for structures. 2. Asphalt pavement and asphalt base pavement over trenches excavated for pipelines shall be removed so that a shoulder not less than 6 inches in width at any point is left between the cut edge of the pavement and the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be greater than at the top and no undercutting will be permitted. Pavement cuts shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines which, unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the centerline of the trench. 3. Pavement removed for connections to existing lines or structures shall not be greater than necessary for the installation as determined by the Engineer. E. Artificial Foundations in Trenches: Whenever so ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate to such depth below grade as the Engineer may direct and the trench bottom shall be brought to grade with such material as the Engineer may order installed. 02220-15 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_WN-2011URC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\loB_90Pereent\DIV 02\02220 ExcavBackMdoc All piling, concrete, or other foundations made necessary by unstable soil shall be installed as directed by the Engineer. Compensation for extra excavation and piling, concrete, or other foundations, except where provided by contract unit prices, shall be made in accordance with the contract provisions for extra work. F. Bell Holes: Bell holes shall provide adequate clearance for tools and methods used in installing pipe. No part of any bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom, trench walls, or granular embedment when the pipe is jointed. 3.09 TESTS A. As stipulated in the quality control section, all tests required for preliminary review of materials shall be made by an independent testing laboratory supplied by the Owner. Two initial gradation tests shall be made for each type of backfill material and one additional gradation test shall be made for each additional 500 tons of each material by the independent testing laboratory. Moisture -density (Proctor) tests and relative in place density tests on the materials, and all in-place field density tests, shall be made at the expense of the Owner. 3.10 DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE A. Trenches across roadways, driveways, walks, or other trafficways adjacent to drainage ditches or water courses shall not be backfilled prior to completion of backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the trafficway to prevent impounding water after the pipe has been laid. Bridges and other temporary structures required to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. All material deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the line of trench shall be removed immediately after backfilling is completed and the original sections, grades, and contours of ditches or water courses shall be restored. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary. 3.11 FINAL GRADING A. After other outside work has been finished, and backfilling completed and settled, all areas on the site of the work which are to be graded shall be brought to grade with the tolerance of ± 0.1 feet at the indicated elevations, slopes, and contours where seeding or sodding is not required or, where sodding is required within three (3) inches of finished grade. Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final grading and dressing of slopes, provided the result is uniform and equivalent to hand work. All surfaces shall be graded to secure effective drainage. Unless otherwise shown, a slope of at least one percent shall be provided. B. After grading and where seeding is required, topsoil shall be evenly spread to a minimum depth of six (6) inches. Topsoil shall be from an Engineer approved source and shall be 02220-16 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Wor ControAIO_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 02\02220 BxcavBackfddoc clear of trash, debris and surface vegetation more than six (6) inches in height. See Section 02920, Topsoil. C. Grading and surfacing shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.12 EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Insofar as needed, suitable excavated materials shall be used in fills and embankments shown on the Drawings. All suitable excess excavated material shall be placed at the stockpile area designated by the Owner or Engineer. B. The Contractor shall segregate different types of excavated materials (i.e. sands, clayey sands) as possible in the stockpile area. All debris, junk, stones, logs, stumps, roots, and other unsuitable materials may be disposed of by the Contractor in the sanitary landfill, but first must be weighed on the truck scales. C. The Contractor should slope and compact the stockpile with a light roller type vehicle to maintain stability. D. The Contractor shall maintain proper soil and erosion control measures. 3.13 SETTLEMENT A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all settlement of backfill, fills, and embankments which may occur within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions. B. The Contractor shall make, or cause to be made, all repairs or replacements made necessary by settlement within 30 days after notice from the Engineer or Owner. 02220-17 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_N W1V-20111IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor C0ntr01\10_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 02\02220 BxcavBackfilldoc 0 U N o t C4 Cd to 1 ~ ~ p ti tj A O U'rA ° cV iV N N iV N N— + + + + + + { A + A � A A Q A A A O O O O O O O O N A In In M M M M � � O O i i O O O O i i O O -V41 NVI 0 � b b w w b .ti � � � •y � .� 0 o 0 0 0 ° o to N W 0 0 0 0 5 L U U U U U U U U U L Ei U R �W a � U� W U A A A A CQ O A A A A A A O A O a z O O � O O O O O O N A o 0 0 (� 0 W p,, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a `ca `cC as u u u U U U U cC U Cd U d� d' A °� F4 Q om M oa U U U U U U U U U U U U U .a a o Cd Cd CIS z� z z� 0 z cu z z aI v ❑ v o00 v 00 o Tj Tj cqs a. A U a. w U vn a. U a �; U v� a o -0 "r ; N N • �" .� y U O p Q b 00 o + + o Sto a o > > a a O'� W .a bA r, ti -J •� ce � A o 0 o 0 0 _ °oN CIO, an W U U viAWUU a U w 4 p ani -00 `� o aea a .a o p�p 14"A' o -O w o 10 E-4 U Z .--i C's .O 7� �IP. cn oa ti °u'00 � N .O 4y l '� cC o� i H C) o o anti O C '° ° bn o U y 0 a a� aaio aC's a A ab .fl ai o k cn 4-0. N N 0 SECTION 02276 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Scope of Work: the work specified in this Section consists of designing, providing, maintaining and removing temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as necessary. B. Temporary Facilities: Temporary erosion controls include, but are not limited to, grassing, mulching, netting, watering, and reseeding on-site surfaces and spoil and borrow area surfaces and providing interceptor ditches at ends of berms and at those locations which will ensure that erosion during construction will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as established by the FDEP, water management district, or local regulatory agencies. 2. Temporary sedimentation controls include, but are not limited to, silt dams, traps, (� barriers, and appurtenances at the foot of sloped surfaces which will ensure that sedimentation pollution will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as established by the Owner and applicable permit conditions. 3. Contractor is responsible for providing effective temporary erosion and sediment control measures during construction or until final controls become effective. 1.02 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. Standard Building Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EROSION CONTROL A. Netting - fabricated of material acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer. 2.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Bales - clean, seedfree cereal hay type. B. Netting - fabricated material acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer. 02276-1 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_NVW-2011\ IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percenl\DIV 02\02276 Erosion ControLdoc C. Filter stone - crushed stone conforming to Florida Department of Transportation specifications. D. Concrete block - hollow, non -load-bearing type. E. Concrete - exterior grade, Class B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EROSION CONTROL A. Minimum procedures for grassing are: 1. Scarify slopes to a depth of not less than six inches and remove large clods, rock, stumps, roots larger than 1/2 -inch in diameter and debris. 2. Sow seed within 24 hours after the ground is scarified with either mechanical seed drills or rotary hand seeders. 3. Apply mulch loosely and to a thickness of between 3/4 -inch and 1 1/2 -inches. 4. Apply netting over mulched areas on sloped surfaces. 5. Roll and water seeded areas in a manner which will encourage sprouting of seeds and growing of grass. Reseed areas which exhibit unsatisfactory growth. Backfill and seed eroded areas. 3.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Install and maintain silt dams, traps, barriers, and appurtenances as necessary to prevent any contaminated water from leaving the project. Hay bales which deteriorate and filter stone which is dislodged shall be replaces. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Should any of the temporary erosion and sediment control measures employed by the Contractor fail to produce results which comply with the requirements of the FDEP, water management district, or others the Contractor shall immediately take whatever steps are necessary to correct the deficiency at his own expense. END OF SECTION 02276-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011URC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIv 02\02276 Erosion Controldoc SECTION 02932 SEEDING AND MULCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work consists of establishing a stand of grass at the locations shown on the Drawings. Also included are mulching, fertilizing, watering, and maintenance as required to produce a healthy stand of grass. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Certification: Certification of quality by producer shall be delivered to Engineer ten days prior to use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Seed: Grassing shall be in accordance with Section 570-1 through 570-3 of the DOT Specifications and as follows: 1. Grass seed shall be a mixture of 20 parts of Bermuda seed and 80 parts of Argentine Bahia seed. The separate types of seed used shall be thoroughly dry mixed immediately before sowing. Seed which has become wet shall not be used. 2. The Bermuda seed shall be of a common variety with a minimum pure seed content of 95% and a minimum germination of 85%. The Argentine Bahia seed shall be scarified seed, having a minimum pure seed content of 95% with an active germination of 40 percent and a total germination of 85 percent. All seed shall meet the requirements of the State Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services and all applicable state laws, and shall be approved by the Engineer before being sown. B. Commercial Fertilizer: 1. Commercial fertilizers shall comply with the state fertilizer laws. 2. The numeral designations for fertilizer indicate the minimum percentages respectively of (1) total nitrogen, (2) available phosphoric acid and (3) water soluble potash, contained in the fertilizer. 02932-1 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_\V_MV-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor ControRIO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02932 Seeding.doc 3. The chemical designation of the fertilizer shall be 18-12-8. At least 50 percent of the phosphoric acid shall be from normal super phosphate or an equivalent source which will provide a minimum of two units of sulfur. The amount of sulfur shall be indicated on the quantitative analysis card attached to each bag or other container. C. Water For Grassing: The water used in the grassing operations shall be obtained from the Owner once the plant irrigation system is substantially complete. Sodding operations shall not be made prematurely. Salt water and off-site water shall not be used. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Fertilizer Spreader: The device for spreading fertilizer shall be capable of uniformly distributing the material at the specified rate. B. Seed Spreader: The seed spreader shall be an approved mechanical hand spreader or other approved type of spreader. C. Rollers: A cultipacker, traffic roller, or other suitable equipment will be required for rolling the grassed areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Preparation Of Area To Be Seeded: The ground to be seeded shall be prepared by disc harrowing and thoroughly pulverizing the soil to a depth of 4 inches. The prepared soil shall be loose and reasonably smooth. It shall be reasonably free of large clods, roots and other material which will interfere with the work and subsequent mowing and maintenance operations. Hand picking may be required. B. Soil analysis: Before applying fertilizer, the soil pH shall be brought to a minimum range of 6.0 - 7.0. 3.02 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Grassing shall be in accordance with Section 570-4 through 570-5 of the DOT Specifications. 2. Mulching shall be in accordance with Section 570-4.6 of the DOT Specifications. 02932-2 U:RVO\Projects\IRC_W_MW-20111IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControA10_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 02\02932 Seeding.doc ( 3. Weather Limitations: Fertilizing, seeding or mulching operations will not be permitted when wind velocities exceed 15 miles per hour. Seed shall be sown only when the soil is moist and in proper condition to induce growth. No seeding shall be done when the ground is unduly wet, or otherwise not in a tillable condition. 4. Sequence Of Operations: The several operations involved in the work shall proceed in the following sequence: Preparation and fertilizing of the ground, seeding and rolling. B. Fertilizing: The fertilizer shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 400 to 500 pounds per acre, by a spreading device capable of uniformly distributing the material at the specified rate. Immediately after spreading, the fertilizer shall be mixed with the soil to a depth of approximately 4 inches. C. Seeding: While the soil is still loose and moist, the seed shall be scattered uniformly over the grassing area at a rate of 100 pounds per acre. 2. When so directed by the Engineer, seed of an approved quick growing species of grass, such as rye, Italian rye, millet or other cereal grass, shall be spread at a rate of 30 pounds per acre in conjunction with the permanent type seed mixture. D. Rolling: Immediately after completion of the mulching, the entire seeded and mulched area shall be rolled thoroughly with the equipment specified. At least two trips over the entire area will be required. E. Watering: The seeded areas shall be watered so as to provide optimum growth conditions for the establishment of the grass. In no case, however, shall the period of maintaining such moisture be less than 2 weeks after the planting. F. Maintenance: Grassing and mulching shall be maintained in accordance with Section 570-4.8 and 570-5 of the DOT Specifications. 2. The Contractor shall, at his expense, maintain the seeded areas in a satisfactory condition until final acceptance of the project. Such maintenance shall include the repairing of any damaged areas where the establishment of the grass stand does not appear to be developing satisfactorily, or where erosion has washed away an area and filling and leveling are required. 02932-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_1V \VN -201 BIRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02932 Seeding.doc 3, Replanting or repair necessary due to the Contractor's negligence, carelessness or failure to provide routine maintenance shall be at the Contractor's expense. Replanting necessary due to factors determined to be beyond the control of the Contractor shall be paid for under the appropriate contract pay items. G. Mowing: Provide initial mowing of the seeded areas when the grass reaches a height of 12 and then at a rate of 1 mowing per month during the growth months and once at the end of the project at final completion. END OF SECTION 02932-4 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\ IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_3pecs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02932 seeding.doc SECTION 02934 SOLID SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Permanent sodding at locations indicated on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO): A. Section 02932 — Seeding and Mulching B. Section 02950 - Landscape Planting C. Section 02920 — Topsoil D. Section 02820 - Irrigation System 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. B. Submit description of type grass and location from which harvested, for approval by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sod: Argentine Bahia grass sod. 1. Sod shall be well matted with root growth. 2. Unless otherwise directed by Owner, sod grass shall match the grass type adjacent to which it will be planted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLANTING B. Planting: 1. At time of planting, sod shall be live, fresh, and uninjured, with native soil f mat adhering firmly to root structure. 02934-1 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_N_1VW-2011VRC_MB_Tanks_OdorControl\lO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02934Sodding.doc 2. Pre -irrigate soil to wet it to a depth of 2 in. Soil should be damp, but not muddy. 3. Plant sod within 24 hours after it has been delivered to site. Do not leave it exposed to direct sun any longer than is necessary. 4. Roll-out sod or lay squares carefully. Use a 2 x 4 laid on its side as a "kicker" to butt against sod strips and force them into place. 5. Stagger joints. 6. Roll with lawn roller filled with water. It is important to get new sod into close contact with the soil by thorough rolling. 7. After laying and rolling, water area thoroughly and deeply. Keep sod well watered during the first two weeks after planting to insure good rooting into base soil. END OF SECTION 02934-2 U:\NVO\Projects\IRQ_W_NNV-2011\IRC—Ana—Tanks_Odor Control\I0_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 02\02934 Sodding.doc Fe TWIa Eel Ll (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide formwork for cast -in-place concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement B. Section 03250: Concrete Accessories C. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Florida Building Code 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete & Commentary 4. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork 5. ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 6. Local codes and regulations B. Contractor's Responsibility: For design of the formwork and for safety in its construction, use and removal. C. Tolerances: Construct formwork to insure that finished concrete surfaces will be in accordance with the tolerances listed in ACI 347. Provide camber as necessary to compensate for anticipated deflection in formwork and concrete due to weight and pressure of fresh concrete and other construction loads. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330, product data and other manufacturer's literature on form ties, spreaders, corner formers, form coatings and bond breakers 03100-1 U.kWOlProjectsllRC W_W W-2011URC_Ma Tanks_Odor Contron10_SpecsklOB_90percent\DIV 03/03100 Concrete Formwork-dgk.doc PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Douglas Fir or Larch or So. Pine, No. 2 grade, seasoned and surfaced on four sides. B. Plywood: Plyform, Class 1, BB -Exterior type, mill oiled and edge sealed, with thickness not less than 1/4 -inch. C. Medium Density Overlay (MDO) Plywood Forms: PS -1, B -B High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I, un -oiled. 1. Butt -form panels, make contact surface fully flush and seal butting holes with sponge form tape. Chamfer edges of beams and ceilings. 2. Where MDO plywood is used to form beams, use no piece of MDO plywood that has been patched or damaged. D. Drip Forms: Varnished ponderosa pine or equally rigid non -staining plastic 1/2 -inch wide on each leg. E. Steel Forms: Uncoated steel, 3/16 inch minimum thickness, fabricated to close tolerances, protected only by the specified release agent, braced so as not to bend, dent or dimple under wet concrete loads, vibrator impact, and tool impact. Maintain steel forms in rust -free condition by use of steel wool and light grinding, followed by coats of specified release agent. Use forms that can be adjusted into true alignment without stops or ridges. F. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Forms: Smooth coated forms, braced so as not to bend, dent or dimple under wet concrete loads, vibrator impact and tool impact, and at least 0.11 inch thick. Design forms for external bracing at piers and columns, without use of form ties. G. Plugged Cone Form Ties: Rod type, with ends or end fasteners which can be removed without spalling the concrete and which leave a hole equal in depth to the required reinforcement clearance. Form ties shall be of a design in which the hole left by the removed end or end fastener is easily filled to match the surface of the hardened concrete. Provide removable cones 11/4 -inches in diameter by 11/2 -inches deep. Provide preformed mortar plugs to match the color of the concrete, recessed 1/4 -inch, adhered with an approved two part epoxy. H. Circular and Elliptical Column Forms: Fabricate of two pieces, clamped watertight using gaskets and without horizontal joints. Install horizontal construction joints only where indicated or as directed by the Engineer. 03100-2 U:\NO\Proi"\IRC_W_NW-20111IRC_Ma Tanks—Odor ControAlO Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 03\03100 Concrete Formwork-dgk.doc I. Beam Forms: Provide in one length without form joints and suitable for cambering up to 1/160 of span without distortion of profile or opening of seams. J. Control Joint Filler: Use epoxy joint filler equal to BurkEpoxy Joint Filler to fill voids left by saw cuts and to resist against spalling caused by vehicle traffic in concrete slabs. K. Inserts: Galvanized cast steel or galvanized welded steel, complete with anchors to concrete and fittings such as bolts, wedges and straps. L. Shoring: As designed and executed by Contractor to support all loads. M. Chamfer Strips: Polyvinyl strips designed to be nailed in the forms to provide a 3/ -inch chamfer at exposed edges of concrete members. N. Form Release Agent: A blend of natural and synthetic chemicals that employs a chemical reaction to provide quick, easy and clean release of concrete from forms, and equal to Eucoslip, by the Euclid Chemical Company, or Release #1, by The Burke Company. Use a non -staining release agent that leaves the concrete with a paintable surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A. Contractor's Responsibility: The design, engineering, and construction of the formwork. B. Design watertight formwork in accordance with ACI 347 Chapter 1, to withstand the pressure resulting from the placement and vibration of the concrete, and which is sufficiently hard and rigid to resist indentation and scratching while maintaining tolerances, and with maximum deflection between form supports of 1/240 span length. Chamfer all exposed edges with 3/4" chamfer. 3.02 INSTALLATION/ERECTION A. Construction Of Formwork: Construct forms sufficiently strong to withstand the pressure resulting from the placement and vibration of concrete, sufficiently rigid to maintain specified tolerances, and sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar. Brace forms against lateral, upward or downward movement. B. Form Facing Materials: Use form -facing materials that produce a hard uniform texture on the concrete. Do not use facing materials with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Use facing materials with maximum deflection, as reflected in concrete surfaces not in excess of 1/240 of the span 03100-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC W_W1V-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControNIO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV03\03100ConmteFormwork-dgk.doc between structural members. Prevent formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects of finished concrete. C. Preparation of Form Surfaces: After each use and prior to placing reinforcing, clean forms of mortar, grout and other foreign material and apply the form release agent. Do not allow the form release agent to stand in puddles in the forms, to come in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed, or with reinforcing steel and items to be embedded. Reuse only forms, which maintain a uniform surface texture on exposed concrete surfaces. Apply light sanding between uses to obtain such uniform texture. Plug unused tie rod holes with corks, shave Rush and sandpaper on the concrete surface side. D. Adjustment: Provide positive means of adjustment of shores and struts to take up all settlement during concrete placing. E. Temporary Openings: Provide temporary openings in wall forms to limit the free fall of concrete to a maximum of 6 -feet unless an elephant trunk is used. Locate such openings to facilitate placing and consolidation, and space no more than 8 -feet apart. Provide temporary openings in the bottom of wall and column forms and elsewhere as necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately prior to placing. F. Construction Joints: At construction joints, overlap the contact surfaces of the form sheathing over the hardened concrete by not more than 1 -inch. Hold forms against the hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar. G. Chamfers: Provide chamfers where indicated herein or on the Drawings. H. Do not embed any form -tying device or part thereof other than metal in concrete. I. Form all surfaces of concrete members except where placing concrete against ground. Dimensions of concrete members shown on Drawings apply to formed surfaces, except where otherwise indicated. Add at least 2 inches of concrete where concrete is placed against trimmed undisturbed ground in lieu of forms. Limit placement of concrete against ground to footings and then only where ground can be trimmed to required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing. J. Runways: Provide smooth and rigid runways (if needed) for moving equipment and concrete. Support runways directly on formwork or on grade and in no case on reinforcing steel or bar supports. K. Form Removal: 1. Remove formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete only after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. Remove forms and 03100-4 U:\WO\Projects\ll2C_W WW-2011\IRC Ann Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV03\03100 Concrete Formwork-0gk.doc shoring supporting the weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other members only after the concrete has attained its specified 28 -day compressive strength. After last concrete is placed, do not remove forms, shoring and wall bracing before the following minimum periods: a. Sides of footings and encasements: 24 hours b. Walls not supporting load: 48 hours c. Vertical sides of beams, girders and similar members: 48 hours d. Slabs, beams and girders: 10 days (forms only) e. Shoring for slabs, beams and girders: When concrete reaches 3000 psi compressive strength. f. Wall bracing: When top or roof slab concrete reaches 3000 psi compressive strength. 2. Do not remove forms from concrete placed when outside air temperature is below 50°F without first determining if concrete has properly set without regard to time. Do not apply heavy loading on green concrete. L. Embedded Items: Set anchor bolts and other embedded items accurately and hold securely in position in the forms until the concrete is placed and set. Check all special castings, channels, or other metal parts that are to be embedded in the concrete prior to and again after concreting. Check all nailing, blocks, plugs and strips necessary for the attachment of trim, finish and similar work prior to concreting. Coordinate with other trades for items to be embedded in the concrete and not shown on Structural Drawings. M. Pipes and Wall Spools Cast in Concrete: 1. Install wall spools, wall flanges and wall anchors before placing concrete. Do not weld, tie or otherwise connect the wall spools to the reinforcing steel. 2. Support pipe and fabricated fittings to be encased in concrete on concrete piers or pedestals. Carry concrete supports to firm foundations so that no settlement will be possible during construction. N. Form Tolerances: 1. Tolerances or allowable variations from dimensions or positions of structural concrete work: 03100-5 U:\WO\Projem\IRC_W_NW-2011\IRC_Ma Tanks_OdorControT\10_Specs\tOB_Wpercent\DIV03\03100ConcreteFormwork-dgk.doc a. Sleeves and Inserts b. Projected ends of anchors c. Anchor bolt setting d. Finished concrete, all locations + i/a" to - i/a" +i/a" to -0" + 1/a" to - 1/a" + 1/a" to -1/a" in 10 feet of length 2. Planes or axes from which above tolerances are measured: Sleeves and Inserts: Centerline of sleeve or insert Projected ends of anchors: Plane perpendicular to end of anchor Anchor bolt setting: Centerline of anchor bolt Finish concrete: Concrete surface 3. Comply with equipment manufacturer's tolerances if more severe than above. END OF SECTION 03100-6 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W WW-2011\IRC_AnaTanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV03\03100 Concrete Formwork-dgk.doe SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide steel reinforcement for cast -in-place and precast concrete structures. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork B. Section 03250: Concrete Accessories C. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Florida Building Code 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement 4. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 5. ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 6. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1 7. Local codes and regulations 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01, the following: 1. Mill test certificates identifying chemical and physical analyses for each load of reinforcing steel delivered. 2. Bending lists and placing drawings for reinforcement. Indicate openings (mechanical, electrical, equipment), including additional reinforcing at openings and intersecting wall, beam and footing arrangements. Coordinate placing drawings with concrete placing schedule. Submit complete bending lists and 03200-1 U:\1VO\Projects\IRC_W WW-2011URC_Ma Tanks_OdorControRIO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV03\03200 Concrete Reinforcementdgk-Aw placing drawings together for each element of structure (grade slabs, footings, walls, deck, floor or roof slabs), including all dowels and other bars. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship reinforcement with bars of same size and shape fastened in bundles with metal identification tags giving size and mark securely wired on. Label identification tags with same designation as shown on bar lists and shop drawings. B. Store bars off ground. Protect from moisture and keep free from dirt, oil and injurious contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. B Metal Bar Supports: CRSI MSP -1, Chapter 3, Protected Bar Supports (capped or dipped), or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. Use concrete supports for reinforcement in concrete placed on grade. C Tie Wire: 16 -gauge minimum, black, soft annealed. D. Coupler Splice Devices: Cadweld tension couplers, capable of developing the ultimate strength of the bar as manufactured by Erico Products, Incorporated, Solon, Ohio, or equal. Use coupler splice devices only with the approval of the Engineer. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Do not commence fabrication until receipt of the shop drawings approval. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with all requirements of the specified standards and within CRSI tolerances, and unless otherwise indicated, with the following: 1. Provide standard hooks. 2. Extend bottom bars a minimum of 6 inches into supporting members or as shown or detailed in the Drawings. 3. Provide cover indicated to the outermost stirrup, tie or bar. 4. Provide splices where indicated on the Drawings and as per CRSI. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 03200-2 U:RV0\ProjeWVRC_W_WW-2011URC_Ann_Tanks_0dorControAl( Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV03\03200 Concrete Reinforcenwntdgk.doc A. Before placing, clean reinforcement of loose mill scale and rust, dirt and other coatings and contaminants that reduce or destroy bond. B. Supporting Reinforcement: Provide bar supports as required by CRSI MSP -1. Support top and bottom bars in slabs formed on earth on precast concrete block supports except where such bars are properly supported from formwork. Precast concrete block supports are not required in slabs formed on working mat concrete but may be used at the CONTRACTOR's option. C. Placing Reinforcement: Place reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric as indicated on the Drawings and as recommended by CRSI MSP -1 and ACI 315. Securely tie and support reinforcement to prevent displacement during concrete placement. D. Where splices are indicated on the Drawings, splice bars in slabs, beams and girders according to ACI 315. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, lap splices in reinforcement shall not be less than 47 bar diameters. Splice horizontal bars in circular structures (i.e., Sludge Holding Tank) with not less than 47 bar diameters. When splicing bars of different diameters, length of lap is based on the smaller bar. Stagger splices in adjacent bars when shown on the Drawings. E. Coupler Splice: Where shown on the Drawings and as approved by the Engineeer, provide full positive tension connections. Install such devices in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. F. Dowels: Wire dowels in position prior to placing concrete. G. Field Bending: Do not use heat to bend bars. Do not bend bars after being embedded in concrete. H. Welding: Welding of reinforcing will not be permitted. I. Place reinforcement a minimum of 2 inches clear of any metal pipe or fitting. J. Unless otherwise shown, install reinforcement with the following clearances for concrete coverage. 1. Beams and Girders: 2" outside of stirrups or ties 2. Solid Slabs: 1'/2" cover when there is no exposure to moisture 2" cover when placed against working slab 3" cover when placed against earth 3. Columns: 2" outside of ties 4. Walls: 2" to outermost reinforcement 03200-3 U:\1V0\ProjedsVRC W WN-2011VRC_Ana Tanks_OdorControAIO—Specs\I0B_90percent\DIV03\03200 Concrete Reinforcementdgkdoc 5. Grade Beams: 3" outside of stirrups, side and bottom, 2" top 6. Pile Caps and Foundations: 3" outside of steel, side and bottom, 2" top 7. Formed Structures in 2" outside of steel contact with soil or exposed to weather, water, sludge or sewage END OF SECTION 03200-4 U:\NO\ProjectsVRC_W WW-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControl\l0_Specs\IOB_Npercent\DIV03\03200ConcreteReinforcennant-dgk.doc SECTION 03250 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide accessories for cast -in-place concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork B. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement C. Section 03300: Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and samples in accordance with Section 01330. B. Submit product data on the following items. 1. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers and Sealers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Precast Concrete Block Supports For Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 315. Provide blocks with No. 4 dowels bent 900 to support top bars. B. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Bituminous type conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 994. 2. Non -extruding type, self -expanding cork, 3/ -inch thick or as otherwise shown on the Drawings, conforming to the requirements of ASTM D1752, Type III, and compatible with the specified joint sealant compound. C. Joint Sealant: A multipart, gray, polyurethane sealant meeting U.S. Federal Specification TT -S -00227E (3) Type 1, Class A self -leveling for horizontal joints, and Type II, Class A, non -sag for vertical joints, and recommended by the manufacturer for continuous immersion in water. Provide sealants as manufactured 03250-1 UAW0\Projects\1RC_)VW W-201 AIRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\l OB_90percent\DIV 03\03250 Concrete Accessories- dgk.doe by Products Research and Chemical Corporation, Mameco International, The Burke Company, W.R. Meadows, or equal. E. Inserts: Stainless steel to fit the proposed hanger or support. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Precast Concrete Block Supports For Reinforcing Bars: Provide in sufficient quantity to support reinforcing bars in slabs formed on earth at a spacing not to exceed 4 -feet on centers in both directions. Provide blocks with dowels to support top bars. Block supports are not required in slabs formed on tremi or working may concrete, but may be used at the Contractor's option. Blocks are not required for reinforcing bars properly supported from formwork. At other locations, refer to ACI 315 and CRSI MSP -1. B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints of size and at locations as shown on the Drawings. Place expansion joint fillers every 30 feet in straight runs of walkways, at right angle turns and wherever concrete butts into vertical surfaces, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants where indicated on the Drawings. Prepare surfaces, prime, prepare materials, all in complete compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 03250-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_WW-2011\IKC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 03\03250 Concrete Accessories- dgk.doc SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide cast -in-place concrete as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork B. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement C. Section 03250: Concrete Accessories 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 4. ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 5. Local codes and regulations B. Plant Qualification: Comply with all requirements of the Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities of the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association and ASTM C 94. C. Worker Qualification: Workers with at least 5 years experience in performing concrete work of high quality, including forming, color, texture and finishing and of the size and complexity of this project. D. Testing: 1. Provide testing in accordance with Section 01455. Keep the laboratory informed of testing schedule. 03300-1 U:\WO\ProjectsURC_N WW-2011URC_Ana Tanks_OdorControhlO_Specs\lOB_90percent\DW03\03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete-d&doc 2. Obtain standard laboratory compressive test cylinders as required by the laboratory when concrete is discharged from the mixer at the middle of the batch of concrete in the truck. Test cylinders will be made and cured by the laboratory in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 31, including a set of 6 cylinders for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof placed each day, for each type of concrete. The cylinders will be cured under laboratory conditions and will be tested in two groups of one at 7, three at 28 days of age and hold two for 56 day break, respectively in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 39. 3. Air entrainment tests shall be made by the laboratory when concrete is discharged from the mixer, for each pour or other volume of concrete for which a set of test cylinders is required in accordance with the previous paragraph. The amount of air entrained will be determined by either the pressure method or the volumetric method in accordance with ASTM C231 or ASTM C173, respectively. 4. The laboratory will make slump tests of Class A and Class B concrete as it is discharged from the mixer. Slump tests will be made of every batch of concrete placed, and failure to meet specified slump requirements will be sufficient cause for rejection of that batch. E. Evaluation and Acceptance Of Concrete: Evaluation and acceptance of concrete will be in accordance with ACI -318, Chapter 5. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01330. Plant Qualification: Submit satisfactory evidence indicating compliance with the specified qualification requirements. 2. Materials: Submit satisfactory evidence indicating that materials to be used, including cement, aggregates and admixtures meet the specified requirements. 3. Design Mix: Submit the concrete mixes to be used, as prepared by qualified persons. The design of the concrete mixes is the responsibility of the Contractor subject to the limitations of the Specifications. Define within the submittal where each mix design will be used; ie. mats, walls, filled cells, etc. 4. Submit, at least 24 hours before placing concrete, signed certification providing the following: a. Exact location and portion of structure to be placed; b. Date and time concrete is to be placed; 03300-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W \VW-2011VRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorCont A10Specs\10B_90percenMTV03\03300Castdn-Place Concrete-dgk.doc c. Type of concrete to be used (mix), and the method to be used in placing the concrete; d. Estimated quantity of concrete to be placed; e. That line and grade have been checked and grade properly compacted; f. That location, type, size and spacing of reinforcement has been checked and conform to the Drawings; g. That any water stops, construction joints, or seals have been placed and conform to the Drawings; h. That any embedded pipes have been placed, are the correct size and type and conform to the Drawings; i. That any embedded conduits, grounding wires or receptacles have been placed and conform to the Drawings; j. That any embedded anchor bolts, bearing plates, dowels etc. are in place, are of the correct size and are located as indicated on the Drawings; and k. That forms are properly located and adequately braced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Domestic Portland cement conforming to the requirements of ASTM C150 Type I or Type II. Construct sanitary sewer manholes, wet wells, pumping stations, and liquid containing structures exposed to water or wastewater with Type If cement. Use Type I cement for structures not exposed to wastewater or water. 2. Use only one brand of cement in any individual structure unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Do not use cement, which has become damaged, partially set, lumpy or caked and discard the entire contents of the sack or container, which contains such cement. Do not use salvaged or reclaimed cement. B. Aggregates: 1. ASTM C33: Coarse aggregates shall be size No. 57, 1 -inch to No. 4 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Use size No. 8 for filling of cells of masonry units. 03300-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC W_NW-2011\lRC_Ma Tanks_OdorControl\lo_Specs\lOB_90percent\DN03\03300 Cut-In-PlaceConcmtedgk.doc 2. In addition to requirements of ASTM C33, apply the following criteria for structures exposed to sewage: a. Soft particles: Not more than 2.0 percent b. Chert as a soft impurity (defined in Table 3 of ASTM C 33): Not more than 1.0 percent c. Total of soft particles and chert as a soft impurity: Not more than 2.0 percent d. Flat and elongated particles (long dimension more than 5 times short dimension): Not more than 15.0 percent C. Water: Potable quality, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials. D. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: 1. Concrete Without Superplasticizer: a. Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type A, equal to Eucon WR -75 by the Euclid Company, Pozzolith 20ON by Master Builders, Plastocrete 161 by Sika Chemical Corporation, and containing no calcium chloride. b. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type D, equal to Eucon Retarder -75 by the Euclid Company, Pozzolith 100 XR by Master Builders, Plastiment by Sika Chemical Corporation, and containing no calcium chloride. c. Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type C or E, equal to Accelguard 80 by the Euclid Company, Darex Set Accelerator by W.R. Grace, and containing no calcium chloride. 2. Concrete With Superplasticizer: a. Water Reducing, High Range Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type F or G, equal to Eucon 37 by the Euclid Company, Rheobild 716 by Master Builders, Daracem 100 by W.R. Grace, Sikament by Sika Chemical Corporation, and consisting of a second -generation admixture, free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those attributable to water) composed of a synthesized sulfonated complex polymer, enabling the concrete to maintain its rheoplastic state in excess of two hours if necessary. b. Manufacturer's Job Site Representation: Provide the services of a competent field service representative from the manufacturer of each of the admixtures selected for 03300-4 U:\WO\Projects\IRC W WW-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorContrOA10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV03\03300 Cast-In-PbeeConctete-dgkdoc use to provide at the job site advice and consultation on the use of the admixture materials, including the effect on the concrete in place, including recommending maximum discharge time for superplasticizer method and procedure to induce superplasticizer into mixer, quantities of admixtures to be used if variations are required because of temperature/humidity, wind, or other environmental considerations, and to be available on short call at any time requested by the Owner, Contractor, or concrete producer. F. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1 and Type 1D, Class A and Class B, containing no ingredient which would adversely affect the bond of coatings or toppings. For exposed concrete not to receive special finishes, protective coatings and/or concrete toppings, provide curing and sealing compound equal to Super Rez- Seal, by Euclid Chemical Co., or Burke Spartan -Cote Cure -Seal Hardener by The Burke Company. 2. For exposed concrete to receive special finishes, protective coatings and/or concrete toppings, provide curing compound equal to Kurez-DR, by Euclid Chemical Co., or Burke Rez-X Curing Compound by The Burke Company. G. Mortar for Repair of Concrete: Same materials as used for concrete, except omit coarse aggregate and use not more than one part cement to two and one-half parts sand by damp �( loose volume. Use no more mixing water than is necessary for handling and placing. H. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Euco #452, BurkEpoxy MV, Sikadur Hi Mod, Concresive 1001 -LPL, or equal. I. Powdered Epoxy Coating For Anchor Bolts: Powdered epoxy resin as manufactured by the 3M Company, Scotchkote No. 213, Armstrong No. R349, or equal. 2.02 MIXES A. General Requirements: Mix Design: Conform to ACI 318, Section 5.3. Submit data on consecutive tests and standard deviation. 2. Maximum Water -Cement Ratio: 0.37 (lbs/lb) - Class A and B concrete with superplasticizer 0.45 (lbs/lb) Class A concrete with or without superplasticizer 0.50 (lbs/ib) - Class B concrete without superplasticizer 0.75 (lbs/lb) - Class C concrete without superplasticizer 03300-5 U:\WO\Projects\IRC W WW-2011\IRC_Ana Tanks_odorControl\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV03\03300 Cast-In-PlaceConmtedgkAn 3. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent (Class A and B). 4. Slump: 4 -inches plus or minus 1 -inch for Class A and B without superplasticizer. 7 -inches plus or minus 1 -inch for Class A and B with superplasticizer. 8 -inches plus or minus 1 -inch for tremie/working mat concrete and Class C concrete. 5. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: Class A: 4,500 psi, for all structural concrete inclusive of liquid -containing (water and wastewater) structures, buildings and building components, pump stations, pipe supports, building slabs -on -grade and structural foundations. Class B: 3,500 psi, may be used for utility encasements, concrete fill, curbs, sidewalks, and miscellaneous concrete. Class C: 1,500 psi, shall be used for protection of waterstops and reinforcement connectors at future wall and slab extensions. This concrete is non-structural and shall be used specifically for encasement purposes as called for on the Drawings. B. Production Of Concrete: General: Use ready mixed concrete, batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Air Entraining Admixture: Add admixture into the mixture as a solution measured by means of an approved mechanical dispensing device, and as a part of the total mixing water. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Measure and add water reducing and retarding admixture as recommended by the manufacturer. Complete the addition of the admixture within one minute after addition of water to the cement has been completed, or prior to the beginning of the last three-quarters of the required mixing, whichever occurs first. Store, handle and batch admixtures in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 68. C. Delivery Tickets: Conform to ASTM C94, including cement content and water/cement ratio. Furnish ticket for each batch of ready -mixed concrete delivered to the site. D. Temperatures: Deliver concrete to site at temperature not higher than 90°F, otherwise, add ice to reduce the temperature, as recommended by ACI. E. Modifications To The Mix: Do not make modifications to the mix in the plant or on the job which will decrease the cement content or increase the water -cement ratio beyond that specified. 03300-6 U:\WO\ProjectsVRC_W WW-2011URC_Ma Tanks_OdorControl\IO_Specs\lOB_90pereent\DIV03\03300 Cut-In-PlaceCormtedgkAm PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Preparations Before Placing: Place no concrete until the approval of the Engineer has been received. Ensure that forms are thoroughly clean and reinforcing and all other items required to be set in concrete have been placed and thoroughly secured. Notify Engineer 24 hours before concrete is placed. B. Conveying: 1. General: Transport concrete from the truck to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients to maintain the quality of the concrete. Place no concrete more than 90 minutes after mixing has begun for that batch. 2. Buckets and Hoppers: Provide buckets and hoppers having discharge gates with a clear opening equal to no less than one-third of the maximum interior horizontal area or five times the maximum aggregate size being used, and having side slopes no less than 60 degrees. Provide controls on gates to permit opening and closing during the discharge cycle. 3. Runways: Provide runways as specified in Section 03100. Use extreme care to avoid displacement of reinforcement during the placing of concrete. 4. Elephant Trunks: Use hoppers and elephant trunks to prevent the free fall of concrete for more than 6 -feet. 5. Chutes: Provide metal or metal lined chutes having a slope not exceeding one vertical to two horizontal and not less than one vertical to three horizontal. Use chutes more than 20 -feet long and chutes not meeting the slope requirements only if they discharge into a hopper before distribution. 6. Pumping Equipment: If required, provide pumping equipment and procedures conforming to ACI 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. Measure slump at the point of discharge. Do not allow loss of slump in pumping to exceed 11/2 -inches. 7. Conveying Equipment Construction: Do not use aluminum or aluminum alloy pipe for tremies or pump lines and chutes, except for short lengths at the truck mixer. Cleaning: Clean conveying equipment at the end of each concrete operation. 3.02 APPLICATION 03300-7 U.\NVO\Projects\IRC W W W-2011\IRC_Ma Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DN 030300 Cas[ -In -Place Conmte-dgk.doc A. Placing: General: Deposit concrete continuously, or in layers of such thickness (not exceeding 2 -feet in depth) that no concrete will be deposited on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. Repair any such seams or planes of weakness with injected epoxy grout and patch to match adjacent surfaces. 2. Supported Elements: Allow at least two hours to elapse after depositing concrete in columns or walls before depositing in beams, girders, or slabs supported thereon. 3. Segregation: Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject the concrete to procedures, which cause segregation. Do not allow the concrete to free fall more than 5 feet. 4. Concrete Under Water: Place all concrete in the dry except for Tremie concrete. 5. Concrete Fill at Tank Bottom Slab: Where shown on the Drawings, place concrete fill for the tank bottoms within the tolerances described herein and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations for the clearance required by the mechanical equipment. Do not operate the mechanical equipment of the tanks as a primary screed for moving the concrete fill, except in the final screeding operation, provided any damage to the equipment is repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Seals and Tremie Concrete: 1. General: a. Wherever practicable, dewater all foundation excavations and deposit the concrete in the dry. Where conditions are encountered which render it impracticable to dewater the foundation before placing concrete, place a concrete foundation seal as shown on the Drawings. Then dewater the foundation and place the balance of the concrete in the dry. b. Place seal concrete in a manner to ensure satisfactory performance of the seal in providing a watertight excavation for subsequent placing of structural concrete. Repair or replace any seal concrete which subsequently fails to perform properly, as necessary to perform its required function, at no cost to the Owner. 2. Method of Placing: Deposit concrete under water by means of a tremie, a closed -bottom dump bucket of not less than one cubic yard capacity, or other approved method, in one continuous pour. Do not place concrete in running water. Provide watertight form work and excavation sheeting designed by a 03300-8 U:\WO\Projeds\IRC_W WW-2011\IRC_Ma_.Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DW03\03300 Cast-In-PlaceConemtedgk.doc Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Florida, for all form work required to retain concrete under water. 3. Use of Tremie: For depositing concrete under water, use a tremie consisting of a tube having a minimum inside diameter of ten inches, and constructed in sections having tight joints. Do not use aluminum parts in contact with the concrete. Ensure that the discharge end is entirely seated at all times and that the tremie tube is kept full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, slightly raise the tremie (but not out of the concrete at the bottom) until the batch discharges to the bottom of the hopper; then stop the flow by lowering the tremie. Support the tremie in such a manner as to permit the free movement of the discharge end over the entire top surface of the work, and to permit it being lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard the flow. Do not interrupt concrete flow until the work is completed. Use special care to maintain still water at the point of deposit. 4. Use of Bottom -dump Bucket: When the concrete is placed by means of a bottom -dump bucket, lower the bucket gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed. Then raise the bucket very slowly during the discharge travel; the intent being to maintain, as nearly as possible, still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. Aluminum buckets will not be permitted. 5. Time of Beginning Pumping: Do not start pumping to dewater a sealed cofferdam until the seal has set sufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure, and in no case earlier than 72 hours after placement of the concrete. C. Consolidating Concrete: General: Consolidate concrete by means of internal vibrators operated by competent workmen. 2. Vibrators: Use vibrators having a minimum head diameter of at least 2 -inches, a minimum centrifugal force of 700 -pounds and a minimum frequency of 8,000 vibrations per second. 3. Vibrators for Confined Areas: In confined areas, use additional vibrators having a minimum head diameter of llh-inches, a minimum centrifugal force of 300 -pounds and a minimum frequency of 9,000 vibrations per second. 4. Spare Vibrator: Keep one spare vibrator for each three in use on the site during all concrete placing operations. 5. Use of Vibrators: Insert and withdraw vibrators at points approximately 18 -inches apart. At each insertion operate vibrator for 5 to 15 seconds. Do not transport concrete in the forms by means of vibrators. 03300-9 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W WW-2011\IRC_Ana Tanks_OdorControhlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV03\03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete-dgk.doc D. Protection: Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or to damage the surface finish. Protect concrete from construction overloads and do not apply design loads until the specified strength has been attained. E. Construction Joints: Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide horizontal construction joints at top of foundation members and slabs on grade and at the soffit of supported slabs and beams. Locate other horizontal and vertical construction joints as indicated on the Drawings. Except in the locations shown, provide no other joints, unless otherwise recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. F. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has set, thoroughly clean the surfaces of the set concrete to expose the coarse aggregate and to ensure they are free of laitance, coatings, foreign matter and loose particles. Retighten forms. Dampen, but do not saturate hardened concrete of joints and then thoroughly cover with a coat of cement grout of similar proportions to the mortar in the concrete. Place the grout as thick as possible on vertical surfaces and at least 1/z -inch thick on horizontal surfaces. Place the fresh concrete before the grout has attained its initial set. G. Embedded Items: In addition to steel reinforcement, securely place pipes, inserts and other metal objects as shown, specified or ordered to be built into, set in or attached to the concrete. Take all necessary precautions to prevent these objects from being displaced, broken or deformed. Before concrete is placed, take care to determine that all embedded parts are firmly and securely fastened in place as indicated. Thoroughly clean surfaces free from paint and other coating, rust, scale, oil, and any foreign matter. Pressure test embedded pipes for leakage, as specified elsewhere, before concrete is placed. Wrap metal rainwater leaders, firelines and other such piping with at least two thicknesses of 301b. roofing felt before placing concrete. Do not embed wood in concrete. Pack concrete tightly around pipes and other metal work to prevent leakage and to secure perfect adhesion. Adequately protect drains from intrusion of concrete. H. Bonding To Existing Surfaces: Clean existing concrete surfaces that are to have new concrete bonded thereto of all grease, oil, dust, dirt and loose particles and coat with an epoxy bonding agent just prior to placing of the new concrete. Apply the bonding agent as recommended by the manufacturer and allow the agent to become tacky before the new concrete is placed. Do not allow the bonding agent to overlap or be spilled on the surfaces to be exposed after the work is completed. 3.03 FORM REMOVAL A. Maintain formwork in place for the following structural conditions until the concrete has attained the minimum percentage of indicated design compressive strength or for the period of time specified in the following table. 03300-10 UANV0\Pm*tsVRC W NW-2011\1RC_Ana_Ta*_OdorControl\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DW03\03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete-dgk.doe Note: Time periods in the table include all days except those in which the temperature falls below 40 degrees F. Over 20 feet between supports Stairways Floor slabs Free standing walls, column and piers Walls, piers, columns, sides of beams, footings, slabs on grade, and vertical surfaces Front face form of curbs 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHINGS A. Repair of Surface Defects: 12 days 10 days 5 days 5 days 6-24 hours 7 days 90 5 days 80 3 days 70 3 days 70 12-24 hours 70 6 hours 70 1. General: Repair surface defects (less than 1/2" deep), including tie holes immediately after form removal. Dampen the area to be patched and an area at least 6 -inches wide surrounding it to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. Notify the Engineer prior to commencing operations. 2. Removal of Defective Concrete: Remove all honeycombed (more than 1/2" deep) and other defective concrete down to sound concrete. Cut edges perpendicular to the surface or slightly under cut. Sand blast surfaces to receive repair. 03300-11 UAIVOTrojectsNRC_W) V-201 BIRC-AnaL Tanks Odor ContmAlO_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 03\03300 Cut -In -Place Concrete-dgkAoc Minimum Compressive Normal Strength for Structural Normal High -Early Form Removal Member or Strength Strength (% Design Condition Concrete Concrete Strength) Cantilevers 12 days 7 days 90 Over 20 feet between supports Stairways Floor slabs Free standing walls, column and piers Walls, piers, columns, sides of beams, footings, slabs on grade, and vertical surfaces Front face form of curbs 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHINGS A. Repair of Surface Defects: 12 days 10 days 5 days 5 days 6-24 hours 7 days 90 5 days 80 3 days 70 3 days 70 12-24 hours 70 6 hours 70 1. General: Repair surface defects (less than 1/2" deep), including tie holes immediately after form removal. Dampen the area to be patched and an area at least 6 -inches wide surrounding it to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. Notify the Engineer prior to commencing operations. 2. Removal of Defective Concrete: Remove all honeycombed (more than 1/2" deep) and other defective concrete down to sound concrete. Cut edges perpendicular to the surface or slightly under cut. Sand blast surfaces to receive repair. 03300-11 UAIVOTrojectsNRC_W) V-201 BIRC-AnaL Tanks Odor ContmAlO_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 03\03300 Cut -In -Place Concrete-dgkAoc 3. Bonding Grout: Thoroughly dampen surfaces to be patched and apply a coat of bonding grout consisting of one part cement to one part fine sand passing a No. 30 sieve and having the consistency of thick cream. 4. Placing Patching Mortar: After the bonding grout begins to lose its water sheen, apply a premixed patching mortar, thoroughly consolidating it into place and striking it off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. Leave mortar undisturbed for one hour to permit initial shrinkage and then finally finish. 5. Tie Holes: After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, fill the tie holes solid with patching mortar. B. Concrete Finishes: 1. Formed Surfaces: After removal of forms, chip off all irregular projections, grind flush with adjacent surfaces and finish concrete surfaces in accordance with the following schedule: Finish Designation Area Ap 1p ied F-1 Exterior walls below grade not exposed to water: Repair defective concrete, fill depressions deeper than 1/2 -inch, and fill tie holes. F-2 Exterior and interior walls exposed to water: Repair defective concrete, remove fins, and fill depressions 1/a -inch or deeper, and fill tie holes. F-3 Walls of structures of buildings exposed to view and underside of formed floors or slabs: In addition to Finish F-2, fill depressions and airholes with mortar. Dampen surfaces and then spread a slurry consisting of one part cement and one and one-half parts sand by damp loose volume on the surface with clean burlap pads or sponge rubber floats. Remove any surplus by scraping and then rubbing with clean burlap. F-4 Tops of walls, beams and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces: Strike smooth after concrete is placed and float to a texture reasonably consistent with that of formed surfaces. 2. Slab Surfaces: 03300-12 U:\\VO\Projects\IRC W \V\V-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorContml\10_Specs\1013_90percent\DIV03\03300 Cast-In-PlaceConcretedgk.doc a. General: After concrete has been consolidated, finish all concrete slabs with a floated finish. After floating, trowel finish all concrete slabs, except for areas to receive roofing, insulation, tile or topping, and immediately light broom finish. Where a finish is not indicated, provide a troweled finish. Finish Designation Area Applied S-1 Slabs and floors not water bearing: Smooth steel trowel finish. S-2 Slabs and floors which are water bearing and slab surfaces on which mechanical equipment moves: Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks and all irregularities. S-3 Slabs, floors and stair treads of structures or buildings exposed to view: Steel trowel finish without local depressions or high points and apply a light hair -broom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or brushes. Leave hair -broom lines parallel to the direction of slab drainage. S-4 Slabs and floors at slopes greater than 10%: Steel trowel finish without local depressions or high points. Apply a stiff bristle broom finish. Leave broom lines parallel to the direction of slope drainage. S-5 Exposed edges of slabs, floors and tops of walls: Finish with a'/a-inch radius edge if a chamfer is not indicated. b. Floated Finish: After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and leveled, do not work the surface further until water sheen has disappeared and the surface has hardened sufficiently to permit floating. During the first floating, check the plane of the slab with a 10 -foot straight edge applied at no less than two angles. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots to produce a surface having the required tolerance. Then re -float the slab to a uniform sandy texture. c. Light Broomed Finish: After floating, power trowel slabs to receive a light broomed finish to produce a smooth surface, relatively free of defects. Before the surface sets, pass a soft broom drag over the surface to produce a surface uniform in texture and appearance. d. Troweled Finish: After floating, power trowel slabs to receive a troweled finish to produce a smooth surface, relatively free of defects. Hand trowel after the surface has hardened sufficiently. When a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved 03300-13 UANVO\Projects\IRC_W WW-2011\IRC Ana_Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\lOB_90pereenmry 03\03300CW-M-Place Concrete-dgk.doc over the surfaces, perform final troweling by hand to produce a surface which is thoroughly consolidated, free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and plane to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 -foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. e. Hardener Finish: Where indicated to receive a troweled hardener finish, water cure slabs without application of curing and sealing agent. When slab is at least 28 days old and thoroughly dry, apply the hardener in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where dry -shake hardener or slip -resistant finish is required, apply the hardener or slip -resistant product prior to complete curing and finishing, in accordance with the requirements and recommendation of the product manufacturer. f. Saw Cut Joints: Cut joints that are to be saw cut not sooner than 2 hours after the concrete is poured and not later than 8 hours after the pour. 3.05 PROTECTING A. Curing: 1. Immediately after surface defects have been repaired, apply a spray coat of curing compound to all exposed surfaces, including slabs, walls, beams and columns in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Protect exposed steel keyways and other embedded items from the curing compound. Cure all concrete surfaces that are to be exposed to wastewater, surfaces that are to be coated with a coal tar epoxy system, and concrete floors requiring a bond for special finishes. 2. Do not apply curing compound during periods of rainfall. Should the film become damaged from any cause within the required curing period, immediately repair the damaged portions with additional compound. Upon removal of forms, immediately coat the newly exposed surfaces to provide a curing treatment equal to that provided for the surface. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Use clear compound conforming to Federal Specification TT -C -800A, 30% solids content minimum, having test data from an independent laboratory indicating a maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per sq. cm. when applied at a coverage rate of 300 sq. ft. per gallon, and equal to Super Floor Coat or Super Pliocure by The Euclid Chemical Company or Masterseal 66 by Master Builders. Furnish manufacturer's certification as required. 4. Apply specified clear curing and sealing compound to all horizontal areas as noted on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Apply immediately after final finishing. Apply this compound to non-structural construction joints of slabs on grade to act as a bond breaker prior to placement of adjacent concrete. 03300-14 U:\WO\Pmkds\IRC_W\VW-2011URC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV03\03300 Cast-In-PlxeConcretedgk.doc END OF SECTION 03300-15 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W \VN-2011\IRC_Ana Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV03\03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete-dgk.doc [7W, P:Ius] Z ! ►Yi/_ OIN:�'1 SECTION 04000 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all materials, equipment and labor required to complete the concrete masonry walls and partitions including concrete masonry units, precast concrete formed units, face brick and miscellaneous masonry items in accordance with the Drawing and Specifications. Properly coordinate all work with that of other trades. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 04230, Reinforced Unit Masonry 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the services of qualified and licensed masons and brick layers with at least five years experience in installations of a similar nature. B. Where a fire -resistance classification is required, provide concrete masonry units and mortar as tested and listed for the particular construction in accordance with ASTM E 119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization. C. Furnish masonry units obtained from one manufacturer, cured by one process, of uniform color and texture, without spalls, chips or other deficiencies that impair strength and/or appearance, and conforming to the physical requirements of the Florida Building Code and to Florida Concrete and Products Association, CM -1 Guide Specifications for hollow regular concrete masonry units, modular dimensions. D. Perform laying, finishing and grouting of masonry work in accordance with the requirements of the American Concrete Institute, ACI 530, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, and ACI 530. 1, Specifications for Masonry Structures. E. Provide mortar materials and mortar application in compliance with the recommendations of the National Lime Association and Portland Cement Association. 04000-1 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_N_NW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\IO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DN 004000 Unit Masomy.doe 1.04 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation From Plumb: 1. For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises, do not exceed the following: a. 1/4" in 10 feet. b. 3/8" in any story height, maximum 1 inch overall. c. 1/2" in 40 feet or more. 2. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed the following: a. 1/4" in any story, maximum 1/2 inch overall. b. 3/8" in 40 feet or more. 3. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed 3/8" in 10 feet. B. Variations from Level: 1. For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed the following: a. 1/4" in any bay, maximum 1 inch overall. b. 1/2" in 40 feet or more. 2. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10 feet or 1/16" within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed the following: 1. 1/2" in any bay, maximum 20 feet. 2. 3/4" in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in Cross -Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, do not exceed minus 1/4" or plus 1/2" from dimensions shown. 04000-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC N_W W-2011\IRC_fvia_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 04\04000 Unit Masonry,doc E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed indicated bed joint thickness by more than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed indicated head joint thickness by more than plus or minus 1/8". 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver masonry units and mortar materials to the site undamaged, on pallets, stacked to allow air circulation and covered and protected from rain, ground water, soilage, stainage, or intermixture with earth or other materials. B. Store mortar materials off the ground, under cover using tarpaulins, felt paper, or polyethylene sheets, and in a dry location. Remove damaged materials from the site and replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, product data, manufacturer's technical information and instructions for each manufactured product. B. Certification: 1. Submit manufacturer's written certification that the concrete masonry units meet or exceed all the requirements set forth in this Section. 2. Submit the grout mix design. C. Shop Drawings, Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of wall reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. C. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. D. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout or mortar in contact with such 04000-3 masonry. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surfaces. E. Protect sills, ledges and projections from dropping of mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Provide concrete masonry units having nominal face dimensions of 16" long by 8" high, smooth textured, sound and free from cracks, chipped edges or other defects that would interfere with proper setting or impair strength or durability of the construction. Use units of special shapes and sizes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers and other special conditions as required to complete the work shown. Where units are to be exposed on the interior of the building, use units free of surface defects that would be noticeable and objectionable at a distance of 12 -feet from the finished wall. B. Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: Provide units conforming to ASTM C90, Type -I, of normal weight units, with a minimum net area compressive strength of 4,800 psi. (Net area compressive strength of masonry with Type M mortar, f'm, shall be 3,000 psi.) C. Deliver units to the job site in an air-dry condition and protect them at the job from ground water and rain prior to and during construction of the walls. Provide units that are suitably aged at time of delivery to meet linear shrinkage potential requirements of ASTM C 426. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type H, non -staining, without air entrainment and of natural color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. C. Premix Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type M. D. Aggregate: 1. For Mortar: ASTM C144. 2. For Grout: ASTM C404. E. Water: Potable water free of deleterious materials which would impair the strength or bond. 04000-4 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ConlroAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 04\04000 Unit Masomydoc F. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. G. Waterproofing: Sec No. 1, Atlas Chemical Co., Miami, FL, Master Builders Stearox or equal. 2.03 ANCHORS AND TIES A. Zinc coated steel or copper coated steel. Provide anchors and ties as indicated on the Drawings, or as required for installation of various items. Provide anchors of the type best suited for the situation. B. Metal Wall Ventilator: Stamped aluminum alloy, Wilko Weephole AA224 by AA Wire Products Company, or equal. 2.04 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Dur -O -Wal Lader, 8 -gauge, ladder type, Hohmann & Barnard Lox -All No. 8, or equal. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. Concealed Flashings: 3 oz. copper sheet laminated between 2 sheets of bituminous impregnated creped kraft paper or saturated felt, and equal to Cop -A - Bond Duplex by AFCO Products, Inc., Cop -R -Tex Duplex by York Manufacturing, Inc., or Copper Armored Sisalkraft by Fortifiber Corp. C. Cold -Applied Asphalt Cut -Back Damproofing Material: Asphalt and solvent compound, compounded to penetrate substrate and build to firm, moisture - resistant, vapor -resistant, elastic coating. Provide heavy fibrated-type mastic compound complying with ASTM D 2822, Type I and containing nonasbestos inorganic fibrous reinforcement materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Construct all work plumb and true and built accurately to dimensions shown. Provide and place such special units as required to form all corners, returns, offsets and maintain proper bond. Where interior concrete masonry partitions meet other interior partitions or exterior walls, provide a masonry bond or the equivalent in approved metal ties. 04000-5 U:\NO\Projects\IRC_W W W-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor ControA10_Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV 04\04000 Unit Masonry.doc 3.02 BOND A. Lay all masonry units, except decorative screen masonry units, in running bond by lapping units in successive courses a distance of one-half a unit. Lay all courses level with joints of uniform width and finished flush. Provide full mortar coverage of the face shells in both the horizontal and vertical joints. Point all joints solid with mortar on both sides of wall. Firmly compact joints in exposed work with a pointing tool when partially set. 3.03 MORTAR MIX A. Proportion mortar by volume, in accordance with Florida Concrete Products Association "Mortar Requirements - Table 2" for Type M mortar, as follows: Mortar Type M _ M Portland Cement 1 1 Masonry Cement 1 (Type 11) - Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty - 1/4 Aggregate, Damp, Loose 2 1/2 min. to 3 max. combined volumes above Aver. Comp. Strength at 28 days 2500 2500 B. Use all mortar and grout within 30 minutes of initial mixing and discard any that has begun to set. Retempering of mortar in which setting has started will not be permitted. Mortar may be retempered as necessary to keep it plastic, providing it has not begun to set or older than 30 minutes. 3.04 CUT UNITS A. Cut all odd size masonry units in a finally exposed wall with suitable power driven masonry saw. Chipping of units will not be permitted. 3.05 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement throughout exterior masonry walls, 16 -inches o.c. vertically. 3.06 FRAMES, MULLIONS AND SPACES A. Fill solidly with grout all hollow metal frames, mullions and spaces around built-in items. 04000-6 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011VRC_Ma Tanks_Odor ControA10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 04\04000 Unit Masonry.doc 3.07 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1 foot are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels, provide precast or formed -in-place masonry lintels. Thoroughly cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed -in-place lintels. B. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units with reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with grout of consistency required to complete fill space between reinforcing bars and masonry unit. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses. B. Build in flanges of factory -fabricated expansion joint units. C. Provide joint fillers where shown, and as specified in Section 07920. Joint width for sealants shall be 3/8" unless otherwise indicated. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect partially completed masonry against the weather, when work is not in progress, by covering the tops of walls with strong, waterproof, non -staining membrane extending at least 2 feet down both sides of walls and held securely in place. B. Protect exposed masonry surfaces against staining. Remove misplaced mortar immediately. 3.10 REPAIR AND POINTING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weepholes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints or corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. 04000-7 U:RVO\Projects\IRC_W_W\V-2011\IRC_Ma Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 04\04000 Unit Masomydoc 3. 11 CLEANING A. Clean mortar drippings from exposed masonry and adjacent surfaces as soon as possible to prevent surfaces from being permanently stained. Remove drippings and smears before mortar sets or hardens. Remove mortar extruded beyond face of walls or partitions. B. Clean face brick by means of bucket and brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 (revised) using the following masonry cleaner: 1. Job -mixed detergent solution. 2. Job -mixed acidic solution. 3. Proprietary acidic cleaner applied in compliance with directions of the manufacturer. END OF SECTION 04000-5 U:RVO\Projects\IRC_W \V1V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 04\04000 Unit Masonry.doc SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY C PART 1 - GENERAL 101 WORK INCLUDED complete the reinforced unit eqent and labor required to comps and Specifications. ui m with the Drawing A. Provide all materials, In l accordance masonry construction work with that of other tr Coordinate allades. 102 RELATED WORK A. Section 04000: Unit Masonry 03 SUBMMALS in accordance with Section 01330. 1,xes, etc., Submit shop drawings, product data, mi A Sbar lists and placement drawings• Submit complete shop drawings, including B • steel. C. Submit mill test certificate for reinforcing C� PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATEgIAIS materials and accessories not included ction 04000 for masonry A. General: Refer to Se in this Section. 615, Grade 60, deformed. Reinforcing Steel: AS Designation A B, as follows: ct all walls of reinforced concrete masonry ht units, with a C. Constru C90 Ty normal weight ASTM e I' Net area compressive Units: of 4,800 psi. 1. Concrete Masonry ressive strengthf m> shall be 3,000 psi.) miumum net area wi h Type M mortar, strength of masonry 2 premix Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type M on the Drawings 3, Vertical Reinforcing: with a mi Provide as shown 'nimum 28-da� ea rock mix 4 Concrete Grout for Filling Cells: 318 -inch p compressive strength, f' c, of 3,000 psi 04230-1 2011\IRC_Ma T hoc ContmMO_Specs\10B_90Pateenl\DN 04 230 Rei o U Mho .dam 5. Horizontal Reinforcing: Galvanized, 8 -gauge ladder -type at 16" on center. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. B. Place reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1 -inch, whichever is greater. C. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as shown, but not less than 1-1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1-1/2 inches, whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as shown. D. Splice reinforcement bars only as shown. Do not splice at other points unless C approved by the Engineer. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, tie splices with wire. E. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as required by governing code. F. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/8 -inch on exterior face of walls and'/2-inch at other locations. G. Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform general installation of unit masonry in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 04000. B. Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erection, support, bracing and maintenance of formwork are the Contractor's responsibility. C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). 04230-2 U.\NV0Trojects\IRC W_NN-201 I\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\l0_Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV 04\04230 Reinforced Unt Matonry.doc D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. Do not remove forms and shoring supporting the weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other members until concrete has attained its specified 28 -day compressive strength. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. General: 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Place CMU with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths as shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8 -inch joints. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay units with full mortar head and bed joints. B. Walls: 1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections and use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. 2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. 3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. 4. Option: Where all vertical cores are not shown to be grouted, Contractor may elect to fill all vertical cores with grout, in which case, requirements for 04230-3 UAWO\Proi"\IRC W W V.2011\IRC_Ma_Ta*k _Odor Control\IO_Specs\IOB_Wpercent\DIV 04\0.1230 Reinforced Un8 Masonrydoc mortar bedding of cross -webs and closing of core spaces below bond beams will not apply. C. Columns, Piers, and Pilasters: 1. Use CMU of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces shown. If not shown, provide units which provide minimum clearances and grout coverage for number and size of vertical reinforcement bars shown. 2. Provide pattern bond as shown, or if not shown, provide alternate head joints in vertical alignment. 3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, construct wall and pilaster units together to the maximum pour height specified. D. Grouting: 1. Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 4 -inches in both horizontal directions. 2. Use course grout for filling 4 -inch spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. 3. Grouting Technique: At the Contractor's option, use either low -lift or high -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow. E. Low -Lift Grouting: 1. Provide a minimum clear dimension of 2 -inches and clear area of 8 -sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend vertical reinforcement above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing and support it in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters or 10 feet. 3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Limit pour height to 5 feet. If bond beam occurs below the 5 feet height stop pour at course below bond beam. 4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute and rod or vibrate during placing. Place grout continuously. Do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1'/2 -inches below top course of pour. 04230-4 U:\1VO\Projects\TRC_W WN-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControAIO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 04\04230ReirdorcedUn@Masonry.doc 5. Bond Beams: Terminate grout in vertical cells 11/2 inches below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beams with corners and intersections lapped as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. F. High -Lift Grouting: 1. Do not use high -lift grouting technique for grouting of CMU unless minimum cavity dimension and area is 3 inches and 10 -sq. in., respectively. 2. Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which are to be filled with grout. Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for units above, or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one face shell. 3. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing grout. 4. Limit grout lifts to a maximum height of 5 feet and grout pour to a maximum height of 12 feet, for single wythe hollow concrete masonry walls, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Place vertical reinforcement before grouting. Tie vertical reinforcement to dowels at base of masonry where shown and thread CMU over or around reinforcement. Support vertical reinforcement at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. 6. Where reinforcement is prefabricated into cage units before placing, fabricate the units with vertical reinforcement bars and lateral ties of the size and spacing shown. 7. Place horizontal beam reinforcement as the masonry units are laid. 8. Embed lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints where shown as masonry units are laid. 9. Where lateral ties are shown in contact with vertical reinforcement bars, embed additional lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints. Place as shown, or if not shown, provide as required to prevent grout blowout or rupture of CMU face shells, but provide not less than No. 2 bars or 8 -gage wire ties spaced 16 inches o.c. for members with 20 inches or less side dimensions, and 8 inches o.c. for members with side dimensions exceeding 20 inches. 10. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean out the grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry 04230-5 U:\WO\Projects\IRC W W\V-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControhIO_Specs\IOS_40percent\DW04\04230 Reinforced Unit Masonry.doc and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. 11. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 12. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Engineer. 13. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow not less than 30 minutes or more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod ox vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. 14. Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour 15. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1 -inch of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 16. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 11/2 -inches of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. END OF SECTION 04230-6 U:\1VO\Proj"'JRC W W W-2011\IRC Ana Tanks_Odor controAlO_Specs\ioB_90percent\DLV 04\04230 Reinforced Un6 Masonry.doc DIVISION (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1- -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, fabricate and erect structural steel and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 05500, Miscellaneous Metals B. Section 09900, Painting 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings, conform to the applicable requirements of the following reference standards and codes which are hereby made a part of this Section, as they relate to structural steel work. 1. Florida Building Code 2. AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings 3. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 4. AWS, Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1 5. ASTM A 6, General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet and Bars for Structural Use 6. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), Surface Preparation Specifications B. Welder Qualification: For welding in shop and field use only welders holding evidence of qualification under AWS procedures for the type of weld involved and who hold current Sarasota County certificates. Perform welding procedures and welding operations in accordance with AWS Code. 05120-1 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-201I\IRC_Ma Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOS_90percent\DIV 05\05120 Structural Steel.doc C. Source Quality Control: 1. Give the Engineer at least 10 days notice prior to the beginning of work at the mill or shop where material for the work is to be manufactured or fabricated, in order that inspection may be arranged. Do not fabricate material until inspection has been performed or is waived by the Engineer. 2. Cooperate with the Engineer to ensure that the inspection work is properly carried out during all stages of construction. 3. Perform radiographic and magnetic particle inspection in accordance with the provision of AWS, as required by the Engineer. 4. Cut and machine test specimens in accordance with ASTM A370, as required by the Engineer. 5. Test a random selection of at least five bolts from each bin of bolts to be used, as required by the Engineer. D. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Structural Members, General: a. Fabricate structural members which consist primarily of a single rolled shape, to be straight within the appropriate tolerances allowed by ASTM A 36 or as otherwise indicated. b. Fabricate built-up structural members assembled by bolting or welding, to be straight within the tolerances allowed for wide flange shapes by ASTM A 36 or as otherwise indicated. c. Maintain the straightness of compression members within 1/1000 of the axial length between points which are laterally supported. 2. Setting of Anchor Bolt Sleeves, Shear Key Blockouts and Shear Key Sleeves: Locate the sleeves accurately enough to ensure that the amount of adjustment permitted by moving the bolts or shear keys within the sleeves is sufficient to allow proper centering of the bolts and shear keys. E. Stock Material: 1. When it is proposed to use stock material, advise the Engineer of such intention at least 10 days in advance of commencing fabrication to permit sampling and testing. 05120-2 UANVOlProjectsVRC_W_\V W -20l IVRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControA1O_SpeallOB_90percenl\DW 05\05120 Structural SteeLdoc 2. Use only stock materials which can be positively identified as having been rolled from a given heat and for which certified mill tests can be produced. F. Welder's Identification Mark: 1. Assign each welder and welding operator an identification mark to stamp on the pieces he has welded in the shop and in the field. 2. Have the welder or welding operator place his identification mark by metal die stamp in letters 3/8 inch high in the position that the identification of the welder or operator will appear adjacent to each of his welds in the finally assembled members for ready reference to the radiographic films and identification by the Engineer. G. Material Acceptance: Replace rejected material promptly and make good rejected workmanship at no cost to the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01330, complete shop drawings, details, erection drawings and certifications for review prior to beginning fabrication. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are to be embedded in the work of other trades to the project site in sufficient time to permit their timely installation. Provide proper setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of these times. B. Store structural steel members above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and avoid bending, scraping and overstressing the incumbers. Store all fasteners and welding electrodes in a weather -tight and dry place until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original containers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, unless otherwise noted on drawings. B. Steel, Pipe, Welded and Seamless: ASTM A 53, unless otherwise noted on drawings. 05120-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_MV-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV 05\05120 Structural Steel.doc 1. Electric -Resistance Welded: Type E, Grade B (Fy = 35 ksi) , unless otherwise noted on drawings. 2. Seamless: Type S, Grade B (Fy = 35 ksi) , unless otherwise noted on drawings. C. Structural Tubing, Carbon Steel, Welded and Seamless: 1. Cold -Formed: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46 ksi) , unless otherwise noted on drawings. D. Bolts: 1. Anchor Bolts — Type 304 Stainless Steel 2. Structural Steel - Type 304 Stainless Steel E. Welding Electrodes: Appropriate Series, conforming to AWS Code for method employed. F. Shop Paint Primer: Lead-free, low VOC, rust inhibitive metal primer compatible with the intermediate and top coats specified in Section 09900. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Meet all requirements of the specified standards. B. Zinc coat structural steel after fabrication in conformance with ASTM A 123. C. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Do all shearing and flame cutting carefully and accurately using machine equipment where at all possible. D. Weld connections or bolt as indicated. " Weld shop connections not otherwise shown. Eccentric connections are not permitted unless shown in detail on the Structural Drawings. E. Drift pins may be used for assembling parts provided metal is not distorted or holes enlarged. Ream holes requiring enlargement to admit bolts. Misaligned holes will subject members to rejection. F. Use of gas cutting torch will be allowed where metal being cut is not carrying stress during the operation and provided stresses will not be transmitted through a flame- cut surface. Make cuts smooth and regular in contour. Cuts exposed in the finished work shall be ground and dressed smooth without nicks or gouges. To ( determine effective width of members so cut, deduct 1/8 -inch from least width at 05120-4 UANV0\Prcjects\IRC_W 1VW-2011\IRC_Ma Tanks_Odor ControAIO_Specs\IOB_90percentWIV 05\05120 Structural Steel.doc << gas cut edge. Make radius or re-entrance of cut fillets as large as practical, but in no case less than 1/2 -inch. All such cuts are subject to prior approval of the Engineer. Do not use cutting torch to align bolt holes. G. Shop Cleaning and Painting: 1. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean all loose mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from structural steel items. Prepare surfaces for painting in accordance with SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning or SSPC-SP8, Pickling, or as otherwise recommended by the coating manufacturer. 2. Painting: Except where encased in concrete or secured as contact surfaces in joints connected by high strength bolts, apply one shop coat of primer, all as per paint manufacturer's specifications for application and coverage. Do not shop paint surfaces to be field welded. Prior to assembly give two coats of shop paint to parts inaccessible after assembly. Provide shop paint conforming with and compatible with the coating system specified in Section 09900. Coat non -painted bearing surfaces with an approved rust preventative applied in the shop. Remove such coating immediately prior to field erection, using a remover approved by the coating manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Before starting work, verify locations and elevations of bearings and anchor bolts. Ensure accurate bearing of steel and correct location of anchorage. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in accordance with the requirements of the specified standards. B. Weld or bolt field connections as indicated. C. Bolting: 1. As erection progresses, bolt up work to take care of all dead loads, construction live loads, lateral forces and erection stresses. 2. Unless otherwise noted, erection bolts used in welded construction may be either tightened securely and left in place or removed and the holes filled with plug welds. 05120-5 U.\IVO\Projects\IRC_W_W1V-201 IHRC_Ma_Tanks_Nor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 05\05120 Structural Steel.doc D. Temporary Bracing: Provide temporary bracing wherever necessary to provide for all loads to which structure is subjected including erection equipment and its operation. Leave in place until no longer required for safety. Make proper provisions for construction loads, piles of materials, equipment, etc., carried by structural frame during erection. E. Touch-up Painting: After erection, clean all fixed connections (bolts and welds) and spot paint all abrasions, with same primer used in shop. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Erection Tolerances: Erect individual pieces so that the deviation from plumb, level and alignment shall not exceed 1:500. END OF SECTION 05120-6 U:\WO\Projects\]RC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanls_Odor ControA10_Specs\IOB_90pereentWIV 05\05120 Structural Steel.doc SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide miscellaneous metals, sections, shapes and sheets, fittings, fasteners, wirework, etc., not specified elsewhere in these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. B. Fabricate and erect structural aluminum as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 05120 Structural Steel B. Section 05520 Aluminum Railing C. Section 09900: Painting 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, indicating fabrication, assembly and erection details, sizes of members, profiles, fastenings, supports and anchors, patterns, clearances and connection to other work, before fabrication begins. B. Submit complete materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Florida Building Code 2. AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings 3. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 05500-1 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W WW-2011\IRC_MaTanks_OdorControl\I0_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIVO5\05500 MiscellaneousMetals.doc 4. American Welding Society Code AWS D1.1 5. Aluminum Construction Manual, Current Edition, by the Aluminum Association 6. OSHA Standards 7. Local codes and regulations B. Qualifications: Use only qualified personnel approved by the Engineer for fabrication and erection. Do not begin preparation of shop drawings until the fabricator and erector have been approved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide material that is free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance, that is of best commercial quality for purposes specified, and that has structural properties to safely sustain or withstand strains and stresses to which normally subjected. Throughout the facility, provide materials having the same inherent texture and color of exposed surfaces for like locations. Insofar as practicable, provide non -corrosive, nonstaining and concealed fastenings. Where fastenings must be exposed, match materials, color and finish as material to which applied, countersink and finish flush. Grind exposed welds smooth to form a neat uniform fillet without weakening base metal. Remove all slag from welds before applying shop coating. Form molded bent or shaped members with clean, sharp arises, without dents, scratches, cracks or other defects. Provide all anchors, bolts, shims and accessory items as required for building into or fastening to adjacent work. Unless otherwise specified, use only galvanized ferrous metals. B. Steel: Provide miscellaneous steel plates, shapes, bars and connections conforming to the requirements of ASTM A36, galvanized by the hot dip method after fabrication in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A123, unless otherwise indicated. C. Steel Pipe: Provide steel pipe for miscellaneous members and connections that conforms to the requirements of ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stainless Steel: Except where otherwise specified, use Type 316 stainless steel plates, members and washers. Use ASTM A193, Grade B8M bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M nuts. 05500-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W MW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorContro410_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV05\05500MiscefteousMetals.doc E. Anchor Bolts And Fasteners: Use Type 316 stainless steel wedge anchors, as manufactured by Phillips Drill Company or equal for securing equipment and for aluminum structures and assemblies. Use adhesive anchors consisting of self contained vinylester adhesive cartridges and Type 304 stainless steel anchor rods equal to HVA adhesive anchoring system, as manufactured by Hilti, or equal, of the size and at the locations shown on the Drawings. Provide all other fastenings, bolts, nuts, washers and anchors as shown in the Drawings. Use fasteners of adequate strength for purpose intended. When steel anchors are indicated, use a one-piece design with expander ring consisting of steel zinc -coated and chrome plated, as manufactured by McCullough Industries, Inc., Kwik Bolt, or equal. R Welding Electrodes: Provide welding electrodes for structural steel conforming to AWS A5.5, E70XX. Use 4043 filler metal for aluminum. Use E308 electrode where the base metal is Type 304 stainless steel and Type E 309 where the base metal is Type 316 stainless steel or where stainless steel is welded to carbon steel. G. Kickplates: Provide kickplates typically at the edges of all metal walkways, even where not specifically shown on the Drawings. Use 1/ -inch angle or plate stock (depending on the specific walkway edge detail) meeting OSHA requirements, projecting 4 -inches above walkway surface and not infringing on minimum required walkway width. H. Castings: Provide castings for manhole frames, covers and other items conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30 and the details shown on the Drawings. Provide castings true to pattern in form and dimensions, free of blow holes, cracks and other pouring faults and defects, and with seating surfaces between frames and covers machined to fit true as not to rock or rattle. Provide lifting or "pick" holes that do not penetrate through the cover. No plugging or filling will be allowed. If the area is subject to flooding, use castings of a waterproof design with rubber gasket and stainless steel bolts to fasten lid to frame. I. Aluminum Stairs: Construct aluminum stairs as indicated on the Drawings, to support dead loads and additional live working stresses permitted for materials in Florida Building Code. Connect stair to the appropriate structural members. Size of various members and number of parts indicated on the Drawings are minimum. Increase as necessary to meet requirements. Construct stairs to comply with the Florida Building Code and OSHA Standards, whichever is more stringent. J. Aluminum Bar Grating: Provide aluminum bar grating with standard mill finish and conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification RR -G -661c, Type I, with right angle cross members and bearing bar not less than 1.5 -inch x 3/16 -inch of 6061-T6 alloy, unless otherwise indicated. Provide joints only at supporting members and fasten grates to supporting members at each contact point. Where grating bears on concrete, provide a steel bearing insert, angle embedded in the concrete and isolate the grating from the bearing surface to prevent corrosion. 05500-3 UAWO\Projects\IRC W W W-2011\IRC_Mfl Tanks_Odor Control\IO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 05\05500 Miscellaneous Metals.doc K. Aluminum Stair Treads: Provide aluminum stair treads of the same pattern and alloys as the aluminum grating, having a 11/4 -inch wide abrasive nosing, and having a standard mill finish. L. Miscellaneous Aluminum: Use aluminum shapes, bars, checkered plates, and plates of Alloy 6061-T6, except when otherwise specified. M. Miscellaneous Aluminum Threaded Fasteners: 1. Bolts — Type 304 Stainless Steel 2. Nuts & Washers - Type 304 Stainless Steel N. Steel Pipe Guards: Provide galvanized steel pipe guards as detailed on the Drawings, including pipe sleeves, concrete fill, crushed fill and grouting to secure parts. Use schedule 40 steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Insofar as possible, fit and shop assemble fabricated material ready for erection. Provide welding equipment and perform welding in compliance with American Welding Society's Code for Welding in Building Construction, latest edition. Construct all work to be square, plumb and true, accurately fitted with tight joints and intersections. Finish exposed work smooth with welds ground smooth. B. Painting And Protective Coating: Except for stainless steel and aluminum surfaces, properly clean all ferrous metal and coat surfaces with one shop coat of primer compatible with coating system specified in Section 09900, Painting. Coat anchors that are built into masonry with asphalt paint unless specified to be galvanized. Do not coat metal work to be encased in concrete unless specified or noted otherwise. Clean castings that are to be left unpainted and coat with a coal -tar -pitch varnish. 2. Provide products fabricated from rolled, pressed or forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips with hot -dip galvanizing in compliance with ASTM A 123. Provide assembled steel products with hot -dip galvanizing in compliance with ASTM A 386. Provide weight of coatings as designated in Table 1 for the class and thickness of material to be coated. Except for bolts and nuts, perform all galvanizing after fabrication. Provide shop coating of galvanized surfaces only where specifically specified or shown on the Drawings. Chemically treat such surfaces prior to applying the coating to provide a bond for the paint. 05500-4 UANVOTrojectsURC_W_WW-201MRC_Ma Tanks_0dorControl\I0_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV05\05500 Miscellaneous Metals.doc C. Perform fabrication in accordance with the specified standards. Do not provide splices except where indicated on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will contact concrete, mortar or plaster, separate the contact surfaces of the metals using not less than one coat of zinc chromate primer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt paint on each surface; or where deemed necessary by the Engineer, use not less than one course of asphalt saturated cotton fabric cemented to both metals with flashing cement. Clean finished works and remove excess cement. B. Adequately anchor all work in place at proper elevations, planes and locations. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: 1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. 2. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, and make plumb, level, true, and free from rack, measured from established lines and levels. 3. Provide temporary anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete or similar construction. 4. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. 5. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 6. Grind exposed joints smooth, and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surface of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of weld made, and methods in correcting welding work. 05500-5 U.XWO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ane Tanks_Odor Control\10_SpmkIOB_90percent\DIV O5\05500 Miscellaneous Metats.doc E. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded area of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 05500-6 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W NVW-2011\IRC_Ma Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percenl\DIV 05\05500 Miscellaneous Metals.doc SECTION 05520 ALUMINUM RAILING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this Section includes fabrication and erection of aluminum railings and gates. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings for aluminum railings and gates shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication of these items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The aluminum railing shall be equal to either one of the following specifications: 1. Aluminum railings shall be 1 1/2 -inch Schedule 40 aluminum pipe, alloy 6063-T6 or Alcoa alloy 6063-T832. Brackets shall be cast aluminum alloy B214. Floor flanges shall be forged aluminum, alloy 6061-T6. Brackets and flanges shall be secured to concrete with expansion bolts. Railings shall be fabricated in shop, made and erected square, plumb, straight and true, designed for adjustment to field variations, accurately fitted with tight joints and intersections. Fittings shall be fastened to pipe members by inert gas shielded metal arc welding method as per Alcoa's Welding Alcoa Aluminum, latest edition. Finish shall be 1 -hour anodized - #215R1 & #204R1. Completed railings shall conform to OSHA Standards. 2. Aluminum railing equal to the system produced by C/S Rigid Rail, Construction Specialties, Inc. All posts shall be extruded aluminum hollow, one-piece sections - .250 inches thick, alloy 6063-T6 square tube of nominal 1 3/4 -inch dimension. Rails shall be extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T6 with minimum wall thickness of .140 inches and nominal 1 3/4 -inch square dimension. Cast fittings shall be fabricated from alloy 5.14T. Fittings are to be adjustable where required to meet directional changes without cutting, welding or bending. For exposed aluminum surfaces provide clear anodized finishes as follows: extruded aluminum - caustic etch and 1 -hour anodizing #215R1 minimum 0.7 mil coating; cast aluminum - etch and anodize #204R1. All post to rail fasteners shall be 05520-1 U:\NVO\Projects\IRQ-NX-WW-2011URC—Ana—Twiks—Odor ControA10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 05\05520 Aluminum Railing.doc Type 316 stainless steel and internally threaded 1 -piece tubular inserts Cc receiving fasteners shall have a minimum tensile strength of 85,000 psi. Fasteners shall have threads treated with epoxy or vinyl lock patches to prevent loosening. Railings shall be fabricated in shop, made and erected square, plumb, straight and true, designed for adjustment to field variations, accurately fitted with tight joints and intersections. Where removable railings are indicated, insert posts into recessed sleeves. B. Kickplates: Aluminum kickplates where not specifically called for in the Drawings shall be furnished and installed typically at the edges of all metal walkways. Kickplates shall be 1/4 -inch angle or plate stock (depending on the specific walkway edge detail) meeting OSHA requirements and shall project 4 -inches above walkway surface. Kickplates shall not infringe on minimum required walkway width and material must be same as that of the railing construction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Insofar as possible, fabricated material shall be fitted and shop assembled ready for erection. Welding and equipment shall conform to American Welding Society's Code for Welding in Building Construction, latest edition. All work shall be square, plumb and true, accurately fitted with tight joints and intersections. Exposed work shall be finished smooth with welds ground smooth. The completed work shall conform to OSHA Standards. 2.03 DESIGN A. Aluminum railings and posts shall be designed by the fabricator in accordance with the loading requirements indicated within the Florida Building Code or on the Drawings. Railing design calculations and fabrication shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer, and submitted for review, prior to fabrication. Post spacing shall not exceed 4 feet unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will contact concrete, mortar or plaster, the contact surface of the metals shall be separated using not less than one coat of zinc chromate primer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt paint on each surface; or where deemed necessary by the Engineer, not less than one course of asphalt saturated cotton fabric cemented to both metals with flashing cement, shall be used. Finished works shall be cleaned and excess cement removed. 05520-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W NW-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor ControMO1 -Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 05\05520 Aluminum Raiting.doc B. All work shall be adequately anchored in place at proper elevations, planes and locations. END OF SECTION 05520-3 U:\WO\Pmjects\IRC_W_\V1V-2011\IRC_Ma Taii s_Odor Control\10_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 05\05520 Aluminum Railing.doc DIVISION 6 �•� SECTION 06190 WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Conditions of the Contract, Division 1, Drawings and Specifications apply to this section. B. Provide trusses that comply with applicable requirements of N.F.P.A.'s "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction and It's Fastenings", and Truss Plate Institute's Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses. 1.02 SCOPE: A. Supply and install all wood truss rafters as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.03 MEASUREMENTS: A. Verify all dimensions shown on the drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of all members as required. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Provide 6 copies of drawings of all shapes required by the design. Shop drawings Design & Calculations shall bear the seal of Florida registered structural engineer. Include on the drawings loading conditions and stress diagrams complete with the name and stamp of the Engineer certifying the design of the system. Provide signed and sealed Engineered sets for building department permit and approval. B. Trusses to be delivered and unloaded at site within five (5) working days from setting date. Trusses to be marked to match plans. Contractor to be supplied with truss plans for the entire building to allow accurate field erection. All trusses to be factory stamped bearing maximum load capacity. 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL: A. Lumber defects such as wane or knots occurring in the connector plate area must not affect more than ten percent of required plate area or number of effective teeth required for each truss member. Connector plates shall be applied to both faces of truss at each joint, and should provide firm even contact between the plate and the wood. All wood members shall be accurately cut and fabricated so that all members have good bearing and all completed truss units are uniform. See Truss Plate 06190-1 Institute Quality Control Manual QCM-77 for tolerances and other special requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TRUSSED RAFTERS: A. Provide a system of stress grade materials and connector plate of sizes and gages that will support a load as follows: 1. Slope top chord trusses as noted on drawings. Top chord, dead load 30 psf., live load 20 psf. 2. Bottom chord dead load 20 psf. Total load duration 1.33. Trusses are to be designed for uplift using wind loads from latest adopted S.B.C. Revisions to the latest adopted edition of the Florida Building Code and a dead load of 20 psf. for sloped trusses. 3. See Structural General Notes for Wind Speed. B. Trusses shall be made of mass-produced uniform parts, using precision jigs, and shall be carefully shop assembled in jigs designed to provide proper alignments, and full bearing of wood members. The fabricator of trusses shall be one regularly engaged in the manufacture of plate -connected trusses of the type specified herein, and shall have shown evidence of successful installations of products similar to those specified herein. 2.02 CONNECTOR PLATES: A. All connector plates shall be a minimum thickness of 0.036" and shall be manufactured from.steel meeting the requirements of A.S.T.M. A-446 Grade "A", and shall be hot dip galvanized according to A.S.T.M. A-525. Coating designation G-60. 2.03 APPROVED PLATE MANUFACTURER: A. ALPINE ENGINEERED PRODUCTS, 1950 Marley Drive, Haines City, FL 33844, 1-800-282-3335 or approved substitution. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Wood Walls or Beams: Anchor trusses with metal hurricane anchoring devices especially formed for the purpose. 06190-2 B. Bearing of wood walls to be minimum 3". 3.02 ERECTION: A. Use tools, equipment and methods that will avoid damaging of the individual members, parting of the joints or damaging the structural capabilities or architectural. 3.03 BRACING: A. All trusses must be securely braced both during erection and after permanent installation in the building in accordance with 'Bracing Wood Trusses: Commentary and Recommendations" (latest edition), as published by The Truss Plate Institute. Erection bracing shall hold trusses straight and plumb and in safe condition until decking and permanent truss bracing has been fastened forming a structurally sound roof framing system. All erection and permanent bracing shall be installed and all trusses permanently fastened before application of any loads. Permanent structural cross -bracing to ensure overall rigidity of the roof system shall be in accordance with the Architectural/Engineering plans for the building structure. Provide additional bracing required by the manufacturer in addition to that shown on the contract document drawings. Materials used in bracing are to be furnished by the Erection Contractor. B. See Structural drawings for additional permanent bracing. C. Trusses shall be so stored as to be protected from contact with soil and exposure to the elements. Trusses damaged during transit, storage, or erection shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 06190-3 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) SECTION 07165 VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Install vapor barrier under all floor and tank slabs and concrete pads, and at other locations shown on the Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vapor barrier shall be 6 -mil polyethylene film or equal as approved by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proceed with vapor barrier work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE A. Examine the substrate and the conditions under which vapor barrier work is to be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Under occupied buildings, soil treatment work shall be completed just prior to installation of vapor barrier. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Vapor barrier shall be applied parallel with direction of concrete pour, lapping adjacent sides and ends 6 inches minimum. B. Seal all joints with continuous approved 2 inch wide plastic tape. END OF SECTION 07165-1 U:RVO\Projects\IRC_W_W W-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Contro610_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 07\07165 VAPOR BARRIBR.doc (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install overhead coiling doors as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data, certifications, etc., in accordance with Section 01340, prior to fabrication of the overhead coiling doors. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the applicable requirements of the following specifications and standards: Standard Building Code 2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. B. Acceptable manufacturers include Cornell Iron Works, Crawford Door Co., Overhead Door Co., Kinnear and North American Door. C. Warrantee: Doors shall be warranteed for five years against defects in workmanship, materials, and operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Door: Provide overhead coiling doors equal to Overhead Door Co., Inc., aluminum counterbalanced overhead coiling doors complete with chain operators and electric motor operators as indicated in the door schedule and designed to withstand 162 mph winds and to comply with the Florida Building Code. Provide doors to withstand associated inwoard & outward pressures with this wind speed. B. Construction: Provide door curtain consisting of slats, endlocks, windlocks and bottom bar with rubber astragal. Fabricate slats of 16 -gauge aluminum type 3003 H14 in clear anodized finish, a minimum of 3 inches wide and 5/8 -inch deep, interlocking to form a continuous flat surface on the side which contacts the extruded neoprene weatherseal strip on the guide. The weatherseal between curtain and neoprene strip shall be effective under 08331 - 1 U:\1V0\ProjectsVRC_W_W W-2011VRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControAlO_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 08\08331 Overhead Coifing Doors-dgk.doc any wind direction. Provide windlocks on all curtains at a spacing of 2 feet maximum o.c., with endlocks machine riveted to both ends of alternate slats. C. Brackets: 1/4 -inch steel plate with ball bearings at rotating support points. D. Guides: 3/16 -inch minimum thick angles, provided with windlock restraining bar and continuous neoprene weatherseal strip which shall contact the flat surface of the curtain at all times. E. Pipe: Steel pipe housing the counterbalancing springs and carrying the curtain without exceeding .03 -inch per foot deflection under load. F. Spring Assembly: Counterbalancing oil tempered steel helical torsion springs, cast iron anchors, steel torsion rod and cast iron spring adjusting wheel. All springs shall act on one single torsion rod and shall receive equal and simultaneous angular adjustment by means of the adjusting wheel placed outside of one of the brackets. G. Hood: 0.032 -inch minimum aluminum sheet metal having stiffening beads or flanges. H. Top weatherstripping: A continuous neoprene rubber piece fastened to the inside of the hood and contacting the top of the curtain thus forming a seal. I. Bearings: To support the pipe and curtain, use grease packed precision ball bearings of self-lubricating graphite bearings. J. Locking Device: Provide each overhead coiling door with a simple locking device on the inside to prevent unauthorized opening from the outside. The locking device may consist of a metal bar pushed home in holes drilled in the door frame and a suitable structural member of the curtain when the holes come into proper alignment on closing the door. 2.02 FERROUS METAL FINISHES A. All steel and cast iron materials used in the manufacture of the door and frame shall be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and machining. B. All ferrous surfaces exposed to view (including galvanized) except working parts of machinery or bearing surfaces shall receive one shop coat of rust inhibitive metal primer compatible with the finish coating system specified in Section 09900 Painting. C. Finish paint in the field as specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2.03 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Preparation: After fabrication, prepare the aluminum surfaces for finishing in accordance with the aluminum producer's recommendations and standards of the finisher or ( processor. Process all components simultaneously to attain complete uniformity of color. 08331-2 U:\NVO\Projects\IRQ-W-WW-2011\IRC-Ma-Tanks_odor ControA10_specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 08\08331 Overhead Coiling Doorsdgk.doc required finish for Engineer's acceptance, prior to Samples' Prepare samples of the req B Samp fabrication of the work.-M21C22A41, (minimum thickness 0.7 -mil) Clear Anodized Finish: C. NAAMM integral clear anodized finish. OPERATIONS ended 2.04 ELECTRIC DOOR of the size and capacity -recommended operator assembly motor and factory General: with electric m clutch, remote A General: Furnish etdoo °n an facturer; operated brake, conduit and and provided by ear reduction unit, solenoid °o Power transformer, otor controls, g motor starters, control p operator assembly and prewired m control stations, control devices, m ro er operation. Electric door op required for p P Group D, Division 1 hazardous wiring and accessories req erator shall be made of non- wiring for the screenings sh�ll be of the doorand manual op controlsonents area. In addition, all comp materials. engaging in sparking manual 1 Provide a hand -operate d disconnect or a mechanism for fo� emergency g erator. and releasingbrake sprocket and chain oP operator so that they are accessible from floor a P mount disconnect and op operation. level. Pre the motor from operating Include an interlock device engaged. to atically p 2. enc operator C� when emergency thehmit-switch so that motor maybe removed without dist ob gator. 3. Design operator the emergency auxiliary P adjustment and without affecting erator units consisting of from motor to reduction box to a gear wheel operator Type Provide wall or brafcrket-mounted door oP t_release for manual B Door a worm gear drive an electric motor, and aquick-clutch disconnec°Wer and design as and drive assembly of horsep specified. mounted on thecounterbalance de motor, dutch, t, size of door required and as herein sp operation. Pro' e door manufacturer for the sr determined by base reversible, constant 480 volt, three -P torque, sized to moVe door in C Electric Motors, Provide high-startingrotection, at not less than 213 -foot "OrimOof motors. than i foot with the Class A insulated electric ion ors with overload P characteristics duty, from any posit either direction, requirement 16 cFurn. , explosion -proof chemical duty second. Coordinate wiring se Division building electrical system; motors with maximum 1/2 horsepower. latching, 3 -button control station with act provide interior units, Provide momentary -cont �, ttclose'', and "stop" • unless D Control Stations: too "Open , Type 12 enclosures, surface -mounted, heavy-duty with NEMA YP pushbutton controls labeledP guarded type, �., 083313 Overhea IURC_Ma_Tad Coiling Doors-dgk.doc U.\�.rp\projects\IRC �V �VN'ZOI —mor ConttoAlO_Specs\lOB 90percent\D1V ()g\08331 otherwise indicated. Provide an exterior, stainless steel, weather proof, key operated switch to open the door from the outside. E. Automatic Reversing Control: Furnish each door with an automatic safety switch, extending full width of door bottom, and located with a U-shaped neoprene or rubber astragal mounted to the bottom door rail. Contact with switch before fully closing will immediately stop the downward travel and reverse direction to the fully opened position. Connect to the control circuit through a retracing safety cord and reel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors in accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer and in such a manner that will prevent damage or deformation. B. Install the doors securely in appropriate frames, and adjusted for proper operation without sticking or binding. C. Protect the doors from damage until the date of final acceptance and repair or replace any doors damaged during construction, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb, and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein. E. Upon completion of installation including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion and fitting weathertight for the entire perimeter. END OF SECTION 08331-4 U:\NO\Projects\IRC_1V_1VW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Contro410_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV O8\08331 Overhead Coiling Doors-dgk.dor SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work included in this Section consists of providing all finish hardware as herein tabulated and as shown on the Drawings. B. The finish hardware specified herein shall be supplied for the hollow metal and wood doors supplied for the project. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering any hardware, samples shall be submitted of every different item of "Finish Hardware" to the Engineer for inspection as to quality, finish and design, and obtain written approval for each item before delivering any hardware. In case the samples are disapproved, other samples shall be submitted until satisfactory samples are approved. B. Complete Hardware Schedule of Finish Hardware shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01340 for the approval of the Engineer. Each item listed in such schedule shall be in accordance with the approved samples. Each item listed in the Hardware Schedule shall be identified with respect to manufacture, brand, catalog number, materials, finish, dimensions and operation, as well as location, operation and use in the buildings. The Engineer will check the Hardware Schedule for quality and types only, but the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any errors, omissions and conformance with the Hardware Schedule. C. Templates: Promptly following approval of the Hardware Schedule by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and deliver template information to the fabricators of items of metal work to which finishing hardware is to be applied, and such deliveries shall be made in ample time to avoid delays in such work of said fabricators. Drawings, schedules and detailed information shall be provided to other trades as necessary for them to accommodate and prepare their work to receive the finishing. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Finish hardware shall be packed in approved manufacturer's containers, complete with trimmings, bolts, screws, washers, etc., as required for application and securement. Each container shall bear a suitable label which shall state the quantity and kind of contents of said container, as well as identifying marks relating to the approved Hardware Schedule and its location in the building. ( 08710-1 U:\No\Projects\IRC_1V_\VN-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\1013 percent\ 08\08710 FINISH HARD\VAR&dgk.doc PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Catalog numbers refer to Schlage, Hager, Sargent, LCN, Sager and Von Duprin and are for the purpose of establishing equality. The products of Stanley, Rixson, Yale, Norton, Accurate, Pemko, Reece and Zero shall be acceptable as approved alternates for the named products. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hardware Requirements: All hardware shall be new and free from defects affecting serviceability or appearance. All working parts shall be well fitted and smooth working. All hardware shall be made of aluminum or stainless steel materials. 2. Hardware application to metal shall be made to standard templates. Template information shall be furnished to door and frame fabricators and other trades requiring same, in order that they may cut, reinforced or otherwise shop prepared for receiving hardware. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for checking all details such as wall trim clearance, bevels, rabbets, backsets, etc., in order that all items of hardware shall fit properly. 3. Complete locksets shall be supplied from a single manufacturer. 4. Hardware shall be furnished complete with all fastenings. All keys and locks shall be as approved by the City of Minneola Utilities Division. All locks shall be keyed to match existing locksets at other facilities as directed by the Owner. Six copies of each key shall be furnished. 6. Box strikes for all metal frames shall be furnished. 7. Finishes shall be US32D, Satin Stainless Steel, except where noted otherwise. 8. Door closers and door holders shall be sized according to door width and the conditions of the location. B. Hardware Schedule: All door sizes, materials, swings, etc. shall be coordinated with the door schedule and floor plans. Total quantities required shall be determined from the Drawings. 08710-2 UAW0\Projects\IRC_W_\VW-2011\IRC_Ana Tanks—Odor Control\to_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 08\08710 FINISH HARDWARE-dgk.doc 1. Set No. 1 - Exterior, Single FRP Doors uantit Hardware Description 1 1/2 pr. Butt Hinges, Hager No. BB 1191, 4 1/2 x 4 1/2, US32D. 1 Mortise Lockset, Corbin/Russwin No. ED 6600, Classroom type with Armstrong exterior lever and crossbar interior panic exit device, US32D. 1 Closer, Corbin/Russwin DC2210 with parallel arm offset angle bracket and full non-metallic cover, silver aluminum lacquer finish. No through bolts allowed. 1 Continuous Threshold, Hager No. 520SN with neoprene insert, extruded aluminum. 2 Overhead Door Holder, Corbin/Russwin No. DH5401, US26D. No through bolts allowed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION CA. Package each item of hardware and each lock set separately in an individual container, complete with necessary screws, keys, instruction and installation template for spotting mortising tools. Provide 10 percent additional screws for all types of hardware. Mark each container with item number corresponding to number shown on approved hardware schedule. Keep knobs suitably covered during construction period. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware" by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by the Engineer. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in other sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 08710-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W1V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Wor Control\IO_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 08\08710 FINISH HARDWARE-dgk.doe C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and hair -line joints. Join units with concealed joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. F. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the proper type for permanent anchorage and of stainless steel. Set thresholds in a full bed of exterior type caulking to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Remove excess caulking. G. Door closers and holders shall be attached using stainless steel machine screws fastened to pre -tapped holes in the door and door frame in the designated reinforced areas stipulated by the door manufacturer. Absolutely no through bolt installations will be acceptable. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.04 INSTRUCTIONS AND TOOLS A. At completion of project, provide the Owner with the following: 1. Installation sheets for all locks, door closers, floor hinges and any other special hardware items. 2. All special closer and lock wrenches. END OF SECTION 08710-4 U:\WO\ProjectsQRC_N_W W-2011VRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControRIO_SpmkIOB_90percent\DIV 08\08710 FINISH HARDWARE-dgk.doc DIVISION 9 FINISHES (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to provide a protective coating system for the surfaces listed herein and not otherwise excluded. All surfaces described, whether new or existing, shall be included within the scope of this section. B. The work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces such as ceilings, walls, floors, miscellaneous metal, doors, frames, transoms, roof fans, construction signs, guardrails, posts, pipes, fittings, valves, equipment, and all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified herein or on the Drawings. The omission of minor items in the schedule of work shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to include such items where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein. The following major items of the Project shall be painted: Exterior & interior of building gypsum ceilings, exposed concrete block walls, and exposed concrete walls. C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. D. The following items shall not be painted: Any code requiring labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. 2. Any moving parts of operating units, valve and damper operators, linkages, unless otherwise indicated. 3. 4. 5. SP9605/101497 mechanical and electrical parts, such as sensing devices, motor and fan shafts, Aluminum pre -finished doors, windows, louvers, and other exposed members. Stainless steel angles, tube, pipe, or other components. Products with polished chrome, aluminum, nickel or stainless steel finish. 09900-1 6. Flexible couplings, lubricated bearing surfaces, insulation and metal and plastic pipe interiors. 7. Plastic switch plates and receptacle plates. 8. Signs and nameplates. 9. Finish hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Paint piping and equipment for identification purposes in accordance with Section 09905: Piping, Valve and Equipment Identification System. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by approved paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. B. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. C. Undercoat and finish coat paints shall be compatible. D. Painting shall be accomplished by experienced painters specializing in industrial painting familiar with all aspects of surface preparations and applications required for this project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include manufacturer's data and samples as indicated below and shall be prepared and submitted in time to provide adequate review by the Engineer. B. Samples - Painting: Paint colors will be selected by the Engineer with final approval by the Owner. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Samples of each finish and color shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any work is started. 3. Samples shall be prepared so that an area of each sample indicates the appearance of the various coats. For example, where three coat work is specified, the sample shall be divided into three areas: one showing the application of one coat only, SP9605/101497 09900-2 one showing the application of two coats and one showing the application of all three coats. 4. Such samples when approved in writing shall constitute a standard, as to color and finish only, for acceptance or rejection of the finish work. 5. For piping, valves, equipment and miscellaneous metal work, provide sample chips or color charts of all paint selected showing color, finish and general characteristics. 6. Rejected samples shall be resubmitted until approved. 1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. 1. Provide labels on each container with the following information: a) Name or title of material b) Fed. Spec. number if applicable C) Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture d) Manufacturer's formula or specification number e) Manufacturer's batch number fl Manufacturer's name g) Generic type h) Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents i) Thinning instructions j) Application instructions k) Color name and number 2. Containers shall be clearly marked to indicate any hazards connected with the use of the paint and steps which should be taken to prevent injury to those handling the product. SP9605/101497 09900-3 B. All containers shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent damage or loss of labels or containers. C. The Engineer shall designate areas for storage and mixing of all painting materials, Comply with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the building shall be provided by the Contractor and used for painting wastes. No plumbing fixtures shall be used for this purpose. D. Used rags shall be removed from the buildings every night and every precaution taken against spontaneous combustion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All paint shall be manufactured by one of the following and shall be their highest grade of paint: Carboline Company, ICI Paints and Devoe Coatings, or Tnemec Company, Inc. B. The following coating systems list a product by name to establish a standard of quality; other products of the same generic types may be submitted to the Engineer for approval. When other than the specified coating system is proposed, the Contractor shall submit on a typewritten list giving the proposed surface preparation, coatings (including proposed number of coats and dry film thickness), brand, trade name, generic type and catalog number of the proposed system for the Engineer's approval. C. Paint used in successive field coats shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Paint used in the first field coat over shop painted or previously painted surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to underlying paint. D. Emulsion and alkyd paints shall contain a mildewcide and both the paint and mildewcide shall conform to OSHA and Federal requirements, including Federal Specification TT -P-19. E. Any coating containing lead shall not be allowed. F. Rags shall be clean painters' rags, completely sterilized. 2.02 COATING SYSTEMS A. Class 1 Exposures - Exposed Concrete, Interior (Building Interior Walls and Ceilings): Class 1 exposures consist of exposed interior masonry and concrete surfaces and shall include the following surfaces: Surfaces To Be Coated: SP9605/101497 09900-4 a) Surfaces of the interior block walls within the new buildings. b) Interior concrete walls, ceilings, columns, and beams of the new building. 2. Class 1 Coating System: a) Surface Preparation: Fill cracks, voids and other surface imperfections. Remove mortar droppings. Use a material specifically designed for the intended use and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b) Primer Coat: Pre -cast or Cast In Place Concrete - None. Concrete Block - Polyamide-amine cured epoxy. (1 coat @ 80 sq. ft. per gal.) (Carboline Multi -Gard 954 HB) c) Finish Coats: Polyamide-Cured Epoxy. (2 coats @ 5 mils DFT per coat) (Carboline 890) B. Class 2 Exposures - Exterior Concrete Stucco. 1. Surfaces to be coated: Coat exterior concrete and masonry surfaces as designated on fnush schedules on the drawings. 2. Class 2 Coating System: a) Surface Preparation: Clean with detergent (trisodium phosphate per ASTM D-4258), wash and remove loose material. b) Primer Coat: Water -borne acrylic or cementitious acrylic emulsion having a minimum solids volume of 40%. Apply one coat to fill all voids, pores, and cracks of Concrete and Masonry; Tnemec 54-560 Masonry Filler or equal. c) Finish Coat: Acrylic latex having a minimum volume solids of 36%. Two coats of 2 mils DFT each) (Tnemec Series 6 or equal) G. Class 3 Exposures - Wood (Exterior/Interior): 1. Surfaces to be coated: Class 3 exposures consist of exterior and interior exposed wood surfaces throughout the project work. 2. Class 7 Coating System: a) Surface preparation: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of all dust, dirt, grease, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed SP9605/101497 09900-5 to view, with either manual or mechanical means, as applicable, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of the priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finished surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried and dust off. b) Primer Coat: Modified waterborne acrylic (1 coat @ 2 mils DFT) (Carbolise Multi -Bond 120) c) Finish Coat: High quality urethane alkyd (1 coat @ 3 mils DFT) (Carbolise Rustarmor 139) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. In addition to the aforementioned preparations, all dirt, rust, scale, splinters, loose particles, disintegrated paint, grease, oil and other deleterious substances shall be removed from all surfaces which are to be coated. B. Hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with painted surfaces and not to be painted shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations. C. Before commencing work, the painter must make certain that surfaces to be covered are in perfect condition. Should the painter find such surfaces impossible of acceptance, he shall report such fact to the Engineer. The application of paint shall be held as an acceptance of the surfaces and working conditions and the painter will be held responsible for the results reasonably expected from die materials and processes specified. D. Program the cleaning and painting so contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted surfaces. E. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster and stucco. to be painted by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. F. Clean ferrous substances, which are not galvanized or shop -coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. All welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth. All pits and dents shall be filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for painting. G. Surface profile as obtained from sandblasting shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer and verified using the press o tex film. SP9605/101497 09900-6 3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and directions, stirring materials before and during application to maintain a mixture of uniform density, free of film, dirt and other foreign materials. B. No thinners shall be used except those specifically mentioned and only in such quantity as directed by the manufacturer in his instructions. If thinning is used, sufficient additional coats shall be applied to assure the required dry film thickness is achieved. The manufacturer's recommended thinner or cleanup solvent shall be used for all clean-up. Application by brush, spray, airless spray or roller shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for optimum performance and appearance. 3.03 APPLICATIONS A. Paint all exposed surfaces in rooms scheduled for painting whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where the natural finish of material is obviously intended and specifically noted as a surface not be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, die Engineer will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems as specified. B. Color Selection for Color Coding: 1. Color Coding Piping: All exposed piping shall be identified as specified in Section 09905. Pipe identification system shall include color coding or banding, legends and arrows. 2. Color Coding Conduit: All exposed electrical conduit with conductors over 120 volts shall be color banded as specified in Division 16 and Section 09905. C. All painting shall be done by skilled and experienced craftsmen and shall be of highest quality workmanship. D. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the type of material being applied. E. All paint shall be at room temperature and the surface to be painted shall be dry and clean. F. Apply additional coats, when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. G. Paint shall be applied in a neat manner with finished surfaces free of runs, sags, ridges, laps and brush marks. Each coat shall be applied in a manner that will produce an even film of uniform and proper thickness. SP9605/101497 09900-7 H. Paint surfaces behind moveable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. I. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match the exposed surfaces. J. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. K. Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise specified. L. The prime and intermediate coats as specified for die various coating systems may be applied in the shop by the manufacturer. The shop coats shall be of the type specified and shall be compatible with the field coat or coats. Such items as pumps, motors, equipment, electrical panels, etc. shall be given at least one touch up coat with the intermediate coat material and one complete finish coat in the field. 3.04 APPLICATIONS RESTRICTIONS A. Application of materials shall be done only on properly prepared surfaces as herein specified, and all exterior painting shall be done only in dry weather. Any surface coating damaged by moisture or rain shall be removed and redone as directed by the Engineer. B. In no case shall paint be applied to surfaces which show a moisture content greater than 15 percent. 3.05 MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS A. Coatings shall be applied in accordance with die manufacturer's recommendations and per SSPC PA2 Standards. Minimum coating thickness shall be as specified above. B. Apply a prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. C. Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 3.06 FINISHES A. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. B. Complete Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specific requirements. SP9605/101497 09900-8 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All completed surfaces will be checked by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide the necessary properly calibrated gauges. All nonferrous surfaces shall be checked for number of coats and thickness by use of a Tooke gauge. All ferrous surfaces shall be checked for film thickness by use of an Elcometer or Micro -Test magnetic dry film gauge properly calibrated. In addition, submerged tank linings and metals shall be tested for freedom from holidays and pinholes by use of a Tinker-Rasor or K -D Bird Dog Holiday Detector. All defects shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The presence of moisture shall be determined prior to coating by testing with a moisture detection device such as a Dehnhors Model DB. 3.08 PROTECTION A. All other surfaces shall be protected while painting equipment, piping, etc. B. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings, and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operation. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery nameplates and all machined parts not to receive paint. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to adequately protect structures, flooring, piping, equipment, and other work from all damage. 3.09 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall perform the work under this Section while keeping the premises free from accumulation of debris and rubbish and shall remove all scaffolding, paint cloths, paint, and brushes from die building and project site when completed. B. Cleaning: All paint brushed, splattered, spilled or splashed on any surface not specified to be painted shall be removed. 3.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Paint To Be Supplied To Owner: Upon completion of painting work, the Owner shall be furnished at no additional cost, one gallon of each type and color of finish paint for touching up. Paint container labels shall be complete with manufacturer's name, generic type, number, color and location where used. END OF SECTION SP9605/101497 09900-9 SECTION 09905 PIPING, VALVE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this Section consists of providing an identification system for piping systems and related equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: ANSI Standard A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications and other pertinent data. B. Schedules: 1. Provide a typewritten list of all tagged valves giving tag color, shape, letter code and number, the valve size, type, use and general location. 2. Provide a complete list of materials to be furnished and surfaces on which they will be used. C. Samples: 1. Provide a sample of each type valve tag supplied. 2. Provide a sample of each type of identification tape supplied. 3. Provide manufacturer's color charts for color selection by Engineer. 1.04 PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Except for locally mixed custom colors, deliver sealed containers with labels legible and intact. B. Storage of Materials: 09905-1 U:RVO\Projuts\IRC_W_W\V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControhlO_Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doc 1. Store only acceptable project materials on project site. 2. Store in suitable location. 3. Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied. 2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. B. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not to be painted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials for painting shall conform to requirements of Section 09900. B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer. C. Aboveground piping shall be identified by self-adhesive pipe markers equal to those manufactured by W. H. Brady Company or equal. 1. Markers shall be of wording and color as shown in Table 09905-B. 2. Lettering shall be: a) 2 1/4 -inches high for pipes 3 inches diameter and larger. b) 1 1/8 -inches high for pipes less than 3 inches diameter. 3. Flow arrows shall be: a) 2 1/4 -inches by 6 inches for pipes 3 inches diameter and 09905-2 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_WW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tatilcs_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percentWIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doc larger. b) 1 1/8 -inches by 3 inches for pipes less than 3 inches diameter. D. Buried piping shall be identified by identification tape installed over the centerline of the pipelines. 1. Identification Tape for Steel or Iron Pipe: Identification tape shall be manufactured of inert plastic film so as to be highly resistant to alkalies, acids, or other destructive agents found in soil, and shall have a minimum thickness of 4 mils. Tape width shall be 6 inches and shall have background color specified below, imprinted with black letters. Imprint shall be as specified below and shall repeat itself a minimum of once every 2 feet for entire length of tape. Tape shall be Terra Tape Standard 250, or approved equal. 2. Identification Tape for Plastic or Non -Magnetic Pipe: Identification tape shall be manufactured of reinforced inert plastic film with a minimum overall thickness of 9.7 mils and shall have a 0.5 mil thick magnetic metallic foil core. The tape shall be highly resistant to alkalies, acids, and other destructive agents found in soil. Tape width shall be 3 inches and shall have background color specified below, imprinted with black letters. Imprint shall be as specified below and shall repeat itself a minimum of once every 2 feet for entire length of tape. Tape shall be TerraTape Sentry Line 1350, or approved equal. 3. Identification Tape for Fiber Optic Cable Conduit: See Section 4. Tape background colors and imprints shall be as follows: Im rint Pipe Service Background Color "Caution - Non -Potable Water NPW, EF, SA Green Pipe Buried Below" "Caution - Reclaimed Water Pipe RW Purple Buried Below" "Caution - Potable Water Pipe PW Blue Buried Below" "Caution - Chemical Pipe Buried AL, NaOH, CL, C12, Yellow Below" MT, P "Caution - Sewage/Drain Pipe RS, CE, FE, DR, FB, Brown Buried Below" PR, IR, ML, FM 09905-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_N NN-2011HRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Controhl0_Spew\lOB_90percent\DIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doc Imprint Pipe Service Background Color "Caution - Sludge Pipe Buried RAS,WAS, SC, SL Orange Below" Identification tape shall be "Terra Tape" as manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., Houston, TX, (800) 231-6074; Allen Systems, Inc., Wheaton, IL (800) 323-1749; or approved equal. E. Aboveground Valve Identifications: On all valves, the Contractor shall provide a coded and numbered tag attached with brass chain and/or brass "S" hooks. 1. Tag Types: Tags for valves on pipe shall be brass or anodized aluminum. Colors for aluminum tags shall, where possible, match the color code of the pipe line on which installed. Square tags -shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round tags shall indicate normally open valves. 2. Coding: In addition to the color coding, each tag shall be stamped or engraved with wording or abbreviations to indicate the valve service and number. All color and letter coding shall be approved by the Engineer. Valve service shall either be as listed in Table 09905, or by equipment abbreviation if associated with a particular piece of equipment. Valve numbering, shall be as approved by the Engineer and/or Owner. F. A blue coded number (#) 14 gauge OF (Underground Feeder per NEC Article 339) solid tracer wire and joint seal (Kearney Aquaseal, Bishop or approved equal) shall be installed along all non-metallic pipes and services and must be taped below the spring line of the pipe and stubbed at hydrants and valves. At each valve, the wire shall be installed along the outside of the valve box to the adjustable piece (see WS 501). Sections of the wire shall be spliced together using Buchanon connectors or similar approved methods for splicing. Twisting the wire together is not acceptable. For directional bores, number (#) 10 OF solid tracer wire shall be used. The tracer wire must provide full signal conductivity (including splices), for the line locating equipment. G. Buried valves shall have valve boxes protected by a concrete pad. The concrete pad for the valve box cover shall have a 3 -inch diameter, bronze disc embedded in the surface as shown on the Contract Drawings. The bronze disc shall have the following information neatly stamped on it: Size of valve, inches 09905-4 U:RVO\Projects\IRC_N_NW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControAlO_Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doc 2. Type of valve: Valve numbers shall be as approved by the Engineer and/or Owner and valve number shall follow the valve type as listed below: a) GV - Gate Valve b) BFV - Butterfly Valve C) PV - Plug Valve 3. Valve Service - See Table 09905 for abbreviations 4. Number of turns to fully open 5. Direction to open 6. Year of installation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT A. Piping color codes, and code labels for pipe identification shall conform to Table 09905. B. General Notes and Guidelines: 1. Pipelines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be assigned a color by the Owner and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract. 2. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids, or semi -liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit systems. 3. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are potential hazards shall be Safety Orange. 4. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards. 5. All in-line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. 6. All pipe hangers and pipe support floor standards shall be painted. 09905-5 UANVO\Projects\IRC_W W W-2011\1RC_Ma_Tanks_Wor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doe C. All hangers and pipe support floor and accessories stands shall be painted to match their piping. The system shall be painted up to, but not including, the face of flanges or the flexible conduit connected to electrical equipment. Structural members used solely for pipe hangars or supports shall be painted to match their piping. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will contact concrete, mortar or plaster, the contact surface of the metals shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900. D. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted between and up to, but not including, the face of flanges or connections on the equipment. E. All insulated surfaces, unless otherwise specified, shall be given one coat of glue sizing, one prime coat and one finish coat. F. System code lettering, identification banding and arrows shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A 13.1 marked on piping as follows: 1. Lettering and identification band colors shall be as shown in Table 09905. 2. Markers shall be placed no more than 20 feet apart with at least one marker on every straight run and additional markers at turns and where pipe passes through walls. 3. An arrow indicating direction of flow shall be placed adjacent to each marker. 3.02 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT A. Unless otherwise indicated or specifically approved, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and finished. See Section 09900. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other cause. C. Where specified in other sections of these specifications for mechanical equipment, the Contractor shall apply field coat or coats of paint in accordance with Section 09900. If shop finish coat is unsatisfactory due to poor adhesion or other problems with primer or finish coats, coatings shall be removed and replaced by sandblasting, priming and finishing in accordance with Section 09900 and this Section. D. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, the Contractor shall protect all motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment found to 09905-6 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_ VW-2011QRC_Ma_Tanks_odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90perrent\DIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doc contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned. Equipment contaminated by grit in critical areas, such as bearings, gears, seals, etc., shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION TAPE A. Identification tape shall be installed for all buried water lines and chemical lines in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and as specified herein. B. Identification tape shall be installed 1 foot below final grade over centerline of pipe. 3.04 BURIED VALVES A. In paved or concrete areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set flush with pavement or concrete top. In concrete areas, valve boxes shall be embedded. Following paving operations, a 24 inch square shall be neatly cut in the pavement around the box and the paving removed. The top of the box shall then be adjusted to the proper elevation and a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad poured around the box cover. Concrete pads in traffic areas shall be reinforced with No. 4 reinforcement bars as shown on the Contract Drawings. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. B. In unpaved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 0.20 -foot above finished grade. After the top of the box is set to the proper elevation, a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad shall be poured around the box cover. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. C. The bronze, valve identification disc shall be embedded in the concrete pad. 09905-7 U:\NO\Projects\IRC W_NW-2011\IRC_Ma_Taaks_Odor ControA10_Specs\IOB_90percentWIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doe Table 09905 COLOR CODES AND ABBREVIATIONS Service Abbreviation Pipe Identification Band Color Conduit, Pipe, and Valve Color Code Letter and Flow Arrow Color Alum Solution AL ----- Yellow Black Caustic Solution NaOH ----- Yellow Black Chlorine Solution NaOCI CL, C12 ----- Yellow Black Clarified Effluent CE Brown Lt. Gray Black Drain DR Brown Lt. Gray Black Effluent EF Lt. Green Lt. Gray Black Filter Backwash FB Brown Lt. Gray Black Filter Effluent FE Brown Lt. Gray Black Force Main FM Brown Lt. Gray Black Grit GR Brown Lt. Gray Black Internal Recycle IR Brown Lt. Gray Black Methanol Solution MT ----- Yellow Black Mixed Liquor ML Brown Lt. Gray Black Non -Potable Water NPW Lt. Green Lt. Gray Black Odor Control Air Piping OA Brown Lt, Gray Black Plant Recycle PR Brown Lt. Gray Black Polymer Solution P ----- Yellow Black Potable Water PW Blue Lt. Blue Black Process Air Low Pressure PA Lt. Green Lt. Gray Black Raw Sewage RS Brown Lt. Gray Black Return Activated Sludge RAS Orange Lt. Gray Black Sample SA Lt. Green Lt. Gray Black Scum SC Brown Lt. Gray Black Seal Water SW Lt. Green Lt. Gray Black Sludge SL Brown Lt. Gra Black Waste Activated Sludge WAS Brown __LLGray Black 09905-8 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_MV-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doc Table 09905 COLOR CODES AND ABBREVIATIONS Service Abbreviation Pie Identification Band Color Conduit, Pipe, and Valve Color Code Letter and Flow Arrow Color Electrical Conduit ----- Black N/A w/Conductors Over 120 Volts w/Yellow 6" Bands Spaced 5' o.c. Electrical Conduit ----- ----- Interior - N/A w/Conductors 120 Volts or less Match adjacent wall or equipment color Exterior — Gray END OF SECTION 09905-9 U:6V01Projects\IRC R_\Vw-2011URC_Ana_Tanks_Odor ControhlO_Specs\IOB_9opercenl\DIV 09\09905 Piping Ident.doc L (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) SECTION 11510 BIOTRICKLING FILTER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PART GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section consists of furnishing a complete biotrickling filter odor control system consisting of a vertical FRP biotrickling filter tower, biotrickling filter media, FRP fan(s), irrigation system with permanent recirculation function, interconnecting duct work between the fans, biotrickling filter vessels and carbon vessel, nutrient addition system if required, instrumentation, fluid controls, and control panel as specified to properly operate and monitor the biofilter system. 1.02 DEFINITIONS Owner: Indian River County Engineer: Atkins Contractor: The firm that enters into a contract with the Owner to furnish materials and services at a specified price. Manufacturer: BIOREM Person -Day: One person for 8 hours within regular Contractor working hours. H2S: Hydrogen Sulfide Gas. D/T: Detection to threshold as per the specified air odor determination method. OU: Odor Unit. Substantial Completion: Date certified by the project engineer on which the project building (or a specified portion) is complete to the extent it can be occupied or used for its intended purpose in accordance with contract and/or regulatory requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Manufacturer's Drawings and Shop Drawings in accordance with general requirement. Shop Drawings a. Submit detail drawings showing compliance with these specifications including materials of construction and parts list, dimensional plan and section views, details of installation requirements, and details of connections to outside utilities. b. Submit detailed control and electrical diagrams, including panel elevations, panel wiring diagrams, and system interconnect wiring diagrams. Electrical subcontractor to recommend wire and conduit sizes for connection of all system components. C. Submit catalog cuts on all component materials, process equipment, parts, equipment, instruments, controls, electrical equipment, pipe, valves, fittings, conduit, wires, and cables. 11510-1 d. Submit installation instructions from manufacturers of component materials. B. Submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the general requirement. C. Submit a list of all exceptions taken to this specification along with documentation as to the reason for the exception. In the event that it is impossible to conform to certain parts of the specification due to different manufacturing techniques, describe and justify completely, to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, all non -conforming details. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM D883 — Definition of terms relating to plastics. 2. ASTM D4097 — Standard Specifications for Contact Molded Glass Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks. 3. ASTM D3299 — Standard Specification for Filament -Wound Glass Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion=Resistant Tanks 4. ASTM C582 — Standard Specification for Contact -Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion -Resistant Equipment. 5. ASTM D2583 — Test for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. 6. ASTM D790 — Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulation Materials. 7. ASTM D2563 — Recommended Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts. B. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). D. Air Movement Control Association International (AMCA). E. American Composites Manufacturers Association (ACMA). F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). G. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). I. When reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product delivery, storage, and handling shall comply with Manufacturer's instructions and as follows. 11510-2 B. The biotrickling filter and carbon media shall be stored on a clean level, surface. Avoid cross - contamination of foreign materials during handling and placement. All media shall be delivered in bulk bags or boxes. Media shall be covered if stored longer than one week. C. All electrical and ancillary equipment shall be stored in a climate controlled building greater than 50 degrees F. D. All packing slips and shipments must be inspected upon delivery to ensure shipments are complete and no damage has occurred during transportation. In the case of an incomplete shipment or damage has occurred, the BIOREMO Logistics Department must be contacted. 1.06 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTIES A. All equipment supplied under this section of the specifications shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the project by the OWNER. B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from any defects. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be repaired or replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. C. In addition to the one year equipment warrantee, the manufacturer shall provide a Ten (10) year warrantee specifically for media failure. Should the media require replacement sooner than Ten (10) years after being place in full time operation, the media supplier shall provide media at a discounted rate directly proportional to the time difference between date of failure and the ten (10) year warrantee date. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Biotrickling Filter Manufacturer shall have at least 3 years experience in design and fabrication of odor control systems as demonstrated by a list of at least 3 successful installations of comparable size with references. All references shall include valid contact names and phone numbers that can be verified. B. Consideration of alternate biotrickling filter media shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the bid date. No alternate biotrickling filter media will be considered unless it has been pre -approved by the Engineer. C. The Biotrickling filter Manufacturer shall provide the Owner with training and monitoring support service during the first year of operation. The support service must be renewable at the end of the first year of operation. D. The Biotrickling filter Manufacturer shall maintain regular laboratory facilities for the microbial and chemical support services required for normal operation of the biotrickling filter system. The facilities shall be open for inspection by a representative of the Owner or Engineer. E. The following type of odor control systems will not be considered equal i. Odor control systems using masking agents. ii. Odor control systems using "counteractants". 11510-3 B. The biotrickling filter and carbon media shall be stored on a clean level, surface. Avoid cross - contamination of foreign materials during handling and placement. All media shall be delivered in bulk bags or boxes. Media shall be covered if stored longer than one week. C. All electrical and ancillary equipment shall be stored in a climate controlled building greater than 50 degrees F. D. All packing slips and shipments must be inspected upon delivery to ensure shipments are complete and no damage has occurred during transportation. In the case of an incomplete shipment or damage has occurred, the BIOREMO Logistics Department must be contacted. 1.06 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTIES A. All equipment supplied under this section of the specifications shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the project by the OWNER. B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from any defects. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be repaired or replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. C. In addition to the one year equipment warrantee, the manufacturer shall provide a Ten (10) year warrantee specifically for media failure. Should the media require replacement sooner than Ten (10) years after being place in full time operation, the media supplier shall provide media at a discounted rate directly proportional to the time difference between date of failure and the ten (10) year warrantee date. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Biotrickling Filter Manufacturer shall have at least 3 years experience in design and fabrication of odor control systems as demonstrated by a list of at least 3 successful installations of comparable size with references. All references shall include valid contact names and phone numbers that can be verified. B. Consideration of alternate biotrickling filter media shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the bid date. No alternate biotrickling filter media will be considered unless it has been pre -approved by the Engineer. C. The Biotrickling filter Manufacturer shall provide the Owner with training and monitoring support service during the first year of operation. The support service must be renewable at the end of the first year of operation. D. The Biotrickling filter Manufacturer shall maintain regular laboratory facilities for the microbial and chemical support services required for normal operation of the biotrickling filter system. The facilities shall be open for inspection by a representative of the Owner or Engineer. E. The following type of odor control systems will not be considered equal. i. Odor control systems using masking agents. ii. Odor control systems using "counteractants". 11510-3 iii. Odor control systems using granular activated carbon. iv. Odor control systems in which the media is not completely enclosed. v. Systems that do not provide continuous and permanent recirculation of the media. vi. Systems that provided structured media that is not free-flowing. 1.08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS The biotrickling filter equipment shall be manufactured by BIOREM (No Equal). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 OPERATING PARAMETERS A. The biotrickling filter system shall be designed to remove odorous constituents from the process air stream under the following operating conditions: Parameter Value Unit Airflow Capacity 5000 CFM H2S Loading (ave./peak): 20/40 ppmV Process Air Temperature: 50-100 Degree F Ambient Air Temperature: 30-110 Degree F Make-up water Hardness: 1 <50 ppm Make-up water Source I Potable/Effluent psi B. The biotrickling filter system by designed in accordance with the following table: Parameter Value Unit BIOREM Model M tilus®12 Number of Reactors 1 each Maximum Vessel Pressure Drop 2 Inches WC Vessel Footprint Dimensions 18' H x 12' D H:D, Feet Recirculation Rate 85 GPM Maximum Inlet Water Pressure 40 psi Blower Motor Size 20 HP Blower Pressure Rating 13 Inches WC Recirculation Pump Motor Size 5 HP C. The carbon polisher system by designed in accordance with the following table: Parameter Value Unit Model Carbon Vessel Number of Reactors 1 each Maximum Vessel Pressure Drop 6 Inches WC Vessel Footprint Dimensions 8' H x 10'D H:D, Feet Carbon volume 335 ft3 11510-4 2.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. When loaded under average and peak conditions the biotrickling filter system shall provide at least 98 percent removal of H2S and >90% total odors when operated at the design air flow rate. B. Carbon polisher shall remove >99% total inlet odors or <150 d/t, as measured by odor panel test. 2.03 SCOPE OF SUPPLY A. Biotrickling filter Vessels i. The vessel shall be designed to handle a pH of 1-2 as sulphuric acid. ii. The vessel shall be manufactured so that all parts are proportioned to have liberal strength and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the intended working conditions. iii. Vessel shall be designed to operate under a positive pressure of at least 8"WC. iv. Materials: a. The vessel shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced isophthalic polyester resin as follows: b. The inner shell shall be approximately 25 percent glass and 75 percent resin. The inner shell shall be provided with an internal C -glass surface veil liner to provide for adequate corrosion resistance. c. The resin shall be Hetron 922 by Ashland Chemical Co., DOW 411, AOC Vipel F010, or approved equal. �( d. Reinforcing material shall be commercial grade glass fiber containing a coupling agent to produce a suitable bond with the resin used. e. All materials shall be suitable for exposure to hydrogen sulfide fumes at a concentration of up to 300 ppm and sulfuric acid at a pH of 1.0. f. Ultraviolet absorbers shall be added to the exterior surface for improved weather resistance. Insulated tanks, where applicable, shall have a light gray pigmented exterior gelcoat layer. v. All surfaces shall be finished so as to obtain complete cure of the resin without air inhibition. The finished laminate shall be as free as commercially practicable from visual defects such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, air bubbles, pinholes and pimples. The vessels shall conform to the Manufacturer's minimum standard for Barcol hardness. vi. The inner surface shall be free of cracks and crazing with a smooth finish and with an average of not over two pits per square foot, providing the pits are less than 1/8 -inch diameter and not over 1/32 -inch deep and are covered by sufficient resin to avoid exposure of inner surface fabric. Some waviness is permissible as long as the surface is smooth and free of pits. vii. The vessel shall be equipped with the accessories as listed below: a. Lifting eyebolts (minimum of 4) shall be provided for use in transporting and placing the vessel. b. Hold downs (minimum of 4) each consisting of Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be used for anchor bolting to the concrete foundation. 11510-5 c. All necessary access doors, nozzles and other attachments. Vessel connection flanges shall be compatible with connecting piping and ductwork. d. At least one side entry Manway shall be provided for each lift and spray nozzle assembly and shall be a minimum of 24 -inch diameter with bolted flanged covers, and are rated for 10 -psi minimum. Bolted manways shall be provided with 1/8 inch thick full face neoprene gaskets with 316 stainless steel bolts. Provide manways as needed for inspection and access to internals of the biotrickling filter. e. All bolts and fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. f. All gaskets shall be EPDM. g. The media support shall be vinyl ester FRP grid type. Packing support plates and mid -span supports shall be suitable to support the weight of the packing and entrained recirculation solution. h. Integral sump to allow for continuous water recirculation. i. A chevron -style, polymer mist eliminator shall be provided at the top of each vessel. B. Biotrickling Filter Media shall be synthetic, engineered type, as supplied by Biorem and shall have the following characteristics; i. Media shall be random packed. ii. The biotrickling filter media shall consist of inorganic inert hydrophilic material, uniform in shape. iii. The media shall not shrink or swell under varying moisture conditions. C. Recirculation and Spray Irrigation System i. The recirculation system shall consist of a spray nozzle assembly above the top media layer, and centrifugal recirculation pump. Pipe shall be Schedule 80 PVC. Spray nozzles shall be PVC. ii. The centrifugal pump shall be CPVC or 316 stainless steel construction. Motors are 3 Phase/ 60Hz/46OV, TEFC, Suitable for Class 1, Division 2 classification. iii. The recirculation system shall be operated continuously for entire life of odor control system. iv. Systems that utilize intermittent media irrigation are not acceptable. D. Carbon polisher. i. Carbon vessel shall be 10' diameter, constructed of FRP as specified, where applicable, to the biotrickling filter vessel. ii. Minimum 3' bed depth of virgin activated carbon. iii. Vessel to include fittings for drain, 24" manway, minimum 3 sample ports, lifting and hold down lugs. E. Biofilter Fans i. Fan shall be designed for continuous service. ii. Fans shall be FRP, backward inclined or radial bladed centrifugal type. iii. Fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 11510-6 iv. Fan shall be equipped with a slip inlet connection, outlet flange, drain connection at bottom of fan scroll and inspection panel. v. Fans shall have a 316 stainless steel shaft. vi. Fan shall have self -aligned grease -packed bearings, with neoprene shaft seals and OSHA approved weatherproof motor / drive cover. vii. Fan shall have a 3 phase/60Hz/460V, TEFC, 1800 RPM Motor, suitable for Class 1, Division 2 and a service factor of 1.15. viii. The fan shall be manufactured by Universal Fan and Blower, or approved equal. 2.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. Provide a single control panel to service the biofilter system. Provide all items which are required to implement the specified functions and the functions required for proper system operation. i. Panel shall contain the local control and monitoring for the odor control system components, including; a. NEMA 4X 304 stainless steel enclosure with pedestal legs. b.Door-mounted disconnect c. Motor starter and Hand/Off/Auto switch for fan d, Motor starter and Hand/Off/Auto switch for recirculation pump e. Status light (on when running) for fan and recirculation pump f. Recirculation low flow alarm g. Alarm reset push button ii. UL certified. iii. Panel shall be mounted a minimum of 3 feet from any potential leak point to comply with NFPA 820. B. Waterbox i. A waterbox, which houses components necessary for water recirculation shall be provided. ii. Waterbox to be a NEMA 4X enclosure of either FRP or 304 SST with mounting feed if required. iii. Waterbox shall contain valves and plumbing required for media irrigation iv. Field connection to external water supply. v. Fuse block and terminals for all field connections. vi. Waterbox shall be mounted a minimum of 3 feet from any potential leak point to comply with NFPA 820. vii. Waterbox shall contain the following instrumentation: 11510-7 a. (1) Flow indicator/switch, to display recirculated water flow rate, signal alarm and shut off recirculation pump in case of reduced water flow. b. (1) Local flow indicator to display blow down water flow rate. C. Instrumentation External to Waterbox: i. (1) Differential pressure gauge to measure pressure drop across media. ii. (1) Inlet air temperature indicator (local read). iii. (1) Pressure indicator (water) at outlet of recirculation pump. D. Fluid Control Systems: i. (1) Lot fluid control valves and strainers as required. ii. (1) Lot 0.25" tubing for differential pressure gauges. iii. (1) Lot drip legs for differential pressure gauges. E. Coordinate with SCADA provider to deliver UO as described on the drawings and specifications. A terminal strip shall be provided near the bottom of the panel for all input and output connections. The terminal strip shall be clearly marked in accordance with the schematic. Provide dry contacts for digital signals and 4-20 mA for analog signals for the following signals, suitable for remote monitoring by the plant control system: Digital Signal Description Individual Low and High water level alarms Blower Running and Blower in AUTO Blower Fault (common alarm for either motor thermal overload or starter overload), Recirculation Pump ON and Pump in AUTO 2.05 CONTRACTOR'S SCOPE The following items listed are to be supplied by the Contractor and are not in the Manufacturer's Scope of Supply. A. Provide all equipment offloading, temporary storage and placement. B. Provide labor, materials and equipment for the installation and assembly of all BIOREM® supplied equipment and instrumentation. Supply and install all other materials or equipment required for a complete operational system. C. Site preparation and clearing of materials. D. Design and supply an appropriately sized reinforced concrete slab to handle full load of the biotrickler vessel, fan, control panel, waterbox, and nutrient system if required. Provide collection and analysis of any geo-technical data as required. E. Supply and install all required protective coatings or paint such as UV paint for piping or concrete paint. 11510-8 F. Supply and install all external water piping and drain piping to and from the biotrickler vessel, water box and other fluid equipment including heat tracing, insulation, piping supports, drainage traps where necessary and / or UV protective paint. If winterizing system, contractor to insulate differential pressure gauge enclosures, with polytubing installed in electrical conduit, which is to be heat -traced and insulated. G. Supply and install air ductwork to and from the biotrickler system including exhaust stack, flexible connectors, interconnecting ducting, manual or actuated dampers, filters, insulation and piping supports, unless otherwise indicated above. H. Supply and install all hardware, supports, guide wires, duct gaskets, expansion joints and connectors needed for a complete and operational system. I. Supply make-up water at a minimum pressure of 40 psi. Water analysis for hardness or other parameters as necessary. J. Provide main electrical service and system field wiring outside the main biofilter control panel. All electrical requirements for heat tracing and equipment not specifically provide by BIOREM® to be provided by others. K: Provide duct balancing, and system functional, hydrostatic, vibration and performance testing. to be conducted by OTHERS as may be specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. B. The Contractor shall give the Manufacturer 5 full working days notice prior to media placement. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. The Manufacturer of the biofilter system shall furnish the services of a factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper operating and maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise a test run of the equipment. The Manufacturer shall furnish a minimum of 1 trip and a minimum of two (2) days total on-site service for mechanical checkout. On site service required for performance testing shall be in addition to the mechanical checkout service. B. Install all systems in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Media installation procedures must comply with Biofilter Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Performance Testing of Odor Control System Verify conformance to specified parameters, to be conducted using actual inlet conditions of the site. Testing to be completed no sooner than three weeks, but not later than 10 weeks, after system startup and shall include; 1. Verification of proper airflow 2. Measurement of inlet and outlet H2S concentrations. 3. Test will be conducted for a period of not less than 8 continuous hours with H2S readings being collected every 30 minutes. 11510-9 4. Record pressure drop readings across media lift. 5. In addition, bag samples will be collected at two different times, on the inlet and outlet of the Biofilter, for odor panel analysis. 6. A report of the test results shall be provided. END OF SECTION 11510-10 DIVISION 1 (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) SECTION 13210 FLAT ALUMINUM COVERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: This section covers flat aluminum rectangular basin covers to be installed for Indian River County, Florida, on existing anaerobic tanks for the West Regional WWTF. The cover manufacturer shall visit the site prior to the Bid to become familiar with the basin dimensions and appurtenances in order to understand the extent of design and fabrication requirements associated with the existing piping, sluice gates, handrails, mixer lift mechanisms, and other basin features that may pose an interference with mounting the covers as indicated on the drawings. Each cover shall be furnished complete with all required fasteners, sealant, gaskets, anchor bolts, and all accessories and appurtenances specified, indicated on the drawings, or otherwise required for a complete installation. Aluminum covers shall be leak tight cover systems. The cover system will contain foul air that will be extracted and treated in odor control systems. The covers shall be designed in compliance with the requirements of this specification and shall be as manufactured by Hallsten, or equal. B. Work Includes: 1. Providing openings in and attachments to covers to accommodate all appurtenant piping, ductwork, handrail posts, gate operators, instrumentation and equipment supports as shown, specified, or required. All cover openings required for such appurtenances shall be sealed to the greatest extent possible to maintain leak tightness of the aluminum cover system as a whole. Provide and install EPDM sealing strips at gate openings and other penetrations to minimize air leakage. 2. Providing all support beams, trusses or spars and connections to existing concrete walls as required for cover support and to meet the load bearing criteria set forth in this specification. Designing all structural support systems for the aluminum covers, including cover load bearing criteria as well as loads resulting from ductwork, instrumentation, piping and other appurtenance support by the aluminum cover system. 4. Providing access hatches and vents as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 GENERAL A. The covers shall be fabricated and installed in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations furnished by the cover manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer 13210-1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications. The cover manufacturer shall be a specialist in the design and construction of flat aluminum covers; shall have furnished at least five flat aluminum covers of the general type and size specified herein which have been in successful operation for at least 5 years; and shall have a record of experience and quality of work in the design and construction of flat aluminum covers that is satisfactory to the Engineer. B. An allowance of $10,000 shall be added to, and assumed to be included into, the overall cost quote for this section of the work. This allowance is to be used to pay for any uncertain or unforeseen changes in the work due to difficulties and interferences not immediately obvious at the time of bid. If any portion of the allowance is not used, it shall be returned to the County at the end of the project by reduction in final payment. 1.04 GUARANTEE A. The cover and all accessories shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year against defective materials and construction. The manufacturer shall replace ox repair faulty workmanship and defective materials at no cost to the Owner within the warranty period. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Shop Drawing Submittal Requirements: Provide conceptual drawings and specifications consisting of plan, section views, and details for the covers. The specifications shall provide information on the materials and construction proposed. The drawings shall indicate the proposed location and number of beams, orientation of span, and general location of proposed penetrations, hatches, vents, and type of end wall connections proposed. B. Final Shop Drawings and Data: Once the preliminary shop drawings have been reviewed and accepted, submit complete drawings, details, and specifications for each cover and accessories. 1. The data shall indicate the sizes of all major components, specifications on the materials and construction procedures, anchor bolt locations and details, loads imposed on the structure at support locations, and assembly and installation details. 2. Drawings shall be complete with all dimensions noted; exact location and sizes of beams, penetrations, hatches, vents, and end wall connections; sectional views and details indicating the necessary information for complete installation instructions and addressing the interference issues from existing basin features; and proposed methods and personnel for installation. Plans, sections, and details shall be specific to this project, with separate sets of drawings for each of the three sets of covers included in this work. Drawings and data attesting to the adequacy of the design shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida, before submitting for review. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. The covers shall be installed on existing concrete basins containing raw municipal sewage. For the anoxic basins and the digester, the odor control piping will be used to maintain a partial 13210-2 vacuum beneath the covers to collect and convey malodorous air to an odor control biofilter and scrubber respectively. B. Each cover and all materials used therein shall provide corrosion resistance for the specified service conditions and shall be certified by the cover manufacturer as suitable for continuous exposure to water -saturated air containing hydrogen sulfide and mercaptans at ambient temperatures ranging from 30 to 120 T under the specified operating conditions. 2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Each cover shall be surface mounted, flat panel type, nominally 2" thick panels. Panels shall be self supporting and clear span across the basin or shall span to beams which span across the basin. Panels mounting to the basin concrete walls shall be either flush mount type, mounted to the top of the wall, or mounted to the side of the wall. Flush mount type is required in areas used for normal foot traffic. The minimum distance from normal (average) water depth to the bottom of the lowest member of the cover (bottom of beams) be no less than 10 inches. Space frames or trusses will not be permitted. B. The covers shall be gasketed and substantially air tight. Connections shall be designed to permit the expansion and contraction of the cover without compromising seal integrity. C. Individual cover panels shall be protected from lifting due when subjected to high winds by means of a positive clamping or other similar method. << D. The cover and accessories shall be designed in accordance with the Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures"; ASCE 7-98, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures"; and the following criteria: Design Loads and Criteria Uniform live load: Unbalanced load acting over one half of the cover with no load on the other half Internal vacuum load Wind load criteria Basic wind speed Exposure Category Importance Factor Point loads One concentrated load; (load applied to a 6 -inch square area at any point on the panel) Maximum panel weight 50 psf 100 percent of the specified live load 1" water column 130 mph (3 second gust speed) Exposure C 1.0 400 pounds 150 pounds E. The cover design loads specified herein shall be considered to act in accordance with basic load combinations (1), (2), (3), and (4) set forth in Paragraph 2.4.1 of ASCE 7-98. The basic load 13210-3 combinations shall also include the effects of unbalanced live load and internal vacuum applied simultaneously in such a way as to produce the highest stresses. The cover design shall preclude instability due to ponding resulting from rainfall. F. The maximum deflection of any primary structural component under the live load shall not exceed IJ240 of the clear span between support members. 2.03 MATERIALS A. All metallic materials used in the construction of each cover shall be aluminum or stainless steel that is suitable for the corrosive conditions. Materials of construction shall be as follows: Beam Members Aluminum extrusions, 6061-T6. Cover Panels Aluminum sheet, 3003-H16 or 6061-T6, not less than 0.09 inch thick. Fasteners Stainless steel, AISI Series 3(10; or aluminum, 2024-T4 or 7075-T73. Sealant Silicone; Dow "790" ; General Electric "1200"; or equal. Gaskets Silicone rubber; neoprene; hypalon; or equal Support Bearing Pads Neoprene; or equal Anchor Bolts Type 304 Stainless Steel. Access Hatches Aluminum, 3003-1-116, 5052-H32, 5086-T34, or 6061- T6, not less than 0.09 inch thick. B. All members and panels shall have a mill finish and all materials shall be suitable for the service conditions. The use of galvanized, plated, or coated carbon steel members, components, or fasteners will not be acceptable. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION A. All panels, except where odor control piping is attached, shall be easily removable and the lifting force shall not exceed the dead weight of the panel. Panels shall be provided with two lifting handles at each end. Handles shall be located within 3 inches of the end of the panel and shall not extend above the surface of the flat cover walking surface or pond water. B. Elastomeric weatherseal gaskets shall form a continuous watertight seal along the panel edges. Gaskets shall be fully enclosed to prevent exposure to ultraviolet light. All connections shall be designed to permit expansion and contraction of the cover. C. Welding Requirements. All welding of aluminum shall be performed in the shop in accordance f ( with the recommendations of the American Welding Society and the Aluminum Association, Specifications for Aluminum Structures, Section 7. Welds shall be free of porosity, cracks, 13210-4 holes, and entrapped slag. Field welding of aluminum will not be permitted. D. Fiberglass Odor Control Pipe Connection. At each odor control pipe connection indicated on the drawings an ANSI 16.1 Class 25 flange shall be provided for the connection of the fiberglass odor control piping. All joints between the odor control pipe connection and the fiberglass odor control piping shall be suitably reinforced, gasketed, and permanently sealed weathertight. E. Cover penetrations: Provide for penetrations through the cover for various existing elements of the existing basins, including side -mounted handrail posts, sample and water pipes, new internal recycle piping, gate and telescoping valve operator stems, and other items noted on the Drawings. Penetrations shall be sealed around the annular space to the extent possible without affecting the normal function of the associated device. F. Access Hatches. Access hatches and panels shall be provided as indicated on the drawings for access to mud valve operators, general maintenance and process access, and access to existing mixers. Hatches and frames shall be suitably reinforced to provide a rigid, sealed installation. Each hatch cover shall be hinged along one side and shall be provided with a locking latch, a gasket, and a means of holding them open automatically. The lifting force required to open each hatch shall not exceed the dead weight of the hatch panel. Provide multiple doors when needed and as shown. For access hatches at mixer locations, hatch shall be sized to avoid any conflict in normal removal of the mixer including angle of mixer to wall, lifting cable access and clearance, lifting mechanism mounting and operation, swing out operation of mixer once clear of the cover (open doors don't restrict movement), and closure of hatch around existing lift brackets. Cutouts in the mixer access hatch doors may be needed to close the hatch around the existing lift brackets (which extend above the top of the cover), along with a suitable closure device to seal the covers once the doors are closed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHIPPING AND HANDLING A. All component parts and accessories of each cover shall be adequately protected during transportation, while storage at the jobsite, and during installation activities. Damaged components will be rejected and shall be replaced with undamaged units or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The cover manufacturer shall provide as built drawings and installation instructions to the Contractor prior to installing the cover. The Contractor shall install the cover in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Panel units shall be plumb, level, and aligned within an installed tolerance of 1/4 inch per 20 feet. B. Field verify dimensions of openings prior to cover fabrication. C. Use anchorage devices and fasteners to secure covers to supporting members of prepared openings. Rivet connections at any location are not acceptable. All panels shall interlock with the adjoining beam or truss without the use of threaded fasteners. D. Perform all cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. Set the Work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack. Do not use wedges or skimming devices. 13210-5 E. Wherever covers are pierced by pipes, ducts, and structural members, cut openings neatly and accurately to size and provide structural members and closure panels to maintain support and water tightness. F. Divide the panels into sections only to the extent required for installation wherever covers are to be placed around previously installed pipe, ducts, concrete, and structural members. G. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: Using approved asphaltic or zinc chromate paint, provide two (2) heavy coats on aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete and masonry. Provide dielectric gaskets between dissimilar metals and alloys. H. Remove stained or otherwise defective Work and replace with material that meets the Contract Document requirements. I. CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of the cover manufacturer's representative to assist and advise CONTRACTOR during the installation of the aluminum cover system. J. Protection of Coating Systems: Cover supports; covers. and all cover system appurtenances shall be fastened to the concrete structure in a manner that does not compromise the concrete liner and coating system. The concrete liner and coating system will extend beyond the covered space to ensure complete concrete protection. END OF SECTION 13210-6 lei (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY. LEFT BLANK) SECTION 15044 PIPING MATERIALS, DESIGNATION, AND PRESSURE TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: This section specifies the pneumatic, hydrostatic, and leakage testing of piping and acceptable piping materials for each application. The piping designations (mark) are also indicated. 2. Piping Materials: Piping materials for the various services shall be as shown in Table 15044, except that any piping materials designated on the drawings shall supercede Table 15044. C. Test Pressures: Test pressures for the various services and types of piping are shown in Table 15044, or if not shown, shall be calculated at 1.5 times maximum working pressure. Any exceptions to the pressure test schedule are shown on the Contract Drawings, D. Testing Records: 1. Provide a record of each piping installation during the testing. These records shall include: a) Date of test. b) Identification of pipeline tested or retested. C) Identification of pipeline material. d) Identification of pipe specification. e) Test fluid. f) Test pressure. g) Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of repairs, or corrections made. 15044-1 U:\1V0\Projects\IRC_W_WW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\lOB_90percentIDlV 15\15041.doc h) Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured conformed to the specifications. i) Signature of Owner's representative witnessing pipe test. 2. Submit five (5) copies of the test records to the Engineer's representative upon completion of the testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Testing fluid: Water unless a pneumatic test is indicated. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide pressure gauges, pipes, bulkheads, pumps, and meters to perform the hydrostatic and pneumatic testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING PREPARATION A. Pipes shall be in place with joints restrained and/or anchored before commencing pressure testing. B. Conduct hydrostatic and pneumatic tests on exposed and aboveground piping after the piping has been installed and attached to the pipe supports, hangers, anchors, expansion joints, valves, and meters. C. Before conducting hydrostatic tests, flush pipes with water to remove dirt and debris. For pneumatic tests, blow air through the pipes. D. Test new pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines by isolating the new line from the existing line by means of pipe caps, special flanges, or blind flanges. After the new line has been successfully tested, remove caps or flanges and connect to the existing piping. E. Conduct hydrostatic tests on buried pipe after the trench has been completely backfilled. The pipe may be partially backfilled and the joints left exposed for inspection for an initial leakage test. Perform the final test, however, after completely backfilling and compacting the trench. 15044-2 U:\IVO\Projects\lRC_PV 1V\V-2011URC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 15\15044.doc 6. Testing of piping under structures shall be completed prior to beginning construction of the structure. In the case of concrete encased piping, the pressure test shall be conducted after the concrete encasement has been placed and cured, but prior to beginning construction of any structure above the piping. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Hydrostatic Testing of Aboveground or Exposed Piping: Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air while the pipe is being filled. Subject the piping system to the test pressure indicated. Maintain the test pressure for a minimum of four hours. Examine joints, fittings, valves, and connections for leaks. The piping system shall show no leakage or weeping. Correct leaks and retest until no leakage is obtained. B. Hydrostatic Pressure and Leakage Testing of Buried Piping: 1. All components of pressure mains including pipe, fittings, and valves shall be tested following installation in accordance with applicable portions of ANSI/AWWA, C 600, latest revision. 2. All pumps, gauges and measuring devices shall be furnished, installed, and operated by the Contractor and all such equipment and devices and their installation shall be approved by the Engineer. All pressure and leakage testing shall be done in the presence of a representative of the Owner and the Engineer as a condition precedent to the approval and acceptance of the system. Water for testing and flushing shall be clean water provided by the Contractor from a source approved by the Engineer. 4. Hydrostatic testing shall commence only after a minimum of 36 hours have elapsed after the last concrete reaction or thrust block has been cast using high early strength concrete, or at least 10 days after the last concrete reaction or thrust block has been cast using standard strength concrete. 5. Pressure piping shall be hydrostatically tested to the pressure specified in Table 15044 at the end of this Section for a minimum duration of three hours. The test pressure shall not vary by more than ± 5 psig. 6. Procedure for Hydrostatic Testing: a) Each section of the pipe to be tested shall be slowly filled with water. b) During filling of the pipe and prior to testing, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If permanent automatic or manual air release valves are not located at all high points, the Contractor shall install temporary air vents at all high point, complete with tapping saddle, corporation stop, fittings and 15044-3 U:\WOU'rojectsURC_W_WW-2011URC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 15\15044.doc valves. Following completion of testing, the taps shall be tightly plugged unless otherwise specified. 7. Apply the specified test pressure, measured at the point of highest elevation in the pipe, by means of a test pump connected to the pipe in a manner approved by the Engineer and the Owner. 8. A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the hydrostatic pressure test. Leakage shall be defined by a measured quantity of water that must be supplied from a calibrated container into the newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof, to maintain pressure within ± 5 psi of the specified test pressure, after the air in the pipe has been expelled and the pipe has been completely filled with water. 9. Allowable leakage shall be limited to the following formula as set forth in ANSUAWWA C 600 latest revision, or to Table 6 of ANSI/AWWA C 600. The maximum allowable leakage shall be the minimum quantity of the three values as determined by the following formulas or obtained from Table 6. The allowable leakage formulas are: a) 10 gpd/inch diameter/mile b) L = SD(P)' 148,000 in which: L is the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipe tested, in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches; and P is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gauge. 10. During the hydrostatic and leakage tests, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, pipe couplings, and the like will be carefully examined. Acceptance of the pipe shall be determined on the basis of the allowable leakage. If any test of the pipe laid indicates leakage greater than that allowed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, repair by removing and replacing defective pipe, fittings, valves, pipe couplings, and the like, with materials that are free of defects, after which the pipe shall be retested. Repair and retesting shall be done until the pipes pass the specified test. All visible leaks and cracked pipe, fittings, valves, pipe couplings, and the like shall be repaired or replaced regardless of the amount of leakage. 15044-4 UANV0\Projects\IRC \V WW-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControT\10_SpecAl 0B_90percent\DIV M15044.doc C. Infiltration/Exfiltration Testing For Gravity Drain Pipes: All gravity drain pipes shall be tested for infiltration and exfiltration. The infiltration/exfiltration test shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner. 2. The allowable limits of infiltration or exfiltration or leakage for the drain pipes, or any portion thereof, shall not exceed a rate of 0.04 gallons/inch of diameter/hour/100 feet of pipe. 3. Any part, or all of the system may be tested for infiltration or exfiltration, as directed by the Engineer. Prior to testing for infiltration, the system shall be pumped out so that normal infiltration conditions exist at the time of testing. The amounts of infiltration or exfiltration shall be determined by pumping into or out of drums, measured by means of a calibrated V -notch, sharp crested weir constructed in a rigid sealed frame of the correct size for the drain pipe being tested, or by other approved methods. 4 The water tightness of the drain pipe which has a crown lying below the normal groundwater level shall be tested by measuring the infiltration. The water tightness of drain pipes having a crown 1 inch or more above groundwater level shall be tested by filling the pipe with water to produce a hydrostatic head of 2 feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or to a depth equal to the normal wet season groundwater table outside the drain pipe, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. For the exfiltration test, the trench excavation shall remain dewatered as required throughout the test. 5. For the exfiltration test, the water level in the drain pipe section being tested shall be allowed to stabilize a minimum of one hour before beginning the test. Following the one hour stabilization period, water loss shall be measured from the drain pipe system for a continuous test period of two hours. Upon application of internal hydrostatic pressure for exfiltration testing, care shall be taken to preclude unseating the joint gaskets for a specific type of pipe by exceeding the pressure capability thereof. 6. Where infiltration or exfiltration exceeds the allowable limits specified herein, the defective pipe, joints, or other faulty construction shall be located and repaired by the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot be located, the Contractor shall remove and reconstruct as much of the work as is necessary in order to conform to the specified allowable limits. 7. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials and shall conduct all testing required, under the direction of the Engineer. D. Pneumatic Testing: 15044-5 U:\W01Projects\IRC_W WW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControl\I Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15044.doc 1. Test Pressure: Minimum 1 1/2 times working pressure. 2. Perform pneumatic testing using nitrogen. Perform tests only after the piping has been completely installed including supports, hangers, and anchors. Protect test personnel and Owner's operating personnel. Secure piping to be tested to prevent the pipe from moving and to prevent damage to adjacent piping and equipment. Remove or isolate from the pipe any appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by the test, prior to applying the test. Apply an initial pneumatic leakage test of 25 psig to the piping system prior to final leak testing. Examine for leakage, detected by soap bubbles, at joints and connections. After correcting visible leaks, gradually increase the pressure in the system to not more than one-half of the test pressure. Then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure has been reached. Continuously maintain the pneumatic test pressure for a minimum time of four hours and for such additional time as may be necessary to conduct a soap bubble examination for leakage. The piping system shall show no leakage. Correct any visible leakage and retest. E. Vacuum Testing: 1. Test Pressure: Minimum 1 1/2 times working vacuum pressure. 2. Perform vacuum test after performing a pneumatic test (as previously specified) on all lines scheduled for vacuum testing. Develop a vacuum in the entire line being tested by use of temporary mechanical means and as measured by attached gauges. Develop vacuum slowly until test vacuum pressure has been achieved. Vacuum must hold for 4 hours without significant loss in vacuum pressure to demonstrate a leak proof system. 15044-6 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_\V\V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control110_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 15\15044,doc TABLE 15044 PIPING PRESSURE TEST SCHEDULE AND MATERIAL LISTING Service Mark Test Pressure (in psig) Pipe Material Alum Solution AL See Note 1 Sch. 80 PVC Caustic Solution NaOH See Note 1 Sch. 80 PVC Chlorine Solution CL, C12 100 Sch. 80 PVC Clarified Effluent CE See Note 2 DIP Drain DR See Note 3 See Note 4 Effluent EF See Note 2 DIP Filter Backwash FB See Note 2 DIP Filter Effluent FE See Note 2 DIP Forcemain FM 100 See Note 5 Grit GR 100 DIP, See Note 9 Internal Recycle IR 100 DIP Methanol Solution MT See Note 1 Sch. 80 PVC Mixed Liquor ML See Note 2 DIP Non -Potable Water NPW 150 See Note 5 Odor Control Air Piping OA See Note 8 Sch. 80 PVC Plant Recycle PR 100 DIP Potable Water PW 150 See Note 5 Polymer Solution P See Note 1 Sch. 80 PVC Process Air PA See Note 8 DIP Process Air PA See Note 8 Sch. 10 304 ST. STL. Raw Sewage RS See Note 2 DIP Return Activated Sludge RAS 100 DIP Sample SA 100 See Note 5 Scum SC See Note 2 DIP Seal Water SW See Note 6 Sch. 80 PVC Sludge SL 100 DIP Waste Activated Sludge WAS 100 DIP 15044-7 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W\V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\lOB_90pereent\DIV 15\15044.doe NOTES: 1. Chemical feed piping shall be tested at 75 psig using potable water. 2. Non pressure process piping shall be pressure tested at 1.5 times the maximum head pressure on the pipe. Calculations for restraint of non -pressure piping shall use a value of 15 psig. 3. Drain piping shall be tested for infiltration/exfiltration as specified in this Section. 4. Drain pipes shall be DR 18 PVC meeting AWWA C 900 or C 905 or Class 52 DIP. All drain pipes under structures shall be DIP and shall be concrete encased. 5. Piping below ground or inside structures shall be Schedule 80 PVC for sizes smaller than 4 inches in diameter, and shall be either DIP or Class 150 (DR 18) PVC for sizes 4 inches in diameter or larger. Piping above ground or outside structures shall be Schedule 80 PVC for sizes 3 inches in diameter or smaller, and shall be DIP for sizes larger than 3 inches in diameter. 6. Test requirements for seal water piping shall be 1.5 times the maximum working pressure, but test pressure shall not be less than 100 psig. 7. Piping not listed and portions of piping in gross conflict with listed pressure shall be tested at a minimum of 1.5 times working pressure. 8. Air pipes shall be pneumatically tested using air at 1.5 times the maximum output pressure of the blowers, but shall not be tested at less than 50 psig. Suction pipes shall be vacuum tested at 1.5 times the maximum vacuum produced by the blower. 9. All grit piping elbows shall be long radius. END OF SECTION 15044-8 U:6V0\ProjectsVRC_W_WW-2011\IRC_An Tanks_OdorControl\IO_Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV15\15044.doe SECTION 15050 PROCESS AND UTILITY PIPING, FITTINGS, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials and in performing all operations necessary for the construction or installation of all process and utility piping, valves, valve boxes and all castings and appurtenances within, adjacent and connecting to pump stations, and inside the limits of the work shown, complete and ready for operation as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construction Requirements: All underground pipes shall be installed with at least 36 inches of cover, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. For underground utilities, changes in horizontal alignment of less than 111/4 degrees may be achieved through the use of allowable pipe deflection in lieu of fittings shown on the Contract Drawings at the Contractor's option, but subject to approval of the Engineer as to layout. Said deflection shall not exceed 80 percent of the maximum allowable deflection as stated in the pipe manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Pipe Inspection: The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturers a certificate of inspection to the effect that the pipe and fittings supplied for this Contract have been inspected at the plant and that they meet the requirements of these specifications. 2. All pipe and fittings shall be subject to visual inspection at time of delivery by rail or truck and also just before they are lowered into the trench to be laid. Joints or fittings that do not conform to these specifications will be rejected and must be removed immediately by the Contractor. The entire product of any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the methods of manufacture fail to secure uniform results, or where the materials used are such as to produce inferior pipe or fittings. 15050-1 U:\NO\ProjectsHRC_W_WN-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doe 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. In general, the following shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to construction: a) Mill test certificates or certified test reports on pipe and fittings, coatings and linings. b) Details of restrained and flexible joints. G) Fire hydrants, backflow preventers. d) Valve boxes. e) All valves, including gate, plug, butterfly, ball, check, telescoping, automatic air release, etc. f) Couplings. g) Service saddles. h) Pressure gauges. i) Flexible expansion joints and tie rods. D Joint lubricant. k) Detailed piping layout Drawings and pipe laying schedule (see below). 1) Temporary plug and anchorage system for hydrostatic pressure test. m) Tie rods. n) Valve and meter vaults. 2. Tabulated layout schedule for each pipe system including: a) Pipe invert station and elevation at each change of grade and alignment. b) The limits of each reach of pipe thickness class and of restrained joints. C) The limits of each reach of concrete encasement or encasement in casing. d) Locations of valves and other mechanical equipment. e) Methods and locations of supports. f) Details of special elbows and fittings. 15050-2 UAWO\Projects\IRC_W_WW-201RIRC_Ane_Tanks_ Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV 15\15050.doc A separate shop drawing submittal will be required for each major item listed above and for each different type of an item within a major item. For example, separate submittals will be required for gate, plug, butterfly, ball, check and automatic air release valves. All submittals shall be in accordance Section 01340. B. Acceptance of Material: The Contractor shall furnish an Affidavit of Compliance certified by the pipe manufacturer that the pipe, fittings and specials furnished under this Contract comply with all applicable provisions of current AWWA and ASTM Standards and these Specifications. No pipe or fittings will be accepted for use in the work on this project until the Affidavit has been submitted and approved by the Engineer. 2. The Owner reserves the right to sample and test any pipe or fitting after delivery and to reject all pipe and fittings represented by any sample which fails to comply with the specified requirements. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit operation and maintenance manuals for valves, hydrants, backflow preventers, and other applicable components requiring periodic maintenance and/or explanation of operation. Manuals shall be prepared in accordance with Section 01730. Information shall include: Detailed assembly Drawings, clear and concise instructions for operating, adjusting, overhauling, troubleshooting and other maintenance. Include shop drawings previously submitted and approved with all corrections made. 2. A complete lubrication schedule including lubricant types, grades and frequency of lubrication. A list of parts for all products with catalog numbers and all data necessary for ordering replacement parts. Such instructions and parts lists shall have been prepared for the specific product furnished and shall not refer to other types or models. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. During shipping, delivering and installing pipe, fittings, valves, backflow preventers, and accessories, they shall be handled in such manner as to ensure a sound undamaged condition. B. Particular care shall be taken not to damage the pipe coating. C. Insides of valves and backflow preventers shall be kept free of dirt and debris. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Water in Excavation: Water shall not be allowed in the trenches while underground pipes are being laid and/or tested. The Contractor shall not open more trench than the available pumping facilities are able to dewater to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for disposing of all water so as not to injure or interfere with the normal drainage of the territory in which he is working. In no case shall the pipelines being installed be used as drains for such water, and the ends of the pipe shall be kept properly and adequately plugged during 15050-3 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W WW-2011URC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doe construction by the use of approved stoppers and not by improvised equipment. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent the entrance of mud, sand, or other obstructing matter into the pipelines. If on completion of the work any such material has entered the pipelines, it must be cleaned as directed by the Engineer so that the entire system will be left clean and unobstructed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to allow either ductile iron pipe or PVC pipe for water and sewer lines 3 inches in diameter or larger, unless one pipe material is expressly called for on the drawings or defined in Section 15044. 2.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI, A 21.51 and AWWA C 151, latest revision. The underground pipe shall have a minimum pressure class of Class 350 for diameters 4 to 12 inches in size and a minimum pressure class of Class 250 for diameters larger than 12 inches in size. Flanged pipe shall have a minimum thickness class of Class 53. B. Pipe shall have a minimum rated water working pressure of 250 psi and shall be furnished in nominal laying lengths of 20 feet or less, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. C. Lining and Coating: The applicator firm and personnel shall be certified, experienced, and qualified to perform the application of the lining and coating materials specified herein. All ductile iron pipe and ductile iron fittings shall have the linings and coatings applied and warranted by the same applicator firm. The applicator firm shall submit certification attesting that it met the requirements of this specification and the requirements of the lining and/or coating materials manufacturer's application specifications. The pipe lining material shall be applied to new, unused, never lined ductile iron pipe and fittings. The pipe and fitting linings and coatings shall be tested for freedom from holidays and pinholes by use of a Tinker-Rasor or K -D Bird Dog Holiday Detector. The pipe shall be lined and coated as specified below. Interior Lining for All Piping Except Non -potable Water, Reclaimed Water, and Substandard Effluent Piping: Ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials shall be coated with Protecto 401, a high build multi-component amine cured Novalac epoxy polymeric lining manufactured by Indurall Coatings, Inc., Birmingham, Alabama, or approved equal. The interiors of the ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials shall receive 40 mils DFT of the protective lining. Storage, surface preparation, application and safety precautions shall strictly follow manufacturers instructions. The applicator of the interior lining shall be approved by the lining manufacturer and written certification of such approval shall be submitted to the Engineer before any lining work is initiated. Applicator firms not having lining manufacturer's written approval will not be considered. 2. Interior Lining for Non -potable Water, Reclaimed Water, and Substandard Effluent Piping: Ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials shall be cement lined in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 104, current revision, "Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water". The cement lining shall have standard thickness and, 15050-4 U:\NO\Projects\IRC_W W1V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc after curing, the lining shall have a seal coat of bituminous material in accordance with AWWA C 104, current revision. 3. Exterior Coatings for Buried Pipe: Ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials to be installed underground shall be coated on exterior at the factory with an asphaltic coating as specified in AWWA C 151. All clamps, bolts, nuts, studs and other uncoated parts of joints for underground installation shall be coated with coal tar epoxy prior to backfilling. Coal tar epoxy shall be equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. Exterior Coating for Exposed Pipe: Ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials to be installed aboveground shall be furnished with a shop applied primer on the exterior. The shop primer shall be as specified in Section 09900 -Painting. 5. Polyethylene Pipe Encasement: a) Polyethylene tube encasement shall be provided and installed for all buried ductile iron pipe. Both material and installation procedures shall be in accordance with AWWA C 105. b) The polyethylene encasement shall be a minimum of 8 mil thick and shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide suitable protection of pipe installation in corrosive soil. C) All pipe joints shall consist of a minimum of one foot of polyethylene overlap onto the adjacent pipe at both ends. All overlap material shall be secured in place with at least two wraps of 1'h -inch x 8 mils polyethylene adhesive tape. Any slack liner material along the pipe barrel shall be taken up by folds secured in- place with adhesive tape. Repair any rips, punctures or other damage to polyethylene with tape or by patching. d) All valves, fittings and specialty items shall be jointed with proper overlaps and fastening as described above. Prepare openings for service taps, air -relief connections, etc., by making a cut in the polyethylene and temporarily folding back the edges. After installation is completed, replace the polyethylene and repair the cut with polyethylene adhesive tape. e) Care shall be taken during backfilling so that no damage will occur to the polyethylene liner. In general, backfilling shall be done in accordance with AWWA Standard C 600. f) The Contractor shall install polyethylene encasement in accordance with all liner and pipe manufacturer recommendations. D. Fittings: Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be either mechanical joint, restrained joint or flanged joint as indicated on the Drawings and shall have a minimum working pressure of 250 psi. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 110, ANSIIAWWA C 111 and ANSFAWWA C 153, latest revisions for flanged and mechanical joint pipe. Fittings shall be coated and lined as specified above for ductile iron pipe. The rubber gaskets for flanged, mechanical, and push -on joints shall be as described below. 15050-5 U:\WO\ProjectsURC_W_W\V-2011URC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc E. Push -On Joints: Pipe using push -on joints shall be in strict accordance with AWWA C 111 and ANSI A21.1 1, latest revision and shall be as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Company (Fastite Joint), United States Pipe Company (Tyton Joint), or Clow Corporation (Super Bell Tite Joint). Jointing materials shall be provided by the pipe manufacturer and installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended practice. F. Mechanical Joints: Jointing materials for mechanical joints shall be provided by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. Materials assembly and bolting shall be in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 111 and ANSUAWWA C 153, latest revisions. Tee head bolts and nuts for mechanical joints shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel as manufactured by NSS Industries, Plymouth, Michigan or an equal approved by the Engineer. G. Flanged Joints: Flange drillings shall be Class 125 per ANSI B 16.1 with any special drilling and tapping as required to insure correct alignment and bolting. Gaskets: Fullface, 1/8 -inch thick, cloth -inserted rubber: Johns -Manville No. 109, John Crane Co., Style 777, or approved equal. Gaskets shall he suitable for a water pressure of 350 psi at a temperature of 180°F. 2. Bolts and Nuts for Flanges: a) Bolts and nuts for flange located outside above ground or indoors and in enclosed vaults and structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B. b) Bolts and nuts for buried and submerged flanges and flanges located in wet wells, and manholes shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8M for bolts, and ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for nuts. 3. Flanges shall be long -hub type screwed tightly on pipe by machine at the foundry prior to facing and drilling. Flange machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor immediately after facing and drilling. Field assembled screwed on flanges are prohibited. H. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be provided for all piping systems in accordance with the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA) Standards, to restrain system thrust. Restraint calculations shall be based on pipe laying condition type 4 and soil type SM. Pipe joints and fittings shall be restrained as specified below. 1. Manufactured Restrained Joints: Manufactured restrained joints shall be Flex -Ring, Lok -Ring, Lok -Fast or Fast Grip, manufactured by the American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Lok -Type or Tr -Flex Type, manufactured by the United States Pipe Company or an equal approved by the Engineer. Joints shall be manufacturer's standard specifically modified push -on type joints with joint restraint provided by ductile iron retainer rings joined together by corrosion resistant, high strength steel tee head bolts and nuts or with joint restraint provided by a welded -on retainer ring and a split flexible ring assembled behind the retainer ring. 2. Restrained joint pipe and fittings shall be ductile iron only and shall comply with applicable portions of this specification. Manufactured restrained joints shall be capable 15050-6 U:\NO\Projects\IRC_N_WW-2011URC_Ma_Taas_OdorControl\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc of deflection during assembly. Deflection shall not exceed 80 percent of the manufacturer's recommendations. Tee head bolts and nuts for restrained joints shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel as manufactured by NSS Industries, Plymouth, Michigan, or an equal approved by the Engineer. 4. Surcharged gravity pipes shall be restrained as pressure pipes. Alternate Restrained Joints: Ductile iron pipe fittings with mechanical joints may also be restrained, at the Contractor's option, using a follower gland which includes a restraining mechanism. When actuated during installation, the restraining device shall impart multiple wedging action against the pipe wall which increases resistance as internal pressure in the pipeline increases. The joint shall maintain flexibility after installation. Glands shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 and restraining devices shall be of heat treated ductile iron with a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. The gland shall have standard dimension and bolting patterns for mechanical joints_ conforming to ANSI/AWWA C 111 and C 153, latest revisions. 2. Tee head bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant, high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel in accordance with ASTM A 242. 3. The restraining wedges shall have twist -off nuts to insure proper torquing. The mechanical joint restraint device shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 250 psi l with a minimum safety factor of 2 to 1 and shall be MEGALUGR as manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc. No other retainer gland type device will be acceptable. After installation prior to backfilling, all parts of the joint restraint system shall be coated with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. Identification: All buried piping shall receive a color -coded adhesive identification tape as specified in Section 09905, 2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Small Gravity Drainage Piping: PVC pipe smaller than 4 inches nominal diameter used for gravity drainage piping shall be Schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM D 1785. Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall have solvent welded joints as specified for PVC pressure pipe. B. Large PVC Gravity Piping: PVC pipe and fittings 4 inches nominal diameter and larger for wastewater gravity sewer lines and services shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 3034, latest revision, with a standard dimension ratio (SDR) 35. PVC pipe shall be suitable for use as a wastewater gravity sewer conduit. Pipe shall have integral wall bell and spigot joints. The pipe bell shall have the same strength as the pipe. Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of 20 ft. The PVC gravity sewer pipe and fittings shall be as manufactured by J -M Manufacturing Company, Inc., or an equal approved by the Engineer. Bell and Spigot: Pipe joints shall be an integral wall bell and spigot with a solid cross section, elastomeric ring gasket which shall conform to the manufacturer's standard dimensions and tolerances and meet the requirements of ASTM D 3212, latest revision. 15050-7 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W—WW-2011\IRC_Ma—Tanks_OdorControNG Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc The elastomeric ring gasket shall be factory assembled in the pipe bell and securely locked in place to prevent displacement during jointing in the field. PVC pipe bell, gasket and spigot shall be "Ring Tite" as manufactured by J -M Manufacturing Company, Inc., or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2. Fittings: All fittings and accessories shall be manufactured of PVC in accordance with the same specifications as PVC pipe of the same size. Fittings shall have bell ends with elastomeric gaskets which conform to the same dimensions, tolerances and specifications as the PVC pipe. Fittings shall be manufactured and furnished by the pipe manufacturer. C. Small PVC Pressure Piping: Unless otherwise specified, PVC pressure pipe smaller than 4 inches nominal diameter shall be Schedule 80 PVC in accordance with ASTM D 1785. Schedule 80 pipe shall have either solvent welded or threaded joints. PVC pressure pipe shall bear the approved seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). PVC pipe that is exposed to sunlight shall be manufactured with additives to provide resistance to ultraviolet deterioration. Fittings: Socket type, solvent welded fittings for Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall be in conformance with ASTM D 2467. Threaded type fittings for Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall be in conformance with ASTM D 2464. All solvent welded or threaded joints shall be watertight. 2. Flanges: Flanges for Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall be rated for a 150 psi working pressure with ANSI B 16.1 dimensions and bolting pattern. Flanges shall be connected to PVC piping with either solvent welded or threaded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2467 or ASTM 2464, respectively. Gaskets shall be full faced type with a minimum thickness of 1/8 -inch. Nuts and bolts shall be hexagonal with machine threads, manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 320, Class 2. Type 316 stainless steel flat washers w/lock washers shall be used against PVC flanges. Solvent Cement: PVC solvent cement shall be in compliance with ASTM D 2564 and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Thread Lubricant: Lubricant for Schedule 80 threaded joints shall be a plastic pipe dope recommended by the pipe manufacturer or Teflon tape. D. Large PVC Pressure Piping: Unless otherwise noted, PVC pressure pipe for nominal diameters 4 to 12 inches in size shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C 900 with a dimension ratio of DRI 8, a pressure class of 150 psi and gasketed integral bell ends, and for nominal diameters larger than 12 inches in size shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C 905 with a dimension ratio of DR18, a pressure class of 235 psi and gasketed integral bell ends. Pipe shall be designed with not less than a 4 to 1 sustained hydrostatic pressure safety factor. Fittings shall be ductile iron fittings with restrained mechanical joint ends as specified hereinbefore. Pipe shall be made to ductile iron pipe O.D.'s instead of IPS. Bell and Spigot: Pipe joints shall be made with integral bell and spigot pipe ends. The bell shall consist of an integral thickened wall section designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. The bell shall be supplied with factory glued rubber ring gasket which conforms to the manufacturer's standard dimensions and tolerances. The gasket shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477 "Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe". 1.5050-8 UA1VO\ProjectsVRC_N_MV-2011\1RC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControD10_Specs\IOB_90Fercent\DIV 15\15050.doc PVC joints shall be 'Ring-Tite" as manufactured by J -M Manufacturing Company, Inc. or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be provided for all piping systems in accordance with DIPRA Standards, to restrain system thrust. Restraint calculations shall be based on pipe laying condition type 4 and soil type SM. Pipe joints and fittings shall be restrained as specified below: a) Uniflange, EBAA Iron, or approved equal. b) Surcharged gravity lines shall be restrained as pressure lines. E. Identification: All buried piping shall receive a color -coded adhesive identification tape as specified in Section 09905. 2.04 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A: Standard Black Steel Pipe: 1. Manufactured steel pipe shall conform to ANSI B31.1; ASTM A53, A134, A135, and A139; and AWWA C 200, as applicable. Fabricated steel pipe shall conform to ANSI B31.1; ASTM A36, A283, A570 and A572; and AWWA C 200, as applicable. Should any of the referenced standards be conflicting, the more stringent standard shall apply. For larger diameter pipe (24 inches or greater), X-ray tested pipe in accordance with ASME Section V (using the accepted methods of ASME Section VIII and AWWA D 100) is acceptable and/or hydrostatic tested pipe is acceptable. The pipe and grade and wall thickness shall be sufficient for the maximum design pressure (See Section 15044) such that the design stress is no more than 50 percent of the minimum material yield point. Pipe thickness for pipe sizes 1/4 inch through 6 inches in diameter shall be Schedule 40, 8 inches through 12 inches in diameter shall be Schedule 30, and 14 inches and larger in diameter shall be 3/8 inch minimum. 2. Unless specifically required, steel pipe shall be lab welded or seamless. Steel pipe 3 inches in diameter and smaller shall be galvanized by the hot dip process in accordance with ASTM A123. All fabrication and welding shall be completed prior to galvanizing so that a complete protective coating covers the entire interior and exterior surfaces including the threads. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, the interior and exterior of pipe larger than 3 inches in diameter shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C 213, except that exterior surfaces above ground shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900. 5. Field welding shall not be allowed. 6. Joints: 1) Flanged connections shall be in accordance with AWWA C 207, Class D. Shop fabricated headers may be used in lieu of individual flanged fittings, except in the area of equipment, valves, etc., requiring access. 15050-9 UANVO\ProjectsVRC_w_W W-2011QRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\I0_Specs\tOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doe 2) Connections 3 inches and smaller in diameter shall be threaded and connections 4 inches and larger in diameter shall be flanged as specified above. B. Fittings: 1. Unless noted otherwise, fittings shall conform to ANSI B 16.9, ASTM A234, WPA-Grade and AWWA C 208, equal in quality and thickness to the connecting piping. 2. Fittings shall have joints consistent with the connecting piping, unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings. 3. All fittings shall be galvanized or coated consistent with the connecting piping. 4. General Service Screwed: Standard pattern malleable iron with full length clean cut threads, ANSI B 16.3. Welded: 1) ASTM A234 made fromASTMA106 Grade B seamless tube. 2) Long radius elbows. 3) Reducing tees for one size reduction, weld -o -lets or thread -o -lets for small take- offs. 4) 150 pound series slip-on or weld neck flanges, ANSI B 16.5 using carbon steel, ASTM A181, Grade 1. 6. Unions: 250 pound series malleable iron with brass to iron seats. 7. Gaskets shall conform to AWWA standards. 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. AISI Type 304L stainless steel conforming to ASTM -A240 -72A. Pipe and fittings shall be designed for a maximum test pressure of 15 psig at ambient temperature, and an operating pressure of 10 psig. Maximum operating temperature is 250°F. Pipes, fittings and specials 8 -inch and larger in diameter shall be Schedule 5S; 21/2 through 6 -inch in diameter shall be Schedule IOS; and 2 -inch and smaller in diameter shall be schedule 40S. 2. Pipes shall be joined using either slip on flange joints as specified in this Section or mechanical couplings. B. Fittings: elbows 16 -inches and smaller will be smooth flow with centerline radius of 11/2 times pipe diameter except where due to space restrictions. Elbows 18 -inches and larger will be fabricated from five mitered sections of 90 degree with centerline radius of 11/2 times pipe diameter except due to space restrictions. C. Slip-on flanges shall be rolled angle face rings of Type 304L stainless steel. The rolled angle face 15050-10 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_W1V-201 NRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe or fitting. D. Backing flanges for the flanged joints shall be ductile iron and drilled to ANSI B16.1 Class 125. Backing flanges shall be painted with a zinc -rich paint prior to installation. Paint shall be sprayed on in two coats approximately 50 microns thick. E. All bolt holes shall straddle normal horizontal and vertical centerline of flanges unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. F. Gaskets shall be all graphite, Grafoil as manufactured by Crane Packing Company or Equal. For pipe sizes over 20 -inches, plain or crinkle all graphite tape may be used. Thickness shall be as recommended by the stainless steel pipe manufacturer. G. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM A778-80 and A774-80 respectively. H. All fabrication and welding shall be performed in the shop by certified welders to ASME approved procedure and ASW Standards. Field welding shall not be permitted. All welding shall be by the shielded arc, inert gas, MIG, or TIG method. Filler wire shall be added to all welds to provide a cross section of weld metal equal to, or greater than, the parent metal. Inert gas shielding shall be provided to the interior and exterior of the joint. Interior weld beads shall be smooth, even, and not have an interior projection more than 1/16 -inch beyond the I.D. of the pipe or fitting. I. After manufacture all pipe, fittings, supports, specials, etc. shall be passivated by immersion in an air agitated pickling tank containing a 25% solution of nitric and hydrofluoric acids for 40 to 50 C� minutes. The acid shall be neutralized by immersion in a rinse tank containing clean water and tri - sodium phosphate. J. After fabrication, all shop welds shall be wire brushed and scrubbed with the pickling solution, neutralized, and washed clean. K. All stainless steel components shall be handled, transported, fabricated, and installed taking care not to make contact with ferrous material as the contamination of stainless steel by steel may lead to marks caused by rusting of imbedded steel. L. Joints for pipe, fittings, and specials shall be as shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. Backing flanges for the flanged joints shall be Ductile Iron and drilled to ANSI B16.1 Class 125. M. Each pipe, fitting, and fabrication shall have type, gauge, and heat number marked and these designations shall be clearly legible. N. Certification of all plant tests required under the Standard Specification under which the pipe and fittings are furnished, and certification that such results obtained conform to those specifications, shall be submitted to the Commission, covering all pipe and fittings delivered to the job. 2.06 WALL SLEEVES, SEALS, AND PIPES AND NON-STANDARD CASTINGS A. Wall Sleeves: 15050-11 U:RV0\ProjectsQRC_W_WW-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_0dorContro!\10_Specs\l0B_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc 1. Wall sleeves shall be of cast iron, ductile iron or carbon steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication (see below for plastic alternate) and shall have a water stop located in the center of the wall. Sleeves shall be provided with seals and shall be oversized as required for the installation of seals. Sleeves shall terminate flush with finished surfaces of walls and ceilings, and shall extend 2 inches above the finished floor. 2. For poured or grouted in place sleeves, lightweight, high -impact thermoplastic sleeves may be substituted. Plastic sleeves shall have integral waterstop and anchoring ribs. Plastic sleeves shall be a product of the sleeve and seal manufacturer and shall be Century Line Sleeves as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or approved equal. Wall sleeves shall be installed for all piping passing through building walls and floors, except where noted on the Contract Drawings. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to pass the pipe without binding. Sleeves shall terminate flush with finished surfaces of walls and ceilings, and shall extend 2 inches above the finished floor. Escutcheons shall be provided at walls and floor to completely conceal the sleeves smaller than 3 inches. Escutcheons shall be cast iron, nickel plated split -type. B. Wall Sleeve Seals: Wall sleeve seals shall be modular mechanical type consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall sleeve. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide an absolutely water -tight seal between the pipe and wall sleeve. The synthetic rubber shall be suitable for exposure to wastewater and groundwater. Bolts, nuts and hardware shall be 18-8 stainless steel. The seals shall be Link Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or approved equal, and the wall sleeve and seal shall be sized as recommended by the seal manufacturer. C. Wall Pipes: Wall pipes shall be of the size and types indicated on the Drawings. All wall pipes shall be of ductile iron and shall have a central fin not less than'/2-inch thick and the same diameter as the bolting flange cast midway of the length to form a waterstop. Each wall pipe shall be of the same grade, thickness and interior coating as the piping to which it is joined. Those portions of the wall pipes that are buried shall have a coal tar epoxy outside coating. D. Non -Standard Fittings and Castings: Fittings having non-standard dimensions and cast especially for this project shall be of an approved design. Fittings shall be manufactured to meet the requirements of the same specifications and shall have the same diameter and thickness as standard fittings but laying lengths and types of ends shall be determined by positions in the pipelines and by the particular piping to which it is connected. Flange facing and drilling shall conform to the 125 pound American National Standard. Where required, flanges shall be drilled and tapped for studs. Other dimensions shall be substantially equal to corresponding parts of standard bell and spigot fittings. 2.07 PIPE COUPLINGS A. Couplings: Pipe couplings used to joint two pieces of plain end pipe shall be sized to suit the outside diameter of the pipe ends to be jointed. Transition couplings shall be used to join pipes of different outside diameters. Pipe couplings shall be bolted type with steel middle ring and end followers. 15050-12 U:\NO\Projects\IRC—W_WN-2011\IRC—Ma_Tanks_OdorControAlO_SpeesllOB_9Jpercent\DIV I5\15050.doe B. Coating: All carbon steel parts of the coupling shall be coated on the interior and exterior with a fusion bonded or thermosetting epoxy coating with a 12 mil nominal coating thickness. The coating shall be equal to AL -CLAD as manufactured by Dresser Industries, Inc. C. Gaskets: Gaskets for the coupling shall be wedge type manufactured of Buna-N resilient rubber. D. Bolts: Bolts shall be manufactured of high strength Type 304 stainless steel with Type 316 stainless steel hexagonal nuts. Bolts and nuts shall conform dimensionally to ANSI/AWWA C 111, latest revision. E. Manufacturer: Couplings shall be Style 38 as manufactured by Dresser Industries, Inc. or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.8 PVC BALL AND BALL CHECK VALVES A. PVC Ball Valves: All PVC ball valves'/2-inch through 4 inch in size shall be of a one piece capsule type manufactured of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC. Ball valves shall be true union design with two-way blocking capability and shall have solvent welded socket or NPT threaded ends. Ball valves shall have Teflon seats with Viton backing cushions and Viton O-ring seals, and shall be designed for a 150 psi water working pressure at 120'R Valves shall be supplied with ABS lever operating handles. PVC ball valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, or an equal approved by the Engineer. B. PVC Ball Check Valves: All PVC ball check valves'/2-inch through 2 inch in size shall be of a solid thermoplastic construction manufactured of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC. Ball check valves shall be true union design with solvent welded socket or NPT threaded ends. Ball check valves shall be furnished with a solid thermoplastic ball and stainless steel spring to assist ball in seating faster. Ball seat shall be Teflon coated Viton. The same seal shall function as both the ball seat and the union seal. PVC ball check valves shall be designed for a 150 psi water working pressure at 120°F. Valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.09 GATE VALVES A. Bronze Gate Valves: Gate valves installed aboveground, 2 inches in size and smaller, shall be Class 150 all bronze valves conforming to Fed. Spec. WW -V -54d, Type I, Class B designed for a non -shock water pressure of 300 psi. Bronze for valve body and internals shall be in accordance with ASTM B 16.18. Valves shall be furnished with screwed ends, handwheel operator, non - rising stem, one-piece solid wedge disc and screwed bonnet. Valves shall be as manufactured by Crane, Powell or an approved equal. The minimum weight of valves shall be as follows: Valve Size Inches B. Iron Gate Valves: 15050-13 U:\WO\Projects\IRC W_\V\V-2011\IRC_Ana_Taals_OdorControl\10_Specs\IOB_90pereent\DIV I5\15050.doc Valve Weight Pounds 1.0 1.5 2.5 3.6 4.6 7.6 1. Iron gate valves shall open by turning to the left (counter -clock -wise), when viewed from the stem. When fully open, gate valves shall have a clear waterway equal to the nominal diameter of the pipe. Operating nut or hand wheel shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening. Each valve shall have the manufacturer's distinctive marking, pressure rating and year of manufacture cast on the body. Prior to shipment from the factory, each valve shall be tested by applying to it a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the specified working pressure. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 500 or ANSI/AWWA C 509, latest revisions, whichever is applicable. 2. Gate valves with nominal sizes from 2 to 21/2 -inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 500, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi. Valves shall be iron body, bronze -mounted, double disc, parallel seat, non -rising stem type with double, Buna-N, O-ring stem seals. Bronze items of construction shall include the stems, seat rings, stem nuts, wedge bushings and upper and lower wedges. Bronze used for construction of these items shall be low zinc alloy bronze. Valve ends shall be screwed and as specified for steel pipe and fittings. Interior ferrous surfaces of valve, except for finished or bearing surfaces, shall be coated with a fusion bonded or thermo setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before coating. Exterior surfaces shall be coated as specified hereinafter. Gate valves for this size range shall be as manufactured by American Flow Control, Kennedy Valve Manufacturing Company, Dresser Industries, Inc., or approved equal. 3. Gate valves with nominal sizes from 3 to 20 inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 509, (� latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi. Valves shall be iron body resilient seat type with O-ring stem seals. The valve stem, stem nut, glands and bushings shall be bronze. Valve disc shall be constructed to assure uniform seating pressure between disc seat ring and body seating surface. Resilient seat of valve shall be formed by a special corrosion and chloramine resistant, synthetic elastomer which is permanently bonded to and completely encapsulates a cast iron valve disc. Valve ends for underground installation shall be mechanical joint as specified for ductile iron pipe and flanged for above ground valves. Interior of valve body shall be coated with a fusion bonded or thermo setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. Exterior surfaces shall be coated as specified hereinafter. Resilient -seated type gate valves shall be manufactured by M & H Valve Company, U.S. Pipe Company, or approved equal. 4. Gate valves with nominal sizes from 24 through 42 inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 500, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi. Valves shall be iron body, solid wedge, tapered seat, bronze mounted, non -rising stem type with O-ring stem seals. The valve stem, stem nut, bushings, pinion stem, body rings, wedge rings, guides and wedge guides shall be bronze. Non -rising stem collars shall be cast integrally with the stem and machined to size. The thrust bearing area shall be fully bronze lined. Disc shall be cast iron, bronze faced. Bronze facing shall be machined after insertion into the disc face. Tongue and groove guides shall be provided on the sides of the wedge and in the body to keep the wedge centered between the seats throughout its length of travel. Guide contacts shall be bronze to bronze and valves shall be suitable for installation in any position. Valve ends for underground installation shall be mechanical joint as specified for ductile iron pipe and flanged for above ground valves. Interior of 15050-14 UANVOTrojeclAIRC_W_W W-201 WRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControAIC_Specs\10B_90pereent\D1V 15\15050.doe (� valve body shall be coated with a fusion bonded or thermo setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. Exterior surfaces shall be coated as specified hereinafter. Solid wedge type gate valves shall be manufactured by M & H Valve Company, U.S. Pipe Company, or approved equal. 5. Valve Joints: All gate valves shall have either mechanical joint, restrained joint or flanged ends to fit the pipe run in which they are to be used. Gate valves installed on push -on joint pipe shall have mechanical joint ends unless otherwise specified. Valve Operators: Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein, gate valves shall have non -rising stems. Buried gate valves shall be furnished with a 2 inch square AWWA standard nut operator with a valve box and cover. Gate valves located aboveground or inside structures shall be furnished with a handwheel operator which shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening. Sixteen (16) inch and larger gate valves shall be equipped with bevel gear operators with a minimum gear ratio meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 500, latest revision. All below ground 16 inch and larger gate valves shall have bevel gear operators which are designed for buried service. Exterior Valve Coatings: All exterior surfaces of iron body gate valves shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. For buried service, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated at the factory with coal tar epoxy with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. Prior to back filling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. For valves installed aboveground, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness 2 - 3.5 mils, of a lead and chromate- free primer with rust -inhibitive pigments and synthetic resins. Primer shall be suitable for finish paint specified. Following installation, aboveground valves shall be finish painted in accordance with Section 09900. 2.10 PLUG VALVES A. General: Plug valves shall be non -lubricated eccentric type with flanged or mechanical joint ends as specified below. Valves shall open by turning to the left (counter -clockwise), when viewed from the stem. Port area of valves shall be a minimum of 80 percent of full pipe area. Valve pressure ratings, body flanges and wall thicknesses shall be in full conformance with ANSI B 16. 1, latest revision. Valves shall seal leak -tight against full rated pressure in both directions. Prior to shipment from the factory, each valve shall be hydrostatically tested as follows. Valve seats shall be tested to provide leak tight shut off to 175 psi for valves through 12 inch and 150 psi for valves 14 inches and larger, with pressure in either direction. In addition, a hydrostatic shell test shall be performed with the plug open to a pressure twice that of rating specified above to demonstrate overall pressure integrity of the valve body. Plug valves shall be eccentric plug valves as manufactured by DeZurik, Milliken Valve Company, or approved equal. B. Eccentric Plug Valves: Eccentric plug valves shall be constructed of high strength cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B and AWWA C 504, latest revisions. Valve seats shall be formed by cast bodies with raised eccentric seats which have a corrosion resistant welded -in overlay of not less than 90 percent pure nickel on all surfaces contacting the plug face or valve 15050-15 U:\\VO\Projects\1RC_W_WW-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV I5\15050.doe seats shall be replaceable 316 stainless steel seats. Valve seats shall be in accordance with AWWA C 504 and AWWA C 507, latest revisions. Valves shall be furnished with resilient faced plugs with Neoprene facing. Valves shall be furnished with replaceable, permanently lubricated, stainless steel or fiberglass backed woven teflon fiber, sleeve -type bearings in the upper and lower plug stem journals. Plug stem bearings shall comply with AWWA C 504 and C 507, latest revisions. Valves shall be bolted bonnet design. Valves shaft seals shall be designed so that they can be repacked without removing the bonnet and the packing shall be adjustable. Packing material shall be Buna- Vee type packing. Valve shaft seals shall be in accordance with AWWA C 504 and AWWA C 507, latest revisions. All exposed valve nuts, bolts, springs, washers and the like shall be Type 304 stainless steel. C. Interior Valve Lining: All interior ferrous surfaces of the valve except the valve seating surfaces shall be coated with a factory applied, fusion bonded or thermosetting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust, oil, and grease before coating. D. Exterior Valve Coating: All exterior surfaces of plug valves shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. For buried service, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated at the factory with coal tar epoxy with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. Prior to backfilling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. For valves installed aboveground, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness 2 - 3.5 mils, of a lead and chromate -free primer with rust - inhibitive pigments and synthetic resins. Primer shall be suitable for finish paint specified. Following installation aboveground valves shall be finish painted in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. E. Valve Joints: All plug valves installed aboveground, in valve vaults or on flanged piping shall have flanged ends as specified for ductile iron pipe. Flanges shall comply with facing, drilling and thickness of ANSI Standards for Class 125 dimension. All buried plug valves shall have mechanical joint ends as specified for ductile iron pipe. F. Mechanical Valve Actuators: 1. Unless otherwise noted, plug valves installed in valve vaults or buried underground shall have gear actuators with 2 inch square nut designed for buried and submerged service. Valve shall have seals on all shafts and gaskets on valve and actuator covers to prevent entry of water and dirt. Actuator mounting brackets for buried or submerged service shall be totally enclosed and shall have gasket seals. All exposed valve nuts, bolts, springs, washers and the like shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Unless otherwise noted, above ground plug valves 6 inch in size and larger shall be furnished with mechanical gear actuators furnished with handwheel, chainwheel or 2 inch square nut operators. Gear actuator shall be sized for the maximum pressure differential across the valve, equal to the pressure rating of the valve. All gearing shall be enclosed in a high strength cast iron housing, suitable for running in a lubricant. Housing shall be provided with seals on all shafts to prevent the entry of dirt and water into the actuator. Actuator shaft and quadrant shall be supported on permanently lubricated bronze bearings. Actuator shall clearly indicate valve position for aboveground and valve vault installations and an adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing torque. Actuator shall 15050-16 UANVO\Projects\1RC_W_WW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControRIC0_Specs\IOB_90percen[\DIV I5\I5050.doc be capable of withstanding an over -torque without damage up to 450 foot-pounds for 2 inch square nut operators and to 300 foot-pounds for handwheel or chainwheel operators. Four inch and smaller aboveground valves shall be furnished with manual actuators, one- quarter turn to open. Actuator shall be supplied with an AWWA Standard 2 inch operating nut with a standard valve operating lever. 2.11 SERVICE SADDLES, CORPORATION STOPS AND TEMPORARY SAMPLING STATIONS A. Service Saddles: Service saddles shall have ductile iron bodies in accordance with ASTM A 536, latest revision, with double stainless steel straps. Ductile iron body shall have a fusion bonded nylon coating with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Straps shall be Type 304 stainless steel with premium grade Type 304 L stainless steel bolts and Type 304 stainless steel washers and nuts. The nuts shall be Teflon coated. The gasket material shall be an elastomeric compound resistant to degradation by oil, natural gas, acids, alkalies, most aliphatic fluids and chloramines. The outlet of the saddle shall have NPT threads. Service saddles shall be Smith -Blair No. 317 or an equal approved by the Engineer. B. Corporation Stops: Corporation stops shall be all bronze construction in accordance with AWWA C 800, latest revision. Inlet threads shall be NPT iron pipe threads and the outlet connection shall be of the packed joint type suitable for use with Schedule 80 PVC pipe. Corporation stops shall be Ford Ballcorp Type FB 1102 or an equal approved by the Engineer. C. Temporary Sampling Stations: Temporary sampling stations shall be a combination of corporation stops, service saddles, polyethylene tubing, and curb stops. Temporary sampling stations shall be properly abandoned after successful testing. 2.12 SOLENOID VALVES A. Solenoid valves shall be 2 -way type for normally closed operation designed for not less than a 150 psi water working pressure. Valves less than 3 inches shall have forged brass bodies. Three inch valves shall have aluminum bodies. Valves shall have NPT threaded ends; stainless steel wetted parts; Buna N seals/disks; and NEMA 4X solenoid enclosures. The valves shall operate on 120 VAC power, shall have threaded conduit hubs, standby manual operators and shall not require a minimum operating pressure differential for steady operation. The valves shall be manufactured by Automatic Switch Company (ASCO Red Hat), or approved equal. 2.13 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Flexible expansion joints shall be of the molded wide arch design manufactured of neoprene rubber with polyester and steel reinforcement. Neoprene body shall be supplied with a hypalon coating. Joints shall be flanged suitable for 150 psi water working pressure and in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 dimensions and bolting patterns. Flanged ends shall be furnished with 304 stainless steel split retaining rings. B. Provide control units consisting of gusset plates, control rod bolts, washers and nuts on all expansion joints. Expansion joints 6 inches and larger in size shall have a minimum of four control rod bolts. Restraint gusset plates, bolts, washers and nuts shall be Type 304 stainless steel. C. Minimum performance for flexible expansion joints shall be as follows: Axial Axial Lateral Angular 15050-17 UAW01Projects\IRC_W_W W-201 BIRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControAlO_Specs\lOB_90pereentWIV M15050.doe Size Compression Elongation Deflection Deflection Inches Inches Inches Inches Degrees 2 13/4 3/4 3/4 30 4 13/4 3/4 3/4 25 6 13/4 3/4 1 20 8 13/4 3/4 1 20 10 13/4 3/4 1 15 12 13/4 3/4 1 15 16 20 2 2 7/8 7/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 12 9 24 2 1 1 1/8 9 D. Flexible expansion joints shall be Redflex as manufactured by Redvalve, Style 1015 Maxi -Joint as manufactured by General Rubber Corporation, Style 711 Metrasphere as manufactured by the Metraflex Company or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.14 PRESSURE GAUGE ASSEMBLIES A. Pressure gauges shall have the following design features: glycerine filled, 4 I/2 -inch dial (for pump service), 2 I/2 -inch dial (for other services), aluminum dial with black numerals on white background, Type 316 stainless steel bourdon tube and movement, 300 series stainless steel case and ring, safety glass lens, threaded lens retaining ring, adjustable pointer with over -pressure stop and zero pointer stop, blowout protection, I/2 -inch Type 316 stainless steel stem mounting, and 1.0 percent accuracy based on full scale. Provide Type 316 stainless steel pressure snubbers on all gauges not protected by diaphragm seals. Provide a supply of replacement fill liquid for all gauges supplied for the entire Project. Pressure gauges shall be as manufactured by U.S. Gauge, Ashcroft, Marshalltown, Marsh, or approved equal. B. Pressure Gauge Service and Ranges: Pressure gauges shall be furnished for the following services. The gauge ranges will be selected such that the normal operating pressure is indicated approximately at mid span. Diaphragm seals shall be furnished for gauges as indicated: Service Diaphragm Seal Wastewater/Sludge Piping Yes Potable Water Supply No Air Supply No C. As indicated above, pressure gauges shall be furnished with diaphragm protection seals which shall be joined to the pressure gauges and filled at the manufacturer's factory. The seals shall be the removable design such that the bottom member can be removed for cleaning without disturbing the diaphragm. The diaphragm shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The top and bottom members of the seal shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Connections for both the gauge and the bottom connection shall be'/2-inch female NPT threaded connections. The bottom member shall have a 1/4 -inch plugged flushing connection with a Type 316 stainless steel plug. Liquid filling for the diaphragm seals shall be silicone. Provide a supply of replacement fill liquid for all diaphragm seals supplied for the entire Project. Diaphragm protection seals shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the gauge. D. Each pressure gauge assembly shall be furnished with an isolation ball valve. Body, stem and all other parts of valves shall be manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel. Valve packing shall be high-density TFE. Valve connections shall be I/2 -inch female NPT threaded connections. Ball 15050-18 U:RVO\Projects\IRC_1V_WW-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControfll0_Spmc IOB_90pereentlDIV M15050.doc valves for pressure gauge assembly isolation shall be 45 Series as manufactured by the Whitey Company, or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.15 VALVE AND METER VAULTS A. Valve and meter vaults shall be constructed of precast or cast -in-place concrete with dimensions as shown on the Contract Drawings. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section on, Precast Concrete Structures. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4 ti psi at 28 days. The steel reinforcement for the structures shall be designed and constructed to withstand the loads expected. B. The covers for the meter vaults shall be a watertight aluminum access frame and cover as specified. 2.16 VALVE BOXES A. Furnish, assemble, and place a valve box over the operating nut for each buried valve. The valve box shall be designed so as to prevent the transmission of surface loads directly to the valve or piping. B. Valve boxes shall be of the adjustable slide -type of suitable length with an interior diameter of not less than 5 inches. The valve boxes shall be manufactured of cast iron and shall be of the two piece design including a bottom section and top section with cover. The cast iron cover shall be cast with the applicable service, "WATER", "WASTEWATER", etc., markings. The top section shall be adjustable for elevation and shall be set to allow equal movement above and below finished grade. C. The castings shall be manufactured of clean, even grain, gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30B for Gray Iron Castings; and shall be smooth, true to pattern, free from blow holes, sand holes, projections and other harmful defects. The seating surfaces of both the cover and the top section shall be machined so that the cover will not rock after it has been seated. D. The valve boxes shall be coated inside and outside with an asphaltic coating prior to machining, so that the machined seating surfaces will be free of any coating. Cast iron valve box assemblies shall be Clow Corp. No. F-2452, Tyler Corp. Series 6855 or 6865 or an approved equal. Valve extension stems shall be provided for all buried valves when operating nut is deeper than 3 feet below final grade. 2.17 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS A. Identification systems for aboveground and below ground piping and for valves shall be as specified under Section 09905 of these Specifications. 2.18 TIE RODS A. When prior approval is obtained from the Engineer, ductile iron pipe, fittings, and valves may be restrained using tie bolt joint restraint. Joint restraint materials for this method of restraint shall be the Super -Star SST Series Joint Restraint System as manufactured by Star National Products, a Division of Star Industries, Inc. Columbus, Ohio, or an equal approved by the Engineer. 15050-19 U:6V0\Projects\IRC_W MV -201 HIRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControNIO_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc B. All bolts, nuts, washers, tie rods and other fasteners for the joint restraint system shall be manufactured of CORTEN high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel in conformance with ASTM A 242. Tie bolts shall be manufactured of heat treated CORTEN steel. Tie rods and all fasteners for the system shall be galvanized in conformance with the requirements of ASTM A 123. Tie rods shall have a minimum diameter of 3/4 -inch. The number of tie rods required per joint shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Prior to backfilling after installation, all parts of the joint restraint system shall be coated with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M, for a minimum dry film thickness of 20 mils. 2.19 WET TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES A. Wet Tapping Sleeves: Shall be cast iron, mechanical joint type, with working pressure rating of 200 psi for sizes 4 through 12 inches and 150 psi for sizes 14 inches and larger, and shall conform to the applicable Sections of AWWA Standard C 110 of current revision. Sleeve and glands shall be split type for assembly on pipe, and sleeve and mechanical joint glands and gaskets shall be sized for use with the class and type of pipe being tapped. Sleeve and glands shall be factory coated on interior and exterior with a fusion bonded, thermosetting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, current revision. Coating shall be holiday free with a minimum thickness of 12 mils DFT, and shall be furnished complete with all accessories. Outlet flange shall be Class 125 Standard. Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer for drilling machine used prior American Valve and Hydrant Company, Kennedy Valve, to tapping operations. Tapping sleeves shall be as manuy, factured by the Mueller Comp approved equal. Prior to backfilling, all uncoated exterior nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other parts of sleeve shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. B. Wet Tapping Valves: Tapping valves shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 509, current revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi. 1. Tapping valves 3 to 16 inches in size shall be resilient seat type gate valves as specified hereinbefore for gate valves 3 to 16 inches in size. Resilient seat type tapping valves shall be furnished with a raised guide ring cast integrally on the flanged end which is designed to match the groove in the tapping sleeve in accordance with MSS-SP60. The purpose of this guide ring shall be to ensure true alignment of the valve with the tapping sleeve. The interior of the waterway in the valve body shall be a full opening and capable of passing a full sized shell cutter equal to the nominal diameter of the valve. Tapping valves shall be as manufactured by the M & H Valve Company, U.S. Pipe Company, or approved equal. 2.20 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE A. Pressure regulating valves shall be of bronze body construction, seat shall be of stainless steel, diaphragm shall be Buna N. B. Regulator shall have a maximum pressure limit of 100 psi and the pressure reduction range shall be to 5 psi for all the services. The regulator shall be a direct acting, spring loaded, diaphragm type for hydraulic operation, and shall be capable of delivering a constant pressure. An adjusting screw shall be easily accessible for changing the outlet pressure. C. Valves shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The manufacturer shall be Watts, or approved equal. 15050-20 U;\WW 01Projects\IRC_\V_N-20t1\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\t0_Specs\lOB 9ppercent\DIV 15\15050.doe 2.21 DELUXE CONFINED SPACE ENTRY KITS A. Provide two (2) deluxe confined space entry kits as specified below B. The Deluxe Confined Space entry Kit shall be ITX-KIT -1)11014 as manufactured by Industrial Scientific. The monitor shall be equipped with a lithium ion 120 volt rechargeable battery pack. The ITX Deluxe Kit shall be set for 112S, 02, CO and LEL. At a minimum the kit shall include Instrument carrying case, Motorized sampling pump, 10 ft. of tubing, Replacement sampling pump filters, Charger/data link, Calibration cup with tubing (iTX), Calibration gas (appropriate mix) with regulator, Spare replaceable cell alkaline battery pack, Training video and Rugged Pelican® case. 2.22 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Other items necessary for the complete installation and not specified herein shall conform to the details and notes shown on the Contract Drawings. All minor items implied, usually included, or required for the construction of a complete operating system shall be installed whether shown on the Contract Drawings or not. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. All pipe, fittings, valves, and other material shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer after delivery, and no broken, cracked, imperfectly coated, or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. When a defect or crack is discovered, the injured portion shall not be installed. Cracked pipe shall have the defect cut off at least 12 inches from the break in the sound section of the barrel. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Excavation, backfill, and compaction shall conform to the provisions of Section 02220. Upon satisfactory installation of the pipe bedding material as specified in Section 02220, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe bells or couplings shall be excavated by hand digging. When the pipe is laid in the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall receive continuous, uniform support and no pressure will be exerted on the pipe joints from the trench bottom. B. Cover for underground piping shall not be less than that indicated on the Contract Drawings. The minimum cover for pipe shall be 36 inches. In areas where other piping conflicts preclude the maximum cover desired, the piping shall be laid to provide the maximum cover obtainable. C. Pipe, fittings, valves and accessories shall be installed as shown or indicated on the Contract Drawings. D. All connections to existing piping systems shall be made as shown or indicated on the Contract Drawings after consultation and cooperation with authorities of the Owner. Some such connections may have to be made during off-peak hours (late night or early morning). 15050-21 U:6V0\Pr0lects\JRC_WW W-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Spets\lOB1 _90percentlDIV 15\ISOSO.doc E. Pipe Joint Deflection: Whenever it is desirable to deflect pipe joints to avoid obstructions or to maintain required alignment, the amount of the joint deflection shall not exceed 80 percent of the maximum limits allowed by the pipe manufacturer. F. In preparation for pipe installation, placement (stringing) of pipe should be as close to the trench as practical on the opposite side of the trench from the excavated material. The bell ends of the pipe should point in the direction of the work progress. G. Pipe and fittings shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required. Where grades for the pipeline are not indicated on the Contract Drawings, maintain a uniform depth of cover with respect to finish grade. Care shall be taken to insure a good alignment both horizontally and vertically and to give the pipe a firm bearing along its entire length. Any pipe which has its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken al and relayed. H. All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of sand, dirt, and debris before laying. All precautions shall be taken to prevent sand, dirt or other foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. If necessary, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end of the pipe before lowering into the trench and left there until the connection is made to the adjacent pipe. Any sand, dirt, or other foreign material that enters the pipe shall be removed from the pipe immediately. Interior of all pipe and fittings shall be kept clean after installation until accepted in the complete work. I. Any time that pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other method approved by the Engineer. Plugs shall remain in pipe ends until all water is removed from the trench. No pipe shall be installed when trench conditions are unsuitable for such work, including standing water, excess mud, or rain. T. After pipe has been laid, inspected, and found satisfactory, sufficient backfill shall be placed along the pipe barrel to hold the pipe securely in place while conducting the preliminary hydrostatiest. c t No backfill shall be placed over the joints until the preliminary test is satisfactorily completed, leaving them exposed to view for the detection of visible leaks. K. Upon satisfactory completion of the hydrostatic test, backfilling of the trench shall be completed L. Aboveground and Exposed Piping: Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all equipment access areas and openings. Changes in sizes shall be made with appropriate reducing fittings. Pipe connections shall be made in accordance with the details shown and manufacturer's recommendations. Open ends of pipe lines shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt and other foreign material out of the system. Pipe supports and hangers shall be provided where indicated or as required to insure adequate support of the piping. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. INSPECTION AND TESTING All pipe shall be inspected and tested at the foundry. 15050-22 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_\V_W W_20111IRC_Ma_Tanks_pdor ControAlO_Specs\lOB_90percentWIV I5\15050.doc 2. The Owner shall have the right to have any or all piping, fittings or special castings inspected and tested by an independent testing agency at the foundry or elsewhere. Such inspection and testing will be at the Owner's expense. Mark as rejected and immediately remove from the job site, all pipe lengths showing a crack, damaged lining, or receiving a severe blow that may cause an incipient fracture, even though no such fracture can be seen. 4. Removal of cracked portions: Any pipe showing a distinct crack, but no incipient fracture beyond the limits of the visible crack, may be cut off and the sound portion installed. Cut the pipe at least 12 inches from the visible limits of the crack. Cutting of pipe shall be done by skilled workmen, and in such a manner as to not damage the pipe. Every cut shall be square and smooth, with no damage to the pipe lining. Cut surfaces, shall be recoated as specified for the pipe. Cutting and installing cracked pipe shall only be performed when approved by the Engineer, and shall be at the expense of the Contractor. B. Handling and Cutting Pipe: Care shall be taken in handling, cutting, and laying ductile iron pipe and fittings to avoid damaging the pipe and interior coal tar epoxy or cement mortar lining, scratching or marring machined surfaces, and abrasion of the pipe coating. All cracked pipe and fittings shall be removed at once from the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Pipe cutting shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner without creating damage to the pipe and interior epoxy or cement mortar lining. Ductile iron pipe may be cut using an C( abrasive pipe saw, rotary wheel cutter, guillotine pipe saw, milling wheel saw or oxyacetylene torch. Cut ends and rough edges of ductile iron pipe shall be ground smooth. For push -on joint connections, the cut end shall be beveled to prevent gasket damage during joint assembly. Interior lining shall be repaired at cut ends per the manufacturer's instructions prior to joint assembly. C. Laying Pipe and Fittings: 1. Bedding for Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum bedding requirements shall be Type 2 as defined in ANSI/AWWA C 600, latest revision. Provide proper bedding required, in accordance with thickness class of pipe being laid and depth of cover. Proper pipe laying conditions shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C 150 and C 151, latest revisions, and ANSUAWWA C 600, latest revision. 2. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be laid in accordance with American Water Works Association Standard ANSUAWWA C 600, latest revision, entitled "Standard for Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances", with the following sections specifically applying: a) Section 3.3 - Pipe Installation b) Section 3.4 - Joint Assembly D. Ductile Iron Pipe Joints: 15050-23 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W MV-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor Control\IO_Specs\10B_90percent\DIV I5\15050.doe Type: The joints of all pipelines shall be made absolutely tight. The particular joint used shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation. Where shown on the Drawings or where, in the opinion of the Engineer, settlement or vibration is likely to occur, all pipe joints shall be bolted mechanical type or restrained type as specified above, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Push -on Joints: Push -on joints shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Lubricant, if required, shall be an inert, non-toxic, water soluble compound incapable of harboring, supporting, or culturing bacterial life. Manufacturer's installation recommendations shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before commencing work. The bell of the pipe shall be cleaned of excess tar or other obstructions and wiped out before the cleaned and prepared spigot of the next pipe is inserted. The new pipe shall be shoved firmly into place until properly seated and held securely until the joint has been completed. 3. Mechanical Joints: All types of mechanical joint pipes shall be laid and jointed in full conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before work is begun. Only specially skilled workmen shall be permitted to makeup mechanical joints. Torque wrenches, set as specified in AWWA Standard C 111, shall be used; or spanner type wrenches not longer than specified therein may be used without the permission of the Engineer. 4. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Joint assembly shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before commencing work. 5. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made up by inserting the gasket between the flanges. The threads of the bolts and the faces of the gaskets shall be coated with suitable lubricant immediately before installation. a) Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate bolts with oil and graphite. b) Insert the nuts and bolts (or studs) finger tighten, and progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to the proper tension. C) Execute care when tightening joints to prevent undue strain upon valves, pumps and other equipment. d) If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PVC PIPE A. Storage and Handling: 15050-24 UAW0\Proiects\IRC_W_WW-2011URC—Ana Tanks_0dorContTORIO_Specs\IOB-90pereentXDIV 15\15050.doc PVC pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles packaged in such manner as to provide protection against damage. When possible, pipe should be stored at the job site in the unit packages until ready for use. Packaged units shall be handled using a forklift or a spreader bar with fabric straps. Packaged units shall not be stacked at the job site higher than two units high. 2. When it is necessary to store PVC pipe for long periods of time, exposure to direct sunlight shall be prevented by covering the pipe with an opaque material. Adequate air circulation above and around the pipe shall be provided as required to prevent excessive heat accumulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources of hot objects such as heaters, fires, boilers or engine exhaust. Pipe gaskets shall be protected from excessive exposure to heat, direct sunlight, ozone, oil and grease. The interior and all sealing surfaces of pipe, fittings, and other appurtenances shall be kept clean and free of dirt and foreign matter. Care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid severe impact blows, crushing, abrasion damage, gouging or cutting. Pipe shall be lowered, not dropped, from trucks or into trenches. All cracked, damaged, or defective pipe and fittings, or any length of PVC pipe having a gouge, scratch or other permanent indentation of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth, shall be rejected and removed at once from the work and replaced with new acceptable pipe at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Field Cutting PVC Pipe: Field cutting of pipe shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner without creating damage to the pipe. The pipe shall be cut square with a fine-toothed hand or power saw or other cutter or knife designed for use with plastic pipe. Prior to cutting, the pipe shall be marked Q� around its entire circumference or a square -in vise shall be used to ensure the pipe end is cut square. Remove burrs by smoothing edges with a knife, file, or sandpaper. C. Field Cutting Bell and Spigot PVC Pipe: Bevel the cut end of the pipe using a pipe beveling tool, wood rasp or portable sander to prevent damage to the gasket during joint assembly. A factory - finished beveled end should be used as a guide to ensure proper beveling angle and correct depth of bevel. Round off any sharp edges on the leading edge of the bevel with a knife or file. D. Laying PVC Pipe: 1. Pipe Bedding: Bedding for PVC pipe shall be as specified in Section 02220 using granular pipe bedding material. 2. All PVC pipe shall be laid in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's published installation guide, the AWWA Manual of Practice No. M23 "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" and the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association installation recommendations. Pipe laying shall commence at the lowest end of the system and proceed upgrade with the spigot ends of bell and spigot pipe pointing in the direction of the flow. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a close concentric joint with the adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets of the flow lines. As the work progresses, the interior of the sewer shall be cleared of dirt and superfluous materials. Except where authorized, trenches shall be kept completely free from water until the pipe jointing and jointing inspection are completed. At all times when work is not in progress, open ends of 15050-25 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_NV1V\V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_odorControAlO_Specs\IOB3Opercent\DIV 15\15050.doc pipe and fittings shall be securely plugged so that water, earth or other substances will not enter pipe or fittings. PVC Pipe for gravity sewers shall be installed in accordance with requirements of ASTM D 2321, latest revision, "Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe", and the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer. PVC gravity sewer shall not be installed with cover depths in excess of 25 feet without prior approval from the Engineer. 5. Pipe and fittings shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades indicated on Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Care shall be taken to ensure a good alignment both horizontally and vertically and to give the pipe a firm bearing along its entire length. Any pipe which has its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relayed at no additional expense to Owner. 6. All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of sand, dirt and debris before laying. All precautions shall be taken to prevent sand, dirt or other foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. If necessary, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end of the pipe before lowering into the trench and left there until the connection is made to the adjacent pipe. Any sand, dirt or other foreign material that enters the pipe shall be removed from the pipe immediately. Interior of all pipe and fittings shall be kept clean after installation until accepted in the complete work. 7. Any time that pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other method approved by the Engineer. Plugs shall remain in pipe ends until all water is removed from the trench. No pipe shall be installed when trench conditions are unsuitable for such work including standing water, excess mud, rain or ice. E. PVC Pipe Joint Assembly for Rubber Gasketed Bell and Spigot Pipe: 1. The PVC bell and spigot joint shall be assembled in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's installation instructions, ASTM D 2774, and AWWA Manual M23. Clean the interior of the bell, the gasket, and the spigot of the pipe to be jointed with a rag to remove any dirt or foreign material before assembling. Inspect the gasket, pipe spigot bevel, gasket groove and sealing surfaces for damage or deformation. Lubricate the spigot end of the pipe with a lubricant supplied or specified by the pipe manufacturer for use with gasketed PVC pipe in potable water systems. The lubricant should be supplied as specified by the pipe manufacturer. After the spigot end is lubricated, it must be kept clean and free of dirt and sand. If dirt and sand adhere to the lubricated end, the spigot must be wiped clean and relubricated. 3. Insert the spigot into the bell so that it contacts the gasket uniformly. Align the pipe sections and push the spigot end into the bell until the manufacturer's reference mark on the spigot is flush with the end of the bell. The pipe should be pushed into the bell using a bar and wood block. The joint shall not be assembled by "stabbing" or swinging the pipe into the bell, nor shall construction machinery be used to push the pipe into the bell. 4. If undue resistance to insertion of the spigot end is encountered or if the reference mark does not reach the flush position, disassemble the joint and check the position of the gasket. If the gasket is twisted or pushed out of its seat, inspect the components, repair or replace damaged 15050-26 U NV0\ProjutsQRC W_\V%V-20111IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor Control\IO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\I5050.doc items, clean the components and repeat the assembly steps. Be sure the pipe is in proper alignment during assembly. If the gasket was not out of position, check the distance between the spigot end and the reference mark and relocate the mark if it is out of position. F. PVC Pipe Joint Assembly for Threaded and Solvent Welded Pipe: All threaded and solvent welded joints shall be made watertight in accordance with ASTM D 2855, ASTM D 2564, and AWWA Manual M23. All pipe cutting, threading and jointing procedures for threaded and solvent welded PVC pipe joints shall be in strict accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Thread lubricant for threaded joints shall be Teflon tape only. 2. At threaded joints between PVC and metal pipes, the metal side shall contain the socket end and the PVC side the spigot. A metal spigot shall not, under any circumstances, be screwed into a PVC socket. G. Field Testing: 1. Following installation, the pipe shall be tested and flushed as specified herein. 2. Long Term Deflection Test: The pipe shall be tested to demonstrate that maximum.long term deflection of the pipe does not exceed 5 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe. The test method for deflection shall be by using an electronic deflectometer or a rigid "Go - No Go" device. The test for long term deflection shall be done after the trench has been backfilled a minimum of 72 hours. Joints: Shall be left exposed following makeup for visual inspection to show that the pipe is fully seated and the bell is not cracked. 4. Alignment: Following placing of one foot of tamped backfill cover, the pipe shall be sighted between successive manholes to ensure proper grade and alignment. This work shall be performed in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Upon examination from either end of the sewer line section, a full circle of light shall be visible from the viewed end. Any section which does not pass the alignment test shall be repaired, or removed and relayed at no additional cost to the Owner, until the section passes the test. 3.05 FITTING INSTALLATION FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING A. The weight of ductile iron fittings shall not be carried by the pipe on which they are installed. The fitting shall be supported by a concrete cradle. Concrete used for supports shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. Concrete for the support cradle shall be poured against undisturbed soil. B. All glands, clamps, bolts, nuts, studs and other uncoated parts of fitting joints for underground installation shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 3.06 THRUST BLOCKING 15050-27 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_WW_W_2011HMRC_a_Tanks_OdorCon[rol\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 1515050.doc A. Thrust blocks shall be avoided in as much as possible. All ductile iron or other push -on or mechanical joint connections shall be restrained with restrained joints as specified hereinbefore. Thrusts blocks may be used for any additional support the Contractor may deem desirable, or at certain locations not applicable to restrained joints, and shall be per the Contractor's design, with approval from the Engineer. B. Suitable concrete reaction or thrust blocking shall be applied on all pressure pipe lines, except for those having flanged or restrained joints, at all tees, plugs, caps and at bends deflecting 11 1/4 - degrees or more. As an option, at no additional cost to the Owner, pipe movement shall be prevented as specified hereinbefore for Restrained Joints. Concrete used for thrust blocking shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. C. Both concrete thrust blocks and restrained joints or tie rods must be used when, in the judgement of the Engineer, the nature and criticality of an installation is such as to require additional stability. D. Areas where thrust blocks are to be placed shall be hand excavated. Excavation for thrust blocks shall be completed following installation of the pipe and fitting to be restrained. For thrust blocks, hand excavate to undisturbed soil and to the sizes and configurations shown on Drawings. Use extreme care following excavation not to disturb soil in the thrust block area, prior to pouring concrete. E. Each fitting and pipe shall be wrapped with 8 -mil thick polyethylene prior to pouring concrete, so that no concrete comes in direct contact with the surface of the fitting or pipe. Concrete shall cure a minimum of 7 days prior to putting the line under pressure. The Contractor shall not backfill around thrust blocks until approval is obtained from the Engineer. 3.07 CONCRETE PIPE ENCASEMENT A. Concrete for concrete pipe encasement shall have a minimum strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days and encasement shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the Contract Drawings. Encasement shall be constructed where: Indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. The Engineer shall order the pipeline encased. B. The points of beginning and ending of concrete pipe encasement shall be not more than 6 inches from a pipe j oint to protect the pipe from cracking due to uneven settlement of its foundation or the effects of superimposed live loads. C. Pipe encasement shall provide a minimum coverage of 6 inches all around the pipe including pipe bells. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES, WALL CASTINGS AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe sleeves and wall castings shall be provided at the locations called for on the Contract Drawings. These units shall be as detailed and of the material as noted on the Contract Drawings. They shall be accurately set in the concrete or masonry to the elevations shown. All wall sleeves and castings required in the walls shall be in place when the walls are poured. Ends of all wall castings and wall sleeves shall be of a type consistent with the piping to be connected to them. 15050-28 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_\VN-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControl\IO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc B. Link seals for wall sleeves shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. For watertight applications in tanks or treatment units, the link seal installation shall be tested hydrostatically for leaks at the same time as the tank or treatment unit. Any leaks that occur during the test period shall be repaired by checking the link seals for proper installation and replacement of unit(s) found to be defective at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Pipe couplings shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Valves of the size and type shown on the Contract Drawings shall be set plumb and installed at the locations indicated on the Contract Drawings. Valves shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and with the details shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Valves shall be installed such that they are supported properly in their respective positions, free from distortion and strain. Valves shall be installed such that their weight is not borne by pumps and equipment that are not designed to support the weight of the valve. C. Valves shall be carefully inspected during installation; they shall be opened wide and then tightly closed and the various nuts and bolts shall be tested for tightness. Special care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter from becoming lodged in the valve seat. Check and adjust all valves for smooth operation. D. Install valves with the operating stem in either horizontal or vertical position. E. Allow sufficient clearance around the valve operator for proper operation. F. Clean iron flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean carbon steel flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads with oil or graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight. G. For buried valves, a valve box shall be centered accurately over the operating nut and the entire assembly shall be plumb. The tops of valve boxes shall be adjusted to the proper elevation as specified below and as shown on the Contract Drawings. In paved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set flush with pavement. Following paving operations, a 24 inch square shall be neatly cut in the pavement around the box and the paving removed. The top of the box shall then be adjusted to the proper elevation and a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad poured around the box cover. Concrete pads in traffic areas shall be reinforced with No. 4 reinforcement bars as shown on the Contract Drawings. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. 2. In unpaved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 2 inches above finished grade. After the top of the box is set to the proper elevation, a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad shall be poured around the box cover. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. 15050-29 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_w_WN-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc The concrete pad for the valve box cover shall have a 2 1/2 -inch diameter, bronze identification disc embedded in the concrete surface as shown on the Drawings. The bronze identification disc shall be as specified in Section 09905 and shall have the information as shown on the Contract Drawings neatly stamped on it. H. Valves shall be tested hydrostatically, concurrently with the pipeline in which they are installed. Protect or isolate any parts of valves, operators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less than the pressure test(s). If valve joints leak during pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts and hydrostatically retest the joints. I. Following installation, all aboveground valves shall be painted in accordance with the painting system specified in Section 09900. Following installation of buried valves or valves installed in valve vaults, repair any scratches, marks and other types of surface damage, etc., with a coating equal to the original coating supplied by the manufacturer. Prior to backfilling, all nuts, bolts and other parts of the valve joints shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline B itumastic No. 300-M. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF TIE RODS A. Tie rods shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written installation requirements. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings, the size and number of tie rods for a joint or installation shall be as recommended by the manufacturer's design chart for a working pressure of 150 psi. B. Following installation and prior to backfilling, all parts of the buried tie rod joint restraint system, including tie rods, tie bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners, shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 3.11 SEPARATION OF WASTEWATER MAINS, REUSE WATER MAINS AND POTABLE WATER MAINS A. Potable water mains shall be installed with at least a 10 foot horizontal separation from any wastewater mains and storm sewers. Separation distance shall be measured outside edge to outside edge. Reuse water mains shall be installed 5 feet center to center or 3 feet clear (outside edge to outside edge) from any potable water or wastewater mains. At crossings, the installation shall provide for a minimum vertical separation distance of 18 inches between the outside edge of the crossing wastewater, storm sewer or reuse water mains and the outside edge of the potable water mains. This separation shall be provided where the potable water main is either below or above the wastewater, storm sewer or reuse water mains. When the 18 inch minimum vertical separation distance cannot be maintained, the crossing shall be arranged so that the wastewater main, storm sewer or reuse water main joints and potable water main joints are equidistant from the point of crossing with no less than 10 feet between any two joints and the piping shall be at least one twenty (20) ft length of ductile iron pipe. Alternately, the wastewater main or reuse water main shall be placed in a casing pipe or encased in concrete to obtain the equivalent of the required 10 ft separation. In case of a storm sewer and water main crossing provide steel casing pipe or concrete encasement around the potable water main to obtain equivalent of the required 10 ft separation. Concrete encasement shall be as specified above. 15050-30 U;RVO\Projects\IRC_W_1VW-2011QRC_Ana_Tanks-0dorControA10_Specs\IOB-90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc 3.12 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING A. See Section 15044. 3.13 INFILTRATION/EXFILTRATION TESTING FOR GRAVITY DRAIN LINES A. See Section 15044. 3.14 MAIN CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Following the hydrostatic and leakage tests, all the mains constructed under this contract shall be cleaned and flushed to remove sand, loose dirt and other debris. Flushing velocity shall be a minimum of 2.5 fps. Flushing shall continue until clean water flows from the main. However, the Contractor shall endeavor to use the minimum amount of flushing water required to complete the work. To increase the efficiency of the cleaning and flushing operation, the Contractor shall use a pipeline pigging device of the proper size and designed to clean the intended pipeline. The pigging device shall be capable of turning. through a standard 90 degree MJ bend. The type of pipeline pigging device and the method of operation shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Upon completion of testing for the gravity drain line system, drain lines shall be flushed to remove dirt, sand, stones and other debris which may have entered the lines during construction and settled out in the lines and manholes. Materials and debris flushed from the drain lines shall be removed from a downstream manhole or basin and disposed of at an approved disposal area. C. Temporary blowoffs may be required for the purpose of flushing mains. Temporary blowoffs shall be installed as close as possible to the ends of the main being flushed. Blowoffs installed on the main shall be the same diameter as the main. Temporary blowoffs shall be removed and plugged after the main is flushed. All costs for installing and removing temporary blowoffs shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The Owner shall be notified at least 72 hours prior to flushing mains. E. Blowoffs and temporary drainage piping used for flushing shall not be discharged into any gravity sewer or pumping station wet well. The Contractor shall obtain prior approvals from the Engineer and the Owner as to the methods and locations of flushing water discharge. 3.15 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. The Contractor shall coordinate making connection of the new mains to mains which are in service at the time of construction, with the Owner. The Contractor shall not connect to existing facilities unless the Engineer and a representative of the Owner are present. The Engineer and the Owner shall be notified at least 48 hours prior to the time connection is desired. B. Operation of all system valves shall be the responsibility of the Owner's personnel only. At no time shall the Contractor operate any system valves. System valves shall be defined as any valve which has main pressure against either side of the valve. The Contractor shall notify the Owner to request that a valve be operated, at least 48 hours prior to the time operation is required. 15050-31 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_\VW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorContro)\10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc END OF SECTION 15050-32 U:\WO\Projects\IRC_\V_W W-2011\IRC_Ana_Tanks_Odor ControA10_Specs\IOB_90percent\DIV 15\15050.doc SECTION 15064 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe of the size and type and in the location(s) shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. AWWA Standard C900 2. AWWA Standard C905 3. Schedule 40 and 80 pipe: ASTM D 1785 4. CPVC Pipe: ASTM D 1784 5. Materials: ASTM D-1784: a) PVC normal impact: Type I, Grade I, PVC 1120 b) PVC normal impact: Type I, Grade II, PVC 1220 C) PVC high impact: Type H, Grade I, PVC 2110 d) CPVC (High Temperature): Type IV, Grade I 6. Pipe for use with domestic potable water shall have NSF seal of approval. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Certain -Teed Products, Corp. 2. Johns -Manville (J -M) 3. Capco 4. Napco 5. Can -Tex 6. Or approved equal 15064-1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Copies of all material required to establish compliance with these specifications shall be submitted to accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Buried pipe 4 inches and larger in diameter: 1. Pipe: a) AWWA C900 PVC DR18 water pipe, 4 inches up to 12 inches in diameter, 150 psi class. Made to ductile iron O.D.'s instead of IPS. b) AWWA C905 DR18 water pipe greater than 12 inches in diameter, 165 psi class. DIP OD's. C) Pipe shall bare the NSF marking and be approved for potable water service. 2. Joints: a) Joints shall be the push on type having the bell as an internal part of the pipe meeting ASTM 3139. b) Gaskets shall meet requirements of ASTM F 477. 3. Fittings: Ductile Iron Fittings as specified in Section 15050. 4. Restrained Joints: Uniflange Series 1350 for pipe 4" to 24", Uniflange Series 1390 for pipe larger than 24", or similar products manufactured by Tyler MJR or Romack. For connection to mechanical joint fittings, restrained joints shall be Uniflange Series 1300. B. Buried pipe less than 4 inches in diameter and all exposed pipe: 1. Pipe and fittings: a) Solvent weld type unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified in other Sections in the Division. b) Piping, fittings and components: Schedule 40 or 80 PVC, normal impact as shown on the Drawings or specified in other Sections in this Division. 15064-2 2. Joints: a) Joints: Solvent weld using primer/cleaner and solvent supplied by or approved by pipe manufacturer. b) Threaded and screwed joints: Permitted only on Schedule 80 and heavier pipe. C) Couplings and fittings: Minimum schedule and pressure rating as the pipe. 3. Provide suitable adapters for connections to equipment and other piping systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Push On Joints: 1. Manufacturer Recommendations. 2. ASTM D 2774. 3. AWWA Manual M 23. B. Solvent Weld Joints: 1. Manufacturer Recommendations. 2. ASTM D 2855. 3. ASTM D 2564. 4. AWWA Manual M 23. C. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be made in strict, complete compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Locations for restrained joints (when not specifically called out on the drawings) throughout the distribution piping additions (if PVC is selected in lieu of DIP), as well as when connections are made to existing pipe that change the configuration of the existing piping, shall be, as a minimum, as listed below. Note that for piping located within the plant site's property line, only DIP is to be used as specified in Section 15000. Pipe Size Length of Pipe Requiring Restraint (ft) for: 11.250 bend 22.5 ° bend 45 ° bend 90 ° bend 15064-3 24 -inch pipe 14' 28' 55' 101' 30 -inch pipe 17' 33' 66' 121' 3.02 HYDROSTATIC TESTING: SEE SECTION 15044 3.03 DISINFECTION: SEE SECTION 15050 3.04 CLEANING AND FLUSHING: SEE SECTION 15050 END OF SECTION 15064-4 SECTION 15126 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install all pipe supports as indicated and as specified herein. B. Number and Location: The Drawings depict only minimum pipe support locations. Adequate pipe supports shall be supplied for all piping systems to provide a rigid overall installation and additional support for pipe ends when equipment is disconnected. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for all pipe support devices and materials demonstrating compliance with this Specification and the support details shown on the Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SUPPORTS FOR DUCTILE IRON AND LARGE DIAMETER STEEL PIPE A. Furnish and install supports necessary to hold the piping and appurtenances in a firm, substantial manner at the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or specified. Piping supports and hangers shall conform to Federal Specification WW -H-171 or shall be as specifically shown or indicated on the Drawings. Piping within structures shall be adequately supported from floors, walls, ceilings or beams. Supports from the floor shall be approved flange supports, saddle stands or suitable concrete piers as indicated or approved. Pipe saddles shall be shaped to fit the pipe with which they will be used and shall be capable of screw adjustment. B. Concrete piers shall conform accurately to the bottom 1/3 to 1/2 of the pipe. Piping along walls shall be supported by approved wall brackets with attached pipe rolls or saddles or by wall brackets with adjustable hanger rods. For piping supported from the ceiling, approved rod hangers proportioned for the size of pipe to be supported and of a type capable of screw adjustment after erection of the pipeline, with suitable adjustable concrete inserts or beam clamps, shall be used. The use of perforated band iron strap (plumber's strap), wire, or chain as pipe hangers will not be acceptable. If required, piping supports shall be placed so as to provide a uniform slope in the pipe without sagging. Supports shall be located wherever necessary in the opinion of the Engineer; U.\WO\Projects\IRC_1V_WW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_Odor ControAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DlV 15\15126.doc 15126-1 however, in no case shall they exceed the dimensions shown on the following table. Adequate supports shall especially be used adjacent to valves and fittings in pipelines. Fabricated steel or cast iron pipe supports, saddles, rolls, brackets and the like shall be as manufactured by Grinnell or an equal approved by the Engineer. C. All fabricated steel or cast iron pipe supports, saddles, rolls, brackets, devises and the like, shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication and/or machining. All nuts, bolts, clips and other hardware, and all hanger rods used for pipe supports, shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All nuts, bolts and threaded rods shall be in accordance with ASTM A 320, Class 2. All such devices shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900, painting, after installation. 2.02 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR SMALL DIAMETER PVC AND STEEL PIPE A. Small diameter PVC piping 4 inches in diameter and smaller, and steel piping 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be supported with Type 316 stainless steel pipe supports on the exterior or interior of buildings and fiberglass reinforced plastic on the interior only of buildings. Hardware used for pipe supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. In some cases, to adequately support small diameter PVC or steel piping, a metal frame support structure may be required for support of the piping system. Where required, metal frame support structures shall be constructed using channels, fittings, brackets, hardware and other accessories as manufactured by B -Line Systems, Inc. of Highland, Illinois, or an equal approved by the Engineer. The materials for the frame structure shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Hardware used to construct the frame support structure shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Pipe supports for small diameter PVC and steel piping shall be located wherever necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to adequately support the pipe; however, they shall have a maximum spacing as specified hereinafter for straight pipe runs. Adequate supports shall especially be used adjacent to valves and fittings in pipelines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install hangers or supports at all changes in direction at the spacing requirements stated in this specification and at the end of piping runs to minimize the stresses imposed on piping, valves, associated equipment and appurtenances. 2. Piping support systems and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. U:\WO\Projects\IRC_W_1V1V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControAlO_Specs\IOB_90percent\DlV 15\15126.doe 15126-2 3. Install all hangers, supports, rods, inserts, clamps, bolts and other supporting devices of sizes and spacings to prevent loads from exceeding the manufacturer's maximum recommended loading with a safety factory of 5. 4. Secure hangers to beams or approved concrete insert where possible. 5. When piping is installed on structural steel supports, provide blocking of pipe rolls to prevent lateral pipe movement. 6. Do not support piping from other pipes or from stairs and walkways. 7. Set all inserts before the concrete is placed. B. Expansion and Contraction: 1. Rigidly support all piping with adequate provisions for expansion and contraction. 2. Firmly anchor horizontal runs over 50 feet in length at the midpoint of the runs to force expansion equally toward the ends. C. Spacing: 1. Install hangers and supports at sufficiently close intervals to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 2. The following table is based on spacing requirements for hard drawn copper tube, Class 53 DIP, Schedule 80 PVC, or Standard Weight (Schedule 40) steel pipe carrying a fluid with a Specific Gravity of 1.0 at a temperature not exceeding 120 degrees F. Support spacing for other pipe materials or for piping carrying fluids with Specific Gravities or temperatures exceeding those stated above shall be approved by the Engineer. Maximum spacing of hangers and supports shall be as follows: Support Spacing Feet Nominal Pipe Diameter, (inches) Copper Ductile Iron Plastic Steel 1/2 4.0 N/A 3.5 4.5 3/4 4.0 N/A 4.0 5.0 1 4.0 N/A 4.5 5.5 1-1/4 6.0 N/A 5.0 6.5 1-1/2 6.0 N/A 5.0 7.5 2 6.0 N/A 5.5 8.0 2-1/2 6.0 N/A 5.5 8.0 3 6.0 N/A 6.0 8.0 4 N/A 8.0 7.0 8.0 Larger than 4 N/A See Note N/A See Note Note: Spacing shall be 10 feet but may be increased depending on pipe size. Refer to AWWA standard of practice. U:\\VO\Rojects\IRC_W_NW-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControl\lO_Specs\I0B_90percent\DIV 15\15126.doe 15126-3 D. Supporting Vertical Piping: 1. Support at a maximum of 10 feet spacing. 2. Support at all points necessary to insure rigid installation with adequate provisions to allow expansion and contraction and prevent vibration. 3. Support by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests. E. Supporting PVC and Fiberglass Piping: 1. Support in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the conditions of operation, temperature, and size of pipe. 2. Support in a manner which will prevent subsequent visible sagging of the pipe between supports due to plastic deformation. F. Drain, Waste and Vent Piping: Support by adjustable hangers. G. Valves, Fittings and Specialties: Independently support pipe, valves and specialties connected to pumps and equipment. H. Temporary Pipe Supports: 1. Lay out each section of pipeline and make connections while the pipe is held in temporary supports. 2. After the completion of connections in each section of pipeline, hold the section in place with temporary clamps. 3. Do not remove the temporary clamps until the piping is correctly installed on the permanent supports. 3.02 PAINTING A. All fabricated steel or cast iron pipe supports, saddles, brackets, rolls, clevises and the like shall be painted, after installation, as specified in Sections 09900 and 09905. END OF SECTION UAW0\Projects\IRC_W_W1V-2011\IRC_Ma_Tanks_OdorControl\10_Specs\lOB_90percent\DIV 15\15126.doe 15126-4 SECTION 15210 FRP DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish, fabricate and install all fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork including fittings, accessories, dampers, hangers and any incidental work or components required and proved complete air supply, return and exhaust ductwork systems as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Design, furnish and install seismic and wind restraints and braces for all ductwork and accessories. C. In general, ductwork shall consist of any passageway made of FRP substantially air --tight, used for the conveying of air, gas or materials. Included are fittings, transitions, bracing, fasteners, sealers, supports and accessories such as access panels, access doors, turning vanes and manual air balancing dampers. All ductwork shall be of size and material as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. All duct sizes indicated on the drawings are clear, inside dimensions. D. Any change in duct sizes, offsets, transitions and fittings required to accommodate job conditions shall be submitted to engineer for approval. E. Fiberglass dampers (manual or motorized) by this division. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the engineer the following drawings and data. Ductwork shop drawings shall include typical details of discharge nozzles, transitions, elbows, fittings, accessory items such as access panels or access doors, turning vanes, volume control and splitter dampers, volume extractors, hangers, saddles, anchors, hold straps and cradles, joining and anchorage methods, bracing and material gauges. Drawings of general layouts of individual systems shall be submitted, scale shall be 1/4 -in = 1 -ft -0 -in minimum. B. The following additional data shall be submitted. 1. Manufacturer's qualification and experience data, specifications and installation instructions, factory and field quality control procedures catalog data, brochures, descriptive matter, illustrations, diagrams and color charts of ductwork to be selected. 2. Specific handling and storage requirements for ductwork, joint kits and resin systems. 3. Resin system data, including chemical environment service test data, case history data of similar installations (with contact addresses), resin pot life 15210-1 and time versus temperature data required for complete resin cure for laminate thicknesses actually proposed. 4. Submit design calculations and fabrication procedures for record purposes only. Also submit a letter certifying that the laminates fabricated with the proposed resin system will give satisfactory performance under the specified service conditions and stating the service conditions for which certification is provided and indicating compliance with specified pressure and vacuum design criteria. 5. Submit construction for flexible connectors, expansion joints, elbows, transitions, junctions and flanged fittings including dimensioned laminate cross sections and flange fabrication and assembly details. 6. Detailed instructions for field joining of the ductwork to include quality control procedures. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C581 - Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. 2. NFPA 91- Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials 3. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. UL 55 - UL Standard for Safety Fire Dampers D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI RTP -1 - Reinforced Thermo set Plastic Corrosion Resistant Equipment. 6. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All FRP duct and fittings shall be from a single manufacturer. Midwestern Fabricators or approved equal. B. All materials shall be supplied by a manufacturer experienced in the fabrication of materials similar to those specified. Design and engineering shall be performed by personnel regularly employed by the manufacturer who are experienced in the design of FRP systems similar to those specified. 15210-2 C. The manufacturer shall provide factory trained personnel for training of installers and for supervision and inspection of the installation. The use of local sales representatives for this service is not acceptable. D. Corrosion resistance data shall be based on ASTM C581. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment, material and spare parts are to be shipped complete except where partial disassembly is required by transportation regulations or for protection of components. No ductwork or components shall be shipped prior to complete resin cure. B. Inspection of the duct and components will be made by the engineer or other representative of the owner after delivery. Materials shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the specified requirements. Material rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. 1.06 STANDARDS OF CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. All ductwork construction and installation details shown on the drawings and specified herein are based on acceptable methods of construction and installation and are intended to define the quality of construction and installation to be furnished. Alternate details may be submitted for approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Internal: 50 to 200 degrees F External: -30 to 125 degrees F B. Pressure: 20 -in H2O w.g. positive, 9 -in H2O w.g. negative C. Flow medium and velocity: air at 2500 fpm D. 120 MPH wind load. E. The following materials are expected to be in the air stream or surrounding area. The resins used shall be suitable for all of the municipal sewage gases. F. Approved manufactures: Midwestern Fabricators: Slat :Lake City, Utah 15210-3 2.02 MATERIAL A. Resin shall be a premium grade vinyl ester such as Derakane 411 and Hetron 922 B. If fire retardant is required the resins shall be Hetron 992 and Derakane 510. 2.03 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK A. FRP ductwork shall be of contact molded or filament wound construction, or a combination of these methods, to meet design criteria. B. Laminates shall consist of a 20 mil (finished thickness) minimum chemical resistant interior liner with an aperture synthetic surface veil embedded in a resin rich surface. The corrosion barrier shall be a minimum of 100 mils thick and include not less than two layers of 1-1/2 oz mat with 25 percent glass and 75 percent resin content. The structural layer shall be of sufficient thickness to meet the minimum thickness requirements specified. The exterior surface layer shall be resin rich "C" - glass or aperture nexus veil not less than 20 mils thick. Outside finish shall be a pigmented, parrafinated gel coat with an ultra violet inhibitor. The inner surface shall be free of cracks and crazing with a smooth finish and with an average of not over two pits per square foot, providing the pits are less than 1/8 -in in diameter and not over 1/32 -in deep and are covered with sufficient resin to avoid exposure of inner surface fabric. Some waviness is permissible as long as the surface is smooth and free of pits. C. The specified resin noted in 2.02 shall be used for the inner corrosion liner and the structural laminate. D. Fittings and Joints: All fittings such as elbows, laterals, tees and reducers shall be of the same resin as and equal or superior in strength to the adjacent duct section and shall have the same internal dimensions as the adjacent duct. Non -flanged duct joints shall be butt wrapped or bell and spigot joints. Bell and spigot joints shall be sealed with a standard butt joint overlay as per PS 15-69. The interior opening between the bell and spigot shall be sealed with a resin paste so that no glass fibers are exposed and all voids are filled. Field cut duct ends and exposed glass fibers shall be resin coated prior to joint assembly to maintain a continuous interior corrosion barrier. Coat all exterior surfaces of joints with a paraffinated resin -rich gel coat with UV inhibitors. E. Total width of overlay for butt -wrap joints shall be not less than 6 -in for diameters from 6 -in up to and including 30 -in, 36 -in and larger shall be not less than 10 -in. F. Round Standard Elbows 1. Standard elbow centerline radius shall be equal to one times the diameter. 2. Standard elbows up to 24 -in diameter shall be smooth radius molded elbows. Standard elbows 30 -in diameter and greater may be mitered sections as specified below. 3.0 to 44 degree elbows shall contain one mitered joint and two sections. 45 to 80 degree elbows shall have a minimum of 15210-4 two mitered joints and three sections. Elbows greater than 80 degrees shall have a minimum of four mitered joints and five sections. G. Rectangular Fittings 1. Fittings shall be factory manufactured to meet the specified design criteria and in accordance with approved submittals. Factory install reinforcing ribs as required to meet the specified deflection requirements and to provide a system free from pulsing, warp age, sagging and undue vibration. 2. Provide forming vanes in all mitered rectangular elbows. Rectangular elbow turning vanes shall be of FRP construction, solid or double wall construction with an airfoil shaped profile. H. Reinforcing 1. Round duct reinforcing shall be factory installed with spacing between reinforcing located to avoid all hangers and support saddles. 2. Rectangular duct and fitting reinforcing shall be factory located and installed to avoid duct hangers, support saddles, bracing, branch take offs and entries, and plenum connections. Routine field cutting and field relocation of factory installed reinforcing is not acceptable. I. Tolerances 1. Out -of -roundness of duct shall be limited to plus or minus 1/8 -in or minus 1 percent of duct inside diameter, whichever is greater for duct sizes 6 -in diameter and greater. 2. Rectangular duct tolerances shall be 3/16 -in for duct diameter up to 18 -in and plus or minus 1 percent for dimensions of over 18 -in. All un -flanged duct shall be square on the ends in relation to the pipe axis and plus or minus 1/8 -in up to and including 24 -in diameter and plus or minus 3/16 -in for all diameters greater than 24 -in. 4. Fittings (a) The tolerance on angles of all fittings shall be plus or minus 1 degree, up to and including 24 -in diameter and plus or minus 1/z degree for 30 - in diameter and above. 5. Flanges (a) Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the duct within 1/z degree. 2. Flange faces shall be flat to within plus or minus 1/32 -in up to and including 18 -in diameter and flat within plus or minus 1/16 -in for 20 -in diameter and larger. 3. Provide custom filler pieces as required to mate flanges squarely. 15210-5 6. Long term deflection shall not exceed 1 percent of duct diameter or duct width for rectangular ducts. Round and rectangular FRP ductwork shall be designed using a safety factor of 10 to 1 for pressure and 5 to 1 for vacuum service. Round duct shall be designed by manufacturer to resist specified loadings but in no case shall FRP duct be less than the following thicknesses: Diameter (-in)* Thickness (-in) Less than 24"- 125", 24" to 3611- 187', 42" to 60"- 250" and 66" to 72"- 312 " Where rectangular duct is used the longest dimension shall be considered equivalent to diameter. ** Rectangular duct may be reinforced with angles or tees as required to meet the required pressure/vacuum service. All connections to expansion joints, butterfly dampers, fire dampers, tanks, or other equipment shall be flanged. Gaskets shall be EPDM. Flanges shall be hand laid up to thickness specified in PS 15-69 except that minimum thickness shall be '/z". Flange drilling shall be as per PS 15-69. All bolt holes shall be back spot faced for a washer seat. All flange bolts shall be torque to values as recommended by manufacturer. K. Fasteners: Furnish all bolts, nuts, washers and other fasteners required. Material of metallic fasteners shall by type 316 stainless steel. L. Provide 1 -in minimum PVC pipe and PVC ball valve duct drains in the bottom of all main, branch and riser ducts to allow removal of condensate. 2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Furnish flexible connectors at each inlet and outlet of fan and in the duct runs where required for expansion, contraction and movement. Flexible connections shall be integral flange molded arch type units constructed of EPDM rubber 1/4 -in thick, reinforced with a strong synthetic asbestos -free fabric suitable for corrosive service. The flexible connections shall be designed to minimize the transition of vibration from the fans to the ductwork at the suction and discharge connections. Expansion or contraction flexible connections shall be designed to allow 1 -in movement. Working length or "live" length shall be as designed by the manufacturer to allow up to 1 -in of movement. Ends shall be flanged, with flanges matching duct connection flanges. Corners on rectangular expansion joints shall be molded and free of patches or splices. The flexible connections shall be suitable for outdoor service and temperature ranges from minus 10 up to 125 degrees F, and pressure to 5 psig. Specially fabricated split type 316 stainless steel retaining back-up bars shall be supplied to prevent damage to the EPDM rubber flanges when type 316 stainless steel bolts are tightened. B. Where the construction of the flexible connections or vibration isolator results in a cross sectional area of the connection which is less than 90 percent of the adjacent ductwork, the size of the connection shall be increased to provide a cross sectional area equal to or greater than 90 percent of the adjacent duct. 15210-6 C. Provide flexible duct connections at both the intake and discharge connections for all fans except as noted below. 1. Wall and roof fans that have integral motor/fan wheel isolation D. Ductwork spacing and alignment for flexible connections shall be aligned to the tolerances of the flexible connection manufacturer, or plus/minus 1/4 -in whichever is less. Bolts shall be torque to the manufacture's recommendations. Do not over tighten. E. Where flexible connections are used as expansion joints, the manufacturer's compression recommendations must be followed. When the temperature at installation differs from the temperature in the compression recommendation, a correction shall be made. F. Manufacturer: 1. Holz Rubber Company 2. Mercer Rubber Company 3. Proco Products, Incorporated 4. Or equal 2.05 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DAMPERS A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings manually operated butterfly or parallel blade dampers, with handle for manual operation and positive locking quadrant for balancing purposes. Dampers shall be flanged connection and �( fabricated from materials similar to those specified in Paragraph 2.03 above. Motorized dampers shall be similar material with explosion -proof motors. B. Locking quadrants shall have a positive method of holding the damper in its selected position such as a bolt through both the quadrant and the lever arm. Systems using springs or other devices that can vibrate loose are not acceptable. C. Rating Conditions 1. Velocity Through Damper: 4000 fpm. 2. Pressure Rating: 20 -in water column. 3. Allowable Leakage: With a differential pressure of 12 -in wg. Size (in Dia.) Maximum Allowable Leakage (cfm) 72"- 200, 66"- 186, 60"- 172, 54"- 158, 42"- 130, 36"- 50, 24"- 25, 18"- 20, 12"-15. One damper of each size shall be shop tested at 12 -in wg differential and shall meet the above leakage. Submit damper test report to the engineer. Damper shall not be shipped until approved by the engineer D. Materials 1. Bearings, Teflon 2. Blade: FRP, angle reinforced 3. Frame: FRP 4. Axles: FRP rods, full length of damper size as shown on the drawings 5. Finish: FRP 15210-7 6. Handle: FRP 7. Pins: Type 316 stainless steel 8. Blade Stops: FRP angles with elastomer seals suitable for use at the design conditions. 9. Bushings: Teflon 10. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel 11. Angles: FRP E. Dimensions: As detailed on the drawings F. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: 1. MWF 2. Swartwout, Phillips Industries. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All ductwork shall be fabricated and erected where shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Ductwork shall be rigidly supported and secured in an approved manner. Bracing and vibration isolators shall be installed, where necessary, to eliminate vibration, rattle and noise. Hangers shall be installed plumb and securely suspended from supplementary steel or inserts in concrete slabs. Lower ends of hanger rods shall be sufficiently threaded to allow for adequate vertical adjustment. Building siding and metal decking shall not be used to hang ductwork. B. Wherever ducts are divided, the cross-sectional area shall be maintained. All such changes must be approved and installed as directed by the engineer or as approved on shop or erection drawings. 3.02 HANGERS A. Rectangular Ductwork and Round - Spacing and size of hangers shall be as required by the ductwork manufacturer. Ductwork support systems shall include restraints as required by the applicable building codes to withstand seismic loading. Design shall be provided by a professional engineer hired by the contractor as specified in other sections of the specification. B. All hanger materials shall be A36 epoxy painted steel. C. Perforated band iron or wore for supporting ducts will not be permitted. Ducts shall not be supported from furring, hung ceilings or from another duct or pipe. D. C-clamp type hangers shall be supplied with a retainer strap. 15210-8 E. Ductwork shall not come in contact with any of the ceiling construction or any other equipment in the ceiling cavity. F. Fiberglass ductwork shall be properly anchored and supported from building structure or yard supports where indicated on the drawings. Support anchoring for horizontal ducts shall be 15 -ft -0 -in on center, maximum spacing or as scaled on the drawings. The duct shall be designed to withstand all loadings subjected to it, and shall be capable of spanning a minimum of 15 -ft vertically and horizontally. Each anchor shall consist of two semi -circular stainless steel bands around the duct bolted together vertically and horizontally. The structural supports or wall securement shall be stainless steel and furnished and installed under this section unless noted otherwise. G. All fittings expansion joints and similar items shall be supported within 18 -in of the joint unless otherwise noted H. Hanger system shall use threaded rod for adjustability for ductwork over 24 -in in diameter or width. I. Design of hangers shall include the effect of all loads applied to the duct as well as the load of the duct. These loads include, but are not limited to wind, snow and internal dirt or liquid buildup. 3.03 DUCT SUPPORTS THROUGH FLOORS A. Where vertical ducts pass through floor openings, supporting angles shall be rigidly attached to the ducts and anchored with expansion bolts to the floor or curb. Angles shall be placed on the two long sides of the duct extending 3 -in over edge of opening. B. Remaining open area in the floor opening shall be sealed with a type 316 stainless steel plate 3.04 SUPPORTING OUTDOOR DUCTS A. The ducts installed above roof shall be provided with angle iron supports unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Sizes of angles shall be as required to withstand all loads subject to them. B. All ductwork supports to structural frames, guides shall be the complete responsibility of the duct supplier. As a minimum, duct supports and guides shall consist of a clamp which will clamp around the duct for mounting on the systems supplier's structural frame. An elastomer shall be provided between the clamp and duct to prevent chaffing. Provide all pads, bolts, clamps, and kits for installing field applied stainless steel collars and straps required for the supports and guides. 15210-9 Supports shall be used to anchor the duct in place, preventing all longitudinal and lateral motion of the duct. Guides shall allow longitudinal movement to provide for thermal expansion, and restrict lateral motion. The duct supplier shall determine the location of supports and guides to allow thermal expansion. Locations of supports, anchors joints shown on drawing are to be used as guide. All duct supports shall be provided with restraints to withstand to seismic and wind loading. C. Ducts shall be sloped to shed water. 3.05 DUCTWORK AT MASONRY A. Where ducts connect to or terminate at masonry openings or along the edges of floors where concrete curbs are not being provided, there shall be placed around the ductwork a continuous 2 -1/2 -in by 2 -1/2 -in by 3/16 -in angle of the same material as the duct which shall be bolted to the construction and made air tight to same by applying caulking compound on the angle before it is drawn down tight to construction. B. Plenums connected to concrete curbs shall be fastened with 3 -in by 3 -in x 1/4 -in thick continuous angle of the same material as the duct. Concrete curbs will be provided under another division. This angle shall sit on a continuous bead of caulking compound and be anchored to the curb at 16 -in centers. The duct shall terminate at the curb and be fastened to the angle. A continuous bead of caulking compound shall seal the plenum to the curb. C. When exposed ducts pass through finished floors, walls or ceilings, provide angle collars completely covering space around duct. 3.06 Field Testing A. All ductwork shall be free from pulsation, chatter, vibration or objectionable noise. After system is in operation, should these defects appear they shall be corrected by removing, replacing or reinforcing the work. Sound levels shall not exceed the minimum requirement as specified in ASHRAE - Systems Volume. B. All fiberglass ductwork shall be tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance to Specification 15990 END OF SECTION 15210-10 rIAT [Filo] ►-i[: (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL POWER AND SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The electrical work consists of scope indicated on the Drawings and includes furnishing all material and labor for a complete electrical installation. B. The requirements of Division I apply to all work hereunder. The General and Special Conditions are a part of this Division of the Specifications and all provisions contained therein which affect this work are as binding as though incorporated herein. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Provide: Furnish, install, and connect. B. Product Data: Catalog cuts and descriptive literature. C. Shop Drawings: Factory prepared specific to the installation. D. Indicated: Shown on the Drawings. E. Noted: Indicated or specified elsewhere. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Within thirty (30) days after the contract award, or as otherwise directed, forward to the Engineer a complete list of all materials and' equipment proposed for installation. Materials list shall include but not limited to conduit, conduit fittings and bodies, wire and cables, disconnect switches, ground rods, transformers, light fixtures, lamps, and switches. The contractor shall provide a minimum of five sets of shop drawings for the owner in accordance with Section 01340 "Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples" section of these specifications. Review drawings consist of shop drawings, product data and other information as noted in the individual equipment sections. Except as noted, submittal information is for review and equipment may not be installed until submittals have been returned stamped "No Exceptions Noted" or "Make Corrections Noted". B. The intent to use the exact make specified does not eliminate the responsibility of submitting such a list. List shall include sufficient information to permit ready and complete identification. C. Information required "for reference" such as product samples, similar unit test reports and time current curves is for the purpose of determining the suitability of a product, etc. This information is to be submitted at the same time as review data; however, this information will not be returned and stamp is not required prior to installation. 16000-1 D. Except as noted, installation instructions are not required to be submitted. However, it is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain installation information from the manufacturer for all equipment prior to installing the equipment. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. Provide the complete electrical installation in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), Life Safety Code (NFPA 101), and in accordance with applicable local codes. Obtain all necessary permits required by the local authorities, and have all work inspected by appropriate authorities, and after completion of the work, furnish to the Engineer for the Owner, a certificate of final inspection and approval from the inspection bureau having jurisdiction. Pay all fees and installation charges as may be required by City or County required to furnish the system indicated on the drawings. B. All material, apparatus, and equipment shall be new and shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards. Where applicable, the date for industry standards is that which is in effect on the date of Advertisement of the Project. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Federal Specifications (FS) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 5. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship products to the job site in their original packaging. Receive and store Products in a suitable manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Keep equipment upright at all times. B. Investigate the spaces through which equipment must pass to reach its final destination. Coordinate with the manufacturer to arrange delivery at the proper stage of construction and to provide shipping splits where necessary. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Power will be supplied by the utility company distribution system utilizing both overhead and underground distribution. Verify and comply with all power company requirements. Make necessary arrangements with the power company for temporary service requirements. C. Telephone, security, energy management and fire alarm, where applicable, will be tied into the Owner's existing systems. Refer to the Drawings for conductors and interface requirements. C. Electrical Contractor will supply conduit and cabling as needed to complete the SCADA system connections (by others). 16000-2 D. There will be demolition work required on this project. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor to de -energize the necessary equipment as needed. Conduits that are stubbed up through existing concrete structures that will cause a tripping hazard will be required to be cut and capped flush to the finished floor surface. Removing or plugging of abandoned conduits will be required for other areas. All power and control wiring for abandoned equipment shall be removed. Abandoned motor control equipment, breakers and terminals will be marked appropriately to reflect spare availability. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS (NOT FURNISHED) A. Unless otherwise noted, the following are furnished and installed under other Divisions: 1. Motors 2. Individual Motor starters when provided by the Equipment Vendor 3. Local control panels for equipment packages provided by the Equipment Vendor. 4. Pilot and control devices for the above equipment B. Power wiring and equipment connections for the above items are included in this Division. Also included in this Division is control wiring to the extent shown on the Electrical Drawings. Other control wiring is furnished under the applicable Mechanical Division. D. Local control panels for equipment packages provided by an Equipment Vendor will vary in size and components depending on the manufacturer. Therefore, all necessary conduit, cabling and junction points may not be shown on the plans to meet the needs of all versions of equipment and models. Contractor shall coordinate with equipment manufacturer to provide all necessary conduit and cabling for each LCP to produce a completely operational system. All conduits and wiring shall be installed in conformance to the latest version of the NEC and with the intent of these specifications. E. Provide control diagrams for all panels in O&M manuals; including a laminated copy of the diagram mounted on the interior door of each panel. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Provide only new products of the manufacturer's latest design. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Where the words "equal to" follow or precede the listed acceptable manufacturers, equal products of other manufacturers are acceptable and request for substitution may be made during submittal stage. B. Where the words "or equal" follow the listed acceptable manufacturers, products of other manufacturers must be submitted and approved prior to the Bid, in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders of the Contract Documents. 16000-3 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Furnish record drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division I. Record drawings consist of submittal data as listed above, operation and maintenance data, and as -built drawings. Record drawings are to reflect the final installation, including any changes during review, manufacturing tests, and installation. B. The contractor shall provide five sets of Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for the owner in accordance with the O&M section in Division 1 of these specifications. The manuals shall be provided for all items of electrical equipment including but not limited to motor control centers, distribution switchboards, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers, panelboards, generators, and transfer switches. The manuals shall be bound in hardback three ring binders and shall have a minimum of the following: 1. Title page with project name; installing contractor's name, address and telephone number. 2. Index sheet. 3. Complete manufacturer's operation and maintenance data (start-up, routine maintenance and trouble shooting information) with tabs (corresponding to the index) separating each item or system. Include the name, address, and phone number of the nearest sales and service organization for each item. 4. Copies of all electrical test reports and coordination studies. 5. Warranty information and start date. 6. Spare parts list. 7. Repair parts and service information 8. Name, address and phone number of installer. C. As -Built Drawings: Furnish one set of prints maintained at the job site at all times with all changes during construction marked thereon. Include on the as - built drawings sufficient dimensions to permit location of underground conduits. D. Submit the results of any tests required in the individual equipment sections. 2.05 GUARANTEE A. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications, workmanship, equipment and material shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, as described in the General Conditions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The complete installation is to be accomplished by skilled electrical tradesmen, with certified or suitably qualified individuals performing all special systems installation and testing. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Sub- standard work will be rejected. B. Schedule the work and cooperate with all trades to avoid delays, interferences, and unnecessary work. If any conflicts occur necessitating departures from the 16000-4 Drawings and Specifications, details of departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted immediately for the Engineer's consideration. C. Prior to final inspection, clean all dirt, mud and construction debris from all boxes, cabinets, manholes and equipment enclosures. D. The actual final locations of wiring and devices are subject to building and structural conditions. Consult and coordinate with other trades engaged on the project. Minor changes in outlet locations of up to 10'-0" may be made by the Engineer at any time prior to roughing -in of the electrical work without additional cost. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to request for final review, test all systems and repair or replace all defective work. Submit, with request for final review, written certification that all electrical systems are complete and operational. B. Unless otherwise specified, a 1,000 Volt megohmmeter shall be used for resistance measurements. C. Insulation resistance measurements shall be made on conductors and energized parts of electrical equipment. Minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance shall be in accordance with the applicable ILEA, NEMA or ANSI standards for the equipment or material being tested, unless otherwise specified. The ambient temperature at which insulation resistance is measured shall be recorded on the test form. D. Insulation resistance test: 1. Conductor and Cable Tests: The phase -to -ground insulation resistance shall be measured for all circuits 120 volts and above, except lighting circuits, and measurements shall be recorded in a format similar to Form 16000-A, located at the end of this section. Measurements may be made with motors and other equipment connected, except that solid state equipment shall be disconnected unless the equipment is normally tested by the manufacturer at voltages in excess of 1000 volts DC. Insulation with resistance of less than 10 megohms is not acceptable. 2. Motor Tests: The Installed Motor Test Form, 16000-13, located at the end of this section, shall be completed for each motor after installation. All motors shall have their insulation resistance measured before they are connected. Motors 50 HP and larger shall have their insulation resistance measured at the time of delivery as well as when they are connected. Insulation resistance values less than 10 megohms are not acceptable. E. At the time of final review of electrical work, demonstrate the operation of electrical systems. Furnish labor, apparatus and equipment for systems' demonstration. F. After final review and acceptance, turn over to the Owner all keys for electrical equipment locks. Present to the Owner, or the Owner's designated representative, demonstrations and oral instructions for proper operation and maintenance of the 16000-5 electrical equipment and systems. Are flash labels shall be provided for equipment included in the study. FORM 16000-A WIRE AND CABLE RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM Wire or Cable No.: Temperature, F Location of Test 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Certified Contractor's Rep Witnessed Owner's Rep 16000-7 Date: Date: Insulation Resistance Megohms FORM 16000-B INSTALLED MOTOR TEST FORM Motor Equipment Number Date of Test Equipment Driven MCC Location Ambient Temperature Resistance: Insulation resistance phase -to -ground megohms: Phase A Phase B Current at Full Load: Phase A, Current Phase B, Current Phase C, Current Thermal Overload Device: Manufacturer/catalog number Amperes Circuit Breaker (MCP) setting: Motor Nameplate Markings: Phase C Mfr Mfr type Frame HP Volts Phase RPM Service Factor Amps Freq Ambient temp. rating Time rating Design letter (NEMA 1-10.35) (NEMA MG -1.16) Code Letter Insulation class Certified Date: Contractor's Rep Witnessed Date: Owner's Rep END OF SECTION 16000-8 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section covers furnishing and field installation of a complete raceway system in accordance with these specifications and the drawings. B. Raceways shall be furnished in quantities sufficient for a complete installation as indicated on the drawings, conduit/cable list, and in these specifications. C. The raceway system is defined to include tray, conduit, underground duct, wireway, and all materials, devices, and work required to install, support, secure and provide a complete system for support and protection of electrical conductors. D. All conduit runs may not be shown in detail on the plans. Additional runs may be required by the conduit/cable list and by the specific equipment manufacturers used by the general contractor. Electrical contractor shall provide all necessary raceways. E. Conduit and cable runs identified on the conduit and cable list indicate the final termination points for cables and their conduits. Disconnects, hand holds, man holes and junction boxes are considered intermediate points; therefore, conduit sizes and cables sizes will be the same as they pass through these devices continuing to the listed termination points. Conduit material identified on the conduit and cable list indicates the majority of the conduit run; however, transitions between rigid metal conduit and PVC conduit systems are required as specified herein. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. B. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings. C. PVC Coated conduit and fittings D. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. E. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings. F. Non-metallic conduit and fittings. G. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. H. Conduit and equipment supports. I. Fastening hardware. J. Handholes and Manholes. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 "Earthwork". Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF E.tpansion 16110-1 B. Section 03310 "Cast -in -Place Concrete". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of raceway system materials and devices herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. National Electrical Code, NFPA-70 (NEC) 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) B. Raceway system components shall be installed in accordance with applicable requirements of the NEC. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Conduit: Allied, Republic, Triangle or Wheatland. B. PVC Conduit: Amoco, Carlon or CertainTeed. C. Flexible Conduit: Anaconda, Thomas & Betts, Electric Flex or Triangle. D. Fittings: Appleton, Crouse -Hinds, Oz or Thomas & Betts. E. Support System: Prefabricated structural systems shall be equal to B -Line Systems, Kindorf, Powerstrut or Unistrut. F. PVC Coated Conduit: Plasti-Bond RedH2OT, Kor-Kap, or Perma-Cote. G. Substitutions: Products equal to those listed. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings 1. Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS): Steel conduit, couplings, and elbows shall be hot -dip galvanized rigid mild steel in accordance with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. The conduit interior and exterior surfaces shall have a continuous zinc coating with a transparent overcoat of enamel, lacquer, or zinc chromate. Rigid steel conduit shall be provided in standard lengths complete with one coupling per ten (10) foot length, minimum size 3/4 -inch. PVC coating systems will meet or exceed ETL PVC -001 adhesion performance. 2. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings. All metal conduit fittings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI C80.4 and UL 514 where these standards apply. Materials for fittings shall match the rigid metal materials used for conduits. a. Bushings. Bushings shall be provided for the termination of all Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-2 conduit not terminated in hubs and couplings. Grounding type insulated bushings with insulating inserts in metal housings shall be provided for conduit 1-1/4 inches and larger. b. Locknuts. One interior and one exterior locknut shall be provided for all conduit terminations not provided with threaded hubs and couplings. Locknuts shall be designed to securely bond the conduit to the box when tightened. C. Unions. Conduit unions and their location shall be approved by the Engineer prior to their installation. Watertight conduit unions shall be - Type UNF or Engineer approved alternate. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum conduit, couplings, and elbows shall be rigid aluminum in accordance with ANSI C80.5; minimum size 3/4 -inch. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) and Fittings 1. IMC: UL 1242; hot dip galvanized; minimum size 3/4 -inch. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Use fittings and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel conduit. C. PVC Coated Conduit and Fittings 1. PVC coated conduit shall be UL listed that the PVC coating shall provide the primary corrosion protection for the rigid metal conduit. 2. PVC coated conduit and fittings shall meet the ETL SEMICO High Temperature H2O PVC Coating Adhesion Test for 200 hours. D. Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings 1. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Flexible metal conduit shall be hot dip galvanized steel in accordance with UL 1; FS WW -C-566; single steel continuous strip with galvanized coating; minimum size 3/8 -inch. The use of flexible metallic tubing in place of flexible metal conduit is not acceptable. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NENIA FB -1; malleable iron squeeze type. 3. FMC shall only be allowed for use with lighting fixtures with EMT conduit systems. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings 1. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LMC): Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be hot dip galvanized steel with an overall liquidtight sunlight resistant jacket consisting of extruded thermoplastic, UL listed. Minimum size 3/4 -inch. Exception: Where connected to devices with manufacturer supplied 1/2 inch hubs, match conduit size to hub size. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB -1; compression type with 0 - ring. 3. Sized to meet NEC requirements. F. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings 1. Plastic Conduit: Plastic conduit polyvinyl chloride. NEMA TC -2; Schedule 40 and 80 PVC. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC -3, Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-3 G. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings 1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing shall be hot dip galvanized rigid mild steel in accordance with ANSI C80.3 and shall bear the U.L. label, minimum size 1/2 -inch. The conduit exterior surface shall be chromated, and the interior shall be coated with a silicone epoxy - ester (or equivalent) lubricant. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB -l; steel or malleable iron, compression type with insulated throat. Indenter or set screw type connectors are not acceptable. 3. Installation of EMT will be limited to finished spaces such as offices, above dropped ceilings and/or lighting in areas that have environmental control systems above 12'-0" (AFF). H. NEMA 1 Wireway 1. NEMA 1 wireway shall be smooth, seam free, without knockouts and with removable covers. The wireway and associated fittings shall be finished with baked satin enamel over phosphatized surfaces. The wireway shall be manufactured from steel not less than 16 gage, shall conform to NEMA Standards and shall be listed by UL. Underground Duct Bank Material 1. Underground duct bank materials furnished under these specifications shall be new and undamaged and shall conform to the following requirements: a. Duct: Polyvinyl Chloride, Type DB in accordance with NEMA TC -6 b. Couplings: Plastic, for use with duct previously specified and "Duct -to -Steel" adapters as required, including joint cement. C. Spacers: Plastic high impact, interlocking, base and intermediate type. d. Underground bends: Type DB, factory made, 36" radius, 10 inch tangent length each end, 45 and 90 degree as required. e. End bells: Plastic f. Plugs: Plastic, high impact, tapered to fit end bell provided. g. Duct binder: Hemp or sisal twine h. Manhole Materials: Shall be as specified below and indicated on the drawings. J. Concrete Handholes and Manholes 1. Handholes and manholes shall be constructed of Portland Cement concrete with a compressive strength of not less than 4,000 pounds per square inch at an age of 28 days. Handholes and manholes shall have Class 3 reinforcing. Joints in the wall shall be tongue and groove with preformed mastic sealer. The design of, the materials used in, the manufacturing process of, and the transportation of handholes and manholes shall be subject to inspection at any time by the Engineer. Materials found defective by the Engineer will not be delivered to the job site. Material on the job site that is found defective shall be moved immediately after being notified that such materials are unacceptable. Precast handholes and manholes shall conform to A.S.T.M. C478.70. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-4 2. Handholes shall be approximately 24 inches square, 30 inches deep (minimum) as manufactured by Southeast Precast Concrete Products or Engineer approved alternate. Refer to duct bank section on the drawings. The manhole dimensions shall be increased when necessary for terminating the indicated duct bank. 3. Handhole Covers and Frames: Handhole covers shall be light duty square cast iron type with provisions for bolting. Covers shall be NEENAH Type R-6688-2 or Engineer approved alternate. 4. Manhole Covers and Frames: Manhole covers and frames shall be of heavy duty cast iron and shall be the type indicated on the drawings. Manhole covers shall be stamped to indicate an electrical manhole. 5. Manholes shall be a minimum of 4'(w) x 5'(1) x 7' (d). Refer to duct bank section on the drawings. The manhole dimensions shall be increased when necessary for terminating the indicated duct bank. K. Conduit Clamps: Supports for conduits in single runs or groups of two shall be cast metal straps and clamp -backs unless other types are acceptable to the Engineer. They shall be galvanized, aluminum, pvc coated or stainless steel to match the specified conduit system it is supporting. L. Support Channel: Stainless steel or aluminum. M. Hardware: stainless steel. N. Threaded Rods: 3/8 -inch diameter, stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordination of Box Locations 1. Provide boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling and equipment connections. Additional pullboxes or wireways may be required to meet NEC requirements due to actual field conditions and conduit routes. 2. Box locations shown on the Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify box locations prior to rough -in. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlet mounted above counters, benches, backsplashes, and other furnishings. Any outlet may be relocated by up to 10 feet before it is permanently installed without incurring additional cost. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements 1. The installation specifications included in this article apply to all raceway system components. 2. Minimum Size: The minimum size conduit to be used on this project shall be 3/a" diameter. 3. Anchors: Where supports for raceways, boxes, and cabinets are mounted on concrete surfaces, they shall be fastened with self -drilling Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-5 tubular expansion shells, single cone expanders, and annular break off grooved chucking cones. Anchors shall be Phillips "Redhead" or Engineer approved alternate. 4. Sleeves and Openings: The Contractor shall be responsible for all required openings. Required openings not provided during structure fabrication shall be provided by the Contractor using a hacksaw, a hole saw, or a core drill subject to acceptance by the Engineer. B. Metallic Conduit Installation 1. The Contractor shall field route conduit according to the general routing indicated on the drawings. Coordinate conduit locations with other equipment and structures, and as described in these specifications. 2. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter and de -burr cut ends. 3. Threading Conduit. The plane of all conduit ends shall be square with the center line. Where threads are required, they shall be cut and cleaned prior to conduit reaming. The ends of all conduits shall be reamed to remove all rough edges and burrs. A cutting oil shall be used in threading operations; the dies shall be kept sharp, and provisions shall be made for chip clearance. All steel conduit, after threading, shall be regalvanized with "Zinc Rich" coating as manufactured by ZRC Chemical Products Company or Engineer approved alternate. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. All connections are to be wrench tightened and electrically continuous. No running threads are permitted. 4. Metal conduit shall be joined by threaded conduit couplings with the conduit ends butted. The use of running threads will not be permitted. EMT conduit shall be joined with clamp type connectors approved for use with this type raceway. Where metal conduit cannot be joined by standard threaded couplings, conduit unions or split couplings may be used if both material and location are acceptable to the Engineer. 5. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets. Threads on metallic conduit shall project through the wall of the box to allow the bushing to butt against the end of the conduit. The locknuts both inside and outside shall then be tightened sufficiently to bond the conduit securely to the box. 6. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes. Conduit entering enclosures outdoors or in wet areas shall enter through Efcor "Water-Tite" hubs, or Engineer approved alternate, or threaded openings. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction. For sizes 2 -inches and larger, use 'LD" or similar fittings to permit a straight pull from either direction. 7. The maximum length between pull points is 400 feet. This length shall be reduced by one foot for each degree of bend. 8. A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those immediately at outlets or fittings. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2 -inch size. Bends in conduit shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the conduit. The use of a pipe tee or vise for bending conduit will not be permitted. The inside radius of conduit bends shall be not less than six times the inside diameter of the conduit. Conduits deformed or crushed in any way shall be removed from the jobsite. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-6 9. Type LB, LR, LL, T, LRL or similar fittings shall not be used with conduit containing any of the following: (a) Single conductor power cable larger than No. 6 AWG. (b) Multiconductor 600 volt cable having more than 2 conductors. (c) Any cable rated above 600 volts. 10. Moisture pockets shall be eliminated from conduits. If water cannot drain to the natural opening in the conduit system, a hole shall be drilled in the bottom of a pull box or a "C-type" conduit fitting provided in the low point of the conduit run. 11. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Install threaded PVC end caps on conduits stubbed up for future use. 12. Provide a 200 pound tensile strength polyolefin line pulled through and tied off at each end of all empty conduits. 13. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints and for straight runs in excess of 100 feet. 14. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls and floors, provide mechanical fire -stop fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. 15. Provide watertight seals, equal to OZ type WSK or FSK, where conduit penetrates exterior walls and where conduit passes between spaces normally at different temperatures. Seal duct bank and underground conduit entry with GE or Dow silicone sealant. 16. In locations where the conduit cannot be turned, provide three piece threaded rigid couplings. Provide clamp backs for conduits on exterior or damp surfaces to prevent the raceway from bearing directly on the damp surface. 17. Route conduits in slabs above the bottom reinforcing and below the top reinforcing. Maximum size for conduits in slabs above grade is 1 -inch. Route so conduits in slabs above grade do not cross. 18. Protect conduit threads from rust and damage during construction. 19. All additional conduit couplings, factory bends, plastic -to -steel conduit adapters, solvent cement, and special fittings for the complete conduit system shall be included. 20. Conductor Protection: Provide bushings on metallic and bell ends on PVC conduits unless conduit terminates in a hub or similar fitting. 21. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt, or concrete in the conduit. Conduit in which water or other foreign materials have been permitted to accumulate shall be thoroughly cleaned or, where such accumulation cannot be removed by methods acceptable to the Engineer, the conduit shall be replaced. 22. Conduits entering any electrical enclosure outdoors shall use a weather proof hub; double locknuts in exterior conduit installation will not be acceptable. C. Conduit Arrangement and Support 1. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. Group conduits in parallel runs where practical and provide rack space for 25 percent additional conduits. Use concentric bends for parallel runs. 2. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, all conduit shall be installed in exposed runs parallel or perpendicular to dominant Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-7 surfaces with right angle turns made out of symmetrical bends or fittings. 3. Conduit shall not be installed on the outside face of exposed columns, but shall be routed on the web or on the inside of a flange of the column. Except where prevented by the location of other work, a single conduit or a conduit group shall be centered on structural members. 4. All conduit field routing shall be coordinated with all other trades to insure accessibility to junction boxes and condulets, and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Routing not acceptable shall be rerouted and replaced without expense to the Owner. 5. All conduit runs in the slab or below grade shall be inspected and approved by the engineer prior to covering with concrete or backfill 6. Avoid sources of heat when possible. Where unavoidable, maintain 3 - inch clearance when crossing hot pipes and 12 -inch clearance between parallel hot pipes, flues, heating appliances and other heat sources. 7. Support conduits to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten single conduits with one hole malleable iron straps. For multiple runs use channel and clamps. Wire, perforated pipe straps and the like are not acceptable support means. 8. Except where buried in concrete; all conduit nuns shall be rigidly suppor- ted. Each conduit shall be supported within one foot of junction boxes and fittings. Hang trapeze assemblies with threaded rods not less than 3/8 - inch diameter. Remove all temporary supports prior to pulling conductors. Support spacing along conduit runs shall be as follows: Max. Distance Conduit Size Between Supports 3/4 inch through 1-1/4 inch 7 feet in horizontal runs or 10 feet in vertical runs 1-1/2 inch and larger 10 feet within one foot of each box, cabinet, or fitting. D. Plastic Conduit Installation 1. Except as specified in the following paragraphs, polyvinyl chloride conduit shall be installed in accordance with the installation requirements previously specified for metallic conduit. 2. Plastic conduit shall not be run exposed or concealed in walls unless specifically noted. 3. Expansion joints for exposed conduit or buried conduit exposed to temperature variations during installation shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Joints shall be unthreaded solvent cement type as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. The contact surfaces of the conduit and fitting socket shall be cleaned with Stoddard solvent, methyl ethyl ketone, or acetone, liberally coated with solvent cement, promptly and fully engaged, and either conduit or fitting rotated approximately 1/4 turn to dispel air and evenly distribute solvent cement over contact surfaces. For proper connection, total elapsed time between the start of the cement application to the surfaces being joined and final assembly of the joint should not exceed 60 seconds. The initial strength of the joint will permit continuous conduit installation; however, additional stress at the joint shall be avoided for at least 24 hours after joining. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-8 5. The conduit length for field bending shall be heated to approximately 275 degrees F by radiant heat, hot air, or hot liquid immersion. Open flame heating will not be permitted. Special mandrels or forms shall be used to provide a smooth bend without reduction of the conduit diameter. Conduit discolored by prolonged heating will not be acceptable. 6. Where plastic conduit is required to be buried directly in the earth as indicated on the drawings, the conduit shall be bedded in a graded 3 inch deep soft bedding of sand or finely divided job excavated material free from debris, organic, material, and stones. Backfill, to approximately 6 inches above the conduit, shall be the same as bedding material. 7. Rigid galvanized steel elbows shall be used at all locations where a transition is made from below grade PVC conduit to above grade in concrete. GRS conduit shall extend from the elbow to above grade. Aluminum elbows may be used at locations in direct contact with the earth as transitions. E. Below Grade Conduit Installation 1. Steel conduit shall not be direct buried in the earth. 2. Below grade steel conduit for signal cables sball be PVC coated and shall be encased with not less than 3 inches of concrete. Concrete used for conduit encasement shall contain not less than 5-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. It shall contain clean and well graded aggregates and low water content. The slump shall be such that the mixture is stiff and will stand erect when placed. The concrete shall be vibrated to consolidate it around the steel and shall be slow cured for several days to provide strength and prevent shrinkage. 3. Conduit shall be supported for encasement by steel wire hangers attached to temporary supports laid across the conduit trench. After the concrete encasement has hardened, the supports and those parts of the wire hangers not encased in concrete shall be removed. 4. Aluminum or PVC coated conduit shall be used in all outdoor exposed areas and where conduit will be installed in direct contact with the earth. Transitions from PVC to rigid conduit in earth shall be made with Aluminum or PVC coated conduit. Transitions from PVC to rigid conduit in concrete shall be made with GRS conduit coated with two (2) coats of black asphaltum paint to a point 6 inches above final finished elevation. 5. A minimum separation of 3 inches shall be maintained between multiple conduits enclosed in the same concrete encasement but not assembled as a duct bank. 6. Concrete used for encasing steel conduit shall contain no additives containing chlorides. The concrete shall be mixed with pure, clean, potable water. 7. The Contractor shall field route conduit according to the general routing indicated on the drawings and shall coordinate conduit locations with other work. Conduit shall be accurately positioned and securely anchored before the concrete is poured to encase it. The Contractor shall note any deviations from the plans in the routing on the redline mark-ups provide to the engineer. 8. Conduit that will be visible above the finished floor shall be straight and plumb. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-9 9. Conduit that is stubbed up shall be plugged prior to pouring of concrete and shall remain plugged until the conduit is extended later. 10. Rigid galvanized steel elbows shall be used at all locations where a transition is made between above and below grade conduit to an indoor location. GRS conduit shall extend from the elbow to above grade. 11. Aluminum or PVC coated elbows shall be used at locations where a transition is made between above and below grade conduit to an outdoor location. Rigid elbows shall extend from the elbow to above grade. F. Underground Duct Bank Installation 1. Concrete encased duct banks of individually assembled plastic ducts, arranged as indicated on the drawings, shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the following specification. 2. All excavation work shall conform to Division 2 of these specifications. 3. All concrete work shall conform to Division 3 of these specifications. 4. Install ducts with minimum grade of 4 -inches per 100 feet. 5. Each duct bank shall be laid to exact grade in the trench and the ends shall enter manholes or buildings as indicated on the drawings. No dips or low points that retain water in any duct will be permitted in ducts between manholes or between buildings and manholes. 6. End bells shall be used in individual ducts at the end of duct banks entering manholes or buildings except where another type of termination is specified or detailed on the drawings. 7. All sweeps shall be fabricated with straight sections of duct, bent to provide the radius indicated on the drawings. 8. The ends of the individual ducts shall be cleaned and swabbed with joint sealing compound, and the duct shall then be forced tightly into the coupling to make a watertight connection. 9. The individual ducts shall be laid in,place, held by standard spacers placed at 5 foot intervals, and bound with hemp or sisal twine. 10. The ends of the ducts in each of the upper layers shall be stepped back approximately 2 feet from the end of the layer immediately below it. 11. The concrete envelope shall be poured after the individual ducts are securely tied in place and adequately anchored and/or weighted to completely counteract the buoyancy of the ducts in the fluid concrete. The concrete envelope shall be a monolithic pour and extend the entire length from the point(s) the ducts stub above grade or terminate at a handhole or manhole. Care shall be taken in pouring the concrete to prevent the empty ducts from being damaged or displaced, either in grade or alignment. The duct bank shall be reviewed by the Engineer or the Owner's representative prior to pouring concrete. 12. Defective ducts shall not be installed and shall be removed immediately from the site of the work. Particular care shall be taken to keep concrete or other substances from the inside of the individual ducts during construction. 13. All reinforcing materials and other magnetic materials installed in a duct bank shall be parallel to the lengths of the individual ducts, except for ties enclosing all ducts of the duct bank. 14. Install top of duct bank minimum 18 -inches below finished grade with plastic warning tape 12 -inches below finished grade. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-10 15. Provide minimum 3 -inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of duct bank. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than four feet on centers to provide conduit spacing as indicated (7.5" minimum between centers). Securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during concrete placement. 16. Construct duct banks with Class B concrete. Provide reinforcing bars in duct banks beneath drive or roadways. 17. Where duct bank passes beneath footings or slabs resting on grade excavate to provide a minimum of 6 -inch clearance between the conduits and the structure. Backfill to the base of the structure with concrete. 18. After completion of the duct bank or before cable is pulled into existing duct banks, each duct shall be tested and cleaned, and ducts will not be used immediately shall be plugged at each end. As a clearance test, each duct shall pass a mandrel with a diameter 1/4 inch less than the inside diameter of the duct. All foreign material, earth, sand, and gravel shall be removed from the ducts with circular stiff bristled brushes. A 1/4 inch nylon rope shall be installed in all unused ducts. G. Supporting Device Installation 1. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors or beam clamps. 2. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors in solid masonry walls; self -drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. 3. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 4. Do not use powder -actuated anchors. 5. Do not use perforated straps or wire. 6. Make all supports from the structure, not the work of other trades. Do not drill structural steel members. Install supports so as not to weaken the structure. 7. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. 8. Install free-standing electrical equipment on 4" high concrete maintenance pads. 9. Surface mounted panels to be installed with manufacturers required number of anchors for support to masonry walls. 10. If panels are to be mounted on sheetrock covered walls, bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush -mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. 3.03 PROTECTION SCHEDULES A. Conduit Schedule 1. Except as noted, use only aluminum or PVC coated rigid conduit for exterior installations. GRS conduit may be used for interior exposed conduit runs. Schedule 40 PVC shall be used for underground conduit runs. PVC coated GRS conduit will be used for shielded control cable Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-11 C conduits. Contractor will select one exposed conduit system for the entire project: aluminum or PVC coated rigid conduit. 2. Use liquidtight flexible steel conduit for connections to motors, transformers and other vibrating equipment. 3. EMT may be used where concealed in spaces above hung ceilings and in hollow spaces of interior partitions 4. Non-jacketed flexible steel conduit may be used for connections to lighting fixtures in suspended ceilings. 5. Rigid nonmetallic conduit may be used for underground, concrete encased duct banks and in or below slab on grade. Exception: Use rigid steel PVC coated or aluminum conduit for analog signal circuits; 4 to 20 mA and AC or DC signals less than 25 volts. 6. Where PVC conduit is indicated, make a transition to rigid aluminum or PVC coated below grade or slab and continue above with rigid steel conduit. Exception: PVC may enter switchboards, motor control centers or other floor standing electrical equipment enclosures. Provide bell ends or socket end bell at enclosure entry. **END OF SECTION** Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16110-12 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Insulated cable, conductors, and conductor accessories shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements of this section of these specifications. Insulated cable, conductors, and conductor accessories shall be furnished in quantities sufficient for a complete installation as indicated on the drawings and in these specifications. B. Installation shall be defined to include placement, splicing, terminating conductors, coiling and taping of spare conductors, identification, testing, and verification of each circuit, cable and conductor. C. Terminating a conductor shall include attaching each conductor in its designated location using the specified materials and insulating the entire connection where specified or required by the application 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire. B. Cable. C. Wiring connections and terminations. 1. Terminating a conductor shall include attaching each conductor in its designated location using the specified materials and insulating the entire connection where specified or required by the application. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Conductors: Aetna, Cablec, Continental, Okonite, Rockbestos, American Insulated Wire, Kerite, Southwire, Pirelli, Triangle, or engineer approved alternate. B. Instrumentation Cables: Equal to Belden, Continental, Dekoron or West Penn. C. Signal Circuit Cables: Equal to Belden, Continental, Dekoron or West Penn. D. Telephone Cables: Equal to Belden or West Penn. E. Fiber Optic Cables: Equal to Belden or West Penn. F. Connectors: Equal to Thomas & Betts, Ideal or OZ. G. Pulling Compounds: Water soluble, equal to Polywater J. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-1 H. Wire and Cable Markers: Plastic, split sleeve or tubing type, equal to Brady Type XC or T & B Type SM. I. VFD cabling shall be Shawflex as manufactured by Shawcor, XLPE 1000V UL as manufactured by Belden or Engineer approved alternate. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Building Wire 1. Power Cable - Type Pl: a. Type Pl power cable shall consist of a single 98% conductivity copper conductor insulated by 600 volt rated cross linked polyethylene suitable for wet or dry locations. The insulation material shall be rated 90° C dry, 75° C wet, and shall be U.L. Type XHHW. b. The conductor size shall be as shown in the cable list with a minimum size of #12 AWG. 2. Power Cable - Type P: a. Type P power cable shall consist of multiple 98% conductivity copper conductors with Class B stranding. The conductor insulating material shall be type XHHW rated for 75° C and suitable for wet or dry locations. b. The multiple conductors shall be cabled together with Class B stranded, uncoated copper ground conductors in accordance with UL 1277, and a PVC jacket provided over the assembly. C. The cable shall be suitable for cable tray use, and shall be provided in the sizes and conductor numbers shown in the cable list. 3. Lighting Cable - Type L: a. Type L lighting cable shall consist of 98% conductivity copper conductor insulated for 600 volts and suitable for dry locations. The insulating material shall be rated 90° C and shall be U.L. Type XHHW or THHN. b. The conductor size shall be as shown on the drawings with a minimum size of #12 AWG. C. All lighting cables shall be single conductor and shall be color coded. 4. Control Cable - Type C1: a. Type C1 control cable shall consist of a single 98% conductivity copper conductor with Class B stranding insulated for 600 volts and suitable for wet or dry locations. The insulating material shall be polyvinyl -chloride rated for 75° C. A nylon jacket shall be applied over the insulation meeting the requirements of U.L. type XHHW. b. The conductor size shall be as shown in the cable list with a Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-2 B. Remote Control And Signal Cable 1. Instrumentation Cable - Type I: a. Type I instrumentation cable shall consist of Class B stranded copper conductor insulated with 300 (600) volt rated PVC insulation. Cable pairs shall be twisted and an overall aluminum or copper shield, with drain wire, shall be applied. A PVC jacket shall be applied over the entire assembly. Single pair cables are indicated with quantity 2 in the cable schedule. Multiple pair cables shall be provided when quantities greater than 2 are shown. b. Instrumentation cable shall be suitable for installation in tray or conduit, and shall be suitable for Class 3 circuits in accordance with Article 725 of the National Electrical Code. 2. Instrumentation Cable - Type Il: a. Shielded signal cables shall be three conductor No. 16 AWG twisted triad. Cable construction shall include a mylar shield surrounding the triad which provides 100% coverage; a No. 18 AWG stranded, tinned copper drain wire; and an overall flame retardant, sunlight resistant polyvinylchloride jacket. These cables shall have ICEA Class B stranding. b. Shielded triad signal cables shall have an insulation rating of 600 volts and shall be identified by UL as being suitable for installation in cable tray or conduit. C. The triad signal cables shall be Houston Wire and Cable catalog No. HW121 or equal by Belden. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-3 minimum size of #14 AWG. 5. Control Cable - Type C: a. Type C control cable shall consist of multiple 98% conductivity copper conductors with Class C stranding. The conductor insulating material shall be polyvinyl -chloride rated for 75° C and suitable for wet or dry locations. Each conductor shall be sheathed with a nylon jacket meeting the requirements of U.L. type XHHW. b. The multiple conductors shall be cabled together using fillers and cable tape, and a PVC jacket applied overall meeting the requirements of U.L. 1277. C. The cable shall be suitable for cable tray use, and shall be provided in the sizes and conductor numbers shown in the cable list. d. The conductor size shall be as shown in the cable list with a minimum size of #14 AWG. e. Individual conductor PVC insulation shall be color coded per NEMA WC -30, color code K-2. B. Remote Control And Signal Cable 1. Instrumentation Cable - Type I: a. Type I instrumentation cable shall consist of Class B stranded copper conductor insulated with 300 (600) volt rated PVC insulation. Cable pairs shall be twisted and an overall aluminum or copper shield, with drain wire, shall be applied. A PVC jacket shall be applied over the entire assembly. Single pair cables are indicated with quantity 2 in the cable schedule. Multiple pair cables shall be provided when quantities greater than 2 are shown. b. Instrumentation cable shall be suitable for installation in tray or conduit, and shall be suitable for Class 3 circuits in accordance with Article 725 of the National Electrical Code. 2. Instrumentation Cable - Type Il: a. Shielded signal cables shall be three conductor No. 16 AWG twisted triad. Cable construction shall include a mylar shield surrounding the triad which provides 100% coverage; a No. 18 AWG stranded, tinned copper drain wire; and an overall flame retardant, sunlight resistant polyvinylchloride jacket. These cables shall have ICEA Class B stranding. b. Shielded triad signal cables shall have an insulation rating of 600 volts and shall be identified by UL as being suitable for installation in cable tray or conduit. C. The triad signal cables shall be Houston Wire and Cable catalog No. HW121 or equal by Belden. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-3 3. Signal Cable - Type S: a. Underground signal cable shall consist of 6 pair no. 19 AWG copper conductors, each pair twisted per telephone industry standards. b. Individual conductors shall be insulated with a color coded thermoplastic compound. C. An overall high molecular weight polyethylene jacket, suitable for direct burial or installation in ducts, shall be applied. 4. Signal Cable - Type S1 (CATS): a. Type S1 signal cable shall consist of 4 pairs no. 24 AWG solid copper conductors, with a color coded polyethylene insulation, unshielded, with an overall high molecular weight polyethylene jacket. b. Type S 1 cable shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568B.2 Category 5E, ISO/IEC 11801 category 5, NEMA WC -63.1 Category 5E. 5. Signal Cable - Type S2 (MODBUS): a. Type S2 signal cable shall consist of 2 pairs no. 24 AWG stranded tinned copper conductors, with polyethylene insulation, with an overall aluminum foil -polyester tape shield, with 100% shield coverage, plus copper braid shield with a 24 AWG tinned copper drain wire, and 90% shield coverage, with an overall high molecular weight polyethylene jacket. b. Type S3 cable shall meet the requirements of UL NEC Type CM, AWM 2919, and low capacitance for EIA RS -485 applications. 6. Signal Cable - Type S3 (MODBUS Plus): a. Type S3 signal cable shall consist of 1 pair no. 24 AWG stranded tinned copper conductors, with polyethylene insulation, with an overall aluminum foil -polyester tape shield with 100% shield coverage, plus copper braid shield, with a 24 AWG tinned copper drain wire, and 90% shield coverage, with an overall high molecular weight polyethylene jacket. b. Type S3 cable shall meet the requirements of UL Type CM, AWM 2919, and low capacitance for EIA RS -485 applications. 7. Thermostat Cable - Type H: a. Cable for thermostats shall be 4 conductor No. 18 AWG copper rated for 300 volts ac. 8. Telephone Cable - Type T (CAT3): a. Telephone cable shall be 4 pair No. 22 AWG copper with an overall jacket. b. Cable for speakers shall be single pair No. 22 AWG copper. 9. Fiber Optic Cable - Type F: Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-4 a. Fiber optic cable shall consist of multiple 62.5 micron fibers contained within plastic buffer tubes which are in turn encased in a braid of Kevlar yarns. The braided fiber core shall be enclosed within a PVC jacket, and a second braid of Kevlar placed over the combined fiber cables. A polyethylene covering shall be applied overall. The individual fibers shall be silica glass with a glass cladding. b. The cable shall be suitable for operation in a temperature range of -10° to 50° C, and shall be suitable for direct burial and installation in conduit. Fiber optic cable shall be supplied by the Division 13 Contractor and installed by the Division 16 Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General Wiring Methods 1. Cable Placement: a. Power, control, signal, and instrumentation cable shall be routed as required by the Circuit or Cable List. The routing of other cable types shall be as indicated on the drawings. All instrumentation cable shall be routed a minimum of six (6) inches from power and/or control conductors when run parallel and shall be in separate raceways. b. If at any time during the progress of the work the Contractor finds raceways which appear inadequate to accommodate the assigned cable, he shall notify the Engineer at once and shall discontinue any further work on the questionable raceway until advised by the Engineer as to how he shall proceed. C. Immediately prior to the placement of each cable or cable group, the raceway route to be followed shall be inspected and ascertained to be complete in installation and free of all materials detrimental to the cable or its placement. All cable assigned to a particular duct or conduit shall be grouped and pulled in simultaneously, using cable grips and acceptable lubricants. d. All cable shall be carefully checked both as to size and length before being pulled into conduits or ducts. Cable pulled into the wrong conduit or duct or cut too short to rack, train, and splice as specified herein, shall be removed and replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor. Cable removed from one conduit or duct shall not be pulled into another conduit or duct. 2. Use only stranded conductors. Exception: Solid conductors size #12 and #10 AWG may be used for receptacle branch circuit wiring. 3. Do not install more than three (3) current carrying conductors in a single raceway unless conductors are properly derated per the NEC i 310.15(B)(2). Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-5 4. Identification: The Contractor shall identify the ends of all power, control, and instrument circuits. He shall also identify all circuits in manholes. At terminations, the Contractor shall identify each conductor of power circuits, each multiconductor cable, and each conductor of circuits consisting of multiple single conductors where the conductors are not otherwise identified. All conductors shall be identified throughout the electrical system. a. Each cable marker shall bear the number of the corresponding circuit according to the Cable List and drawings. b. Markers shall be attached where the first individual conductor is routed away from the assembly. C. Each phase of multiphase power circuits shall be individually identified. d. In manholes, handholes, and pull boxes each circuit shall be identified. Each marker shall bear the number of the circuit according to the Cable List and drawings. e. One end of each marker board shall remain free of the fastening tail, and the entire marker shall be so attached that it is readily visible for circuit identification. f. For control and signal conductors use wire markers at all terminals and connections. Unless otherwise required by the Local Authority, the Color code for power circuit conductors shall as follows: 5. For conductors #8 AWG and larger color coding may be accomplished with 1 -inch wide colored tape applied at each end of the conductor or at points where conductor is accessible so as to be visible inside the enclosure. 6. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Provide adequate support to prevent conductor movement under fault conditions. a. Nylon ties shall be used to neatly lace together conductors entering switchboards and similar locations after the conductors have emerged from their supporting raceway and before they are attached to terminals. 7. Moisture Seals: Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-6 120/208 Volt System 277/480 Volt System Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow 120/208 Volt System 277/480 Volt System Neutral White Grey Ground Green Green 5. For conductors #8 AWG and larger color coding may be accomplished with 1 -inch wide colored tape applied at each end of the conductor or at points where conductor is accessible so as to be visible inside the enclosure. 6. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Provide adequate support to prevent conductor movement under fault conditions. a. Nylon ties shall be used to neatly lace together conductors entering switchboards and similar locations after the conductors have emerged from their supporting raceway and before they are attached to terminals. 7. Moisture Seals: Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-6 a. Each cable rated 2500 volts and above shall be kept sealed except when termination and splicing work is being performed. b. The ends of all cables shall be sealed with heat shrinkable caps. Cap sizes shall be as recommended by the cap manufacturer for the cable outside diameter and insulation type. Caps shall contain sufficient adhesive that shrinkage of the cap during application results in formation of a positive watertight seal capable of withstanding complete immersion or total exposure without permitting the entrance of moisture. C. Heat shrinkable caps shall be "Thermofit" as manufactured by Raychem Corporation or acceptable equal. d. Before and after pulling, the leading end seal of each length of cable shall be examined and repaired if necessary. e. All cut cable ends shall be promptly sealed after cutting except those to be spliced or terminated immediately. 8. Spare Conductors: a. All spare conductors of a multiconductor cable shall be left at their maximum lengths for possible replacement of any other conductors in the cable. b. Each spare conductor shall be neatly coiled and then taped to the conductors being used. 9. All cable supports and securing devices shall have bearing surfaces located parallel to the surfaces of the cable sheath and shall be installed to provide adequate support without deformation of the cable jackets or insulation. 10. All cable shall be routed as shown in the cable list. All cable assigned to a particular conduit shall be grouped and pulled in simultaneously, using cable grips and acceptable lubricants. Fishing and pulling shall be done with a flexible round metal tape, CO2 propelled polyethylene cord, nylon rope, or manila rope. 11. Cable pulling: a. Woven wire cable grips shall be used to pull all single conductor cable larger than 1/0 AWG, and all multiconductor cable. Pulling loops shall be used for single conductor cable 1/0 AWG and smaller. When a cable grip is used, the area of the cable covered by the grip plus 6 inches shall be cut off and discarded when the pull is completed. When pulling loops are used, the entire loop shall be cut off and discarded when the pull is completed. A swivel or swivel connection shall be inserted between the pulling rope and the cable grip or loop. b. Cable pulling lubricant shall be suitable for use with the cable being lubricated. All pulling lubricant shall be approved by the Engineer prior to its use. Cable pulled into conduit using a lubricant unacceptable to the Engineer shall be removed and discarded, the conduit thoroughly cleaned, and new cable pulled in. The pulling tension on any cable shall not exceed the maximum tension recommended by the cable manufacturer. If Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-7 any excessive strain develops while pulling, the pulling operation shall be stopped at once and the difficulty determined and corrected. To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends in duct and conduit runs, the pulling tension in pounds at a bend shall not exceed 100 times the radius of the bend in feet. C. Extreme care shall be exercised during the placement of all cable to prevent tension and bending conditions in excess of the manufacturer's recommendations. The permanent radius of a bend after cable installation shall be in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations. 12. Feeding Tubes: A 4 inch or larger flexible feeding tube, with a removable nozzle sized to fit the ducts, shall be used in pulling all underground cable. The feeding tube shall be long enough to extend from the duct entrance to the outside of the manhole and shall be so arranged that it will be impossible for the cable to drag across the edge of the manhole ring or any other damaging surface. 13. Splices: No splices shall be made in conductors for instrument circuits or control circuits without specific acceptance by the Engineer except where required at connections to accessory devices equipped with factory installed pigtails, or where high temperature wire is necessary locally to connect to a particular device. C. Wiring Installation In Raceways 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install all conductors in conduit. 2. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. Use wire pulling lubricant for all pulls. Do not exceed the manufacturer's pulling tension. 3. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. D. Installation In Manholes 1. Cable shall be supported at all times without short bends or excessive sags and shall not be permitted to lie on the manhole floor. 2. Cable ends must not be submerged. 3. Cable racks shall be provided for permanent support. 4. Cable Racks: a. Cable racks shall be furnished and installed in manholes according to the drawings and as required to provide the proper cable support. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-8 b. Cable racks shall be installed on spacings of not greater than 36 inches and shall be bolt secured to permanent wall surfaces with self -drilling anchors or continuous slot concrete inserts. C. Rack all cables; straight thru pulls are not acceptable. d. Attach cables to rack supports with tie wraps to prevent motion under fault conditions. 5. Temporary support required during placement shall be with rope slings, timbers or alternate method acceptable to the Engineer. E. Wiring Connections And Terminations 1. Splices in power conductors shall be with compression type connectors. 2. Splices in control conductors shall be with compression type locking spade terminal connectors. 3. The terminal connectors shall be connected using bolts, tooth lock washers and hex nuts of copper or copper bearing metal. 4. Splices in lighting conductors smaller than 8 AWG shall be with "Scotch -Lok" twist type insulated spring connectors or Engineer approved alternate. 5. Splices in lighting conductors 8 AWG and larger shall be with compression type connectors. 6. No splices shall be made in conductors for instrument circuits or control circuits without specific acceptance by the Engineer except where required at connections to accessory devices equipped with factory installed pigtails or where high temperature wire is necessary locally to connect to a particular device. 7. Shields may be spliced where necessary to permit connection to the station ground. 8. Power cable circuits may be spliced only by methods and at locations acceptable to the Engineer. 9. Splices shall not be made to utilize short lengths of cable nor shall they be made to provide correct lengths on cable initially cut too short for a particular circuit. 10. Splices, joints, and connections in cable shall be made only in pull boxes, junction boxes, or manholes unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, and shall be made in accordance with the instructions of the cable manufacturer. 11. Make connections to circuit breakers, disconnect switches, panel mains, etc. with solderless lugs. 12. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL f { A. All insulated conductors shall be tested for continuity and conductor Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-9 identification. In addition, all insulated conductors of multiconductor cable shall be tested for short circuits. The Contractor shall furnish portable, battery powered, ring testers and other test equipment as required to conduct these tests. The contractor shall submit copies of all cable tests to the engineer for review and place a copy of all cable tests in the O & M Manual at the conclusion of the project. 1. Continuity tests shall include all tests necessary to confirm that the conductor is continuous throughout its entire length. Ring all conductors for continuity and replace any open conductors. 2. Identification tests shall include all tests necessary to confirm that the conductor being investigated originates and terminates at the locations indicated on the drawings. 3. Short circuit tests shall include all tests necessary to confirm that no conductor of a multiconductor cable is short circuited to another conductor in that cable. 4. All insulated conductors, except supervisory and communication cable, rated less than 5000 volts shall be tested with a 1000 volt megger or an equivalent testing device. Insulation resistance measurements shall be made between each conductor and ground and between each conductor and all other conductors of the same circuit. Acceptable resistance values shall be approximately infinite. B. Ground Fault Tests: Megger all feeder circuits for grounds. Compile and submit a list of megger readings. Replace all conductors measuring less than 2 megohms to ground. C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturers recommended values. D. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. **END OF SECTION** Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16120-10 SECTION 16130 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. All boxes required throughout the electrical raceway system shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements which follow. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Boxes shall be equal to Appleton, Crouse Hinds, Raco, or Steel City. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Outlet Boxes 1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS -1, UL 514; galvanized steel, with %z inch male fixture studs where required. Galvanized steel boxes will be installed in indoor, air conditioned areas only. 2. Cast Boxes: Cast aluminum with epoxy powder coat, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs for use with rigid conduit, UL 514. 3. Floor Boxes: Full adjustable, steel, water and concrete tight equal to T&B model number 68 D. 4. Except as indicated otherwise on the drawings or in these specifications, all junction boxes or pull boxes 4 inch trade size or smaller in any dimension shall be PVC coated GRS or aluminum for use with the conduit system used. 5. Provide stainless steel cover plates for indoor outlet boxes and weather protected NEMA 3R cover plates for exterior outlet boxes. B. Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be as indicated on the drawings and as specified in these specifications. Junction box types shall be NEMA rated for the class and division as required or as indicated on the drawings. Where no type or size is indicated elsewhere for junction boxes or pull boxes, they shall be in accordance with the requirements of the NEC, Article 314, Paragraphs 28, 29, 40 and 41 for use on systems with a Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16130-1 nominal rating of 600 volts and less, and Section IV for use on systems with a nominal rating of over 600 volts. a. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS -1; galvanized steel. Boxes larger than 12 -inches in any dimension shall be hinged enclosure. Equal to Hoffman Bulletin A-51. Sheet metal boxes will be used in indoor areas only. b. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA 250; Type 4, galvanized cast iron box and cover, neoprene gasket, stainless steel cover screws, UL listed as rain tight. Provide flat -flanged type for surface mounting and outside flange recessed cover type for underground use. Boxes for sidewalk or other traffic areas to have appropriate duty cover with non-skid finish. Cast metal boxes shall be used in indoor spaces, where rough conditions will exist. C. Corrosion Resistant Boxes: UL 508 Type 4X, gasketed screw cover. For boxes larger than 6 -inches in any dimension provide hinge on one side and stainless steel toggle latches (equal to Hoffman A-FC412SS) on the other three sides. Equal to Type 304 stainless steel, and equal to Hoffman Bulletin A -51S. NEMA 4X boxes shall be used in all outdoor installations. d. Floor Boxes: Floor boxes shall be cast iron with bolted covers. The boxes shall be approximately 12 inches square and 10 inches deep, and shall be located as shown on the drawings with the lid flush with the finished floor. Floor boxes shall be Neenah No. R -7517 -DB or alternate acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Indoor electrical enclosures, except junction boxes and pull boxes 4 inch trade size and smaller and other enclosures of cast metal, shall be constructed from steel plate reinforced as required to provide true surfaces and adequate support for devices mounted thereon. 3. Except as indicated otherwise in these specifications or on the drawings, all junction boxes and pull boxes larger than 4 inch trade size for use in indoor locations shall be sheet steel hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and those for use in outdoor locations shall be 316 stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordination of Box Locations 1. Provide boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling and equipment connections. 2. Box locations shown on the Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify box locations prior to rough -in. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlet mounted above counters, benches, backsplashes, and other furnishings. Any outlet may be relocated by up to 10 feet before it is permanently installed without incurring additional cost. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16130-2 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Box Installation 1. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6 -inch separation, except provide minimum 24 -inch separation in acoustic -rated walls. 2. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. 3. Support boxes independently of conduit openings. 4. Use multiple -gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. 5. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 -inches of recessed luminaires to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. 6. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. 7. Align wall -mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. Align adjacent devices at different elevations in one vertical line. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. 8. Unless otherwise noted, use only cast outlet boxes. Galvanized steel outlet boxes shall be used only in finished areas where they are completely concealed within walls or ceiling. 9. Conduit openings in pull boxes shall be made with a hole saw or shall be punched. Field locate holes injunction and pull boxes so as to afford the maximum bending radius for the conductors. 10. Boxes mounted on concrete shall be secured by self -drilling anchors. Mounting on steel shall be by drilled and tapped screw holes, or by special support channels welded to the steel, or by both. Boxes larger than 4 inch trade size shall be leveled and fastened to the mounting surface with not less than 1/4 inch air space between the enclosure and mounting surface. All mounting holes in the enclosure shall be used. 11. Except as prevented by the location of other work, all junction boxes and outlet boxes shall be centered on structures. 12. Label cover of junction boxes with circuit numbers of conductors in the box. 13. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or in these specifications, electrical enclosures, except junction boxes and pull boxes 4 inch trade size and smaller, shall be as follows: Location Enclosure Type Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16130-3 Indoor (Non -hazardous) Dry Areas NEMA 1 Areas where moisture conditions NEMA 4 are more severe than those for which NEMA 1 enclosures are intended Outdoor (Non -hazardous) NEMA 4X Indoor or Outdoor (hazardous) NEMA 7 **END OF SECTION** Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16130-4 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power system grounding. B. Communication system grounding. C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Wire and Cables are specified in Section 16120. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system consists of ground rings for building grounding; ground clusters for supplemental electrodes; and connections thereto of structures, equipment and electrical systems. B. This Section is intended to supplement the requirements of the NEC, particularly Article 250, and to differentiate among options allowed by the NEC. This Section is not intended to reiterate explicit requirements of the NEC. C. Within this Section the following definitions apply: 1. Ground Ring: A horizontal loop, electrically and mechanically continuous; routed a minimum of two feet outside the perimeter of buildings and structures and 30" below final grade, as indicated on the drawings. 2. Ground Cluster: An assembly of three or more driven ground rods; spaced not closer than ten feet apart; each rod connected to the others in a closed delta configuration; and providing a resistance to ground of not more than 10 ohms. 3. Connect or Bond: For underground or otherwise inaccessible locations — a permanent connection made by exothermic welding, brazing, or similar process. For exposed and accessible locations - a connection made with clamps, bolts or similar fittings approved for the purpose. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16450-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Bare Conductors: ASTM B -B; stranded; hard drawn copper. Size as indicated on the plans. B. Insulated Conductors: Grounding conductors in conduit shall be insulated. All insulated grounding conductors shall be copper, and shall be the size indicated on the drawings. Where no size is indicated, the grounding conductors shall be sized according to the National Electrical Code, but shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG. C. Ground Rods: UL 42511; 5/8 -inch x 10 feet; high strength steel core with metallically bonded copper jacket. Couple ground rods to achieve lengths of 30'. Rods shall be connected with compression couplings. Threaded couplings are not acceptable. D. Connectors: Grounding conductors shall be spliced, where required, using exothermic welds. Equipment enclosures shall be grounded using copper compression ring tongue terminals unless grounding lugs are provided for this purpose. E. Hardware: All clamps, bolts, washers, nuts, and miscellaneous hardware used in grounding shall be copper or bronze. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Buildings 1. Bond all steel building columns to the ground grid. 2. Provide outside access to the ground ring in at least one location by means of a 48 -inch coiled pigtail buried approximately 18 -inches below grade located in a ground well per detail on plans. Ground well shall be for making ground system resistance test. Note location(s) on the as -built drawings. 2.03 MANUFACTRURES A. Conductors: Shall be as manufactured by Aetna, Cablec, Continental, Okonite, Rockbestos, American Insulated Wire, Kerite, Southwire, Pirelli, Triangle, or engineer approved alternate. B. Ground Rods: Shall be as manufactured by Copperweld, Blackburn, or Engineer approved alternate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16450-2 panelboard ground bus or as allowed by NEC 250.20 and 250.30. The neutral to ground bond shall be made in one location only per NEC 250. K. Where bare conductors emerge from concrete encasement, provide a 4 -inch length of Schedule 40 PVC conduit set in the concrete to protect the conductor. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Notify the Owner's representative at least one week in advance that the ground ring for each building is ready for inspection. Obtain written notice to proceed before filling trenches, pouring slabs, or otherwise covering the work. 3.03 TESTING A. Ground resistance testing shall be done in accordance with IEEE standard 81- 1993 to confirm that the resistance of the grounding system is 10 ohms or less (test shall not be run within 72 hours of last rain fall). Ground resistance testing shall be done with the power off and the grounding electrode conductor isolated from the utility, and the service to prevent coupling. The testing equipment shall use the fall of potential method of earth resistance measurement. The test equipment must be designed to reject the effects of stray ac and do currents on readings. B. A test report shall be submitted to the engineer and included in the O & M manual for the project. The report shall include but not be limited to: • Date of test • Time of day • Weather condition (ex. 82°F, 82% RH, cloudy) • Date of last rain fall >_'/z" in a 24 hour period • Soil type • Minimum of five (5) readings • A plot of all readings indicating a level spot in the curve at the system resistance. C. All ground resistance testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. If test measurements indicate a grounding system resistance of greater than 10 ohms, additional grounding cable and rods shall be installed as directed by the Engineer. Ground resistance testing as described herein shall be repeated after the additional grounding has been installed. The installation of additional grounding and repeat testing shall be done until the 10 ohm grounding system resistance has been achieved. D. Test equipment for ground resistance measurement shall be Vibroground by Associated Research, Megger null balance by Biddle, or alternate approved by the Engineer. Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16450-4 **END OF SECTION** Indian River County, Florida 071415.05 West Regional WWTF Expansion 16450-5